Home

WAVECOM Decoder W-PCI/e, W-CODE, W

1. Browse folders 3 Open each folder in the same window j gt Open each folder in its own window Click items as follows 3A Single click to open an item point to select X Underline icon titles consistent with my browser 3 Underine icon titles only when point at them 9 Double click to open an item single click to select Navigation pane General View Search Folder views You can apply the view such as Details or Icons that you are using for this folder to all folders of this type Advanced settings Files and Folders Always show icons never thumbnails Always show menus Display file icon on thumbnails Display file size information in folder tips e de E Automatically expand to current folder d Hidden files and folders Dont show hidden files folders or drives Show hidden files folders and drives Hide empty drives in the Computer folder Hide extensions for known file types Display the full path in the title bar Classic theme only aq Hide protected operating system files Recommended How do change folder options 0K cance soo Path names can vary if you use a non English language operating system or if you are not using the Mi crosoft Windows Explorer Folder XP Program Fold C Program Files WAVECOM lt Product gt er RO Vista C Pro
2. 52 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Note The WAV file is reloaded each time the Apply button is pressed The Apply button must also be used to save the configuration of a new custom input Pressing the OK button only closes the dialog The XML file Inputs xml located in the Config directory is updated by pressing the Apply button Add a New Sound Card Real or Virtual Custom Input Select the Configuration Custom Inputs menu entry to open the configuration dialog for the custom inputs To use a sound card as the signal input source the following parameters have to be set via the Custom Inputs dialog STANAG4285 Parameter Value wacl PXGF1 Newlnput 4 Input Name Newlnput 4 Device Soundcard Name Micropnone Realtek 4L 3 Audia Channel Microphone Realtek ACS Audio Type SPDIF Realtek AC S Audio Line In Realtek AC S Audio Phone Line Realtek 40 97 Audio Sampling Rate Hz Soundcard Input Parameter Value Input Name The name of the custom input Select Soundcard in the list Select one soundcard Note If the GUI is running in remote mode the names of the sound cards installed on the remote com puter which hosts the WAVECOM decoder are listed Add a new TCP IP Custom Input Select the Configuration Custom Inputs menu entry to open the configuration dialog for the custom inputs To use a TCP IP stream as signal input source the fol
3. Trigger Level Using the Oscilloscope Gain option the hori zontal un calibrated input voltage sensitivity may be adjusted from 0 to 100 Oscilloscope Gain 76 e Analysis Tools WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 To open the FSK analysis window go to the HF Modes menu and select Analysis FSK Analysis or use the FSK Analysis button The baud rate and spectrum window will open but NOT the waterfall window After a few seconds the baud rate and spectrum window are updated r KA WAVECOM W CODE W CODE Baudrate Card 1 File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help FSK Analysis HF Baudrate 100 25 12 33 05 D aw Y Mode cL te erhB 2 cS e 1750 Hz DD a7soHe gt 2 W CODE Baudrate Card 1 zo e a 100 1495 1720 1945 1 1 1 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 Hz ASAS IAEA S 12 32 37 12732 573 1 1 l 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 Hz Demodulator DSP PB Bandwidth 3600 Hz PB Center 2000 Hz Offset 0 Hz Input AF LEFT The FSK analysis window consists of four panes gt A spectrum graph pane gt A spectrum waterfall pane gt A baudrate graph pane gt A baudrate waterfall pane Baudrate and Spectrum Window The baudrate and spectrum window are two dimensional displays of the monitored baud rate measured in Baud and the spectrum of the transmission mea
4. Demodulator DSP Span 600 Hz Center 403 Hz Input AF LEFT Tracking rate determines the sampling rate The range is 1 15 ms the default is 2 ms Double clicking Filter inserts a low pass filter for filtering the tones The value of the filter should be ad justed to avoid serious tone distortion A rule of thumb value is 1 6 times the baud rate The filter range is 1 100 ms Using the Span menu the resolution of the frequency axis may be increased The steps are 3000 Hz for analogue selective calling systems 1500 600 and 300 Hz From the Center menu the center frequency may be adjusted It is important to readjust the center fre quency whenever the frequency Span axis is increased Several Color schemes are available through the right click menu MFSK Code Check HF MFSK code check is started by selecting the Analysis MFSK Code Check button or from HF Modes Analysis MFSK Code Check The MFSK code check starts with default values In many cases the user needs to set the following values 88 e Analysis Tools WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 center frequency baudrate 1 tone length number of channels VV V WV bandwidth use the PB tuning to enter the correct bandwidth The center frequency and bandwidth can be set by using the cursors in the FFT Window as shown below or by selecting Center in the Demodulator menu The baud rate and the Number of Channels Tones can
5. The center frequency of the decoder should be set to 1800 Hz when the receiver is correctly tuned to the transmitting station Small frequency variations are automatically tracked and compensated for in the de coder The center frequency of the decoder can be adjusted to 400 Hz from its normal setting By using the bar graph any remaining frequency difference can be compensated for by fine tuning of the receiver frequency or by adjusting the center frequency of the decoder Related mode MIL 188 110A STANAG 4481 FSK STANAG 4481 is a synchronous FSK mode which uses KG 84 encryption for communication It is com monly found in the HF band A number of communication parameter settings are possible but 75 Bd and a shift of 850 Hz are widely used Parameter Value Operation modes Broadcast Simplex FEC Receiver settings Data CW USB LSB Signal source s AF IF The KG 84 bit stream contains a 64 bits long header followed by two 256 bit message blocks in turn fol lowed by encrypted data terminated by an End Of Message Hence synchronization can only be achieved at the start of transmission using the KG 84 header The length of a message is variable Messages are usually sent consecutively with a short idle sequence between each message STANAG 4481 PSK This STANAG mode is specified by the NATO North Atlantic Treaty Organization Military Agency for Standardization as a Minimum technical equipment standards for naval HF shore
6. The selection of baud rate frequency shift or center frequency is done by clicking on the status bar fields or using the Demodulator menu If the FSK code check cannot identify a mode the code check should be repeated Data acquisition is con tinuously performed as a background task Heavy fading or other disturbances during data acquisition may prevent the identification of a mode You can also start a new data acquisition by pressing the Resync button As this kind of signal is not continuous a Noise Gate is required The status of it is displayed in the status bar The noise gate examines the input signal and tries to find out if a valid signal is available which can be processed or if the input consists only of noise 22 WAVECOM W CODE W CODE Code Check Card 1 x gt D O A oases A a am D lt a s ey File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help FSK Code Check SUB Baudrate 2400 00 ACARS Auto Noise Gate Mode Enabled 15 43 24 Deh amp amp M FP Mode Analysis gt HE 2 O ma 2 E aon Y 4 mone we i W CODE Code Check Card1 ACARS ATIS BIIS DSC VHF FMS BOS MOBITEX 1200 MPT 1327 NMT 450 NWR SAME PACKET 1200 ZVEI VDEW 1 l 1 l i l I 1 I l I l 1 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3250 3500 3750 4000 Hz Center 1821 Hz Input AF LEFT gt After starting the FSK code check the frequen
7. 1 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3250 3500 3750 4000 Hz Demodulator DSP Shift 300 Hz Center 1758 Hz Input AF LEFT Several color schemes are available through the right click menu By clicking on the displays graphic cursors may be used to move over the graph to allow measurement of data The bottom window shows the distribution of bit lengths as computed from the sampled data It should be noted that reception in the HF band may be subject to distortions In such cases the distribu tions for the O and 1 values should be averaged In the top window a graphical representation of the binary data 0 and 1 is provided The resolution may be set using the zoom function Practical values are between 1000 us and 10000 us In general the resolution is controlled by the smallest parameter to be measured For MFSK this corresponds to tone changes and RTTY to data transitions bits Using the scroll bar the binary bit pattern may be continuously moved left or right This allows easy loca tion of the bit tone duration to be measured The example shows the lower section of the screen display after using the zoom function The cursors may be moved across the bit pattern The individual positions of the cursors as well as the difference between the two cursors are continuously displayed in us and Bd When measuring binary Os or 1s mark or space it should be noted that the two levels may be subject to
8. Parameter Value Operation modes Unprotected FEC Modulation 8 PSK This mode employs 8 ary phase shift keying PSK on a single carrier frequency 1800 Hz as the modula tion technique for data transmission Serial binary information raw data accepted at the line side input is converted into a single 8 ary PSK modulated output carrier The modulation of this output carrier is a con stant 2400 Baud waveform regardless of the actual user data rate MIL 188 110A single tone waveform has the following characteristics Baud User data FEC cod interleaver No of unknown 8 No of known 8 rate rate bps ing rate phase symbols phase symbols CREL Channel Probe 2400 4500 ZERO No interleaver 2400 2400 Data SHORT oF LONG 2400 soo a 2 sHorrortong 20 o 174 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Baud User data FEC ole le Interleaver No of unknown 8 No of known amp rate rate bps ing rate phase symbols phase symbols CREE Channel Probe 2400 sHortertong ao foo ooo Each transmission of a MIL 188 110A message begins with a synchronization phase preamble 0 6 se conds for message with ZERO or SHORT interleaver setting and 4 8 seconds for a message with LONG interleaver setting followed by the data phase which is of unlimited length The data phase is structured in User Data Channel Probe pairs The phase value of a User Data symbol is unknown whereas
9. The modem and FAX modes available in the decoder are mainly used on land lines but may in as well be used on for instance satellite links The modes are mainly analogue in nature Parameter Value Frequency range 200 3800 Hz wire Symbol rate 2400 14400 Bd Modulation TCM DPSK QAM Receiver settings Line coupler required to record WAV files The modem and FAX mode is able to decode fax messages that are transmitted over the telephone wire There is a Half duplex Auto Mode and a Full duplex Auto Mode that will detect all transmission pa rameters automatically by analyzing the T 30 signaling WARNING To interface with the line a line coupler is required This adapter has two functions it con nects the audio from telephone line to the decoder input at the correct level and it isolates the recorder electrically from the telephone line Do not connect the line directly to the decoder input the decoder will interfere the fax signal and may be destroyed Line transmission The analogue loop The terrestrial network supporting fax and modem modes the Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN is still predominantly analogue in nature as far as the local loop subscriber connection is con cerned The local loop connects the end user subscriber with the global PSTN via a hierarchy of ex changes central offices The exchange provides 48 VDC line voltage used for signaling and dialing and a 90 120 VAC ringing voltage
10. XSizeUser the width of the data range in the user interface Y VV VV VV WV YSizeUser the height of the data range in the user interface To the default file header with 64 bytes additional a block of 112 bytes is added The additional block contains display parameter used by the WAVECOM GUI for displaying the stored data correctly NOTE the following struct type could be used to extract the data header struct SigAnalData char m nCursorHide char m strLabelxX 40 char m strLabelY 40 long m Phis xSize double m Phis ySize double m User xSize double m User ySize Data This FileType uses the data structure described in chapter Data Structures on page 310 to store the da ta 316 e WAVECOM Data Formats WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 A data package in the WDA file contains the data of all data points of one line in the graphic The data points are stored in long values 4 bit type that is 4 Bytes in the WDA file contains the value of one data point in the graphic WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 WAVECOM Data Formats e 317 Appendix Alphabets Details Unicode WAVECOM uses a Unicode font to display data which may be replaced by a user installed font within the ranges indicated below Alphabet Range Hex Range Dec Font Art A true type fixed system font produces a better display of table information Transparent Transparent LETTER FIG
11. Channel Probe 2400 2400 3 Psk SHORT or LONG 2400 1200 2 QPsk SHORT or LONG 2400 600 8Psk SHORT or LONG 2400 300 2400 150 2400 2400 2400 228 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Baud User da User data FEC coding Interleaver No of unknown No of known 8 Rate ta rate rate bps rate 8 phase sym phase symbols bps bols User Data Channel Probe 2400 1200 3 8Psk ZERO The user data is transmitted using a continuous frame structure Each frame begins with a 33 33 ms pre amble containing 80 symbols the next 176 symbols are divided into four 32 symbol data segments and three 16 symbol channel probe segments 33 33 ms dec T 106 66 ms Mh NCN ke A 1 q ji i l Block1 Block2 l Block 3 Block 4 Preamble 32 Data symbols SS Channel probe symbols At the end of transmission a certain bit pattern in hexadecimal notation 4B65A5B2 MSB first is sent to mark the end of message EOM The EOM sequence is followed by flush bits which are for FEC coder flushing and for the complete transmission of the remainder of the interleaver data block In most cases FEC and interleaver are used to combat the effects of fading frequency shift multipath ef fects and burst noise User data is in this case first FEC encoded interleaved then mapped into PSK sym bol and transmitted in 32 symbol data segment The 16 symb
12. Detailed information for each of the analysis tools can be found in the corresponding descriptions see FFT on page 71 and Sonagram on page 74 Options can be set using the right mouse button or the context menu see FFT Sonagram Context Menu on page 63 It is possible to remove the tuning FFT or Sonagram in the View Menu Waterfall The waterfall analysis produces a three dimensional display of FFT spectra over time frequency and am plitude The waterfall display aggregates many single measurements to 40 displayed spectra An updated measurement in the two dimensional real time FFT display only shows a fraction of the data depending on the modulation method In contrast the FFT waterfall display also displays data in the time domain A time histogram is displayed on the left hand side of the display By clicking on the graph the display will be paused and measurement cursors appear WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Analysis Tools e 73 File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Fax amp Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help Waterfall HF Window Hanning Period 50 ms Auto Avg 1 D SAnS aa O eve Y Waterfall Card 4 W CLOUD ee Oe Oe OS Fee 1 1 1 1 1000 1500 2000 2500 Demodulator FFT Bandwidth 4000 Hz Center 1951 Hz Input AF LEFT Options can be set using the right mouse button or the context menu see FFT Sonagram Con
13. For more information see Symbol Definition on page 39 By selecting Zoom In the mouse cursor changes its shape By clicking and dragging a field can be en larged or reduced horizontally and vertically The field should be sized in such a way that the peaks fill out the zoom field optimally E 0 600 800 1000 After the zoom field has been sized release the mouse button An enlarged section of the autocorrelation trace is displayed The distance between recurring equidistant peaks gives the periodicity of the signal under investigation Z WAVECOM W CODE Autocorrelation Card 6 W CLOUD File HF Modes WHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Fax Autocorrelation HF Baudrate 50 00 0544949 4 mode 2 Autocorrelation Card 6 W CLOUD 15 Bite _ 129 156 164 1000 320 0 I I 100 120 140 160 150 By selecting Zoom 100 the full screen display will reappear Several Color schemes are available through the right click menu Bit Correlation The bit correlation and bit length analysis tools allow the measurement of bit length Bit length analysis relies on a statistical evaluation of many individual measurements whereas the bit correlation function displays the data of the V1 channel graphically The data for bit correlation is sampled and displayed with respect to time Thus pulse and tone duration lengths as well as bit bias may be measured The bit correlation analysis
14. SigAnal data 316 Signal Interference 328 Signal Polarity 38 Signal Strength 282 346 e Index WAVECOM Decoder Single channel Float IQ time data SFIQ chunk 307 Single channel Float Real data SFR_ chunk 308 Single channel IQ Packing SIQP chunk 308 Single channel Short IQ time data SSIQ chunk 307 Single channel Short Real data SSR_ chunk 308 SITOR Alphabet 326 SITOR ARQ 223 SITOR AUTO 223 SITOR FEC 223 Software Options 15 Software Uninstall 17 Software Updates 15 Sonagram 74 Sonagram HF SUB DIR and SAT 75 Sonagram data 314 SP 14 224 Spectrum Indicator 60 Spot Beam Reception 282 SPREAD 11 SPREAD 21 and SPREAD 51 225 SR Calibration 56 SR Fine Tuning 56 SSTV 226 STANAG 4285 228 STANAG 4415 230 STANAG 4481 FSK 231 STANAG 4481 PSK 231 STANAG 4529 233 STANAG 4539 235 STANAG 5065 FSK 235 Status Information 303 Status Window 261 267 SWED ARQ 235 Symbol Definition 39 Synchronization 103 Systems 276 T Telegraph Speed Bit Rate Baud Rate and Symbol Rate 98 Temp Files 48 TETRA 236 Text data 310 The analogue loop 286 THE PXGF CHUNK STRUCTURE 305 The Sat Aero System 280 Time Stamp 40 Toggle 40 Toolbar 59 Traffic Channel Decoder 280 Transmission Modes 107 Transparent 318 Tree View of the Classified Signals Code Checks 260 266 Trouble Shooting 282 Tuning FFT or Sonagram 72 Tuning FSK Signals 72 Tuning MFSK Signals 72 Tuning PSK Signals 72 TW
15. row lt button gt Using the Writing Direction radio buttons a LeftToRight or RightToLeft output direction of the decoded text may be selected WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 First start e 55 gt The System combo list is used to set the length of the codeword for a user defined alphabet The present version allows only 5 bit alphabets Click Transparent to select if control characters are to be displayed in the decoded text Depending on which radio button i e Letters Figures or Third is selected the letters figures or third shift control characters of the current 5 bit custom alphabet are displayed in the list con trol gt The Control Characters combo box contains the control characters that can be added to an al phabet i e the Letters Shift Figures Shift Third Shift Unperforated Tape Space Linefeed and Carriage Return characters Select a character then press the Arrow button to copy the selected character to the selected row in the custom Alphabet list gt The Arrow button is used to move characters to the translation table Press this button to copy the selected character in the Font table or the selected entry in the Control Characters combo box to the selected position in the Alphabet table gt The Find button and the edit box to the left of the button are used to find a character decimal or hex value in the Alphabet or Font table Press Reset to replace all cha
16. 1784987 100701 100702 100701 100702 100701 Destination Date ny es be Rs R 17 11 2010 7 11 2010 17 11 2010 17 11 2010 17 11 2010 17 11 2010 17 11 2010 17 11 2010 17 11 2010 17 11 2010 17 11 2010 Time 12 55 08 12 55 06 12 55 09 12 55 10 EAS 55 10 12 55 12 12 55 11 12 57 16 12 59 47 12 59 47 12 59 54 A Status File 2340590122 _20101117_125506_TETRA_TMO VOICE 2 wav 2340590122 20101117 _125506 TETRA TMO VOICE _160 wav 2340590122 20101117_125507_TETRA TMO VOICE_159 wav 2340590122 20101117_125510_ TETRA TMO VOICE _3 wav 2340590122 20101117_125510_ TETRA TMO VOICE _160 wav 2340590122 _20101117_125510_TETRA TMO VOICE _2 wav 2340590122 _20101117_125511_ TETRA TMO VOICE _159 wav 2340590122 20101117_125716_TETRA _TMO VOICE 113 wav 2340590122 _20101117_125947_TETRA_TMO SDS_167_100 2340590122 20101117_125947_ TETRA TMO SDS 167_100 2340590122 20101117 _125954 TETRA TMO SDS 168_100 2340590122 20101117_125955 TETRA TMO SDS 168 100 Demodulator IQ The middle pane contains a list of active TMO and DMO voice sessions Left clicking an entry will highlight the row ant send the selected conversation to the audio output Audio output may be enabled or disabled using the mute button ah WAVECOM Decoder PB Bandwidth 25000 Hz W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Offset 12300 Hz Input IQ LEFT amp RIGHT Transmission Modes e 237 The lower pane contains a list of saved calls and SDS message
17. CIS 50 50 enhanced AIS enhanced CW improved New installation software XML customer inputs configuration improved New protocols DMR New digital TDMA based mobile radio mode W CODE Media Player Recorder This tool records signals directly to WAV files from the host sound card inputs During playback of WAV files the sig nal is sent unprocessed to the W CODE and a monitoring signal is played through the sound card PSK 63 125 Now independent amateur radio modes implementing the FLARQ emergency messaging protocol PSK 250 New amateur radio modes implementing the FLARQ protocol VDL M2 New digital aeronautical data link mode W PACTOR III Initial release of WAVECOM s implementation of PACTOR III IP PXGF TCP IP streaming data format added Improvements and modifications Installation The procedure has been greatly improved and simplified an option to delete all settings before re or new installation added CHU Polarity now manually selected CW New much improved demodulator will decode speeds up to 90 wpm AIS New Inland AIS interpretations of standard AIS message fields add ed Standard AIS Inland AIS St Lawrence Seaway and PAWSS AIS binary message decoding added Baudot Reworked decoder with improved polarity detection and enhanced performance PACTOR I PACTOR II ASCII 0x1E idle removed from hex output W CODAN 9001 Output of demodulated multichannel symbols de randomization of secure and un
18. Card File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help Sssifier Code Check P2 Table based Check finished NOR Auto 16 41 48 Del amp amp A Mode Analysis v q te Du RMA 2 tid an OHe 0H2 22 W CODE Classifier Code Check HF Card1 cn x CCC Settings Classifier Settings Code Check Settings 41 46 EE 48 T 0 250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3250 3500 3750 4000 4250 4500 4750 Hz dB A 0 1 0 53 Si 20 4 JY gt Y It 4800 Hz vit 1 I l I 1 I I 1 J 1 I B 0 250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3250 3500 3750 4000 4250 4500 4750 Hz Bandwidth 4800 Hz Center 2704 Hz Offset 0 Hz Input AF LEFT The status window displays status messages for each step of the process selected in Classifier Code Check Sequences on page 258 The status messages should be self explanatory Decoding Process 4 and 5 complete the classification and code checking steps by automatically switching to decod ing of the assumed mode In the case that a sampling spectrum contains multiple signals and without any preference set in Code Check Settings Signal 1 is automatically selected for decoding otherwise the preference checked will determine the selection for decoding Classifier Code Check CCC VHF UHF The VHF UHF Classifier Code Check is a versat
19. FFT DIR Offset Frequency Bandwidth 2 Offset Frequency Bandwidth 2 FFT SAT Offset Frequency Bandwidth 2 Offset Frequency Bandwidth 2 Tuning FFT or Sonagram In some modes a Tuning FFT or Sonagram is available The FFT or Sonagram can be used to set the center frequency shift and passband filter Tuning FSK Signals H CODE Tet Card A Mark and Space are selected with the right and left cursor The precision of the center frequency is very important and directly influences the performance of the decoder After every change the center frequency and shift are automatically updated Automatic tuning is also available It works perfectly as long as there is only one input signal present in the spectrum To apply a filter see Passband Filter Support on page 69 Options can be set using the right mouse button or the context menu see FFT Sonagram Context Menu on page 63 It is possible to remove the tuning FFT or Sonagram in the View Menu Tuning MFSK Signals W CODE Tent Card 2 z icuescne Yue TOA poe omir e 1877 less 334 The highest and lowest tone of the signal is selected with the right and left cursor The precision of the center frequency is very important and directly influences the performance of the decoder After every change the center frequency and shift are automatically updated Options can be set using the right mouse button
20. FSI Cycle EN SSN SSN BATCH BN border area frequency subset cycle number subsequence batch number indicator 1 bith indicator 3 bits 6 bits number 3 bits 4 bits Depending on the value of the SSI flag the Supplementary System Information SSI carries information on zone local time and date Another option displays day of week month of year and year Data ERMES transmits data in fixed length frames of 36 bits A frame may carry an additional data field and the text data Message Frame MHEAD Local Address Message Number External bit LADDR MNUM ER AIMALL VIF full local address individual group local or external additional vanable Info oa calls 5 bits receiver 1 bit info 1 bit field 7 bits The Variable Information Field VIF has two main options depending of the status bit ALL O or ALL 1 Variable Information Field Without Supplementary Information Paging Category PCAT UMI URI ALERT ALERT RSVD 00 tone 01 numenc Urgent indicator alert alarm signal for Tuture 02 alphanumeric O normal message indicator 03 transparent 1 urgent message type O Y definition 1 bit 2 bits 1 bit 3 bits Variable Information Field With Supplementary Information The ETS 300 133 4 standard has a very fine grained subdivision of the VIF and this enables ERMES to be used for a wide range of applications 154 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD
21. File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Fax amp Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help Demodulated Bitstream Output Baudrate 100 00 po _ Traffic i 14 07 27 1Gd GS AA 0 Mode Anays gt dE 2 OARA 2 tS ee MOM sow tO ston Demodulated Bitstream Output Card 1 ee fesse Sending bitstream to external application a 1 o 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 Hz Demodulator DSP Shift 850 Hz Center 1700 Hz Offset 0 Hz Input AF RIGHT NUM For FSK signals the polarity is changed from the menu Options Signal Polarity and then using the buttons in the window shown For more information see Signal Polarity on page 38 For PSK signals the configuration of the symbol definition is in the menu Options Symbol Definition For more information see Signal Polarity If you select an FSK or PSK demodulator in Bitstream Output or Autocorrelation mode the signal polarity definition is available 144 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Signal Polarity Default st Change Order Pressing Change Order reverses the polarity of the signal and pressing Default ST restores the default val ue For more information see Symbol Definition on page 39 DGPS DGPS Differential Global Positioning System data is mainly transmitted in the low frequency band e g 285
22. Law Enforcement Warning C E E F H LE LA p N R S V A D R R a n a Volcano Warning EM QU VI RW MW W E OE UW HW PW OW DR MO MT WT XB XF XO XP Federal Communication Commission and Federal Emergency Management Agency codes a Canadian codes PSSCCC FIPS Area Codes USA Code Area Delaware North Pacific Ocean near Alaska and along Alaska coastline including Bering Sea and Gulf of Alaska District of Columbia Central Pacific Ocean including Hawaiian waters Florida 60 american Samoa O Georgia 61 South Central Pacific Ocean including American Samoa waters WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 191 os os O Eastern North Pacific Ocean and along U S West Coast from Canadian border to Mexican border Code Area Idaho 65 Western Pacific Ocean including Mariana Island waters uam stows 68 Marshall stant Kansas Northern Mariana Islands Pal Midway Islands 24 Maryland 73 Western North Atlantic Ocean and along U S East Coast from Canadian border south to Cur rituck Beach Light N C Massachusetts U S Minor Outlying Islands 2 Michigan 75 Western North Atlantic Ocean and along U S East Coast south of Currituck Beach Light N C following the coastline into Gulf of Mexico to Bonita Beach FL including the Caribbean Minnesota Navassa Island Mississippi Gulf of Mexico and along the U S Gulf
23. North Atlantic Treaty Organization Military Agency for Standardi zation in Characteristics of Single Tone Modulators Demodulators for Maritime HF Radio Links with 1240Hz Bandwidth 14 December 1995 Parameter Operation modes PSK Broadcast Simplex FEC Modulation 8 PSK Additional Inf The modulation technique used in this mode consists of phase shift keying 8 PSK of a single tone sub carrier that is selectable in 100Hz steps from 800Hz to 2400 Hz with a default value of 1700 Hz The modulation speed symbol rate is always 1200 Bd Through the use of different M PSK modulation formats and FEC Forward Error Correction coding rates serial binary user information raw data ac cepted at the line side input can be transmitted at different user data rates STANAG 4529 single tone waveform has the following format characteristics which may be selected from Options Frame Format Baud Rate User data rate bps Bits per symbol M PSK FEC coding Interleaver rate E T 1200 1 BPSK SHORT or LONG 1200 1 BPSK SHORT or LONG 3 8 PSK ZERO 2 QPSK ZERO 1200 150 1 BPSK SHORT or LONG WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 233 Baud Rate User data rate bps Bits per symbol M PSK FEC coding Interleaver rate 1200 00 reso ZERO The user data is transmitted using a continuous frame structure with 213 33 ms per frame Each frame starts with a preamble containing 80 symbo
24. P ARQ M2 242 arq m2 242 FSK 96 3 Pilot Frequency ARQ M2 242 arq m2 242 FSK 96 3 ARQ M2 242 arq m2 242 FSK 85 7 2 ARQ M2 342 arq m2 342 FSK 96 3 ARQ M2 342 arq m2 342 FSK 200 3 ARQ M2 342 arq m2 342 FSK 85 1 2 ARQ M2 342 arq m4 342 FSK 172 2 ARQ M4 242 arq m4 242 FSK 192 3 ARQ M4 242 arq m4 242 FSK 172 2 ARQ M4 342 arq m4 342 FSK 192 3 ARQ N arq n FSK 96 5 ARQ6 90 arq6 90 FSK 200 5 ARQ6 98 arq6 98 FSK 200 5 ASCI ascii FSK 75 5 ASCI ascii FSK 110 5 ASCII ascii FSK 171 42 5 5 acrii 5 Ready CAP NUM SCRL A A E A Gh vo mm epi ye x el ED A A a Pe ee eB TKOKI11212 p US yy wavecom_ma WAVECOM W EY IrfanView CCC Table 201 CCC Table 201 EE Manuals DA lt RP OM Woe 14 08 The table contains a number of columns containing information required for the operation of the CCC in table driven mode The information in the columns is entered using the Signal Parameters Editor window Clicking the menu items will display the corresponding drop down menu Below the menu line a toolbar is placed File Menu File Edit View Help J New Ctrl N ES Open Ctri 0 Merge Ctrl M bal Save Ctrl S Save As 1 CCC Table 20101129 xml Exit In addition to the entries of the standard Windows file menu the File Menu also contains a Merge entry which allows the user to merge two tables To merge files click Merge to open the Merge Signal Data base window 268 e Classifier Optional WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e
25. Sample Time 325 ka OFDM Mode Partial Analysis E 30 Baud CW Morse Protection These settings control the behavior of the classifier See the section on Classifier Code Check HF CCC on page 255 for details Note that the Refresh List option is not available when the classifier is used with the CCC 258 e Classifier Optional WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Code Check Settings Code Check Settings General Code Check timeout 30 s v Decode using highest Confidence Decode using highest Level Code Check table file Path AAA y Browse Clearlist Reload table EE Code Check Timeout This option specifies the maximum allowable time interval between two successful synchronization at tempts performed by a code check process If the specified time interval is exceeded the code check pro cess will be interrupted Available intervals are 15 30 45 and 60 seconds Decode Using the Highest Confidence If checked and if decoding is part of the selected CCC process P4 and P5 decoding is performed for the signal with the highest confidence as determined by the classifier Decode Using the Highest Level If checked and if decoding is part of the selected CCC process P4 and P5 decoding is performed for the signal with the highest signal level determined by the classifier Code Check Table File Select the XML table to use for the table check
26. TSC to mobile Carries information on traffic channel number allocated for requested call The return control channel for the mobile units is accessed randomly using a particular form of the slotted ALOHA protocol The TSC continuously sends sync messages on the forward control channel to the mobiles inviting random access messages These TSC messages contain a parameter indicating the number of fol lowing timeslots a frame available The mobile unit finds a random slot in the frame for its message If the messages of two or more units collide the collision is detected by the TSC which now increases the number of timeslots for the next frame and the mobile units retransmit If you select Fixed stations AHL messages will be filtered out except for the two following a non AHL message This is to prevent the display being flooded by these messages which are the most numerous in the system 186 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 If you select Mobile stations all messages in the control channel will be displayed and the messages which are identical but have different labels depending on their origin from TSC or mobile will be labeled with their mobile label Error correction may be enabled or disabled by toggling the ECC menu item A PC generated timestamp may be inserted ahead of the decoded message Go to the Options menu and enable the Time stamp function Here are a few examples of the most fre
27. Text modes gt Fax modes gt FSK analysis gt Sonagram analysis Selecting high values allows the user to scroll back over a longer time but requires more memory and hard disk space 48 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Settings Clicking Setttings opens a configuration window F Settings Global Settings When selecting Clear Screen show warning before deleting all data Y When selecting Exit save last used mode When selecting FFT and PSK Symbol Rate pause graphics while cursors are active Enable the Backspace support Enable reconnect to cards on remote computer Enable relative frequency display Restore defaults You can enable or disable different options to control the behavior of the application gt gt When selecting Print include front page containing all mode settings Enable or disable the printing of a status page with all mode settings if you use the Print command When selecting Clear Screen show warning before deleting all data Enable or disable the display of a warning window before the screen is cleared when you use the Clear Screen command When selecting Exit save last mode Enable or disable storing of settings from the last mode If enabled the decoder will start again in the latest mode used When selecting FFT and PSK Symbol Rate pause graphics while cursors are active Enable or disable the auto
28. V 22bis BEND 17 A A AN 184 DD E fsa sess eect A 184 FAX 8 MODEMS Full DupleX cccccccccccccccccccccceccsceeeeeececeeeeeceeececeeueusaseaeeeneeeess 184 CIN a a A aa tgiceeie south cfaa teases 184 Ve TA O ta neue 184 Te A ERE A A A E ENA N 184 A E E A O A E uae 185 UD IIA AEE T E EE E T EE 185 Mi A 185 NAT eaa a eseuncatans diva tach oiadd T inate etn atainasec 187 BUI O E eae eet sions aad es Sacer a ene hectare nal dates 188 NE A A A A A A 188 A oe Mais nested soars eed ala acerca nd tara ted edna 189 A O caine 193 O A E 193 A A AS 194 A O O mn ee ee 195 PACKET 300 pu a acia cairo delas 196 A O tessa cava A 197 PACT OR EE te ataateetnida ies A T E 197 BIN Oe EE E E cesta A eee 198 PACTOR sasusataononceensialarsnocsgsaeretddinnidana nscancialenaessaaamietdtnsidatamatsachannaestants 199 NO O A O A nea Gah waa A EN 200 ACTOR FE ide 200 NAO A A E E acta neastsiad amp 201 oE l EAEE A E E EE E A eases eames 203 A A te ee ee eee eee 203 PICCOLO MK6 and PICCOLO MK12 cccccccccssssseeeeeeecececececccececeusueuuasaenuneeeeess 204 OCS A A EO sec Codsatac et 205 A A ON 207 O Gk ee RRC Me Dee trey A TL Ure nes tr CETTE UOTE PE MERON 208 PS iI ratero ai dond meconcaes 208 PSK 31 PSK 63 PSK 125 PSK 250 iba tanta 209 E AS 210 PSK 63F PSK 125F PSK 220F occcccnnnnnnnnnnnncconononnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 210 KAM A A A N ON 211 NE A A cia cite A E cinteoeecie 211 ROBUST PA KE atole rada na oral tea A T 212 KOMET A cutee
29. W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 CHIA so Users Public Public Documents Wawecom CCC Code Tables 49 If Search COC Coe Tables 2 CCCSigmalDB zrm E CCCSignalDB_Oxemi N IE Computer amp Local Disk C3 a Removable Disk i EI My Passport F E Filename CCCSignelDB arml Signal Database ami gt open je concu The file contents of the first of the two files to merge now appear in green in the main CCC Editor window File Edit View Help g a rl a E Ep Name Decoder Modulation Submode Baud Symbol Shift Bandwi No of Tones No of Carriers Spacing ALE 400 ale 400 MFSK 50 8 50 ALF RDS alf rds PSK 2 1187 5 ALIS alis FSK 228 7 ALIS 2 alis 2 MFSK 240 ARQ E arq e FSK 46 15 ARQ E arq e FSK ARQ E arq e FSK ARQ E arq e FSK ARQ E arq e FSK ARQ E arq e Ready CAP NUM SCRL Pa Pa NY we a by 00 hr Now repeat the procedure described above for the second of the two files to merge i e from the File Menu select Merge select the file to merge and press Open Now the two files have been merged To merge additional files just repeat the steps outlined above Edit Menu Edit View Help New Ins x Delete Enable Disable Select All Ctri A The edit menu accesses these functions New Pressing this menu item or selecting an existing record from the CCC Editor main window by left clicking an entry will open a Signal Parameters Editor window Signal
30. W CODE icons idas laicas 15 Sotware UnINStdl lacra ca Dai 17 First start 18 W CODE FIRSE STATES a dit biien 18 SU A Na Ne OS 19 Command Parametros Es 20 Default Data and Program Folders Paths occccccccccccccncnnnnnnnnnnnn cnn nr 20 MAA IMA o e a ALAS 22 Pile MEN Mid Edda 23 Media Player Recorder usina a a 24 EME viene focal s ie ten tare ee el cee a ae a a A kee ti Coe ee ae 28 VEE ZU AED ERIS UM A ri 30 VEE UHIF SUB Men Udri a a a 31 Satellite Men an dad laica as 32 PAK SEMOdenas Men Na ins 33 ODEIONS MAME e a a a het Gel eee deren tes 33 A TO 34 BIE IIVersion Massi a Slate aha aia dared ediaaacs wee 34 CRC RECOGMICOMccncnsveasneural eter O 34 ERES Table iaa ee ee r 34 A A O A O annus 35 Code Stati tics wav cui den bia atau anoan a a aelaanes sides banaue te cdiaa sesame 35 CH CIO A aank E laa taatirads 35 En Or PNGICAEION sons 35 FAX amp Modems Settings iia i 36 Frane FONA a a e ne eieaaeaes 36 A 36 L tlerS RIGUPES naar aaa das 36 Message IV DO mientes ic a AA A oi 37 Modem Set Sita ds 38 PSL AA y O O 38 RESVNG MOG iia 38 Signal Polaris a aaa 38 SVIMDO WD SUMILIOM area aia 39 WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Contents e iii iv e Contents POTASA tasca sa 40 o 40 Demodulator Men tato bad 41 A eee a a ee eee Tee ee ee ee eee re 41 RAKET E EAEE E E coli ET 41 PE CONLE cemin e A waren wane E E E 43 PB BandWwidt Mikire a adas a 43 Cente Trene lanes esa N RI 43 S E
31. from land earth stations LES or CES to mobile earth stations SES or MES are 6 kBaud for NCS TDM 2 8 kBaud for LES voice low speed data and fax Parameter Value Frequency range L Band C Band Operation modes Inm mM Forward NCS and LES Msg Chnl Forward 6 kbps DPSK NCS TDM 8 kbps OQPSK LES Voice SCPC LES Low Speed Data Return 3 kbps DPSK Slotted Aloha TDMA 8 kbps OQPSK SCPC Required SNR gt 15 dB 20 dB recommended pa In idle mode all mobile stations listen to the NCS Network Control Station common TDM channel which carries signaling information When a mobile station identifies its id in a signaling frame it will act on the commands received from the NCS and in case of a channel assignment message being received tune to the assigned transmit receive frequency pair The return channel is a 2 8 kBaud TDMA 3 kBaud for all service types WAVECOM decodes SAT M 2 4 kbps fax and data The decoder will automatically adjust to the modulation type in use BPSK or OQPSK Additional information See SAT Settings on page 40 See SAT System on page 275 SI ARQ SI ARQ is a simplex system similar to for example SITOR SI ARQ therefore also sounds similar to the well known SITOR system Because data and pause blocks are longer in duration the perception of a low er baud rate is created Parameter Value cnn iin Operation modes Simplex ARQ WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3
32. on page 275 Toggle Clicking the Toggle function will immediately switch from the current case to its opposite i e from Let ters to Figures or vice versa Thus an incorrect case shift caused by a character received in error may be corrected at once and the proper case restored Time Stamp Clicking Time stamp offers a selection of different time zones for time stamping text output Time stamp ing may also be disabled at a later time through this menu Time Stamp Local Time Universal Time Coordinated UTC 40 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 To display the time stamp a new window is opened on the left hand side of the screen When a text line has been displayed date and time is displayed in this window This function is available for all text output modes Eile HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satelite Moderns Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help BAUDOT Baudrate 50 00 Alphabet TA2 Latin INV Traffic Bit Inv Mesk 00000 DS amp 8 amp a Mode Analysis v a amp BAM 2 52 FF ATT Demodulator Menu Favorites Conf Auto Mode PB Center PB Bandwidth Center Shift Baudrate Offset Input Gain Using the Demodulator menu all parameters for decoding may be edited In addition to baud rate the options and values for mode shift center frequency offset frequency input and input
33. see the section Classifier Code Check Editor on page 267 Below is a browser excerpt from the XML file with the begin ning of the file and entries for two modes ACARS and ATIS displayed lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 standalone yes gt lt SignalDatabase gt lt SignalList gt lt Signal Name ACARS Mode acars Modulation FSK Disabled 0 gt lt Baudrate gt 2400 lt Baudrate gt lt NumTones gt 2 lt NumTones gt lt CodecheckCounter gt 3 lt CodecheckCounter gt lt Signal gt lt Signal Name ATIS Mode atis Modulation FSK Disabled 0 gt lt Baudrate gt 1200 lt Baudrate gt lt NumTones gt 2 lt NumTones gt lt CodecheckCounter gt 3 lt CodecheckCounter gt lt Signal gt Code Check Code check tests whether a candidate mode can successfully synchronize to the input signal for a required number of times as specified in the corresponding entry in the XML file lt CodecheckCounter gt 262 e Classifier Optional WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 User Interface The CCC user interface consists of five windows gt A sonagram and options window An FFT window gt A list of classified signals gt A tree view of the classified signal code check gt Atext status window nak The CCC is launched in manual mode by default by selecting the Classifier menu from VHF UHF DIR Analysis Classifier Code Check or from VHF UHF SUB Analysis Classifier Code Che
34. severe distortions depending on the quality of the received signal Using the average value over a number of measurements improves the accuracy of results Some transmission modes are modulated in terms of bit length or bit position Pulse Width and Pulse Position Modulation SELCAL Analysis The SELCAL analysis for the VHF UHF range employs a graphical display in two dimensions frequency y axis and time x axis Both values may be preset This tool was developed for the analysis of analogue sequential single tone call systems After starting SELCAL Analysis the detected frequency values are displayed as pixels A SELCAL signal is easily recognized as stable lines To stop the horizontally scrolling display click on the display Measurement cursors for both the time axis and the frequency axis appear The display may be scrolled backwards with a maximum range of 15 seconds when tracking rate is set to 1 ms and 225 se WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Analysis Tools e 95 conds when the tracking rate is set to 15ms The scroll back range for all tracking rate settings in between varies accordingly 7 Z WAVECOM W CODE W CODE SELCAL Cardi rh babak File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite FAX amp Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help SELCAL Analysis SUB Tracking Rate 2 ms Filter 10 00 ms 22 27 47 0 ow Mode Analysis v ug uma 2 ik MO json L 1500 H
35. shown below r Peak Hold Cancel If you select max Decay then a decay value can be set This allows to use the peak hold functions during thunderstorms or if tuning the receiver Max Decay Display Settings To configure other parameters of the FFT select Display Settings Display Settings Base level dB lJ 60 dB 240 0 Range dB 60 dB 30 240 FFT length Pt 2048 y The sliders Base level and Range control the dynamics of the FFT Base level sets the minimum level that is visible in the FFT display Range is the difference between the maximum and the minimum level With FFT length the number of points used to calculate the FFT can be set A longer FFT length leads to increased resolution in the frequency domain This can be useful in analyzing OFDM signals where it is al so recommended to select a bigger average factor to reduce the noise shown in the FFT Color schemes Select between Grey Hot Cool Cooper and RGB 64 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Mode Selector Full screen menus are available for modes and analysis tools Click on the Mode Selector Button in the toolbar to open this menu Modes are available in alphabetical order Click on a mode to start it From the top row tabs analysis tools may also be selected If a mode is already active it will not be terminated or halted by opening the full screen m
36. 0 gt lt Baudrate gt 123 5 lt Baudrate gt lt 5hift gt 300 lt Shift gt lt NumTones gt 2 lt NumTones gt lt CodecheckCounter gt 2 lt CodecheckCounter gt lt Signal gt lt Signal Name VFT 8 200 Bd Mode no mode Modulation FSK Disabled 0 gt lt Baudrate gt 200 lt Baudrate gt lt ShifE gt 300 lt Shitt gt lt NumTones gt 2 lt NumTones gt lt Spacing gt 300 lt Spacing gt lt NumChannels gt 8 lt NumChannels gt lt NumChannelsMin gt 2 lt NumChannelsMin gt lt Signal gt 256 e Classifier Optional WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Code Check Code check tests whether a candidate mode can successfully synchronize to the input signal for a required number of times as specified in the corresponding entry in the XML file lt CodecheckCounter gt User Interface The CCC user interface consists of five windows A sonagram and options window An FFT window A list of classified signals A tree view of the classified signal code check Vv Vv V WV A text status window Na The CCC is launched in manual mode by default by selecting the Classifier EE menu from HF Modes Analysis Classifier Code Check or by pressing the CCC buttton The CCC may be restarted using the Start Restart Classifier Code Check d button Classifier Code Check P3 When the CCC is launched a label positioned on the left hand side of the up permost status bar indicates the level of processing s
37. 00 In the return direction messages are transmitted by the MES on time division multiple access TDMA channels assigned by the NCS The frame length varies between 2176 symbols and 10368 symbols in steps of 2048 symbols SAT C TDM As for the other Inmarsat satellite modes the Inmarsat C system uses a NCSC Network Control Station Channel for the announcement of new messages for the terminals At the time of writing these an nouncements were transmitted on the following frequencies Ocean Region NCSC Frequency Ocean Region NCSC Frequency AOR W 1597 70 Mii 1537 10 Mii AOR E 1541 45 MHz orn 1541 45 mi The NCSC frequency is fixed for each ocean region This ocean region is user selectable through the Sat ellite Settings panel In the frequency offset bar the Inmarsat C mode has a NCSC Auto check box Frequency RE stepS 5000 memory em Det fede 1539544000 test PABA nosc auto With this checkbox the user is able to select between two operation modes e Fixed Frequency Mode checkbox not ticked e NCSC Auto Mode checkbox ticked In Fixed Frequency Mode the decoder decodes all messages both signaling and traffic messages on the channel tuned to The traffic messages are transmitted on frequencies announced on the NCSC This mode makes it possible to decode for example only the NCSC and display all control information transmitted there The user may also leave the decoder on a traffic channel frequency
38. 00 Transmission Modes e 221 Parameter Value Symbol rate 96 0 192 0 and 200 0 Bd Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF Additional Info ITA 3 SI ARQ operates at symbol rates of 96 192 or 200 Bd on the radio link SI ARQ uses the ITA 3 alphabet for data transmission and error detection Data blocks usually consist of 5 or 6 characters One transmission cycle is made up of twice the length of a character block If the information sending sta tion ISS receives an acknowledgement character the next data block is sent with inverted phase or po larity However if the receiving station IRS requests a retransmission the repeated block is sent with unchanged polarity If the ISS does not receive the acknowledgement packet it transmits a RQ block as is the case with SITOR The software automatically detects SI ARQ block lengths of four five or six characters and displays this information after phasing has been achieved The polarity of the signal is automatically detected Transmission Sequence of SI ARQ at 96 Baud with Five Characters Five ITA S Characters Acknowledge Five ITA 3 Characters normal parity Data Ready inverted parity IRS SI AUTO Fully automatic tuning to signal center shift and transmission modes SI ARQ Mode A and SI FEC Mode B may be achieved by selecting SI AUTO mode SI FEC The SI FEC sound is similar to the sound of SITOR FEC However SI FEC is used very seldom and s
39. 01100 O 11010 11110 Letter shift 01001 00111 Carraige return D 00110 00011 Mm 01101 11101 Figure shift 00 01010 Ce 10100 N O 00001 N 11100 Space N 01111 N 11001 N D Ra e e Iie e e e Iie je e N dga IA IU IN le Ul Ww IN e N Ul Ww N e 10111 N 10101 N mn 10001 WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Appendix e 327 No ITA 1 Alphabet LETTER FIGURE 00010 V 01000 CA A 11131 Unperforated tape 11011 00100 O 00000 ee Questions amp Answers I got the following error message An unnamed file contains an invalid path Why When installing any WINDOWS operating system a Temp folder is automatically created in your root di rectory The decoder software uses this folder to create the required temporary files Please check if a Temp folder is present If not just create a new one in your root directory e g C Temp Why is my CPU at nearly 50 percent utilization even if no sophisticated mode is enabled If data compression encryption is switched on switch off these features Why is my fast CPU at 100 percent utilization when I run the FFT mode For graphics intensive tasks e g FFT the PC CPU uses as much processing power as is available to maximize the display refresh rate If there is more than one FFT display i e from two or more decoder cards these will share the available processing power This wi
40. 166 76 01110110 V amp 118 Lowercase v 119 167 77 01110111 w amp 119 Lowercase w 120 170 78 01111000 xX amp 120 Lowercase x WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Appendix e 325 DEC OCT HEX BIN Symbol HTML Number Description 171 79 121 01111001 y amp 121 Lowercase y 122 172 7A 01111010 Z amp 122 Lowercase z 123 173 7B 01111011 amp 123 Opening brace 124 174 7C 01111100 amp 124 Vertical bar 126 176 7E 01111110 amp 126 Equivalency sign tilde 127 177 7F 01111111 amp 127 Delete SITOR Alphabet No SITOR Alphabet LETTER FIGURE 1110001 0100111 1011100 1100101 0110101 1101100 1010110 1001011 1011001 O 1110100 0111100 1010011 1001110 1001101 1000111 OV 1011010 0111010 00 1010101 o 1101001 N O 0010111 N 0111001 N 0011110 N 1110010 N D e e a e e e Iie e e N 0 IA IU IN le N Ul WwW IN e N wm A W N Ire 0101110 N 1101010 N mn 1100011 N 0001111 Carriage Return 326 e Appendix WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 e UJ SITOR Alphabet LETTER FIGURE N 00 0011011 Line Feed 0101101 Letter Shift 0110110 Figure Shift 0011101 N WO W O 0101011 0110011 1111000 1100110 LETTER UJ ITA 1 Alphabet No ITA 1 Alphabet FIGURE 11000 10011 01110 Line feed 10010 10000 10110 01011 00101
41. 30 s v Decode using highest Confidence Decode using highest Level Code Check table file Path AAA y Browse Clearlist Reload table EE Code Check Timeout This option specifies the maximum allowable time interval between two successful synchronization at tempts performed by a code check process If the specified time interval is exceeded the code check pro cess will be interrupted Available intervals are 15 30 45 and 60 seconds Decode Using the Highest Confidence If checked and if decoding is part of the selected CCC process P4 and P5 decoding is performed for the signal with the highest confidence as determined by the classifier Decode Using the Highest Level If checked and if decoding is part of the selected CCC process P4 and P5 decoding is performed for the signal with the highest signal level determined by the classifier Code Check Table File Select the XML table to use for the table check or to replace the current file A history of previously used XML files is displayed in a drop down list when clicking on the arrow Pressing the Clear List button the history list will be reset A file browser appears when clicking on the Browse button If the selected file does not exist a warning is displayed Code check table C Users Public Documents Wavecom CCC Code Tables CCCSignalDB_orig xml does not exist If the CCC is started without an XML table a dialog wh
42. 4 Alphabet LETTER FIGURE A AAA O AE E IO PPC E E AECI E ls 363 0 foswww je Ja A a IA PE O A e so oono E e IEC AEREO E ea PEC TP E PA PEC TPC E PA as foo a as fosas eo fo PE CPES EC E WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Appendix e 321 ITA 4 Alphabet LETTER FIGURE 001010 No PEC rere ITA 5 Alphabet An alphabet in which 128 unique 7 bit strings are used to encode upper and lower case letters 10 deci mal numerals special signs and symbols diacritical marks data delimiters and transmission control characters 12 of the 7 bit strings are not assigned to any letter numeral or control character and the unassigned bit strings are open for use in a given country that may have unique requirements such as monetary symbols diacritical marks such as the tilde umlaut circumflex and dieresis and a two condition 8 bit pattern may be used that consists of seven information bits and a parity check bit DEC OCT HEX BIN Symbol HTML Number Description 0 0 00 1 01 00 00000000 NUL amp 000 Null char 1 00 00000001 SOH amp 001 Start of Heading 2 00000010 STX amp 002 Start of Text ETX 002 02 3 003 03 00000011 amp 003 End of Text 4 004 04 00000100 amp 004 End of Transmission 05 05 EOT 5 0 00000101 ENQ amp 005 Enquiry 6 06 00000110 A amp 006 Acknowledgment 7 07 B 00000111 006 007 8 010 CK EL amp 007 Bell 08 00001000 BS amp 008 Back Space 9 O11 09 0
43. 6 Speed Levels SL As propagation conditions change PACTOR III is able to select the most suitable speed level Under very poor conditions PACTOR III changes to speed level 1 whereas under optimum conditions speed level 6 is used As in the previous PACTOR standards the frame durations are still 1 25 seconds short cycle and 3 75 seconds long cycle for data mode Again a long path option is available to enable contacts up to 40 000 km In such a case the duration of the short and long cycle is extended to 1 4 and 4 2 seconds respectively Initial link establishment is achieved using the frequency shift keying FSK protocol of PACTOR I corre sponding to the lowest protocol level If both calling and called stations are capable of PACTOR III auto matic switching to this protocol is done For data transmission which is robust against all kinds of disturbances a decision must be made whether a short or a long frame length should be used Each frame consists of the user data a status byte and 202 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 two CRC bytes This input bit stream is then bit interleaved and convolutional encoded After that the symbol mapping for the different channels is done and the resulting signals are applied to the DxPSK modulators To extract the data from a PACTOR III signal the signal is demodulated with the appropriate number of DxPSK demodulators according to the speed
44. Autocorrelation Bit Correlation Full Duplex Auto Mode Full Duplex Auto Mode Bit Length Analysis V 26 V 26bis 35h V 32 V 32bis o Demod Bitstream Output V34 v32 V 32b15 a V34 Analysis Selector v 90 v 92 v 90 yo Mode Selector Mode Selector Fax amp Modems Mode Selector See Mode Selector on page 65 Options Menu Demodulator Favor Alphabet Code Statistic Letters Figures Toggle Y MSI Y IAS Cycle Time Stamp Y Error Indication Clear Screen Resync Mode In the Options menu all supported functions for a particular mode or functionality are collected the menu is adapted to each individual mode The Options menu will therefore appear with different contents depending on the mode or functionality selected First start e 33 WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Alphabet The Alphabet menu has options for transparent and normal output The normal output includes fonts for e g Latin Greek Cyrillic Hebrew Arabic alphabets The ASCII character sets for output in German Bulgarian US Swedish Danish Norwegian Chinese or other alphabets may also be selected Skyper an alphabet which is used in POCSAG mode in Germany is also available The transparent alphabet includes output of non printable characters of a data transmission e g ITA 2 control characters like Letter Shift and Figure Shift or undefined upper case characters In
45. Bit Length Analysis 93 BR 6028 124 BULG ASCII 125 C Cancellation 330 Card Information 296 Caveats 255 CCC Editor GUI 268 WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 CCIR 126 CCITT 127 Center 43 Centre Frequency CF__ chunk 308 Changes of order quantities 330 Channel Coding 102 Channel types 281 CHINESE 4 4 128 CHU 128 CIS 11 129 CIS 12 130 CIS 14 130 CIS 36 130 CIS 36 50 131 CIS 50 50 132 Classification Results List 260 266 Classifier 250 Classifier Optional 250 Classifier Code Check CCC VHF UHF 261 Classifier Code Check Editor 267 Classifier Code Check HF CCC 255 Classifier Code Check Sequences 258 264 Classifier data 311 Classifier Modulation Settings 258 264 Classifier User Interface 250 ClassifierCodeCheck data 312 Clear Screen 35 CLOVER 2 132 CLOVER 2000 133 CmStick 294 CODAN 9001 134 CODAN SELCAL 134 Code Check Settings 259 265 Code Statistics 35 CodeMeter and CmStick User Guide Help 295 Command Line Parameters 20 Conditions of Sale 329 Configuration Font size 299 Configuration Menu 46 Constraints 239 292 Contents 59 Copyright 331 COQUELET 13 138 COQUELET 8 139 COQUELET 80 140 CRC Recognition 34 CRC Table 34 CTCSS 141 Custom Alphabets 55 Custom Inputs 51 CV 786 142 CW MORSE 142 Cycle 35 Index e 343 D Data Base Fields 273 Data Encryption 297 Data Structures 310 dB Full Scale dBFS chunk 308 DCS SELCAL 14
46. By selecting 122 5 Bd or Variable rate reception is started Selecting the Polarity will determine normal or inverse screen color 156 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 In the Demodulator submenu the special function fields AM Gain and AM Offset are placed Centering of the signal deviations on the bar graph is controlled by adjusting AM Offset In addition maximum de viation is required on the bar graph This is done by adjusting AM Gain It should be noted that these two adjustments are influenced by each other Right click on the image to open the Zoom menu which allows the user to zoom in and out on the image FLEX FLEX is another mode used for pager transmissions It is often combined with POCSAG and GOLAY GSC Parameter Value gana ina FLEX specifies 4 different transmission modes Modulation Baud rate Bit rate Transmitted phases FFSK 1600 Ba 1600 bits sec aFFSK 1600 Ba 3200 bits sec A B FFSK 3200 Bd 3200 bits sec 4FFSK 3200 Bd 6400 bits sec A B C D First a preamble is sent which identifies the modulation type Next a Frame Information Word FIW is transmitted to identify the cycle and frame number The preamble and FIW are always transmitted as FFSK 1600 Baud After the preamble and FIW the message is sent with the modulation according to the preamble The message block contains the information and consists of 11 blocks Each block carries 8 words with
47. Code Hex CRC 0000 HAM Edit CRC Delete CRC A table of CRC s is stored in Config CRCTable xml Clear Screen This function will clear the screen contents All data will be lost Code Statistics For five bit alphabets a code statistics window can be shown below the text window In the Options menu chose Code Statistics to switch the statistic window on or off The bottom row shows the decimal value of the characters The row above displays the number of charac ters as a percentage The statistics are displayed as a 3D bar graph with the height of the bars proportional to the number of instances of a given character Click on the Reset button to reset all counters to zero Press the Enabled button to toggle sampling of the received characters for the statistics on and off Using the Statistics button the data can be showed ordered by quantity Pence AA AA A TT A e File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UMF SUB Satellite Fax Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help IBAUDOT Bsudrate 50 00 Alphabet ITA2 Lat INV Traffic Bit Inv Mask 00000 16 13 02 Gda AA DO Tes Analysis v TI BAM 2 tlt OOM 20H 8 8 70H Statistic Values in Maximum absolute value 155 a a ald a a 0 3 14 4 8 9 10 11 12 43 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 23 24 25 28 27 28 29 W 31 22 3 8 9 44 0 Cycle In some modes the character repetition cycle may be manually selected Error Indication
48. Connect button The selection will now appear in the Se rial Link main screen All settings are automatically saved Serial Link will automatically use these settings the next time it is started Status Information Serial Link displays status information for each card Status messages could be one of the following Comp Status Explanation Connecting The Serial Link application client is being connected to the selected computer server Connected The Serial Link application client is connected to the selected computer serv er The Serial Link application is being disconnected The Serial Link application is disconnected WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Additional Functions e 303 Card Status Initialize Running Error Error loader Card in use No card Timeout Err dev driver Err drv conflict Port Status Initialize Idle Traffic Error Timeout No port Overflow Explanation The card is being initialized Each card needs to be initialized when a connection is made to that card for the first time The card is ready and active A general error occurred and the card is in an error state The software could not be downloaded to the card Another application is accessing the card A card is not connected at that address A time out error occurred A device driver error occurred The device driver is not correctly set up Explanation The COM port is being initialized The C
49. E E E E E T 43 A E a a ne 43 Polilla osa 43 OMS ai AS 43 INDIE sra iaa 44 A INS 45 Favorites Menta A a eee eeaanees 45 OPEN Sr len eos 46 SAVE A a ias 46 Configuration Meninas 46 WCODEDEVICO aria ta ds 47 A x bares Sonata as hea waneenae can Sharan conan ois boda wa ua ee aa nan a boca teeanees 48 TEME ICS aroraa aa anteater Diocesan Dia teat sean awe meaner aniaaue ia 48 SENOS vee scien cece o cons 49 Receiver and Satellite Settings o ooocccccccccccncccncccncccnonnnnnnannnnnanannnnnnos 49 A O 50 CUSTOM INDUL Sarai raro dd a 51 CUSTOM Al DMA GUSH gt ets 55 SR Fme TURNO aora ra aos 56 SR CallbratiON ia ad 56 Vew Menno aae TE ease eae vane na nauk es N 58 WVIMGOW MCN Ute ismael daban 58 Help MENU weet succie eve ooo 58 CO e aN Sainte 59 WAVECOM On the WebDiiocicoscconconasconc rr da 59 ADOUE VV CO DE Ad Rea aS 59 Other GULES Men ES nn R s 59 TODA da A A loba 59 WAVECOM TOD aras 59 Leve indicator nidad ida 60 Spectrum INC COP A E E A EE 60 Decoder Status Dardo 60 Demodulator Status Bar merenie EE A AEN AA O 61 SAT Frequency TUNING Ba sass ccacwersetk E E E 61 FF Sonagram Context Men s orris ea 63 MOde S elector iaa 65 Passpana Filter SUPP OFT rasne aE a A E Seeaauan a eaaues aA 69 Analysis Tools 71 FU aah a AEA TE A A A A 71 PR CHE SUB DIR and SAT as 72 TUNING FFT OF SONAGlalM escri rondar cert 72 PET and Sonda Ma od 73 WALT sar A is td NAS A a 73 Waterfall HF SUB DIR and SAT cnt tato 74 SOMAG a
50. File Header described in chapter File Header on page 309 The Phase value the AspectRatio could be stored in old WAVECOM Data Files for the actual Software it is not stored anymore and the Flip Left Right Top Bottom value are stored additionally to the default head er The following additional data is stored in the Header following the default header FileHeader Phase Pad AspectRatio FlipHV Pad 64 Bytes 4 Bytes 4 Bytes 8 Bytes 4 Bytes 4 Bytes Phase Value for moving the image horizontal Pad padding bits for alignment not used AspectRatio obsolete no longer used in the actual software FlipHV O FlipLeftRight amp FlipTopBottom disabled 1 FlipLeftRight 2 FlipTopBottom 3 FlipLeftRight amp FlipTopBottom Y VV WV gt Pad padding bytes for alignment not used To the default file header with 64 bytes additional a block of 24 bytes is added that contains the Phase the AspectRatio the FlipHV and some padding bytes for alignment The Phase value occupies 4 Bytes followed by 4 padding bytes The Aspect Ration occupies 8 bytes The FlipHV Flip horizontal vertical value occupies 4 bytes followed by 4 padding bytes NOTE the following struct type could be used to extract the data header WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 WAVECOM Data Formats e 313 struct GraphicsData Long Phase double AspectRatio int FlipHV Data This FileType us
51. GlobalXpress VSAT service offering user bandwidths up to 50 Mbps Inmarsat started operations in 1982 with leased satellite capacity for the INMARSAT A system The table below shows the evolution of the various Inmarsat systems YF G y DEE Rate fax data Services Offered Introduction Analogue voice G3 fax telex data Discontinued 1982 Aero H Digital voice fax data 1990 Digital voice G3 Fax data telex To be discontinued 1994 2015 Store and forward messaging 1992 Digital voice G3 4 fax data 1993 mini M Digital voice G3 fax data To be discontinued 2012 1996 System 3 kHz 9 6 kbps 50 Bd 56 kbps 10 5 kbps 9 6 kbps 600 bps 2 4 kbps 2 4 kbps Forward paging 1996 Paging with return channel 1997 Emergency position indicating radio beacon EPIRB Dis 1997 continued 20 bps 20 bps 600 bps mini M Digital voice G3 4 fax data 1997 Aero I Digital voice fax data 1998 M4 GAN Digital voice G3 4 fax data packet data 2000 2 4 kbps 10 5 kbps 64 kbps R BGAN 2003 BGAN 2006 nero c swited For the maritime mobile service based on M4 approved for GMDSS operates in global beams 4 dB k antenna options 2 4 kbps G3 fax 9 6 kbps G3 fax 9 6 kbps async data 144 kbps 464 kbps U lt IO gt 1 N N F55 For the maritime mobile service same as F77 but not approved for GMDSS operates in spot beams 7 dB k antenna except global 4 8 kbps voice
52. Input Select the Configuration Custom Inputs menu entry to open the configuration dialog for the custom inputs To use a WAV File as signal input source the following parameters have to be set via the Custom Inputs dialog coon bots E STANASG 4285 Parameter PXGF1 Value Input Name STANAG4285 Device File File Path mel_Secure_222222nach111111_c wavk Channel Left Type PCM Play Continuous Off File Input Parameter VENTE Input Name The name of the custom input File Path The path to the specific WAV file has to be specified Channel In the list box the channel s to be used are displayed Left Right Left Right For mono files only Left is displayed If IQ is selected only Left Right can be selected If PCM is selected all three channel configurations are available If you start by entering the filename then the file is analyzed and the correct settings are automatically selected Type PCM or IQ A law mu law or other codecs are not supported 16 bit sampling rate up to 192 kHz min 8 kHz recommended Play Continuous Indicates if the files are played in repeat mode Select On to switch on the repeat mode or Off to switch off the repeat mode The file can be selected from any available directory on the LAN The specified WAV file is copied to the Data Input directory on the computer hosting the decoder and stored under the name lt SerialNumberOfW xx Card gt _ lt InputName gt wav
53. Niedersachsen e Retamar Ja _Nordrhein Westfalen a WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 159 FMS BOS Settings Polizei Polizei Feuerwehr Feuerwehr Feuerwehr r FMS BOS Settings Arbeiter Samari Deutsches Aot Johanniter Unf Malteser Hilfsdi Sonstige Rettu Arbeiter Samari Deutsches Rot Johanniter Unf Malteser Hilfsdi Sonstige Rettu Baden Wurttemberg Baden Wiurttemberg Baden Wiurttemberg Baden Wurttemberg Baden Wurttemberg Baden Wurttemberg Baden Wirttemberg Baden Wurttemberg Baden Wurttemberg Baden Wurttemberg Baden Wurttemberg Baden Wiurttemberg Baden Wurttemberg Baden Wurttemberg Baden Wiurttemberg Baden Wurttemberg Baden Wiirttemberg PP Stuttgart PP Karsruhe PP Mannheim PD Freiburg LFS Bruchsal LFS Bruchsal LFS Bruchsal LFS Bruchsal LFS Bruchsal LFS Bruchsal Funkstelle Lerchenbe Funkstelle Lerchenbe Funkstelle Lerchenbe Funkstelle Lerchenbe Funkstelle Lerchenbe Funkstelle Lerchenbe RP Stuttgart a Cancel Apply Baden Wurttemberg FP Stuttgart X m Arbeiter Samari LK Baden Wiirttemberg v Add Station Name Edit Polizei v OK Hex E To apply or manipulate the various FMS BOS stations select Options FM BOS Settings A table of FMS BOS users is stored in config FmsbosSettings xml GMDSS DSC HF GMDSS Global Maritime Distress and Safety System is a world
54. Operation modes Downlink to Subscriber Communicator Modulation SDPSK The ORBCOMM System consists of a Network Control Center NCC that manages the overall system worldwide and three operational segments gt aspace segment consisting of 36 LEO Satellites gt a ground segment consisting of Gateway Earth Stations GES and control centers located throughout the world gt a subscriber segment consisting of communicators used by ORBCOMM System subscribers to transmit and receive information to and from the LEO Satellites RF communication within the ORBCOMM System operates in the very high frequency VHF portion of the frequency spectrum between 137 and 150 MHz The ORBCOMM Satellites have a subscriber transmitter 194 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 that provides a continuous 4800 bps stream of packet data Each Satellite also has multiple subscriber re ceivers that receive short bursts from the SCs at 2400 bps The ORBCOMM System will be capable of providing near real time wireless data communications service around the world All communications within the ORBCOMM System must pass through an ORBCOMM Gateway An ORBCOMM Gateway consists of one Gateway Control Center GCC the facility that houses the computer hardware and software that manages and monitors message traffic and a GES The GES provides the link between the Satellite constellation and an ORBCOMM GCC Using the ORBCOMM
55. PSK Symbol Rate HF DIR SUB and SAT on page 83 start the PSK phase plane analysis tool The display can be started and stopped by clicking on it If stopped a Paused message is displayed You can use an existing demodulator BPSK QPSK or DPSK or IQ to decode the signal and produce a phase plane display of the output of the demodulator For BPSK and QPSK this provides a check of the quality of the signal When using DPSK this provides an indication of the level of phase modulation which is being used i e 2 PSK to 16 PSK As the symbol rate is equal to the baud rate of the signal the baud rate must be known to configure the demodulator a KA WAVECOM W CODE W CODE PSK Phase Plane Card 1 o0 x File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help PSK Phase Plane HF Symbol Rate 2400 00 Hold Time 0 10 s Traffic 16 33 51 De Mode Analysis y CL eee Sr ma 2 fee 1500 Hz T 1500 Hz o Ge 2 W CODE PSK Phase Plane Card 1 po Demodulator DPSK PB Bandwidth 3600 Hz Center 1800 Hz Offset 0 Hz Input AF LEFT 84 e Analysis Tools WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Center The Center allows the center frequency for the demodulator to be adjusted A center frequency error nor mally results in a phase plane that is rotating with a speed proportional to the frequency error Hold Time The H
56. Save As Save As GA CODE I Ji Computer OS C Transfer y 49 Organize v New folder Xx Favorites ME Desktop W CODE V7 0 0 J Downloads Read Update E Recent Places 12 11 2010 MZ Desktop Libraries B Rolf Haenggi jM Computer L os Ca BAUDOT2 wfv Filename HUYE Save as type WAVECOM Favorite Files wfv z Hide Folders Select Save to save the settings Configuration Menu W CODE Device Font Temp Files Settings Receiver and Satellite Settings License Custom Inputs Custom Alphabets SR Fine Tuning SR Calibration In the Configuration menu all general setup functions are available 46 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 W CODE Device The first time the decoder application is started with the decoder card installed the location of the decoder devices must be set Host address or name Speed limit Baud YY 127 0 0 1 Disconnect Server Devices No device Name Connections Device Serial number soundcard 1 Line In Realtek High Definitio V1 1 1927840122 G39ddc Line 1 WiNRADIO Virtual Sound V1 1 1927840222 Devicec W CLOUD G33DDC Wavecom V2 0 0343973651 W CLOUD Networking Index Remote host Port Auto connect Encryption Sound Status 1 weloud73651 y Y O e In the example above the W CODE software is looking for devices in a local compu
57. Shift 300 Hz RES 0 9 900ys 101 010Bd my m iiao ae ee Ad 300 Hz 1608 1758 1908 I i 1 I I I 1 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3250 3500 3750 Center 1758 Hz Offset 0 Hz Input AF LEFT 4000 Hz Additionally several Color schemes are available through the right click menu Bit Length Analysis Bit length analysis serves to determine baud rate distributions tone duration or bit length distributions The resolution offered by the sampler option is 14 us 72 000 samples per second After the demodulator has been correctly set up either manually or by using the auto function sampling is initiated by pressing the Start button To stop sampling the Stop button is pressed Captured data may then be further ana lyzed A screen with two graphs is displayed The following example shows a typical bit length display screen WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Analysis Tools e 93 2 WAVECOM W CODE W CODE Bitlength Card 1 l X CODE z File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite FAX amp Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help Bit Length Analysis HF Traffic Filter 10 00 ms 22 25 26 Dw SSS m Mode Analysis gt HB D2 OMA 2 FS RIM mm on A 180 Hz W CODE Bitlength Card 1 1000 ms iS i E A 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3250 3500 3750 4000 B
58. Switzerland The buyer declares that for any legal claim against WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG he waivers his legal domicile and hereby accepts the legal domicile of Buelach This contract is based on Swiss law 330 e Appendix WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Warranty Despite careful testing of our equipment component or functional failures may occur WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG grants you a warranty for a period of 24 months from date of delivery Defective compo nents will be replaced or repaired free of charge No liability is taken for any other claims which may arise due to consequential damage arising from the use of this product Damage resulting from non authorized modifications to this equipment by third parties is hereby disclaimed Shipping costs for equipment returned to WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG will be paid by the customer In case of repairs within the warranty period WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG will carry the costs of return shipping to the customer Obligation The products of WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG are sold on the basis of technical specifications valid at the time of sale WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG has no obligations to update or modify equipment already sold Copyright The software of all versions of WAVECOM decoders is the intellectual property of WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG and protected by international copyright law Any copying of the software is prohibited without the ex press and prior consent in writing of WAVECOM ELEKT
59. The subscriber loop uses a balanced two wire pair for both transmission and reception In the telephone set and in the exchange line card a special device called a hybrid sepa rates the two signal directions Leased subscriber lines can be ordered as four wire lines having a dedicat ed pair for each signal direction WARNING DO NOT CONNECT ANY OF THE DECODER OR PC SOUND CARD INPUTS DIRECTLY TO A TELEPHONE LINE Doing so is illegal and will seriously damage your PC Use a suitable line adapter or a recorded signal E1 and T1 digital trunks Early telephone networks were entirely analogue networks end to end and carrying only one call per line However by mid 20th century the backbone trunks had gradually been converted to Frequency Division Multiplexed and later to Pulse Coded Modulated PCM digital Time Division Multiplexed coaxial cable carri er frequency lines or microwave radio links and more recently to optical Wavelength Division Multiplexed lines A simultaneous development naturally took place for the exchanges which developed from electro mechanical devices to analogue electronic switches and then on to fully digital operation In spite of the progress of IP based telephony the overwhelming majority of telephone trunks are still to day PCM based digital channels organized into hierarchies These hierarchies fall into two major groups the European or CEPT hierarchy and the North American hierarchy The standard CEPT El link consists
60. Translation the Offset value LowFreqLimit the lower frequency limit value HighFreqLimit the higher frequency limit value LowMagLimit the lower magnitude limit value HighMagLimit the higher magnitude limit value VideoFilterOn the VideoFilter On Off flag V Y VV VV Y Y V vv 314 e WAVECOM Data Formats WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 To the default file header with 64 bytes additional a block of 48 bytes is added The additional block contains display parameter used by the WAVECOM GUI for displaying the stored data correctly NOTE the following struct type could be used to extract the data header struct sonagrambData long 1DocSizexX Long 1DocSize double dCursorA double dCursorB long 1Bandwidth long lITranslation long lLowFrequencyLimit long lHighFrequencyLimit short sLowMagnitudeLimit short sHighMagnitudeLimit BOOL boVideoF1lterOn Data This FileType uses the data structure described in chapter Data Structures on page 310 to store the da ta The stored sonagram data has the following structure DataHeader Data FFTSamples Time 4096 Bytes 16 Bytes gt FFT Samples the first 4096 bytes of the stored data contain the 2048 sample values for the FFT gt Time the last 16 bite of the stored data contains the system time timestamp value of the received data the additional timestamp is necessary because the default timestamp in the data head
61. W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 The next picture shows a transmission which can be either a ZVEI message or a VDEW message without follow up telegram WAVECOM W61PC W61PC Text Card 1 File HF Modes VHF UHF Modes Demodulator Options Favorites Setup View Win Baudrate 1200 00 ZVEI VDEW pelmele prete ala 21X l l El amall mmm 360H2 1 M 30Hz W61PC Text Card 1 BAK 2 STAT O RAUTE 1 Herst 23 Ruf 456 lt EOM gt The user has to decide from the context which transmission standard was used In case of a VDEW trans mission without follow up telegram the rhombic labeling and the manufacturer identification have to be interpreted as EVU WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 249 Classifier Optional Overview The current version of the decoder can accommodate two versions of the optional classifier gt A wideband up to 96 kHz version available as Classifier WB if you press the button in the WAVECOM Toolbar or select it in one of the analysis menus or selectors gt A narrowband up to 4 8 kHz version available as Classifier NB if you press the button in the WAVECOM Toolbar or select it in one of the analysis menus or selectors The classifier version in use is indicated in the left hand side of the upper status line Classifier WB HF Continuous Mode Classifier NB HF Manual Mode Classifier The classifier is an important analysis tool
62. W CODE e Denied W CLOUD device is reachable but this W CODE can not connect to it because this W CODE does not have the access right As W CLOUD is a networking device it should be accessable to different W CODE decoder instances Con sidering this W CLOUD will terminate the connection to a W CODE when W CODE does not use this W CLOUD actively for ca 7 minutes i e no mode is running After the 7 minutes time out W CLOUD device is free for any new connection requests The previous W CODE can do decoding as usual by opening a mode The connection to the W CLOUD device will be established automatically if the W CLOUD device is not busy by another W CODE instance It may be that the re established connection does not work properly the user just need to open a mode and change the device input to wake up the connection W CODE Licensing By default W CODE is licensed using a USB CmStick An update option for a period of 12 24 36 48 60 months is available Optional additions to the basic W CODE application are available from WAVECOM On request different licensing models are available gt Single user licenses gt Network licenses with floating licenses sharing of W CODE and options between different comput ers gt Licenses for other WAVECOM software products and third party products may also be stored on the CmStick Software Updates Software released during the update period can be installed at any time New li
63. W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Status Window WAVECOM W CODE Classifier Code Check VHF UHF Card 1 MEJES File HF Modes YHF UHE DIR WHF UHF SUB Satellite Fax Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help Classifier Code Check P3 _ ji _ Code Check finished _INOR Auto i 16 28 58 as AAA gt IR _ iaa JE Mode Analysis ely gt ee gt 2 Slama 2 wel Coed 0Hz E 0Hz Classifier Code Check YHFZUHF Card 1 CCC Settings Classifier Settings Code Check Settings 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000 20000 Hz l l 18000 20000 Hz Signal 1 5947 6Hz 738 5Hz 133 8Bd 872 3Hz Signal 2 1626 7Hz 8122 8Hz 1208 2Bd 330 9Hz Signal 1 Table Detected DCS SELCAL Codecheck Detected DCS SELCAL Signal 2 Table Detected ATIS BIIS DSC VHF FMS BOS MOBITEX 1200 MPT 1327 NMT 450 PACKET 1200 ZVEI VDEW POCSAG Codecheck Detected POCSAG Classifier start Classifier finished Code check started checking signal no Mode detected for signal no 1 Code check started checking signal no Mode detected for signal no 2 Code Check finished Classifier code check in idle mode Demodulator IQ Bandwidth 24000 Hz Offset 8000 Hz Input AF LEFT The status window the bottom window in the above figure displays status messages for each step of the process selected in Classifier Code Check Sequences on page 258 The status messages should be self e
64. WV TONoScrVect Bad scrambling vector TooManyBadCRCs Excessive number of failed checksum calculations gt UserCanc User cancellation A file in the Session List Window can be deleted by right clicking on it and following the delete dialog For the modes SAT B SAT M and SAT B C TFC it is possible to listen to live voice output during TEL ses sions El With the speaker button in the tool bar the user can mute the output WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 SAT System e 279 Traffic Channel Decoder If monitoring the forward direction in SAT B SAT M or SAT mM it is necessary to extract information from the control channel NCSC in order to achieve for proper decoding The following stand alone traffic channel decoders are available e SAT B C TFC e SAT B L TFC The SAT B C TFC mode can be started via the GUI whereas the SAT B L TFC can only be started via the XML RCI For proper decoding the SAT B L TFC decoder requires the MES ID and service type TEL FAX DATA from the control channel The user may start traffic channel decoding by setting these two parameters in addition to the offset frequency The following picture shows the XML parameter set for the SAT B L TFC mode Message version 1 0 gt nformation gt ParameterList gt Parameter name code yalue sal b l the gt Parameter name ormard mes d value 123456 Parameter name ervice hpe value tel Parameter na
65. added incl new Modem Settings and Modem Input File options OSI Level removed MIL STD tuning changed OLIVIA changed PACTOR II AFC 50 Hz additional frame type detection HEX Binary output Sonagram added to FFT tuning window FFT and Sonagram tuning parameter moved from options to the new context menu Pause Graphic option for the sonagram tuning view Passband display shows additional tuning information shift mark space frequency in a tooltip box if the mouse is move over the cursors Number of Custom Alphabets and Custom Inputs limited to 16 Message Type dialog box New parameter for Parity MARK and SPACE Message Type dialog box Display format ITA5 and ASCII merged to ITA5 WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Version Date 15 Nov 2009 6 8 1 17 Mar 2010 WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Changes ASCII WAVECOM Data File Format additional information added Added List of checked modes with FSK Code Check Name of ROBUST PACKET RADIO changed to ROBUST PACKET Changed license manager New protocols VDL M2 added NMT 450 Center in the documentation changed to 1500 Hz BIIS 1200 renamed to BIIS CODAN 9001 LSR initialization changed from binary to hex CLOVER 2 and CLOVER 2000 CRC Recognition added Binary Output of PACTOR I and PACTOR II enhanced MIL 39T enhanced CIS 36 50
66. an allocation is received In case of encrypted traffic packets the payload data is saved together with the number of the slot frame multi frame and hyper frame being decoded which constitute the Initial Value IV for the encryption algorithm Saved data and meta information may be fed to an external decryption process A sample of the text file contain ing encrypted voice and meta data is shown below TMO Main Freq 393 912 MHz 383 912 MHz MCC 000 MNC 0000 LA 15972 Security elass 3 and class 1 CN 3756 CC 2 Encrypted Channel Allocation Dest 568463 Slot 1 Frame 11 Enc Mode 2 11011101000101010000000000101100110011101110010000100000111111101111100101100000 00001000000100001000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 2 8 40 5337 slot frame multi frame hyper frame 10000101011111001100111010000101100011111011010010110000011000011111001100010000 00011001010010000110100001110010101010111010110110100101011001000010111110101101 10000111110011000111011100000001000011101100011010000111000011111100000001010100 001101010100 Constraints WAVECOM s implementation of TETRA is based on TETRA release 1 and will decode all TMO and DMO voice and data traffic in real time albeit with certain constraints referring to the TETRA reference protocol stack and the appropriate ETSI standards Constraints gt Multiple Slot Transmission mode MST is
67. applied in situations where retransmissions are impossible traffic lists broadcasts FFSK Fast Frequency Shift Keying FFT Fast Fourier Transform File type The categories of files specified by file extensions APP DBF PRG CDX FRX and so on WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Glossary of Terms e 335 GFSK Gaussian Frequency Shift Keying GUI Graphical User Interface HDX Half duplex Hot key An underlined letter in a menu or dialogue that you can type to immediately choose an item IF IN 10 7 The IF IN 10 7 input has a range of 10 685 10 715 MHz or 21 385 21 415 MHz This IF is common for VHF UHF receivers IF IN 21 4 The IF IN 21 4 input has a range of 21 385 21 415 MHz This IF is common for VHF UHF receivers IF IN VAR The IF IN VAR has a range of 14 kHz 1 5 MHz Most receiver s IF is in this range IMBE Improved Multi Band Excitation speech coding Insert mode The default text editing mode in which any character you type is inserted at the cursor position and the text to the right of the cursor is shifted to the right IOR Indian Ocean Region IQ In phase Quadrature Used to denote the complex format on which the RF data is processed and stored The IQ demodulation is also sometimes named Base band demodulation quadrature demodulation or complex demodulation etc Keyboard shortcuts The keystroke combinations that you can use to choose menu op
68. based on Fast Fourier Analysis FFT oper ating in real time with a 4096 point resolution The signal is digitized saved and its frequency spectrum calculated and displayed The measurement is started by selecting a bandwidth The display of the frequency spectrum has a linear scale and covers a dynamic range of 60 dB The internal dynamic range is considerably higher due to the 16 bit A D converter used but the configured display resolution performs better in practical use The frame refresh rate averages 10 to 20 pictures per second allowing even fast signal changes to be dis played The frame refresh rate is however dependent on the speed of the PC and its video card WAVECOM W CODE FFT Card 4 D aanname File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Fax amp Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help FFT HF Window Hannin Peak Hold Off Period 50 ms Auto Avg 1 g DE Mode Analysis a Qa he FFT Card 4 W CLOUD l 1 l l 1 l 1 1 1 l 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3250 3500 3750 4000 Hz Demodulator FFT Bandwidth 4000 Hz Center 1951 Hz Input AF LEFT To start the FFT click on the FFT button or use Analysis Real time FFT from one of the menus To activate the measurement cursors click inside the FFT graphics window The left and right cursors may be moved around using the mouse The cursor positions are displayed as absolute freque
69. be closed and reopened at any time Any playback or re cording operation that is in progress when the dialog is closed will continue uninterrupted in the background 24 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Signal Routing Media Player Recording 3 Output Output Device Windows Audio System Input WAVECOM Media Player Disk 2 DA Y Recorder File Recording Mute Windows Audio System Decoder Gain Input Windows Audio System W CODE Signal Routing Media Player Playback a J Output Output Device Windows Audio System Disk WAVECOM Media Player Recorded Files Recorder Decoder Gain W CODE Main Control Buttons The Media Player Recorder is controlled primarily using the main control buttons Record E3 T Pause m Press the Record button to start recording and the Stop button to stop recording Press the Play button to start playback and the Stop button to stop playback Playback and recording can be paused and re sumed at any time by pressing the Pause button When the Loop button is toggled on playback will au tomatically restart from the beginning when the end of the file is reached If the Loop button is not pressed playback will stop at the end of the recording WAV File Before starting a playb
70. be within 1 1 5 of the nominal value If a DTMF call is received the call sign is displayed on the monitor In the Options menu a Time stamp function can be enabled to add date and time to each call Tone Allocation Digit Hz Digit Hz oases oo 697 1209 IE 697 1336 697 1633 WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 147 Digit Hz E TE 697 1477 s 701638 770 1209 C 852 1633 770 1477 941 1209 852 1209 941 1477 770 1336 941 1633 Tone duration 70 ms DUP ARQ DUP ARQ is a semi duplex system The radio channel is used by a DUP ARQ system in the same way as a simplex system both stations alternating in transmitting blocks of five characters and a Hamming check sum If a transmission error occurs a repeat request is initiated and the last data block is re transmitted Parameter Operation modes Semi duplex ARQ Additional Info DUP ARQ operates at a Symbol rate of 125 Bd on the radio link If only one station is sending data the other station transmits an IDLE pattern and initiates RQ cycles in case of transmission errors DUP ARQ has automatic channel selection facilities Before transmission starts the best available short wave transmission channel is selected and its quality is continuously checked for the duration of the transmission Within a given frequency range the system may select one of 5 possible channels which are spaced at 400 Hz intervals Because of this ch
71. codec ISDN bear er services are optional and has no optional 2 4 kbps G3 fax F33 For the maritime mobile service 12 5 db k antenna global 4 8 kbps voice codec optional spot beam 9 6 kbps G3 fax async data MPDS 276 e SAT System WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 System Services Offered Introduction Max User Data Rate fax data mini C For the land mobile service as C not approved for GMDSS compact all in one unit housed in the antenna FleetBroadband Maritime version of BGAN lt A SwiftBroadBand Aeronautical version of BGAN Fleetphone Maritime regional satelite phone _Landeone Regional satelite phone same as Fleetphone RF Channels Direction Frequency L Band Frequency Range C Band Frequency Range Logical Channels The logical channels are described in the table below Name Type Function Direction NCS Common Network Bulletin Board status infor Forward to MES mation NCS Assignment Channel assignment Forward to MES NCS Spot beam Identification Spot beam identification for MES Forward to MES NCS Inter station NCS LES signaling and assignment Forward to LES NCS Registration Acknowledge Registration acknowledgement Forward to MES ment LES Assignment Stand alone or NCS backup assignment Forward to MES LES Inter station LES NCS signaling Return to NCS MES Request Access request channel Return to LES NCS MES Response Signaling response chan
72. data is considered to be unprocessed user data and channel encoded user data Independent of the payload data field the sequence number field has its own error detecting and correct ing code Payload data in each channel packet is protected by a cyclic redundancy code CRC This fea ture is included in order to allow the ARQ protocol to request retransmission of packets received in error A session consists of one or more multi frames Depending on the amount of data queued for transfer the length of a multi frame may vary The receiving modem will extract the frames from the multi frame de termining the number of channel packets and checking whether payload data was received without errors If a channel packet was received in error a re transmission is requested It should be clear from this that a multi frame may consist of a mixture of new data and re transmitted data Re transmitted data may ap pear on any channel and in any position within a multi frame Additionally the transmitting modem may opt to send ALE like parity bit packets in a separate frame and even on another channel within the same multi frame as the payload data packet to which it belongs This is indicated by the two packets belonging together carrying the same sequence number This mechanism is predominantly seen when the link quali ty deteriorates and consequently the number of re transmissions increases In the Broadcast and Group modes multi frames with new dat
73. dear ucichateuhast 213 SRO O O A E 214 A ho teenage 214 A A AA 215 SAT C TDM SAT C TDMA GAT CE GC rociado hallas 216 a A A 217 SAT CATIDMA soriana 218 A A A 218 A E A Poona ata ctcaeat ne tas alee 220 A O A date eune Laka 221 SUR ache fastens sensei O O tA ues 221 A snaked tech cicadas wh ca EA ana sat Aas cache EN semana 222 SU ee erases cates a eet T cacao A ete 222 STAG Or Ooa A 223 ORAU sara sn sens asenensaianacciatsateatol O A N 223 NDE snstecetsee ce O E uate ance eos ania nanan ae 223 A A E A 224 SPREAD 11 SPREAD 21 and SPREAD B1 00ooooocnnnnnnnnononnnnnncnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 225 A A cua ieoseste 226 ST ANAC A OS va c a hata siscctndacua A 228 E naaa A ached Mavens A 230 STANAG AAO EE rr adi ahaha ica asus 231 O E hid aataline aah a eieen esis 231 A tic det Renae A E E 233 W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Contents e vii STANA GH4 55 Jaraa a a rancia 235 STANAG SO0G65 FSK miira r ea a a a e OE 235 SWEDSARO surcos E aA AAA E Si AAN Ue ASA 235 TE TRA add rales 236 CONSAN O 239 TWIN SE a EAEE E DEE A aii ases 239 VDEW nadaa dadas 241 A EETA TA A E E E A E A E AE AEA sanamuaneee 241 VISE a NN E N EEEN 242 A l ae a ge E E E EED E EAE E E E E EEE 243 A A 243 ZVEM O pad Hae a eae alae 245 DENS Va A e a 245 FAA a E A A A Gaisteainnue 246 IET DE E E E E E e do e e o E E 247 Classifier Optional 250 OVERVICW o thchtatdecdsatoutidatandeoamataecanbaidecaatmatite tanienasateinies los icacoad tdt 25
74. details regarding Custom Inputs see on page 51 For a soundcard device following inputs are available z Signal Input JAF LEFT AF RIGHT Cancel AF LEFT RIGHT Cancel IQ LEFT amp RIGHT STANAG4285 PXGF1 gt AF xxx These inputs are used when you work with the sound card The frequency range depends on the sound card specification You can also apply IF to this input as long as your signal is within the supported bandwidth of the selected sound card input gt IQ is used for analogue IQ signals with the I and Q channels sent to the left and right channel of the soundcard respectively gt STANAG4285 is an example of Custom Input in wav format gt PXGF1 is an example of Custom Input with PxGF format 44 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 For details regarding Custom Inputs see on page 51 Gain When you choose a WAVECOM hardware W PCI or W PCle as device and connect a signal to an input for the first time you should use the Automatic Level Setting to adjust the hardware to the input signal level ALS Status ALS off Y O 20 40 60 0 100 ALS Automatic Level Setting Autoset ALS for W PCI and W PCle device Click the Autoset button after the adjustment is finished you can adjust the signal level by moving the level slider The gain parameters are saved in the system i e it is not necessary
75. device between antenna and receiv er HF cabling All HF cable plant inside the building must use shielded HF cables Grounding The best grounding is provided by the cold water mains Hot water or heating pipes are not necessarily grounded Good quality effective grounding of the receiving equipment is highly recommended also for your personal safety Location of decoder Despite multi layer metallic shielding of the receiver the PC may still radiate into the receiver if placed in close proximity This problem may be solved by moving the PC or the receiver or both PCs and peripherals PCs printers keyboards etc can all be sources of heavy interference and noise if placed close to a receiv er or an antenna If possible ground the equipment and place ferrite loads on the cabling connecting the equipment Video monitor If at all possible use a monitor which conforms to the latest Swedish MPR II radiation standards or even better to the TCO 92 standards The improvement in noise reduction offered by such equipment is signifi cant and interference originating from these monitors can be expected to be negligible LAN Computer networks using coaxial cabling with BNC plugs produce very high noise radiation To combat this noise install your antenna at least 5 m away from the building Conditions of Sale General These general conditions of sales are binding if no other conditions have been declared as applicable in the qu
76. different infor mation The type of a chunk is specified by an int32 field in the chunk as shown in table 3 1 An applica tion that requires data from a particular chunk will register to receive data from that type of chunk Chunks that are not recognized are simply skipped over The size field in the chunk allows unrecognized chunks to be skipped over Each chunk starts with the sync number Oxa1b2c3d4 WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 WAVECOM Data Formats e 305 Element Type Description Synchronization number Oxa1b2c3d4 Derived from the chunk name e g SOFH EOFH SSIQ The number of data bytes in the remainder of the chunk The value of size must be a mul tiple of 4 byte size The chunk data in a format specific to the type gt The maximum amount of data in a chunk is limited to 65536 bytes This limits the separation be tween sync patterns gt The length of each chunk must contain an integral number of 32 bit words even though the size element in the chunk header is specified as a number of bytes gt The PXGF format supports both little and big endian byte ordering although it may be necessary to provide the stream reader with the endian used depending on its implementation The endian format for a file or stream may be determined by reading the sync pattern It is not permissible to mix chunks of different endian format within a stream or file gt When the PXGF format is used to store
77. ees E A a E Samaras AE 74 Sonagram HF SUB DIR and SA Dinar a a a 75 OSOS COPE ona 75 PSK Alla SIS seta ar fetta ve ede ceuteeds OE pode venas ieee peas ences 76 FSK Analysis OPLONS anta a 78 FOK COAC NECK ranae ata 79 FSK Cod CHECK HE iia 79 FSK COde Cheek DIR A OANA A 80 FSK Code Check SUB arar aa 82 WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 PSK Symbol Rate HF DIR SUB and SAT cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees PSK Phase Plane HF DIR SUB and SAT ceeeeeesseeeeeeeeess PSK Code Check HF DIR and SUB a eu erecteeret ii MIL STANAGS Code Cnel at MESS AMV Saa MESK Codey Check HE adn AUtOcCO relacionan OA BECOME ON odia BIC EENGUTARGAIVSS na SEECAL ANN Si deeaceaiie ta uated canta akan anne Fundamentals of Radio Data Transmission WAVECOM Decoder Telegraph Speed Bit Rate Baud Rate and Symbol Rate F rmatting and Source Coding rado ENCYDUION meea a a alias da a T a Channel Coding sita anida ECU GIZA Rascal cock ta aa cited sis ors ba ae deca is SYMCNFOMIZACOMisavagividetatiadevadesidesiandaaeciennries cr sas Multiplexing and Multiple ACCESS ccceeesesessceccecccccccssseceeess MOGUIATIOM pret raens Tea A teres ea ASK Amplitude Shift Keying cccceeeee cece ee eeeeeeeee FSK Frequency Shift Keying cccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees PSK Phase Shift Keying cccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes M ary FSK MFSK M ary PSK MPSK 00ceeeeeeeeees O
78. excessive This results in the re transmission of the last 3 or 7 characters preceded by the RQ request control character According to the CCITT recommendation the repetition cycle may span 4 or 8 characters as is the case with ARQ E The longer RQ cycle of 8 characters has never been monitored In addition to the time multiplexing of several channels division channels each division channel may be further subdivided into sub channels resulting in a multitude of possible modes of operation At present however no transmissions with sub channel division are known Systems employing sub channel division may be recognized by a rhythmic blinking of the Error indication system state in the decoder status bar ARQ M4 342 and ARQ M4 242 These operating modes also known as TDM or ARQ 56 conforming to the CCIR recommendations 342 2 and 242 Four 50 Bd Baudot channels are interleaved to form a time multiplexed aggregate bit stream Multiplex frames of 56 bits are used Parameter Value Frequency range HF ARQ M4 342 and ARQ M4 242 systems operate at a Symbol rate of 172 or 192 Baud on the radio link The ITA 3 7 bit alphabet is used allowing error detection The ITA 3 alphabet is a balanced code in which each character has a 3 to 4 ratio between mark and space bits balanced code ARQ M4 342 and ARQ M4 242 are full duplex systems 116 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Full duplex systems send a
79. field If the baud rate deviates by more than 0 5 Baud a bit slip may occur and therefore the autocorrelation must be restarted with the exact baud rate a 21 WANECOM W CODE W CODE Autocorrelation Card 1 E A File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite FAX 8l Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help Autocorrelation HF Baudrate 180 00 Traffic 22 07 39 Dw Mode Analysis ao Osma 2 Pe Re O MO gohe l 10Hz 8 Bits t 188 192 196 fy fl pj h 1400 HH HH HA o A a a a E i 1 12 CON A 1 14 A 4 00 0 400 0 4 4 A A lt gt 4 a Af md 131 f 180 200 y i Bits p 1608 1758 1908 3600 Hz l I 1 I 1 I I I 1 1 1 I l l 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3250 3500 3750 4000 Hz Demodulator DSP Shift 300 Hz Center 1758 Hz Input AF LEFT OOOO AA a A gt gt gt To start the sampling process press the Start button The number of sampled bits is continuously dis played Autocorrelation can currently process up to 200 000 bits By pressing the Correlate button the actual computation of the autocorrelation is started Results are displayed graphically If a large number of bits have been sampled and the graph indicates a low periodici ty the computation may be stopped by pressing the Stop button Periodicity is indicated by distinct peaks in the graphic displa
80. filters and the amplitude is then calculated The mark space demodulator exhibits an ex tremely good noise distance and should be used for all FSK modes utilizing a speed of less than 300 Baud 42 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 OQPSK Carrier recovery is mandatory to demodulate OQPSK As OQPSK has phase shifts at 90 degrees the sig nal must be squared two times to produce a carrier at four times the original frequency A PLL recovers the carrier in frequency and phase with ambiguities at 90 and 180 degrees A complex mixer down converts the signal to base band and the resulting signal is the data signal In contrast to QPSK OQPSK has only phase steps of 90 degrees in one step First the in phase part is switched then after half a symbol duration the quadrature part is switched The advantage of this process is a smaller amplitude var lation OQPSK is used almost exclusively for satellite data links QPSK Carrier recovery is mandatory to demodulate QPSK As QPSK has phase shifts at 90 and 180 degrees the signal must be squared two times to produce a carrier at four times the original frequency A PLL re covers the carrier in frequency and phase with ambiguities at 90 and 180 degrees A complex mixer down converts the signal to base band and the resulting signal is the data signal QPSK is almost exclusively used for satellite data links SUBTONE The same as DSP but the parameters are opti
81. found in the AX 25 Link Access Protocol for Ama teur Packet Radio The package identifier specifies the used layer 3 protocol In the following table all possible package identifiers are given Package Identifier PID Hexadecimal binary value Layer 3 Protocol value PID TEXNET datagram protocol RUM FEC Parameter Value Frequency range FS Operation modes Broadcast Simplex FEC Additional Inf RUM FEC operates at symbol rates of 164 5 and 218 3 Bd on the radio link The HNG FEC and RUM FEC modes are technically very similar RUM FEC alphabet has a codeword length of 16 bits where each of the 32 used bit combinations corresponds to an ITA 2 character WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 213 The RUM FEC alphabet is designed to obtain a maximum Hamming distance for error detection and has deep interleaving The actual ITA 2 alphabet is not contained in the code table As in HNG FEC error cor rection is performed by table look up of the bit pattern character closest resembling the character in er ror RUM FEC has a bit interleaving of 128 bits each new character starting at intervals of 16 bits The soft ware synchronizes to traffic as well as idle bit patterns Error correction may be enabled or disabled using the ECC item in the Options menu In RUM FEC mode the signal polarity sideband can be manually selected by toggling the Polarity item in the Demodulator menu If pola
82. identical to the classifier FFT Window see the section on WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Classifier Optional e 259 Classifier on page 250 Classification Results List The Classification Results List is identical to the Classifier Classification Results List see the section on Classifier on page 250 This information is available for all processes Tree View of the Classified Signals Code Checks A list of code checked signals is displayed below the list of classified signals For each signal a tree struc ture is used if required for more detailed information see below rt 3 mM bu To expand the view right click on the node The view has two levels gt A classified signal reference Signal lt number gt with a Table Detected reference if a match has been determined from the XML table loaded gt A Codecheck Detected reference Signal lt number gt This level contains a reference to the list of classified signals Codecheck Detected Left clicking on the expand folder button to the left of Codecheck Detected will expand the view to in clude details of the mode detected by the code check The Codecheck Detected listing may also contain more details on the mode in the Submode and Misc fields 260 e Classifier Optional WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Status Window WAVECOM CODE W CODE Classifier Code Check HF
83. in all frequency bands Two decoder families are currently available e W PCI and W PCle are decoder hardwares with two physically independent channels The decoder software W CODE supports these two hardwares W CODE works also as a stand alone application with native host hardware like the built in soundcard or other audio devices e W61PC W61LAN consists of hardware e g W61PC W61LAN and corresponding integral soft ware no additional order of the software required Revisions Version Date Changes 15 Jan 2006 CMH files index installation 6 4 15 Jul 2006 New protocols PSK AM MIL 188 110 16Tone CIS 12 PACTOR III CLOVER 2 CLOVER 2000 CODAN 9001 Improvements and modifications HF PSK CODE CHECK HF MFSK CODE CHECK HF CLASSIFIER CODE CHECK Tuning FFT Installation for PACTOR III CODAN CLOVER Modes 25 Aug 2006 WS1PC added 6 4 01 4 Oct 2006 W61LAN added 6 4 02 4 Oct 2006 ServerControl 2 e General Information WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Version Date Changes 6 5 00 27 Apr 2007 New protocols PACTOR FEC CV 786 MD 674 MIL M 55529a MOBITEX 1200 VISEL STANAG 5066 Improvements and modifications Inputs added streaming and user inputs Passband tuning added 6 6 00 23 Jan 2008 New protocols CHU DZVEI MIL 188 110 39Tone MOBITEX 1200 MODAT NWR SAME PCCIR PDZVEI PZVEI SAT AERO Aero I ZVEI 3 Stanag 5065 FSK Improvements and m
84. information in a file there must be a global header at the beginning of the file to aid identification of the file format and the data stored in the file This is necessary due to the potentially large size of files gt Nested sub chunks are not supported as this would unnecessarily complicate synchronization gt The implication of the previous point is that all chunks are at root level and are interpreted entirely sequentially The parser must know which chunks need to be identified before it can use other chunks The only constraint here is that files must start with a SOFH chunk Due to the sequen tial nature of parsing and the inability to nest chunks a separate global chunk is needed to identi fy the end of the file header namely the EOFH chunk APPLICATION NOTES Above is a graphical illustration showing how PXGF chunks of different type are ordered in a stream file Below are some notes to the developer to keep in mind when using the PXGF format in an application PXGF Chunk format Cross section of typical stream 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 8 bytes x 8 bytes Stream cross Size O section showing Synchronisation Type of chunk dun firib Array of IQ pairs single chunk SSIQ word descriptor come x bytes 1 pair 2x signed 16 bit integers Chunk l second between resync Stream at multiple chunk level A SSIQ chunks Resynchronisation SSIQ chunks Resynchronisation SSIQ chunks chunks leg SIOP chun
85. is necessary to be able to distinguish between continuous data and block data where only part of the time data is available Data chunks contain timestamps to enable detection of discontinui ties A chunk has also been defined to indicate discontinuities in the time data namely the IQDC chunk Playback control is essential for the off line analysis of files however due to the stream based de sign of the PXGF format playback control is not easily supported The PXGF format uses data chunks supported by a number of meta chunks that describe the state of the data stream Before processing data chunks it is necessary to obtain sufficient state information like the sample rate by processing the necessary chunks in the data stream The use of an index file has been pro posed as a possible solution to the problem of playback control By reading an index file an appli cation could determine over what period the recording was made and determine where to start processing the stream to play back a particular section C and Java libraries have been developed for the writing and reading of PXGF streams The li braries take care of synchronization and formatting issues they do not provide or dictate the communication medium The PXGF streaming format does not provide any mechanism for communication between the source of the data stream and the application receiving the data stream The PXGF stream there fore represents a unidirectional flow of inform
86. is sometimes also Known as BARRIE or USA 7 channel modem 124 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Parameter Value Operation modes Baudot ASCII Modulation VFT FSK Theoretically the system may handle channel dropouts of up to 3 seconds before errors occur An un modulated pilot tone is transmitted at 560 Hz Tune to the Pilot Tone Center Hz Space Hz Mark Hz Plormoe se Channel spacing 340 Hz Shift 170 Hz Channels are delayed by a multiple of 1 024 seconds Symbol rate 45 100 Baud gt Modes Baudot ASCII and some FEC modes Y VV WV Use the alphabet option to select the correct protocol and alphabet BULG ASCII For BULG ASCII the standard baud rates 110 to 600 Bd may be directly selected Other baud rates up to 1200 Baud may be selected using the variable baud rate option WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 125 Parameter Operation modes Asynchronous duplex ARQ ymbol rate 110 120 150 180 200 300 and 600 Bd variable 50 1200 Bd Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF BULG ASCII is a full duplex mode using go back 7 frames ARQ and a variable data frame length Frames are transmitted with a preceding frame counter for transmitted and received frames and an appended CRC check sum ASCII modes using iso asynchronous start stop bit patterns are frequently encountered in th
87. level The center frequency must be adjusted to the center between the lowest and highest tone in use AFC automatic frequency control can be switched on or off After demodulation and bit synchronization the symbols of the channels are combined to one bit stream which is de interleaved and passed through a Viterbi decoder The CRC is used to check whether trans mission errors occurred After successful synchronization it may take several tens of seconds before any text is output in the GUI In PACTOR III the data may be transmitted as ASCII without compression or can be compressed with HUFFMAN or PSEUDO MARKOV compression PMC In addition run length encoding RLE is included PCCIR The entire call number is transmitted by consecutive tones in decade sequence When two identical digits are to be transmitted consecutively then an eleventh frequency is used as a repetition identifier Parameter Value Frequency range VHF UHF Operation modes Analogue Selcal Modulation FM SUB tone Receiver settings FM BW 12 kHz Input format s AF IF If more than two identical digits are to be transmitted the repetition tone is appended to the digit tone e g 22222 is transmitted as f2 fw f2 fw f2 where f2 is the tone for 2 and fw is the repetition tone In most systems the accuracy of the single frequencies has to be within 1 1 of the nominal value Decoding the selective calls is started by clicking on a system If transmission
88. menu The special items AM Gain and AM Offset are placed in the Demodulator menu Centering of the signal deviation on the bar graph is controlled by adjusting AM Offset In addition maximum deviation is re quired on the bar graph This is done by adjusting AM Gain It should be noted that these two adjust ments are influenced by each other Meteosat reception requires a parabolic reflector and receiver The AF output of the receiver may be fed directly into the decoder which converts it into a weather image viewing station providing excellent image quality The decoder allows a continuous and smooth alignment of the image as it is being received from Op tions Fine Speed By using the Phase item in the Options menu the image can be shifted into the cor rect position Flip Left Right and Flip Top Down will reverse the image or turn it upside down MFSK 20 MFSK 20 is a sequential 20 tone mode which is optimized for the transmission of numeric codes MFSK 20 is similar to SP 14 and AUM 13 Parameter Operation modes FSK Broadcast Simplex Modulation MFSK 20 Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF Most of the tones have been assigned a character gt 10 tones are assigned to the numerals 0 9 gt One tone is used as an idle character gt One tone is used as a Space character gt One tone is used as a repetition indicator gt Six tones are assigned to characters All other tones are undefined A t
89. menu The baud rate can also be configured The number of channels is set to one for all single channel modes and to two for two channel modes like PACTOR II II FEC Modes with more than one channel need the shift settings in addition to the center fre quency Note The accuracy of the center frequency and shift settings is very important and directly influences the performance of the decoding After each configuration change the PSK code check automatically restarts with the new values The val ues of these parameters are displayed in the appropriate fields after the setting has completed If two or more different systems are identified or if more than five proven transmission errors occur an automatic switch to a mode will not take place 2 WAVECOM W CODE W CODE Code Check Card1 gt UD gt gt e gt mes File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help PSK Code Check HF Baudrate 31 00 PSK 31 Progress 0 Auto Channels Tones 1 17 20 33 Cael amp amp MS Mode Analysis y gt HR r mAa 2 ER Ree 100 Hz D 100 Hz 44 W CODE Code Check Card 1 PSK AM PSK 31 PSK 31 FEC Hits Checks Misc 100 00 Modulation i l 1 l I I 1 I l l i I 1 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3250 3500 3750 4000 Hz Demodulator DPSK PB Bandwidth 3600 Hz Center 994 Hz Input AF LEFT e e M The s
90. mode select a baud rate By selecting the Auto button the automatic determina tion of center frequency shift frequency and baud rate is performed Signal polarity LSB or USB side bands is automatically detected To maintain synchronization between the two duplex stations both transmitters operate continuously If no data is transmitted an idle bit pattern is sent At 100 Bd the last three characters are repeated after the RQ character At 200 Bd the last four characters are repeated 5 character repetition cycle Due to mode characteristics the character repetition cycle must be controlled manually WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 207 PRESS FAX The transmission of press fax images on short wave is based on gray levels and specific IOC values A number of IOC assignments were modified for press image transmissions These special characteristics are taken into account in the PRESS FAX software Parameter Value Operation modes Graphic mode Broadcast Center frequency 1900 Hz 60 90 120 180 and 240 RPM IOC 288 352 and 576 Receiver settings FAX DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF If the Auto function is selected the software waits for the IOC identifier and synchronization sequence Both parameters are only transmitted at the start of an image and hence capture will only start when the next image occurs By selecting PRESS FAX the decoding starts immediately and the drum spee
91. normal alpha bets these characters are not output Bit Inversion Mask One or several data bits may be inverted by using the Bit Inversion Mask item in the Options menu The Bit Inversion Mask can be entered in three different ways gt Inthe top input box a decimal number between 0 and 31 may be entered gt In the center input box the same number may be entered in binary format with the least signifi cant bit to the right gt Inthe bottom check boxes a logical 1 is entered with the mouse by clicking in the check box Bit Inversion Mask The bit inversion mask can be entered in any of the three formats Decimal 0 31 D Binary LSB to the right 00000 Bitwise a check indicates a logical 1 s Bit Inversion is only implemented for ITA 2 Baudot based bit streams CRC Recognition An automatic detection of the CRC can be switched on off with Options CRC Recognition The detect ed CRC is displayed in the decoder status bar Options Demodulator Favor Alphabet Y MSI Time Stamp Y Error Indication CRC Table Y CRC Recognition Clear Screen Resync Mode CRC Table Using Option CRC Table a certain CRC mask can be defined 34 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 7 CRC Table CRC Code Hex CRC Description 000 HAM a 4943 UNO nce 4348 ICRC A 4649 IFR poy 4244 5 534d 6 4244 7 5243 8 0216 9 Add CRC CRC
92. not insert a time stamp this is done by the network The system has four payload packet classes PSUBCOM for subscriber packet switched communication PSOSCOM for alert messaging CSUBCOM for circuit switched subscriber communication and DTESERV for service messages PSUBCOM will accommodate text 7 bit ASCII text data transparent data status messages transpar ent data and data of higher level protocols like OVLS identified by a protocol identification byte after the time stamp Mobitex 1200 also has voice call ability MOBITEX 8000 Mobitex 8000 is a multiple access packet radio system for wireless communications developed from the older Mobitex 1200 bps system Mobitex 8000 operates in the UHF bands and is found around 420 and 900 MHz in a number of countries using direct 8 kbps GMSK modulation Parameter Value The Mobitex 8000 frames consist of a frame header with a unique synchronization word base station identification traffic area identification and control flags followed by zero or more blocks of data max 32 blocks Each block consists of 18 bytes followed by two CRC bytes The data block bytes are protected by a 4 bit 12 8 Hamming code so each data word is 12 bits long For further protection the data bits are interleaved However the frame header is not interleaved and does not have a CRC sum appended Each system is identified by the unique 4 hexadecimal digit sync word The sync word is inverted for mo bil
93. not supported gt Only downlink bursts are supported in the current decoder version Logical channels User plane traffic channels gt Circuit mode not supported Control plane control channels gt All channels except Access Assignment Channel AACH Protocol Data Units PDU gt Only downlink PDUs supported At layer 3 control plane PDUs are user selectable TWINPLEX TWINPLEX F7B is a FSK modulation technique with four modulation frequencies Two transmission chan nels V1 and V2 are obtained through a combination of the modulation frequencies WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 239 SITOR TWINPLEX systems employ the second channel to double the data transmission rate from the equivalent of 50 Bd to 100 Bd The V1 and V2 channels each contain 3 telegraph characters from the SITOR alphabet Parameter Value Operation modes Simplex ARQ Modulation 4FSK Additional Inf Twinplex transmissions can have widely varying shifts Seven standard combinations are available from the Shift item of the Demodulator menu gt 100 100 100 Hz 200 400 200 Hz 170 170 170 Hz 115 170 115 Hz 200 200 200 Hz 115 170 515 Hz gt 65 170 65 Hz In addition any desired combination may be programmed V VW YV V WV In addition to shift variations Twinplex systems may utilize very different keying assignments On the V1 and V2 channel the software allows the selection of Y Y B B Y B Y
94. of 30 voice and 2 signaling channels each 64 kbps giving a total bandwidth of 2 048 Mbps whereas the North American T1 requires a bandwidth of 1 544 Mbps for a frame consisting of 24 channels each 64 kbps plus one framing bit The basic PCM channel samples the analogue voice signal 8000 times per se cond producing 8000 8 bit words per second Whereas the CEPT basic channel utilizes all 8 sample bits 286 e Modem and FAX Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 for voice the North American channel utilizes one bit for signaling robbed bit signaling Two different algorithms are used for sampling A law and mu law Large organizations use El or T1 subscriber loops to connect their PBX Private Branch Exchanges to a PSTN central office The line interface is either two coaxial lines or two balanced pairs one for each direction ISDN digital loop The Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN is the oldest attempt of extending the digital infrastruc ture to the subscriber ISDN comes in two flavors the Basic Rate Interface BRI delivering 2 x 64 kbps channels 16 kbps channeling totaling 144 kbps and Primary Rate Interface delivering 30 voice channels 2 signaling channels equaling an El of 2 048 Mbps At the subscriber premises a BRI is terminated in a Network Termination box which converts the line sig nal from the line T interface to a local synchronous interface the S four wire interface supporting up t
95. or to replace the current file A history of previously used XML files is displayed in a drop down list when clicking on the arrow Pressing the Clear List button the history list will be reset A file browser appears when clicking on the folder but ton If the selected file does not exist a warning is displayed Code check table C Users Public Documents Wavecom CCC Code Tables CCCSignalDB_orig xml does not exist If the CCC is started without an XML table a dialog which prompts the user to select an XML table file ap pears Reload Table Press this button to reload the current XML table The reload feature should be used to ensure that modifications of the currently selected file are applied for instance if CCC Editor has made changes Note The FSK and PSK code checks have built in automatic polarity detection For MFSK and MIL or STANAG signals it is necessary to select the appropriate polarity before the Classifier Code Check starts Use Demodulator Center or double click in the Center field in the lower status bar for selecting an ap propriate center frequency To select the classification bandwidth double click the Bandwidth field in the lower status bar or open a context menu by right clicking in the FFT window The Average Factor Window Type Period and Peak Hold options in the list are identical to the corresponding real time FFT options see the section on Real time FFT FFT Window The FFT Window is
96. play cursors the center frequency of the signal may be determined All 14 tones except tone 2 and tone 13 are clearly displayed The missing tones are the start and stop indicators which are of course only transmitted at the start and the stop of the transmission It is important to tune to the signal center fre quency as accurately as possible because accuracy of this tuning directly influences the quality of demod ulation and the synchronization In case the receiver AF output is used the center frequency should be as close to 409 Hz as possible The value of the center frequency is directly transferred to the decoding soft ware module The screen shot below shows a decoded SP 14 signal 648 648 648 1 648 648 648 1 648 648 648 1 648 648 648 1 648 648 648 1 648 648 64 8 1 648 648 648 1 648 648 648 1 648 648 648 1 44PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP 047 86 00257 63655 15036 24409 46922 29195 44536 23756 88185 19734 13815 05559 15248 03935 48092 22844 39614 37412 85835 65608 04564 40088 55422 26178 70730 52333 1 6231 51008 48925 72744 421566 05865 47410 47631 36932 83107 77635 05071 68333 10 397 74041 97767 70457 04550 05554 14024 45859 06664 27877 495054 37750 86584 0123 8 81688 92279 08231 09517 67628 69921 70851 01138 12040 61286 08078 51485 06823 8251 40456 04672 81354 84511 06500 89257 4580 62857 78635 99173 42002 87665 15 302 7115 17707 46330 41140 15536 44764 3508 3881 18273 45302 14834 8787 8900 O 22523 06297 11356 67247 17772 60186 26178 10242 1456
97. purposes Data 1 8 sec single slot or 4 2 sec Data section structured in data probe pairs 45 M PSK sym double slot bols each 30 user data symbols and 15 known BPSK symbols for synchronization purpose The following diagram shows the TDMA slotted frame structure 32 sec Frome 13 Sbts Hm e oon UL DL JDL DLIDL DL IDL JDL OL IDL DL UL Res Res Res RA RA RA RA Res Res Res 32 13 sc Sbt Ore MPDO r Slt UL Uplmk DL Res D o rlmk Reserva DL EBA Dor rmk Random Access The HF ACARS decoder detects each slot with the characteristic pre key 1440 Hz single tone uses the preamble to synchronize the slot eliminates various distortions in the HF communication channel config ures several components of the decoder demodulates the user data section and decodes it according to the HFDL protocol interpreter Each message is finally output on the screen in Squitter SPDU format Uplink MPDU format from ground Station to aircraft or Downlink MPDU format from aircraft to ground station Only when a HFDL slot is successfully detected the decoder enters the Traffic state otherwise it remains in the Sync state Usually an HFDL station sends the signal with USB setting However the decoder has the possibility to pro cess signals in both USB and LSB settings This can be done by setting the polarity in the menu neither to NOR for USB and INV for LSB signals The center frequency of the decoder should be se
98. repeat request RQ character to the remote station if a character error has been detected or the distortion or fading becomes excessive This results in the re transmission of the last 3 or 7 characters preceded by the RQ request control character According to the CCITT recommendation the repetition cycle may span 4 or 8 characters as is the case with ARQ E The longer RQ cycle of 8 characters has never been monitored In addition to the time multiplexing of several channels division channels each division channel may be further subdivided into sub channels resulting in a multitude of possible modes of operation At present however no transmissions with sub channel division are known Systems employing sub channel division may be recognized by the rhythmic blinking of the Error indication system state in the decoder status bar ARQ N ARQ N uses the ARQ 1A alphabet as does ARQ E Character inversion as in the case of ARQ E or ARQ E3 is not defined for ARQ N The lack of inversion makes it impossible to automatically determine the length of the RQ cycle However known systems operate exclusively with a single RQ character and three repeated characters Parameter Value Operation modes Duplex ARQ Known ARQ N systems operate exclusively at a symbol rate of 96 Bd on the radio link The synchronization phase for the ARQ N mode of operation may be initiated via the AUTO function or by manual selection of the baud rate Signal p
99. shift characters In this manner it is possible to transfer 2 x 32 6 58 characters the last six are subtracted because they have same functions in either case Shift characters are also used to toggle between Latin and non Latin alphabets in the same transmission e g Latin Cyrillic and Latin Arab alphabets The alphabet most widely used in modern data communication is the ASCII code American Standard Code for Information Interchange which is internationalized as ITU ITA 5 The alphabet is originally based on 7 bit words but normally 8 bits are used either to expand the alphabet or to include a parity bit Because of the number of bits available for each codeword it is unnecessary to use special case shift characters as for ITA 2 Also both capital and miniscule letters can be accommodated as well as non printing commands and if 8 bit words are used completely transparent binary data Ss ao a a la efi e fete pepe te pete mpe ete jojifififi fofofofol nuc ore se o e r NUL Null or all DCI Devi i Melee pr parejo los Stine 863 Sets evica control 3 lol 1 o o STA bea 2 ea el bt ee ETX End of text DC4 Device contrat 4 111 olol ETX CANA AA laces EOT End of transmission NAK Negative acknowledge ofo 1 ol eor oca s a o t af ENO Enwiy SYN Synchronous idle 1 o fol eno wax x s e ule Tu ger pana ee olififoffack sve a efr vir v es Backspace EM Endof medium ififijol ser Jere 7
100. shift of 170 Hz Each character is transmitted twice with an interval of 35 bits In the case of error free reception of both characters the character is displayed on the screen The underscore _ character is displayed if both characters are received in error SP 14 SP 14 is an AM modulated sequential 14 tone mode which is optimized for the transmission of numeric codes Parameter Value feathers M Additional Inf The tone separation is 16 Hz The center frequency is 409 Hz and the bandwidth is approximately 210 Hz Each tone has been assigned a character 10 tones are assigned to the numerals 0 9 One tone is used as a start character One tone is used as a stop character Y Y V WV One tone is used as a Space character gt One tone is used as a repetition indicator A transmission is initiated with a start sequence which identifies this mode and may be used for accurate tuning This sequence is transmitted at 1 Baud which makes it readable even during very unfavorable conditions The data proper is transmitted at a rate of 7 5 Baud A sequence of 19 P characters is initially transmitted followed by the five digit code words The transmission is terminated by transmitting 20 K characters As the transmission rate is very low this mode is insensitive to fading and multipath propagation To decode a SP 14 signal it must first be demodulated using an AM demodulator in order to retrieve the MFSK signal The simplest
101. stations transmit meteorological data and operator communication in clear POCSAG The pager services introduced by a number of PTT administrations use the POCSAG Post Office Code Standard Advisory Group standard Pagers are one way devices A base station controls a large number of receivers and a return channel for transmission of reception acknowledgements or text is not available Parameter Value Frequency range VHF UHF Operation modes Simplex pager Symobol rate 512 1200 or 2400 Bd WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 205 Parameter Value Receiver settings FM BW 15 kHz nice Additional Info ITA 5 with block coding PAGER POCSAG specifies four different call modes Tone only pagers Mode O and 1 The receiver can receive four different messages The meaning of the four tones must be determined be forehand The acoustic signal is supported by the display of the A B C or D messages on a small LCD dis play All pagers must in principle have tone only capability as a minimum Numeric pagers Mode 2 Individual parties receive their messages in the form of transmitted digits and some special characters In this way for example the telephone number which the POCSAG subscriber is to call can be relayed Mes sages are displayed on the pager display and may be partially stored Alphanumeric pagers Mode 3 The pager type which is easiest to use is the alphanumeric pager w
102. the Channel Probe has a predefined phase pattern Preamble 0 6 s or 4 8 s Interleaver 1 Interleaver 2 Interleaver 3 lee Interleaver N The FEC and interleaver are used to combat the effects of fading frequency drift multi path effects and burst noise affecting the HF transmission The known 8 phase symbols the Channel Probe are trans mitted to keep the receiver mainly the equalizer on track Thus the receiver can be resynchronized with out the preamble being regularly repeated The MIL 188 110A decoder processes all the above settings except 2400 bps voice Generally MIL 188 110A user data is transmitted in binary mode e in a transparent mode Thus upper protocols layers are required to further process this data stream For this reason the decoder displays the user data BINARY HEX ASCIT ASYNC or ASCIT SYNC format selected from Options Message Type In the HEX display mode the decoded binary data is just displayed as it is In ASCII ASYNC mode the bit stream is searched with an ASCII ASYNC structure i e one start bit 0 8 data bits and at least one stop bit 1 The 8 data bits are transmitted with the LSB first The display is stopped when more than 3 NULL characters are received or when the asynchronous data structure is vio lated more than 8 times In ASCII SYNC mode each 8 bits LSB first represent one ASCII character Tuning the decoder The decoder processes signal in both SSB settings USB and LSB Thi
103. the LES and the MES The remaining part of the protocol is as in the case above SAT Operation The decoder displays the session output in two windows a Session Window and a Session List Window The Session Window continuously displays control channel information Field MODE SERVice DATA data FAX fax TEL voice TELX telex EVeNT srt Traffic channel start ass Assignment ccs Control channel start MES_ID Mobile earth station ID FREQ Traffic channel frequency TX_CHA_ID Channel ID of the uplink channel from the MES The result a file of a monitoring session is listed in the Session List Window Bold font indicates that a file is unread by the user while normal font indicates that the file has been read Display Status In order 278 e SAT System WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 to display a file double click on the corresponding File field This enables the correct viewer It is also possible to directly view a file through Windows Explorer however this does not change the Display Sta tus SATB Baudrate 6000 00 TEL DATA FAX Progress 0 Traffic 10 32 05 Es EJ Ge AS Analysis el y gt let gt AmE 2 elal m 1500H2 T 150H2 Frequency fl BERS EES GT B SERV EVNT ass MES_1D 10353590 FREQ 1538 070000 B SERV EVNT ass MES_1D 14706195 FREQ 1538 410000 B SERV EVNT ass MES ID 7548407 FREQ 1552 080000 B SERV EVNT ass MES_ID 853
104. the classifier data and then the CodeCheck data The Classifier data is stored in the way described in chapter File Header on page 309 312 e WAVECOM Data Formats WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 The data package which contains the text CodeCheck Data Section marks the beginning of the CodeCheck data section The CodeCheck data of a classified signal is written to a single string The following values are written to the string gt The index value of the classified signal gt The string value with all predicted modes gt All detected modes can be more than one for a detected mode the following values are written to the string Mode the name of the detected mode e g FEC A ASCII SubMode the name of the submode e g SREG 72 Bits by FEC A 9 Bits by ASCII mode additional description information e g Shift Reg 72 Bits the hits value Shows how often during checking a mode was successfully determined NOTE the values are written to the string in the same order as listed above If not stored with _UNICODE enabled then the string contains normal 8 bit characters values from type char otherwise the string contains 16 bit characters from type wchar_t A char value occupies 1 Byte and a wchar_t value occupies 2 Bytes in the binary WDA file Graphics data The FileType stored in the file header is Graphics Header data This file type uses the
105. time A circular buffer is used re sulting in a small delay between the input and output signal A problem may occur when monitoring an input from one sound card to an output on another sound card where the sampling clocks used for the input and output will not be synchronized On some sound cards different clocks are used for input and output resulting in the same problem In these cases the monitor function may produce sound with occasional skips and interruptions this is normal and will not affect the integrity of recorded sound Some sound cards have an input labelled something like What You Hear or Wave Out allowing the re cording of sound produced by other applications on the computer When these inputs are selected the monitor function should not be used as it will create a feedback loop HF Modes Menu The various HF protocols are displayed in the HF Modes menus and are divided into different groups To select the modes of a group left click or let the mouse rest briefly on the group item to be selected Now the modes of the group are displayed in a separate menu Start decoding the desired mode by another left click It may be difficult to guess or remember to which group a particular mode belongs To facilitate an over view a full screen menu may be opened by clicking the menu item Mode Selector To start a mode click on the appropriate menu field Leaving the full screen menu will not terminate an active mode
106. to amplitude changes and used to modulate a quadrature carrier cos 2 nfen 9600Hz 9600Hz sin 2 afer WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Modem and FAX Modes e 287 The receiving section will attempt to cancel out any echo then demodulate the incoming signal recover carrier and bit synchronism then finally de frame and de scramble the bit stream The equalizer will at tempt to invert line characteristics and if Trellis coding has been used a Trellis decoder is inserted Interpolsting Diecisnabin Filter Caster Recovery Timing Recovery Leowrerse Handshaking Before user data can be transmitted handshaking must take place between the originating and answering modems or fax equipment Using fax communication as an example five distinct phases can be identified Phase A Call establishment Receiver number is dialed and a calling tone CNG is sent and when the receiver goes off hook it an swers with an answer tone Phase B Pre message procedure Using V 21 300 bps FSK capabilities configuration and finally rate test signals are exchanged in HDLC frames Phase C Message transmission After the Confirmation to Receive signal has been received the originator starts sending images Phase D Post message procedure Originator sends a Return To Control signal switching both devices back to V 21 and the originator sends end of message signals The answe
107. tones Parameter VENTE Adaltional Inf The first group of tones contains 8 tones 1 8 and the second group the tones 5 8 Tones 1 4 of the second group are not defined Coquelet 8 is a synchronous system with a tone duration of 75 0 ms 50 0 ms or 37 5 ms One ITA 2 character is transmitted in 75 or 150 ms which is equivalent to 50 or 100 Bd Baudot with 1 5 stop bits codeword length 7 5 Bit An IDLE sequence is sent when no traffic is at hand Transmissions start with a synchronization preamble and end with several EOT characters WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 139 Tone Assignment of COQUELET 8 Tone Number Frequency Hz Bit 1 First tone Group COQUELET 80 COQUELET 80 is a synchronous MFSK system with error correction FEC Various references note two dif ferent systems COQUELET 80S and COQUELET 82S COQUELET 82S can be used in both side bands and uses extended handshaking and synchronizing sequences extended protocol Parameter VENTE COQUELET 80 is used with the ATU 80 Arabic or the ITA 2 Latin alphabet As for COQUELET 8 a char acter is coded with two tone assignments from group 1 and group 2 Error correction is done by transmitting every character twice with a specified time offset The second transmitted character is mathematically reformatted MOD 8 The leading DX and trailing characters RX always have the same ODD or EVEN parity At the
108. transmitted using amplitude modulation Parameter Value Frequency range VHF UHF 188 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Parameter Value Modulation FM SUB AM Center frequency 1800 Hz Receiver settings FM BW 40 kHz Input format s AF IF The software is started in free run mode by enabling the mode Because this mode has no synchronization sequence the correct display of the image is controlled by using the Phase function in the Options menu The special items AM Gain and AM Offset are placed in the Demodulator menu Centering of the signal deviations on the bar graph is controlled by adjusting AM Offset In addition maximum deviation is re quired on the bar graph This is done by adjusting AM Gain It should be noted that these two adjust ments are influenced by each other The orbiting satellites may be received with an active antenna and a high quality VHF UHF receiver An optimal receiving station allows reception for approximately 20 minutes before the satellite has moved be low the horizon The AF output of the receiver may be fed directly into the decoder which converts it into a weather image viewing station providing excellent image quality Polarization problems occur with orbiting satellites resulting in reception gaps of up to 2 minutes A special antenna may alleviate this problem Due to the Doppler effect the frequency of the received signal may change as much as 10
109. unit dashes and spaces one dash being equal to three dots The character E is represented by the shortest code word dot equal to one dot or 1 in binary notation The character Zero 0 is represented by the longest code word dash dash dash dash dash equal to 19 dots or 1110111011101110111 in binary notation The reason for the unequal length of the code words was the desire to reduce the amount of work for the operator when transmitting many messages Samuel Morse found by visiting a Philadelphia printing office that the compositors had sorted the lead types in such a way that the types most frequent ly used were the ones most easily accessible An example of an equal length but non integral code is the Baudot or ITA 2 alphabet which was formerly in use on the majority of the world s land lines and radio links It is still the base for many codes con structed later as compatibility to existing equipment and networks was essential In the ITA 2 code a character is represented by five bits For instance the letter D is represented by the codeword 10110 As we have five bits which can assume one of two possible states we are able to repre sent 25 32 characters However the number of all letters figures and special characters add up to more than 32 Therefore a trick is employed ITA 2 makes a distinction between two cases lower letters case and upper figures case Shifting between these cases is accomplished by special
110. way is to use the AF output of the receiver and select receiver AM demodula tion If a receiver IF output is used AM demodulation is not available and decoding becomes difficult However using the MFSK demodulator the transmitted symbols may be retrieved A MFSK IAS using 16 bit over sampling will retrieve symbol clock In order to process both baud rates used by SP 14 the IAS has to be configured to a baud rate of 15 Bd Thus at a rate of 1 Bd 15 symbols per transmitted symbol and at 7 5 Bd two symbols per transmitted symbol must be received with a certain tolerance Even if for instance the same character is received 15 times in succession error correction is impossible due to the fact that in case of repetition of numerals the numeral itself is followed by the repetition indicator R Tuning a SP 14 Signal Using the WAVECOM decoder as an example the following shows how decoding SP 14 is performed After tuning the receiver to the selected frequency and turning AM demodulation on the receiver AF out put Line Out is connected to the AF input If the receiver has been correctly tuned the following FFT display is shown 224 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 500 550 Frequency Hz For the FFT bandwidths of 500 Hz 1000 Hz and 4000 Hz may be selected A bandwidth of 500 Hz will ensure a good quality of signal display and will also enable a fine tuning of the signal Then using the dis
111. where f2 is the tone for 2 and fw is the repetition tone In most systems the accuracy of the single frequencies has to be within 1 1 5 of the nominal value Decoding the selective calls is started by clicking on a system If transmission and system selection con form the call sign is displayed on the monitor In the Options menu a Time stamp function can be ena bled to add date and time to each call Tone Allocation Tone duration 100 ms VDL M2 VHF digital link VDL Mode 2 is an air ground data link specified in the ICAO documents Annex 10 Vol ume III Communication Systems and Manual on VHF Digital Link VDL Mode 2 WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 241 Frequency range VHF Frquency range VHF 136 975 MHz std transmission frequency Operation modes CSMA Modulation D8PSK Symbol rate 31 5 kBd Receiver settings BW 15 30 kHz Inputs VDL M2 uses D8PSK Differentially encoded 8 Phase Shift Keying modulation scheme operating at a bit rate of 31 5 kbps in a 25 kHz frequency band The data is transmitted in the form of short bursts The maximum number of data bits at a single packet is 217 1 bits which corresponds to a packet length of approximately 4 seconds Each packet carries a header field which contains a 48 bits synchronization sequence and a packet length field The packet length field is protected with a 25 20 block code and the remaining
112. 0 APP a a a a aim een Saag eae Kae weeds Cat ae 250 HOW TENE Classifier WORKS iia AAA ds 250 classifier User Intera inscritos 250 a AY Ss SE O 255 Classifier Code Check HF CCC ii A 255 How the Classifier Code Check WOrkS cccccuessccuueeeuuueeeuuuvenuuueneuues 255 WSErINTEEIACE A dais 257 DECO MRE anaes 261 Classifier Code Cneck CCC VAF UE da 261 How the Classifier Code Check WOoOrkS cccccccsesseeuveeeuuueeeuuuvenauuueneaues 261 User Interrace omnia oud densa aa Slain oe e 263 DECOUINA aa Na 267 Classifier Code Check Edito Anana e A a tas 267 ha eN Le S P A A E E E T E E E T E EE E 267 ESE EGO GUI aa in ia 268 Data Base Fields lt rscarwetnaenia a bar oamiarenietareetanersencueia ebeueerees 273 SAT System 275 OVER O sheen E dade vate abueevananiern wie es 275 SY SMS iio als 276 A A A E arena ae Ba temas detees coeur ora ances see oe 277 Logical Channels coi 277 MES Identiicaci nuit a a e 278 SESSIONS Mad A ci 278 SATODE OM ica 278 Irae Channel DE od e a le 280 THE Sat Acro SYSTEM escroto 280 hes S hd ok oe ce ee A 280 CHEMMEI LY DSS arta 281 TFOUDIS SHOOUN G isa 282 Modem and FAX Modes 286 OVER VIC Won aan 286 LeU aNSIMISSIOM trar idad 286 Fax and Data Transmission oda 287 Modem Puncto nal cada iaes 287 Handshake meuri a aaa 288 MOGUALION TY DES taa ae 289 DS COGIC mr ore Aan e 290 PUL ANG INES ACG weacsse a ameee omits anne ueamees 292 TS Ci GS dan aia 292 QUID Esti ata 293 viii e Con
113. 0 40096 57654 80854 64722 36845 88997 12536 2933 71541 88034 68312 18204 50227 4411 12950 60637 73908 32 183 08242 4365 47715 49531 10214 7453 66511 50792 21633 87670 66427 70567 8456 7 54120 56534 18562 82186 54955 21287 62427 08256 38131 55174 59664 53885 68060 42712 83564 96617 02533 87734 72544 74843 6193 67417 07798 32650 20306 18077 05 029 53414 80773 71243 42385 71838 5833 06771 83235 74802 82129 55074 24771 4239 5 55780 00282 88456 01384 38622 03750 55638 82128 41994 23934 13000 9630 60315 79139 4185 42986 67164 49911 88313 50872 66312 30121 867597 7915 54694 00554 13 867 65350 02023 20403 35974 49563 24559 49003 16913 84037 02018 90793 39625 7725 7 29947 18058 80461 7815 32446 97978 59707 14838 20277 28541 45243 5468 25732 62256 38446 75465 05588 73029 67780 7342 40652 76990 64547 59103 45368 77833 02 537 41390 65606 65572 54246 12590 16550 46181 15588 25287 71034 03921 50520 1235 3 64450 03521 50920 12353 64490 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK F942 47P2 5941648 F 648 648 1 648 648 648 1 648 648 648 1 648 648 PM SPREAD 11 SPREAD 21 and SPREAD 51 Like AUTOSPEC the SPREAD 11 SPREAD 21 and SPREAD 51 modes use the 10 bit Bauer code For im proved reliability in terms of burst errors each character is spread in time interleaving After each bit of the 10 bit Bauer code 50 data bits alternately 10 or 20 from other characters are sent New characters Start at intervals of 10 bits Parameter Frequency range HF Operation modes Simplex
114. 00 Hz during the reception period The receiver should therefore have a built in automatic frequency control AFC capabil ity NWR SAME NWR is the abbreviation for NOAA National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration USA Weather Ra dio All Hazards which is operated by the NWS National Weather System A similar system using the Same message format is operated as weather radio Canada by the Meteorological Service of Canada Parameter Value Symbol rate 520 83 Bd Input format s AF IF SAME is the abbreviation for Specific Area Message Encoding This feature is incorporated in information regarding severe weather conditions which is distributed by the NWS The area to which such a message applies is restricted by the area code thus avoiding false alarm in areas which are not affected by the weather condition which causes the alarm The coded message is transmitted using Audio Frequency Shift Keying on the audio channel of the NWR transmitter system Seven channels on 162 400 162 425 162 450 162 475 162 500 161 525 and 162 550 MHz are assigned to this task WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 189 The baud rate is 520 83 Bd the mark frequency is 2083 3 Hz and the space frequency 1562 5 Hz all val ues fixed The user cannot change the audio frequency by tuning the receiver For this reason the center frequency is preset as well as the baud rate The display shows the informati
115. 0001001 HT amp 009 Horizontal Tab 11 013 OB 00001011 VT amp 011 Vertical Tab 12 014 OC 00001100 FF amp 012 Form Feed 322 e Appendix WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 DEC OCT HEX BIN Symbol HTML Number Description 5 OD 13 01 00001101 CR amp 013 Carriage Return 14 016 OE 00001110 SO amp 014 Shift Out X On 16 020 10 00010000 DLE amp 016 Data Line Escape 18 022 12 00010010 DC2 amp 018 Device Control 2 20 024 14 00010100 DC4 amp 020 Device Control 4 21 025 15 00010101 NAK amp 021 Negative Acknowledgement 23 027 17 00010111 ETB amp 023 End of Transmit Block 25 031 19 00011001 EM amp 025 End of Medium 27 033 1B 00011011 ESC amp 027 Escape 28 034 1C 00011100 FS amp 028 File Separator 29 035 1D 00011101 GS amp 029 Group Separator 30 036 1E 00011110 RS amp 030 Record Separator 32 040 20 00100000 amp 32 Space 34 042 22 00100010 amp 34 Double quotes or speech marks 3 00100100 amp 36 Dollar 6 044 24 37 045 25 00100101 amp 37 Percent 38 046 26 00100110 amp amp 38 Ampersand 39 047 27 00100111 amp 39 Single quote 41 051 29 00101001 amp 41 Close parenthesis or close bracket 43 053 2B 00101011 amp 43 Plus 44 054 2C 00101100 BHAA Comma 45 055 2D 00101101 amp 45 Hyphen 46 056 2E 00101110 l amp 46 Period dot or full stop 47 057 2F 00101111 amp 47 Slash or divide 48 060 30 00110000 0 8748 Zero WAVE
116. 03 1A 8 January 1988 Parameter Value This mode has 16 carriers one Doppler tone at 605 Hz 14 data carriers starting at 935 Hz with tone dis tance of 110 Hz and the 16 carrier at 2915 Hz is used for data and synchronization see table below Ex cept the Doppler tone other carriers are DQPSK modulated at the symbol rate of 75 or 45 45 Baud Number Frequency Hz Description Bit location E CE AA O E A A O ate EA as ss sas tas a es ate ant a s ts ea A O E CE E ows ate tans pas a ars CAE AE EA AE O aan as ss A E There are 5 frame formats e DNCS IM Data Net Control Station Interrogation Message WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 169 e DNCS IWM Interrogation with Message e PRM Picket Reply Message e SB Short Broadcast e Net Test The data in the frames is coded with Hamming method To decode the mode choose the correct Polarity put the Doppler Tone cursor in the FFT tuning window to the Doppler tone Small frequency error 30 Hz and Doppler shift will be corrected automatically and displayed in the Freq Err Doppler Shift field The data will be displayed in the main text window Because the mode transmits link information the data is displayed in a 30 bit group hex The frame format is displayed together with the baudrate in the Format field Confidence shows the de coding quality a value over 95 means the FEC has probably corrected all bit errors t
117. 1 1927840122 G39d ddc Line 1 WiNRADIO Virtual Sound V1 1 1927840222 Devicec W CLOUD G33DDC Wavecom V2 0 0343973651 W CLOUD Networking Remote host Port Auto connect Encryption Sound Status weloud73651 52001 v y y 4 e Delete Restart Close W CODE Device dialog window W CLOUD Networking A W CLOUD device is like a local W CODE device e g soundcard W PCI or W PCle cards The only dif ference is a W CLOUD device is physically at a remote site over the internet where the antenna and re ceiver are located W CLOUD device sends genuine and encrypted IQ signal to W CODE for decoding In the W CODE Device dialog window you can enter a W CLOUD device by name or IP address and port number The connection can be made automatically upon restarting W CODE by pressing the Restart button The connection between W CLOUD and W CODE can be encrypted by checking the Encryption box Because the signal is received at a remote site it is a big help to hear the signal at W CODE site This is done by activate the Sound button By pressing the Check button you may know the instantanuous status of a W CLOUD device A W CLOUD device may have the following Status e Available W CLOUD device is reachable W CODE can connect to it by restarting e Offline W CLOUD device is unreachable e Busy W CLOUD device is used by another W CODE e Connected W CLOUD device is connected by this
118. 105 MD 674 ASYNC 170 Media Player Recorder 24 MES Identification 278 MES Initiated Session 278 Message Type 37 METEOSAT 170 MFSK Analysis 88 MFSK Code Check HF 88 MFSK 20 171 MFSK 8 and MFSK 16 172 MIL 188 110 16Tone Appendix B 172 MIL 188 110 39Tone Appendix C 173 MIL 188 110A 174 MIL 188 110B Appendix C STANAG 4539 175 MIL 188 141A 177 MIL 188 141B Appendix C 178 MIL M 55529A NB WB 180 MIL STANAG Code Check 87 MOBITEX 1200 180 MOBITEX 8000 181 MODAT 182 Mode Selector 65 Mode 41 Modem and FAX Modes 286 Modem Functionality 287 Modem Settings 38 Modulation 104 Modulation Types 289 MIL 188 110A B MIL 188 110A B WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 MPT 1327 185 MSI 38 Multiplexing and Multiple Access 104 N NATEL 187 Networking Information 297 NMT 450 188 NOAA GEOSAT 188 NWR SAME 189 NXDN 193 O Obligation 331 OFDM Orthogonal Modulation 105 Offset 43 OLIVIA 193 Open 46 Options 300 Options Menu 33 ORBCOMM 194 Oscilloscope 75 Other GUI Elements 59 Output 293 Overview 250 275 286 305 Frequency Division P PACKET 1200 195 PACKET 300 196 PACKET 9600 197 PACTOR 197 PACTOR FEC 198 PACTOR II 199 PACTOR II AUTO 200 PACTOR II FEC 200 PACTOR III 201 Passband Filter Support 69 Payments 330 PB Bandwidth 43 PB Center 43 PCCIR 203 PCs and peripherals 329 PDZVEI 203 PICCOLO MK6 and PICCO
119. 1450000 Demod DPSK Baud 1200 00 gt Entry Name aero Value 1545030000 Demod DPSK Baud 600 00 gt Entry Name aero6 Value 1545045000 Demod DPSK Baud 1200 00 gt In multi card systems each card has its own section in the XML file The user may edit these files by hand however it is recommended to use the SAT Frequency Tuning Bar The installation package contains example XML files for each mode FFT Sonagram Context Menu Pause Graphics Bandwidth Average Factor Window Type Period Peak Hold Display Settings Y Grey Hot Cool Copper RGB Pause Graphic Freeze the FFT or Sonagram Window Bandwidth To select a display bandwidth use Bandwidth from the context menu or double click on the Bandwidth field on the demodulator status bar For the Tuning Sonagram FFT bandwidths of 0 5 1 0 2 0 and 4 0 kHz are available For the Analysis FFT Sonagram bandwidths of 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 24 48 and 96 kHz are available f Bandwidth Hz mo e Average Factor After choosing an Average Factor from the context menu the average of up to 64 measurements may be displayed at each step A value of 1 turns averaging off The averaged display of several measure ments is very helpful when monitoring MFSK and FDM transmissions or during heavy fading The averag ing function may also be selected by double clicking the Avg field in the upper status bar Window Type Four w
120. 2 WT normalized bandwidth where T is the signal pulse width Encryption To protect data transmissions against interception various methods are in use The encryption process basically processes clear text with a key with the transformed message then transmitted over the insecure media At the receiving end deciphering is achieved using the same key and the clear text message is recovered Encryption may be on line or off line On line or stream encryption takes place at transmission time whereas off line or block encryption often is done before transmission usually in the form of coding the clear text message into five letter or five figures groups This is done by a key sequence Bit inversion inverts logical zeroes of a codeword with logical ones and vice versa either in a static pat tern e g bit 3 and bit 5 or in a dynamic pattern depending on the value of the codeword The result of bit inversion is character substitution the original clear text character is substituted with another char acter Character transposition or permutation replaces characters in one position in the clear text with char acters in another position One of the most famous implementation of permutation transformations is the German Enigma cryptographic machine in use before and during the World War II Substitution and permutation of clear text messages is relatively easily broken using statistical methods and a knowledge of the frequency of characters
121. 2 wav 2340590122 20101117_125511 TETRA _TMO VOICE _159 wav Demodulator IQ PB Bandwidth 25000 Hz Offset 12300 Hz Input IQ LEFT amp RIGHT In uppermost part of the GUI two status lines are continuously updated with system information Mode TMO or DMO base station main frequencies country code MCC network code MNC local area identi fication LA security class and the frequencies of neighbor base stations The upper pane will display signaling information for the signal being monitored For voice the default dis play will show slot number destination and source addresses call ID and status Other options are availa ble from Options Tetra Settings see below GUI for SDS WAVECOM W CODE W CODE Text Card 1 File SORE TETRA HF Modes WHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Modems Options NOR DEAR Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help o x Confidence 100 Deh sae TMO Main Freg 42 Mode Analysis 416 700 MHz MCC 228 MNC J m ne T CELSE a Sh AA ad s000H2 1D aone 8889 LA 1 Security class Neighbour s 4 Text Messaging n 100702 Destination 1 eavecom th AATA n wry Grae nA TMO SDS Sender Text Messaging lt Slot Mode Desti 2 106 105 3 106 2 105 100601 100701 100702 100701 100702 TMO TMO TMO 100701 Destination 1 Source 2 100458 100396 3 100458 2
122. 3 Decoder 164 Decoder Status Bar 60 Decoding 261 267 290 DECODING OF CODAN DATA MODEM SIGNALS 136 Default Data and Program Folders Paths 20 DEFINITION OF CHUNKS 307 Delivery time 330 Demodulated Bitstream Output 144 Demodulator Menu 41 Demodulator Status Bar 61 DGPS 145 Dispatch 330 DMR 146 dPMR 146 DTMF 147 DUP ARQ 148 DUP ARQ 2 148 DUP FEC 2 149 DZVEI 150 E El and T1 digital trunks 286 Edit Menu 269 EEA 150 EFR 151 EIA 152 Encryption 101 Equalization 103 ERMES 152 Error Indication 35 EURO 155 F Favorites Menu 45 FAX 106 FAX amp Modem Analysis Selector 69 FAX amp Modem Mode Selector 68 FAX amp MODEMS Full Duplex 184 Fax amp MODEMS Half Duplex 182 FAX amp Modems Menu 33 FAX amp Modems Settings 36 Fax and Data Transmission 287 FAX Transmission Sequence 106 FAX G3 V 17 182 FAX G3 V 27ter 183 FAX G3 V 29 183 FAX G3 V34hdx 183 FEC A 155 FELDHELL 156 FELDHELL data 314 FFT 71 FFT HF SUB DIR and SAT 72 FFT and Sonagram 73 FFT Window 259 265 344 e Index WAVECOM Decoder FFT Sonagram Context Menu 63 File Header 309 File Headers and Data Structures for Individual File Types 310 File Menu 23 268 First start 18 Fixed Station Initiated Session 278 FLEX 157 FM HELL 157 FMS BOS 158 Font 48 Formatting and Source Coding 99 Frame Format 36 FSK Frequency Shift Keying 105 FSK Analysis 76 FSK Analysis Options 78 FSK Code Check 79
123. 30 Hz automatically The user needs to place the frequency cursor in this range The user has to specify the polarity of the signal i e NOR mal or INV erse CHU CHU is a radio station operated by the National Research Council of Canada It continuously broadcasts time information on 3330 kHz 7850 kHz and 14670 kHz The information provided is the Gregorian year Julian date UTC hour minute and second Further infor mation is a leap second warning DUT1 the difference between the International Atomic Time TAI and UTC and the code for the Canadian daylight time indication 128 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Parameter Value The coded message is transmitted using Frequency Shift Keying the baud rate is 300 baud the mark frequency is 2225 Hz and the space frequency 2025 Hz The display shows the information of each packet on a single line The first packet sent at the 31st second of each minute provides the year the delta information and the daylight saving pattern code The following packets sent between seconds 32 and 39 provide day hour minute and actual second The user can specify the polarity of the received signal i e NOR mal or INV erse CIS 11 CIS 11 transmissions are mainly in the Russian M2 3 SHIFT CYR adaptation of the ITA 2 alphabet It is a full duplex system with two transmission frequencies Parameter Value Operation modes Full duplex Mo
124. 315 kHz It is a correction signal for GPS receivers and is used to increase the accuracy of the sat ellite based GPS signal DGPS is based on the transmission of correction data by a reference station the position of which has been determined with high accuracy by traditional position finding measurements With the correction data an absolute accuracy to within 4 meters can be achieved Parameter Value Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF Additional Info ITA 5 Transmissions use MSK Minimum Shift Keying with speeds of 100 or 200 baud DGPS has been implemented according to RTCM SC 104 Recommended Standards for Differential Navstar DGPS Service v 2 0 Jan 1990 e These messages are decoded 1 3 7 9 13 16 e These messages are NOT decoded but their type is indicated 2 4 5 6 8 10 11 12 14 15 17 60 64 e Compared to M 823 2 messages 4 and 5 are not decoded by my implementation neither are the equivalent GLONASS DGPS data which is formatted according to RTCM v 2 0 or 2 1 is continuously transmitted in frames con sisting of a varying number of data words The two first words of each frame contain the reference station id the message type a sequence number the frame length and the health of data A data word has a length of 30 bits 24 data bits and 6 parity bits The last two bits of a word are used as an EXOR function for selected bits of the succeeding data word The value of the la
125. 32 bits each The length of a message block is always constant The basic modulation type FFSK 1600 Baud can transmit one message block With a higher modulation type it is possible to transmit four complete and independent message blocks To distinguish between the different message blocks they are called phase A to D A message block contains a lot of smaller messages 8 different message types are used with FLEX gt Alphanumeric Secure messages for text based messages Three types of numeric messages Binary messages Tone Only messages V Y V WV Instruction messages for configuring the pager devices FM HELL FM HELL is a synchronous picture telegraph system like FELDHELL It is using a virtual matrix laid down on the character to be transmitted The pixels of the matrix are then sent scanning the matrix from the bottom of the first column left to the top of the last column right covering a matrix of 7 columns x 14 lines Pixels are always sent in pairs WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 157 Parameter Operation modes Graphic Mode Broadcast simplex ymbol rate 122 5 Bd Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF By selecting the mode with a baud rate of 122 5 Bd reception is started Selecting Polarity will determine normal or inverse screen color FMS BOS FMS BOS is a radio signaling system for security authorities and organizations The system allow
126. 34 1100 1166 29 W CODE Baudrate Card 1 100 186 e 1005 1098 1191 20 0 7 1 l l 1 1 l 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 0 I H vV Zoom Normal i y i gt z 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 Zoom 2X Zoom 4X Hz 12 44 22 12 44 42 12 45 02 ih Ad WSs ool 12 44 22 12 44 42 12 45 02 12 45 22 12 45 42 12 46 02 12 46 22 12 46 42 12 47 02 12 47 22 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 12 47 42 12 48 02 Hz l l l l l l l l l 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 Hz 78 e Analysis Tools WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 FSK Code Check The purpose of the FSK Code Check is to automatically identify the mode of transmission baud rate fre quency shift and center frequency FSK Code Check HF FSK code check is started in automatic mode by selecting the Analysis Code Check button or from HF Modes Analysis FSK Code Check This function has a high degree of accuracy when determining baud rate frequency shift and center frequency of HF FSK systems As an additional aid FSK code check also offers an option to start the analysis manually after user entry of baud rate frequency shift and center frequency To utilize this option the Auto button must be deselect ed The software will then start data acquisition using the pre selected parameters If a pre selected pa rameter has been changed data ac
127. 490 446 100 446 200 MHz CEPT ECC DEC 05 12 149 01875 149 11875 MHz Licensed ETSI TS 102 658 Licensed PMR frequency bands 146 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Additional Info Voice codec AMBE 2 3600 bps Bit rate 4800 bps Supported Modes gt dPMR446 gt dPMR Mode 1 gt dPMR Mode 2 TS 102 490 covers only license free hand portable equipment operating in peer to peer mode The radios should have an integral antenna and are limited in their output power The standard is also called as dPMR446 TS 102 658 uses the same air interface technology as in dPMR446 without the limitations of the license free counterpart It supports different levels of functionality as listed below gt Mode 1 Peer to peer direct network gt Mode 2 Conventional repeater network gt Mode 3 Managed centralized network The current version of the dPMR decoder supports the Modes 1 and 2 as well as the license free dPMR446 operation To use the mode set Offset to the IF output of the receiver Decoded voice will be saved in a wav file in the default Data Output directory Use the Mute button to mute or un mute live voice output to the speaker DTMF The entire call number is transmitted by consecutive tones in decade sequence Parameter Value The entire call number is transmitted by consecutive tones in decade sequence In most systems the accuracy of the single frequencies has to
128. 5491 FREQ 1538 200000 B SERV EVNT ass MES_ID py FREQ 1535 540000 B SERV EVNT ass MES_ID 30 178 FREQ 1553 350000 B SER EVNT ass MES_1D 10884407 FREQ 1553 520000 B SERV EVNT ass MES ID 6497571 FREQ 1554 900000 B SERV TEL EVNT srt MES_ID 67801 FREQ 1538 200000 TX_CHA ID 11280 B SERV TEL EVNT end B SERV EVNT ccs B SERV EVNT ass MES_ID 1454215 FREQ 1533 560000 228108 210 82087 C Users Public Documents WAVECOM W51PC Data Output SAT 3B aad ae bpp C Users Public Documents WAVECOM W61PC Data 03 03 2010 1 SAT B TEL 10019317 C Users Public Dcocuments WAVECOM W61PC Data 03 03 2010 1 SAT B TEL 14413722 C Users Public Dcocuments WAVECOM W61PC Data 03 03 2010 1 SAT 3 TEL 14413722 C Users Public Dccuments WAVECOM W61PC Data 03 03 2010 1 SAT B TEL 16323651 C Users Public Documents WAVECOM W61PC Data 03 03 2010 1 SAT 3 TEL 5915943 C Users Public Dcocuments WAVECOM W61PC Data 03 03 2010 1 SAT B FAX 49 4103 431838 C Users Public Documents WAVECOM W51PC Data Output 03 03 2010 SAT 3B TEL 5961910 C Users Public Documents WAVECOM W61PC Data 03 03 2010 1 SAT B TEL 5915943 C Users Public Documents WAVECOM W61PC Data 03 03 2010 1 SAT B TEL 2533442 C Users Public Dcocuments WAVECOM W61PC Data 03 03 2010 1 SAT 3 TEL 5915943 C Users Public Dcocuments WAVECOM W61PC Data 03 03 2010 1 SAT 3B TEL 2986132 C Users Publ
129. 6 wf a w HT o Horizontal tabulation SUB Substitute r LF Line feed ESC E ofofo es can i 8 H x VT eau tabulation FS Fite sanar ator ojojoj ur em 9 fi vy i fy FF Form feed GS Group separator 0000 ECO sue 1 fs 2 a 2 cr carugerewm RS Record seperate WT ESC 50 shift out US Unit separator o ee pg nolih cr os DLE Data link escape DEL Delete eph so es gt nN Paya _ 0 00 CO post Pe CI E 7 bit ASCII code Normally eight bits are transmitted with the 8th bit either set to 1 or 0 used for odd or even parity or to expand the alphabet WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00Fundamentals of Radio Data Transmission e 99 Digital Tex Format Trans mit Pulse Chan FE on wave ASA di I D l J y I code late l Detect ceive An example of source coding for analogue input is the process of transforming analogue voice to digital bits by way of sampling the input signal quantizing it into discrete amplitude levels and finally converting the quantized signal into 8 bit data words This process is used for the conversion of ordinary analogue telephone speech into standard PCM Pulse Coded Modulation digital signals used globally in the Public Switched Telephone Network Other examples for voice coding are the coding used for GSM mobile tele phones or LPC Linear Predictive Coding used for narrow band digital voice To reduce redundancy i e to use the transmissi
130. A format This format is used to save decoded text together with time stamps in a text file The import of old W40 W40PC W41 W41PC and W51 W51PC files is also supported For more details see WAVECOM Data File Format on page 309 Media Player Recorder The Media Player Recorder enables the user to record and save audio signals as WAV files for later play back to the W CODE decoder Audio signals are recorded directly from the local host sound card and saved as WAV files on the host computer During playback the audio signal is sent directly to the W CODE decoder in digital format with out any further processing or conversion the sound card is completely bypassed To enable the user to monitor the signal the signal is also routed to the local host sound card output The Media Player Recorder is controlled from the Media Player Recorder dialog Media Player Recorder Input Device Microphone High Definition Aud Input Output E Input Source Output Device Speakers High Definition Audio Sample Rate 48000 Bits per Sample 16 Channel EJ l dE 50 50 40 30 20 10 File C Transter BEL CODANSCODAM BEL Demonstrations Signalas Signal ES Clear list Time 0 11 n O a Monitor Close 45000 Hz 16 Bits 1 Channel The Media Player Recorder dialog can be opened from either the File gt Media Player Recorder menu or from atoolbar button The Media Player Recorder dialog can
131. ASCII FSK with a shift of 340 Hz The transmission format is based on DIN 19244 i e start bit 8 data bits parity bit and stop bit The length of the data frame is variable therefore a length field is required The frames consist of a start character followed by the length information which is sent twice The fourth byte is the start character again Bytes five to seven are message number address field A1 and address field A2 After a maximum of 16 data bytes a checksum is transmitted and finally the stop character The checksum is an addition of the message number address and data fields without considering carry bits Messages are sent twice to increase transmission security Two user data protocols are in use Semagyr TOP and Versacom As messages do not contain a protocol identifier both formats are displayed together with the raw data string in hexadecimal format Using Op tions Display Mode the display may be toggled between All frames and Error free frames If messages are not at hand EFR periodically transmits time signals which allow the receivers to synchro nize their internal clock From time to time a test signal is transmitted containing the name of the trans mitter e g DCF49 WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 151 EIA The entire call number is transmitted by consecutive tones in decade sequence When two identical digits are to be transmitted consecutively then an ele
132. Alarm string Enable SMS SMS settings Time Do not repeat duplicate messages for 15 minutes Save folder A Cancel Proceed as follows Enter a phone number for the message to be forwarded to Check the Enable SMS box to enable the forwarding gt Set the SMS time delay 1 59 minutes v gt Select a folder where to store the SMS files using the browse button on the right Note To forward the SMS message files created using these settings requires a third party product Run This menu allows you to start and stop the monitoring of the Alarm Monitor After connecting to a card you must press the Start menu item to begin monitoring Before you can select a new card you must stop Alarm Monitor using the Stop menu item When Alarm Monitor is active this will be indicated in the title bar with the message Running Use the scrollbar to see the whole text line Run Options Settings Setup Help z2WORLD CUP FINAL JAMAICA 2 JAPAN 1 z2WORLD CUP FINAL ARGENTINA Note The display will only allow the user to look back over the last 1000 lines of text Serial Link Introduction Serial Link is an integral component of the decoder software Although it is a separate application it is on ly useful when used in conjunction with the WAVECOM decoder software Serial Link can send all data from text modes of eight decoder cards to eight different COM ports Each COM port can be configured 302 e Additional Funct
133. B B Y Y B B Y B Y Y B B Y settings via the Y B V1 Channel item in the Options menu In the Y B V2 Channel menu one of four combinations is selectable Most Twinplex stations work with the V1 combination of Y Y B B and Y B Y B or B Y B Y in the V2 chan nel Transmissions with a B Y B Y combination in V1 and Y B B Y in V2 are however also possible TWINPLEX F7B Principle of Operation shift 170 Hz Center 1700 Hz 441 Channel Y B B V2 Channel Y B 7 B 2 shift 115 Hi Frequency f3 Frequency f4 1785 Hz 1900 Hz Frequency f1 Frequency f2 1500 Hz 1615 Hz Measurement and Determination of TWINPLEX Frequency Shifts Proper tuning is done using the FSK Analysis The frequency shifts may be measured using the cursors The effective center frequency is the mid frequency between the two inner tones f2 and f3 This is also valid in case of asymmetrical shifts e g 115 170 515 Hz After the measurements and the determination of the V1 and V2 frequencies the values found must be set up via the Shift item in the Options menu If no standard combination is used the shift dialog box will allow the entry of any combination After the previously described set up has been completed the TWINPLEX mode can now be started by se lecting 100 0 Bd or a variable baud rate 240 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 The preferred demodulator type is the MFSK mode Otherwise the DSP mode may be
134. B automatically adjusted depending on center shift and speed Individual tones are filtered and PB automatically adjusted depend ing on tone spacing center and speed Individual tones are filtered and PB automatically adjusted depend ing on tone spacing center and speed lot tone can be manually set PB bandwidth automatically adjusted depending on center shift and speed The center frequency can be manually set PB bandwidth automatically adjusted depending on center shift and speed The center frequency can be manually set BR6028 DBPSK D8PSK ANALYSE PB bandwidth automatically adjusted depending on center shift and speed The center frequency can be manually set PB bandwidth automatically adjusted depending on center shift and speed The center frequency can be manually set PB bandwidth automatically adjusted depending on center shift and speed The center frequency can be manually set Freely configurable Freely configurable No filtering implemented PB bandwidth automatically adjusted depending on center shift and speed The center frequency can be manually set cme No ein implemented TIME ing i om EXT DEM BYPASS No filtering implemented The PB parameters can be set to maximum bandwidth switched off with the Maximize Passband but ton 70 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Analysis Tools FFT The real time FFT analysis is a powerful spectrum analysis tool
135. B first is sent to mark the end of message EOM The EOM sequence is followed by flush bits for flushing the FEC coder and for the complete transmission of the remainder of the interleaver data block 176 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Data Block 256 symbols N Mini probe 31 symbols Regularly Re inserted Mini Preamble 103 symbols The FEC and the interleaver are used to combat the effects of fading frequency drift multi path effects and burst noise etc in the HF transmission The mini probe and regularly re inserted mini preamble are transmitted to help keep the receiver synchronized The MIL 188 110B decoder processes all the above settings except 12800 bps This setting is usually not to be used for reliable data transmission because it has neither FEC nor interleaving Generally MIL 188 110B transmits the user data in binary mode i e it does not care which type of data is transmitted This Should be defined by the protocol layer using the MIL 188 110B mode For this reason the decoder just displays the user data in BINARY HEX ASCII ASYNC ASCII ASYNC 7 Data bits and O Stop bit or ASCII SYNC format which may be selected from Options Message Type The decoder stops display ing data after the EOM bit pattern is received In the HEX display mode the decoded binary data is just displayed as is MSB first Display is terminated when more than 25 NULL he
136. Bit Correlation TETRA VDL M2 Bit Length Analysis VDL M2 Mode Selector Mode Selector Demod Bitstream Output Analysis Selector VHF UHF DIR Mode Selector See Mode Selector on page 65 30 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 VHF UHF SUB Menu INDIRECT modes require additional AM or FM demodulation in the receiver If the signal is demodulated from an IF IQ signal offset frequency lt gt 0 then a standard AM or FM software demodulator is automat ically added to the signal processing path The various VHF UHF SUB protocols are displayed in the VHF UHF SUB menu To start decoding of the desired mode click on it The various analysis tools are displayed in the Analysis menus The descriptions of the operating modes in a separate section of this manual are arranged in alphabetical order The Mode Selector is available from the VHF UHF DIR menu and from the WAVECOM Toolbar VHF UHF SUB Analysis Satellite Fax amp Modems Options Demodulator Fa Analysis ACARS ATIS BIS FMS BOS GMDSS DSC VHF MOBITEX 1200 MPT 1327 NMT 450 NWR SAME PACKET 1200 X 25 ZVEI VDEW SELCAL Analog Mode Selector FFT Sonagram FFT amp Sonagram Waterfall Oscilloscope FSK Analysis FSK Code Check PSK Symbol Rate PSK Phase Plane SELCAL Analysis Classifier Classifier Code Check Autocorrelation Bit Correlation Bit Length Analysis Demod Bitstre
137. Bulletin Board form the NCS the user may deduce which spot beams are visible in his location Session Success Fax Patience is required when monitoring satellite transmissions as the monitoring of sessions may fail in par ticular fax sessions The reasons for the failure may be gt gt gt The W61PC monitoring system cannot synchronize to the traffic channel because the traffic chan nel is not in a spot beam seen by the antenna or it is too weak Check the FFT display The W61PC monitoring system cannot synchronize or it may synchronize but after some time it loses synch because the traffic channel is in a spot beam which is disturbed by a neighbor chan nel This neighbor channel can be inactive at the beginning of the session but is activated after a while Check the FFT display The session is terminated after less than 100 seconds and no fax is received Many fax sessions never start transmitting fax data because the handshaking process at the beginning of the ses sion fails The handshake may take as long as 120 seconds The fax transmission is successful but the fax viewer does not display anything or displays only a partial fax This could be due to bit errors preventing the fax decoding process or because the fax devices during the handshake agreed on a coding version not yet implemented in the WAVECOM fax viewer The fax transmission is successful but output is not the default TIF file but a JBG file becau
138. C are described in detail in the ITU Rec M 493 11 GOLAY GSC The GOLAY GSC pager system originates in the USA and is based on the binary code found by Marcel GOLAY GSC GOLAY has been in use since 1973 The first standard defined only tone calling and could handle a maximum of 400 000 addresses After 1982 the system also allows for alphanumeric transmis sion and up to 4 million addresses may be selected via a coded preamble Parameter Value Operation modes Broadcast FEC Modulation Symbol rate 300 600 Bd adaptive Receiver settings FM BW 15 kHz aliada Frequency range K GOLAY Addressing Format 23 bits 23 bits 14 bi 12 data 11 pari 12 data 11 pari eqn gr 1 word 2 word comma 200 ms This illustration shows the basic address format of the Golay Sequential Code GSC It is constructed from two code words which are derived using the Golay 23 12 algorithm The bit rate for each code word is 300 bit s Each received Golay word can contain up to three errors before integrity is compromised The GSC is asynchronously decoded To separate adjacent addresses a separator word comma is transmit ted at a rate of 600 bit s The message format is based on eight BCH 15 7 code words that are grouped together to have exactly the same length as an address Messages and addresses are thus easily interleaved Each message block may contain up to 12 numeric or 8 alphanumeric characters Messages which are longer than a si
139. COM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Appendix e 323 DEC OCT HEX BIN Symbol HTML Number Description 5 00110100 2 064 34 4 5 067 37 7 6 070 8 amp 52 Four 00110111 amp 55 Seven 5 5 38 00111000 amp 56 Eight 57 071 39 00111001 9 amp 57 Nine 59 073 3B 00111011 amp 59 Semicolon 61 075 3D 00111101 amp 61 Equals 6 00111111 amp 63 Question mark 3 077 3F 70 106 46 01000110 F amp 70 Uppercase F 75 113 4B 01001011 K amp 75 Uppercase K 324 e Appendix WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 DEC OCT HEX BIN Symbol HTML Number Description 34 91 1 92 1 5C 01011100 amp 92 Backslash 93 135 5D 01011101 amp 93 Closing bracket 95 137 5F o1011111 amp 95 Underscore 97 141 61 01100001 a amp 97 Lowercase a 99 143 63 01100011 C amp 99 Lowercase c 100 144 64 01100100 d amp 100 Lowercase d 101 145 65 01100101 e amp 101 Lowercase e 102 146 66 01100110 f amp 102 Lowercase f 104 150 68 01101000 h amp 104 Lowercase h 106 152 6A 01101010 j amp 106 Lowercase j 108 01101100 amp 108 Lowercase 09 154 6C 1 155 6D 01101101 m amp 109 Lowercase m 110 156 6E 01101110 n amp 110 Lowercase n 111 157 6F 01101111 O amp 111 Lowercase o 113 161 71 01110001 q amp 113 Lowercase q 115 163 73 01110011 S amp 115 Lowercase s 116 164 74 01110100 t amp 116 Lowercase t 117 165 75 01110101 u amp 117 Lowercase u 118
140. Check Sequences r Classifier Code Check Sequences Process sequence selection Process 1 Classification Process 2 Classification Table Check Table Check mp Code Check Process 4 Classification Table Check m Data Decoding Process 5 Classification TableCheck mp Code Check Data Decoding From this list the desired mode of operation of the CCC is selected Each process performs one or more steps to narrow down the possible candidates for eventual successful signal determination or decoding The availability of more or less complex processes allows the user to select the process which is best suit ed to his purposes The process selected is shown in the status line Process Steps Only classification is performed but no decoding Classification and table check are performed but no decoding Classification table check and code check are performed but no decoding ed valid detector was found Classification table check and code check are performed and finally the signal is decoded if a mode with an associated valid detector was found Classifier Modulation Settings pe Classification and table check are performed and finally the signal is decoded if a mode with an associat Classifier Modulation Settings Modulation type FSK FTE MFSK cw OFDM 2 PSE 4 PSK a PSK 16 PSK OOPSK Voice All Classifier aptions Fl Continuous Mode Cycle Mode Data Acquisition Mode Previous Samples
141. Coast from the Mexican border to Bonita Beach FL Z 7 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 Ko ohnston Atoll 15 16 LA 18 19 20 21 2 9 Missouri Virgin Islands of the U S 0 Montana Wake Island Nebraska aker Island Nevada owland Island Jarvis Island New Hampshire 4 New Jersey B H North Dakota L p L ake St Clair almyra Atoll Lake Ontario 9 Ohio 0 Oklahoma Oregon Pennsylvania 4 Rhode Island South Carolina 6 EM EM EN EM EN New Mexico New York North Carolina EM 40 EN EN 44 7 5 St Lawrence River above St Regis 5 South Dakota 192 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Code Area n E PSSCCC FIPS Area Codes Canada Code Area fee nee Nova Scotia New Brunswick Prince Edward Is ee Saskatchewan land Newfoundland and Labrador O and Labrador Abeta fees Te British Columbia ries Manitoba SSS NXDN NXDN is a proprietary narrowband digital protocol developed by ICOM Inc and JVC KENVOOD Co to provide a low complexity digital radio protocol solution which satisfies the FCC narrowbanding mandate Parameter Value Frequency range VHF UHF Operation modes Digital voice and data system Modulation 4 level FSK Vocoder AMBE 2 input forma The modulation type enables manufacturers to use existing analog FM designs with the add
142. DPSK2A 8 tones parc AAA RS coding is utilized to correct transmission errors Four coding levels called RS Efficiency are specified which allow for more or less error correction within a block The percentages in the following list of coding levels relate the number of information symbols user data to the block length a block comprises user data and parity check symbols ROBUST 60 NORMAL 75 FAST 90 gt OFF 100 i e no error correction Yv Y WV The level of RS Efficiency is automatically detected by the demodulator After successful synchronization it may take up to a minute before any text is output in the GUI Using Options CRC Table a certain CRC mask can be defined see CRC Table on page 34 The Options Display Mode provides the options to display All Frames or Error free Frames which means frames with the correct CRC check WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 133 CODAN SELCAL The mode was developed by the Australian CODAN PTY and is very similar to GMDSS DSC Parameter Value Frequency range Operation modes Digital Selcal Additional Inf CODAN SELCAL operates with 100 0 Bd and can be started by selecting the mode A preamble of at least 100 dot reversals which are 50 changes between 0 and 1 low and high bit precedes the data block This lead in has duration of 2 0 seconds Digital MARK 1 is represented by a frequency of 1870 Hz and S
143. EC and interleaving to combat the effects of fading frequency shift multipath and burst noise The user data is transmitted using a continuous frame structure with a variable block length number of symbols depending on user data rate and message type Each transmission starts with a preamble consisting of three phases followed by block synchronization and data segments The data block immediately follows the next block synchronization segment defining again the start of the next data block This repeated frame structure enables synchronization of the de modulator at any time of transmission FILL DATA The end of transmission is determined by an EOM sequence at least ten ones 1 E 317 5 ms lt 315ms gt e 180 ms 22 5 ms DATA SUPER UNMODULATED MODULATED BLOCK BLOCKS S BLOCK 8064 TO 31752 BITS gt PREAMBLE gt 40 REFERENCE TONES Data Display There are two different types of data transmissions synchronous and asynchronous In the synchronous data mode the data is bit synchronously displayed as 7 bit characters while in the asynchronous mode different character lengths are possible using start stop and parity bits The parity WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 173 start and stop bits as well as the special null characters inserted by the modem and not being part of the data stream are ignored by the display The decoder st
144. ET O AN 329 HF CaDINO AAA Pe A a aan edet 329 COUGHING each oe eet O 329 MOCALIONWOMGACCOG CN naa aid A 329 PES and perimetral Siria ala 329 VideO MONO di 329 LAN AN Nai 329 GONGIEIONS On SA a nuda mame anee 329 GENERA IA uu isk O 329 PrI ES cias aida 330 DEV GE ENTS A la 330 DISD OU CI asic A A AA aba ewes 330 RECUENTO OOO St aa 330 PAYO Sia a A A 330 RESErVation O OWNErSNID rra ias 330 Cancela Maa acid 330 Changes of order quantities uni eni 330 Legal ao miii da 330 Wa Vrrrnisrraira rr AAA AAA 331 ODIO titles 331 COD VRC ant ES Esa 331 WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Contents e ix ASAS 331 Laws anad regulations aaa 331 License VERAS a A a a A AAA A a 331 Man nu fact rer Address lid 332 Glossary of Terms 333 Index 343 x e Contents WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 General Information e 1 General Information Welcome Thank you for choosing a WAVECOM decoder product The product that you have purchased includes the latest technology in data decoding together with the latest software release available at the time of ship ment Please check our website at http www wavecom ch for software updates Before you install the product please also check the latest documentation on the installation CD DVD or on our website WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG develops and sells products for wireless HF VHF VHF SHF data monitoring
145. FDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Modulation Bandwidth efficient MOCUI AtION ccceceeceecaceeceusaueeseuss INDIRECT FM A A dE INDIRECT AM isc ads da MO A O A EN A ie Rrceasieds ta iaveas mauneaessse natant ARQ6 90 and ARQ6 98 cccssssesseeeeececececcecceccccuuueusassasaeeeeeeees A NA A E O desctecontasaapes ora EST a E ci W PCI e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Contents e v vi e Contents CIS SU a eater ae en eal naa vente eae nee 132 CLOVER a wee trea te a Aya Mie acct tid wedi id a A iene catia de ace A Rae en elena 132 CEOVER 2000 ir a il los 133 GCODAN SEE CGAL oi a OA 134 CODAN 00 Lt A A ie 134 COOQUELE T Sut AS dadas 138 COQUBLET S cta tal barda 139 COQUELET Uat OEA 140 CS Seis E E eae aaa nae he EE EE E ee ae eee ees 141 ON RN O 142 EWEMORS Esc aaa ida alada nia ina 142 DESSELCAL o A ne ee eee 143 Demodulated Bitstream Output cccccccccccccccccccccocococccononnonrororrrrrrrrorooronossss 144 DU dd 145 DMR ccc ete rant id taa 146 APM Careto area neta eens 146 DTM a a ad odia nae 147 DUP ARO it dada 148 DUP ARO Zas tasa es sas ci 148 DID T e EA NEA ae kv cca carne A EE AS hoah cat eae ota eee aa teen e T 149 BPAY St rata eta Rene tono cacao drid 150 PEA A a e 150 Ey arrasan cdersas ro a dr deae circo daa OS nenE 151 A tare E a aa no was cee aw EE E EA EE Son A AE E E ea nae e 152 ERMES 0 uti A te veneer A At A A a aia 152 EUR searcactata ede cs ese a a ems ae ceusdo 2 aenn en uss a E A donde harar
146. FEC Adaitional Inf WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 225 The operating menus for the SPREAD 11 and SPREAD 12 are identical to the SPREAD 51 menu and are therefore not treated separately SPREAD 51 systems mostly use 102 6 Bd on the radio link 218 Bd is used more seldom The spreading used in the transmission with 11 21 or 51 bits significantly improves the data transfer reli ability The probability that two or more bits of the same character will be in error is reduced considerably using such bit spreading The software synchronizes with traffic or idle characters and the polarity is automatically recognized Since the SPREAD modes are designed in such a way that they use the same IDLE character as AUTOSPEC no clear distinction between SPREAD and AUTOSPEC is possible during idle transmissions Classification is on ly possible during actual data transmission SSTV SSTV is used to transmit still images over a voice channel Using a SSB transceiver images may be trans mitted world wide SSTV is a television standard as the images are scanned row by row and then trans mitted at a very low rate hence the designation Slow Scan Television SSTV is normally used by radio am ateurs Parameter Value colegio Operation modes Graphic Mode FSK Broadcast Simplex Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF SSTV transmissions come in a variety of modes The picture reso
147. FSK Code Check DIR 80 FSK Code Check HF 79 FSK Code Check SUB 82 Fundamentals of Radio Data Transmission 97 G Gain 45 General 328 329 General Information 2 Getting Started 303 Glossary of Terms 333 GMDSS DSC HF 160 GMDSS DSC VHF 160 GOLAY GSC 161 Graphics data 313 Grounding 329 G TOR 162 GUI 19 GW FSK 163 GW OFDM 163 GW OFDM Modulation and Protocol 164 GW PSK 165 H Handshaking 288 HC ARQ 165 Help Menu 58 273 HF Analysis Selector 66 HF cabling 329 HF Mode Selector 65 HF ACARS 166 HF Modes Menu 28 HNG FEC 167 How the Classifier Code Check Works 255 261 How the Classifier Works 250 IAS 36 ICAO SELCAL 168 INDIRECT AM 106 INDIRECT FM 106 Inmarsat Utilities 219 Input and interfacing 292 Input 44 W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Installation 267 Introduction 296 298 302 IP CONF TCP IP Data Format 305 IP PXGF TCP IP Data Format 305 ISDN digital loop 287 ITA 1 Alphabet 327 ITA 2 Alphabet 319 ITA 3 Alphabet 320 ITA 4 Alphabet 321 ITA 5 Alphabet 322 L LAN 329 Laws and regulations 331 Legal domicile 330 Letters Figures 36 Level Indicator 60 Liability 331 License System 294 License System Software and Options 294 License Terms 331 License update for CodeMeter and CmStick 295 License 50 Line transmission 286 LINK 11 CLEW 169 Location of decoder 329 Logical Channels 277 Main Menu 22 Manufacturer Address 332 M ary FSK MFSK M ary PSK MPSK
148. Forward Control Channel from base station to units and the Return Control Channel from units to base The forward control channel may be dedicated fixed non dedicated any free channel or the same for all TSC s which then access the channel in TDMA time division multiple access The return control channel is randomly accessed by the mobiles in timeslots of 106 7 ms 128 bits The forward control channel is divided into time slots each carrying two 64 bit code words gt A Control Channel System Codeword CCSC which identifies the system to radio units and pro vides synchronization to the following address codeword gt An address codeword which is the first codeword of any message and defines the nature of the message A message consists of a codeword sync sequence an address codeword and one or more data code words A codeword contains 48 information bits and 16 check bits If bit 1 is logical one the codeword is an address codeword otherwise it is a data codeword The more important address code words are ALOHA ALH TSC to mobile Carries information on the number of time slots in the succeeding frame and the channel number of the control channel REQUEST RQS Mobile to TSC Requests for action by the TSC AHOY AHY TSC to mobile General availability check ACKNOWLEDGEMENT ACK TSC to mobile mobile to TSC Response to RQS or AHY ACK from TSC also carries ALOHA time slot in formation GO TO CHANNEL GTC
149. HDLC frame with a size of 64 to 4096 bytes X 25 PLP encapsulation in a LAPB frame Cisco Internetworking Handbook 4 12 8 Variable GFI LCI PTI User data 1 _ A N a Packet level header User data ia RA Packet PLP packet i iim Frame 22 Y X 21bis frame Bit Stream The GFI General Format Identifier field contains general information of the packet format the LCI Logi cal Channel Identifier field contains information on the logical channel and the PTI Packet Type Identifi er field contains information on the PLP packet type The WAVECOM implementation of the X 25 decoder features some options that can be selected Options Frame Format offers the decoding of Basic Extended or Super frames Options Display Mode offers the display of All Frames or Error free Frames Options Display selects the kind RAW FULLFRAME DATA ONLY of data which ar to be displayed gt RAW The content of the frame is not decoded only the byte values starting with the address field are displayed hex being the best choice In this way signals can be displayed which only to some degree conform to the standard 244 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 gt FULL FRAME This is the general case in which header data as well as user data are displayed User data ar displayed in the text window and frame and packet headers are displayed in the sta tus line
150. II BR6028 Baudrate Decoder ascii v Shift Modulation FSK Bandwidth Codecheck Count 2 Recognition disabled No of Channels Minimum No ITU Designator of Channels Cor went Spacing Pilot Frequency 270 e Classifier Optional WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 MFSK For multi frequency shift signals the entry window looks like the example below for a SP 14 sig nal bno mo Edit signal gt OFK MFSK PSK OFDM Name SP 14 Baudrate Decoder Tone Duration 133 333 Modulation MFSK Spacing 16 Codecheck Count 3 No of Tones 14 Recognition disabled aigron ITU Designator Bandwidth Comments PSK For phase shift keyed signals the entry window looks like the example below for GW PSK rm So Edit Signal gt FSK MFSK PSK OFDM cw Name GW PSK Symbolrate 200 Decoder gw psk a Bandwidth Modulation Multicarrier Codecheck Count 2 No of Carriers Recognition disabled Agerra 7 esto saon Comments Pilot Frequency no Hz OFDM For orthogonal frequency division multiple signals the entry window looks like the example below for MT63 1000 Signal Parameters Editor Edit Signal gt FSK MFSK Name MT63 1000 Decoder no mode Modulation OFDM Codecheck Count Recognition disabled ITU Designator Comments WAVECOM Decoder PSK OFDM Subcarrier Symbol Rate No of Carriers Minimum No of Carriers Bandwi
151. IMN and the MESID pairs These IDs are hard coded into the satellite terminals at manufacturing time Session Signaling In its idle state the MES continuously listens to the NCSC updating its internal network status database control channels frequencies etc through the Bulletin Board messages There are two possibilities for starting a session gt Fixed station initiates the session gt MES initiates the session Fixed Station Initiated Session Through the terrestrial network the fixed station connects to a LES The LES sends a signaling message to the NCS which in turn pages the MES via the NCSC The MES receives the session oriented signaling mes Sage with its Forward MESID and sends a response back to the NCS with its Return MESID The NCS in turn sends a channel assignment signaling message to both the MES and LES and both stations will tune to the assigned traffic channel where the session will take place The traffic channel carries all user data voice fax data plus signaling messages as required At the end of the session the traffic channel is re leased and the LES informs the NCS that the channel is free again The NCS returns the assigned channel and channel equipment to its pool of available resources MES Initiated Session On a MES Request Channel the MES sends a request signaling message to the NCS containing its Return MESID The NCS then sends the traffic channel assignment using the Forward MESID to both
152. INPLEX 239 W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 U Unicode 318 User Interface 257 263 V V 21 BELL103 183 V 22 V 22bis BELL212A 184 V 23 184 V 26 V 26bis 184 V 32 V 32bis 184 V 34 184 V 90 185 V 92 185 VDEW 241 VDL M2 241 VHF UHF DIR Analysis Selector 66 VHF UHF DIR Menu 30 VHF UHF DIR Mode Selector 66 VHF UHF SUB Analysis Selector 67 VHF UHF SUB Menu 31 VHF UHF SUB Mode Selector 67 Video monitor 329 View Menu 58 272 VISEL 242 W Warranty 331 Waterfall 73 Waterfall HF SUB DIR and SAT 74 WAVECOM Data File Format 309 WAVECOM Data Formats 305 WAVECOM on the Web 59 WAVECOM Server 296 WAVECOM Server Control 296 WAVECOM Toolbar 59 W BV BitView Tool 8 W CLOUD Networking 14 W CODE 12 W CODE Device Serial Number 14 W CODE Device 47 W CODE First Start 18 W CODE Hardware Installation 12 W CODE License Checking 16 W CODE Licensing 15 W CODE Server Control 14 W CODE Software Installation 12 WEATHER FAX 243 Welcome 2 Window Menu 58 W PCI W PCIe 10 W PCI W PClIe Hardware Installation 10 W PCI W PCIe Software Installation 12 W Sat email Decoder 8 X X 25 243 XML 304 XML Frequency Memories File 62 Z ZWVEI 1 245 ZVEI 2 245 ZVEI 3 246 ZVEI VDEW 247 WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Index e 347
153. IPS an acronym that translates as In terpreter for Process Structures A small part of the computer s 64 kBit memory is used by IPS as workspace 256 bytes of data collected via a 128 channel ADC and 128 bytes of digital data is stored in this area called the IPS SysPage The SysPage covers a lot of measurement functions Status navigation power and temperature The decoder is able to demodulate decode verify CRC and display the data content in binary or as text The so called A or E packets are processed further and the information is displayed in four sections Main status temperatures power and sensors From Options Display Mode All frames or Error free frames may be selected Selecting Options Display offers the option of an ASCIT or RAW bits display APCO 25 Project 25 P25 or APCO 25 is a set of standards for digital radio communications for public safety secu rity public service and commercial applications It is standardized by Telecommunications Industry Asso ciation TIA and supports both voice and data transmissions APCO 25 compliant technology is being de ployed in several phases Wavecom decoder currently supports only Phase 1 systems Parameter Value Frequency range VHF UHF Operation modes Digital voice and data Phase 1 Symbol rate 4800 Bd WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 113 Parameter Value IMBE Rate 7 2 Kbps The common air
154. If Error Indication is switched on then characters containing errors are marked in red color If possible the error correction will correct the erroneous data WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 First start e 35 FAX amp Modems Seitings Fax amp Modems Settings Data output paths Server EiUsers Public Documents WAWEC Modem 19 273401 22 Browse Client Cilsers Public Documents WAWEC Modem 9275401 22 Browse For the FAX amp Modems modes additional parameters regarding the output location can be set in the Op tions FAX amp Modem Settings dialog box These settings are gt Server The path to the specific output directory has to be specified gt Client The path to the specific output directory has to be specified This option is only enabled in remote mode Frame Format Frame Format 600 bps Short 300 bps Short 150 bps Short 75 bps Short 2400 bps Long 1200 bps Lona 1600 bps Long 1300 bos Lona IAS IAS is the abbreviation for ISO ASYNCHRONOUS and SYNCHRONOUS modes Iso asynchronous modes have start and stop elements like Baudot but the code words have an integer number of elements The IAS function is used for the extremely accurate baud rate estimation of a synchronous or iso asynchronous bit stream The automatic phase correction for the ideal bit center sampling bit synchronism is completely inde pendent of the IAS function and
155. In the NCSC Auto Mode the decoder is able to recognize announcements for all MES IDs for a specific MES ID or a range of MES IDs depending on the watch list settings The decoder then automatically tunes to the corresponding traffic channel and decodes relevant data traffic corresponding to the settings In the decoder output window only the data content of the messages for the MES of Interest is visible Mes sages for any other MES are indicated by the message sequence number and the logical channel assigned to the MES However data files are generated for all messages received except if a watch list was de fined If a watch list was defined only messages for the MES IDs in the watch list are decoded and stored Inmarsat C data content is interpreted according to the codes shown in the table below Announcement message presentation field WAVECOM decoder output presentation asc Pres any other HEX In NCSC Auto Mode the decoder interprets the data for the MES of Interest according to the value of the presentation field Pres of the Announcement message For decoded data not for the MES of In terest the configuration selected in the display dialogue is used The NCSC Auto Mode is recommended if the user would like to intercept the traffic for a particular target MES In case the watch list does not contain any MES ID the decoder will process the first incoming announce ment After recognizing a CLEA
156. Intermediate Gain Yes Yes 600 1200 8400 Aero H High Gain Yes Yes 600 1200 10500 21000 Aero H High Gain Yes Yes 600 1200 10500 8400 21000 280 e SAT System WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Channel types The channel types for Aero are P channel A packet switched continuous channel in the forward direction ground to air from each GES carrying user data and signaling e g system tables broadcast R channel A random access slotted Aloha channel in the return direction carrying user data and signaling if the sig naling unit is 33 bytes or less T channel A TDMA channel in the return direction carrying user data and signaling The GES allocates time slots ac cording to requests from the AES C channel Circuit switched SCPC voice channel in both directions Forward Direction Return Direction C Band L Band weak signal strong signal AE A satellite region contains one or more Ground Earth Stations GES The GES manages the control chan nels allocation of traffic channels channel resources interfacing to terrestrial networks PSTN data net works Internet and session control The user terminals called an Aeronautical Earth Stations AES com municate with the GES The GES communicate with other GES within and outside its region and broad casts system information The only frequencies the AES initially knows are the frequencies of the GES in all regions all other fr
157. LES is also a TDM with the same frame structure as the NCS TDM The return channels are all 12 kBaud Aloha for SES requests call acknowledgements and registration traf fic TDMA for SES response and telex traffic and SCPC for SES voice low and high speed data 64 kbs is only decoded with W CODE WAVECOM software decodes SAT B fax with 9 6 kbps and low speed synchronous data with 9 6 kbs The decoder will automatically adjust to the modulation type in use BPSK or OQPSK All SAT Modes store the monitor information in a result file The list of all result files is displayed in the lower part of the User Interface The file names are constructed with the Date Time and possibly addition al information Additional information See SAT Settings on page 40 See SAT System on page 275 SAT B C TFC SAT B C TFC mode is used to monitor the C band return signal of SAT B down converted to an IF of 70 MHz Parameter Value Operation modes Inm B Return Msg Chnl Symbol rate 12000 Bd Modulation OQPSK Required SNR gt 15 dB 20 dB recommended eer Unlike the other SAT Modes this mode does not automatically select a frequency The user has to manual ly set the frequency and offset to the desired signal which will then not be interfered with or changed by the mode The signal level should be at least 16dB over noise a 20dB level will produce good results Session start and end are automatically recognized but
158. LO MK12 204 POCSAG 205 Polarity 43 POL ARQ 207 PRESS FAX 208 Prices 330 PSK Phase Shift Keying 105 PSK Code Check HF DIR and SUB 86 PSK Phase Plane HF DIR SUB and SAT 84 PSK Symbol Rate HF DIR SUB and SAT 83 PSK 10 208 PSK 31 PSK 63 PSK 125 PSK 250 209 PSK 31 FEC 210 PSK 63F PSK 125F PSK 220F 210 PSK AM 211 PXGF DESCRIPTION 305 PZVEI 211 Index e 345 Q Questions amp Answers 328 R Receiver 329 Receiver and Satellite Settings 49 Receiver Frequency Error Compensation 282 Recommended WAVECOM Products and Services 8 Remote Control 304 Reservation of ownership 330 Resync Mode 38 Return of goods 330 Revisions 2 RF Channels 277 ROBUST PACKET 212 RUM FEC 213 Run 302 S Sample Rate SR__ chunk 308 SAT data 311 SAT Frequency Tuning Bar 61 SAT Operation 278 SAT Settings 40 SAT System 275 SAT AERO 214 SAT B 214 SAT B C TFC 215 SAT C TDM 217 SAT C TDM SAT C TDMA 283 SAT C TDM SAT C TDMA SAT C EGC 216 SAT C TDMA 218 SAT C TDM EGC 218 Satellite Analysis Selector 68 Satellite Menu 32 Satellite Mode Selector 67 SAT M 220 SAT MINI M 221 Save As 46 SELCAL Analysis 95 Serial Link 302 Services 280 Session Signaling 278 281 Session Success Fax 283 Setting Up Card Names 296 Settings 300 Settings Alarm 301 Settings Folder 300 Settings SMS 301 Settings 49 Setup 10 Shift 43 Shortcut Manager 298 SI ARQ 221 SI AUTO 222 SI FEC 222
159. LSB or USB Input format s AF IF The basic RDS data unit is a group which consists of four blocks each having 16 data bits and 10 error detection and correction bits Groups are divided into type A and B each containing 16 different groups In the upper window a Display Mode can be selected The default display mode is All Blocks which dis plays the information of each block Binary will display the contents of a group in binary format In the lower window other information like flags time program information and transmitted text is dis played ALIS ALIS Automatic Link Set up is a simplex ARQ system and operates at a Symbol rate of 228 66 Baud on the radio link ALIS is described in report 551 2 of the ITU Reports of the CCIR 1990 Fixed Services at Frequencies be low about 30 MHz WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 111 Parameter Value Operation modes FSK Simplex ARQ The transmission block of the standard ARQ system consists of 2 identification bits 30 data bits and 16 CRC bits Data transmission is transparent for ALIS Known systems are however structured around six ITA 2 characters The two identification bits indicate one of four possible system states The CRC checksum enables detec tion and correction of transmission errors The acknowledgement block is 16 bits in length The total transmit receive cycle for ALIS is 111 bits which corresponds to a duration o
160. MAL CIS 36 50 INVERSE CIS 50 50 NORMAL CIS 50 50 INVERSE CODAN SELCAL CV 786 GPS GMDSS DSC HF G TOR GW FSK HNG FEC MD 674 Mode BAUDOT ITA 2 STANAG 5065 F SK 1 l 1 l i I I I 1 l I l I 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3250 3500 3750 4000 Hz Demodulator DSP Shift 450 Hz Center 1720 Hz Offset 0 Hz Input AF LEFT n Steps gt After starting the FSK code check the frequency shift center frequency and baud rate are deter mined The values of these parameters are displayed in the appropriate fields after measurement has finished gt The software then proceeds with code and system analysis The incoming bit stream is tested against known modes For some modes using a high interleaving depth e g RUM FEC large quantities of input data are required These modes therefore require longer to test and are tested last WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Analysis Tools e 79 gt The name of each identified system is displayed in the output window An identified system may be immediately started by double clicking the system in the output window for instance double clicking BAUDOT ITA 2 in the figure above will interrupt FSK code checking and immediately start BAUDOT ITA 2 gt The Hits Checks will show you how often during checking a mode was successfully determined If multiple modes are listed this will indicate which mode should be tried gt Some mo
161. Manual V8 3 00 AIT AIT AIN CAIN Additional information type Additional information number long message remote programming urgent alert OF non urgent alert G f miscellaneous addilional character sel paging area identity cade add or replace temporary address pointers and more data in pager country code and more ERMES and other pager systems are losing importance in Europe due to the surge in GSM usage and sev eral networks have been closed down EURO The entire call number is transmitted by consecutive tones in decade sequence When two identical digits are to be transmitted consecutively then an eleventh frequency is used as a repetition identifier Parameter Value If more than two identical digits are to be transmitted the repetition tone is appended to the digit tone e g 22222 is transmitted as f2 fw f2 fw f2 where f2 is the tone for 2 and fw is the repetition tone In most systems the accuracy of the single frequencies has to be within 1 1 5 of the nominal value Decoding the selective calls is started by clicking on a system If transmission and system selection con form the call sign is displayed on the monitor In the Options menu a Time stamp function can be ena bled to add date and time to each call Tone Allocation DIGIT EURO DIGIT EUR 979 8 510 7 oo af as ss asas Sf EA O A ETS Tone duration 100 ms FEC A FEC A uses a convolutional error correction scheme based on data
162. Nordic countries Parameter VENTE NMT 450 mobile station signals can be found from 453 MHz to 457 5 MHz base station signals from 463 MHz to 467 5 MHz The frequency range is divided into 180 channels of 25 kHz each channel 1 180 In areas with a lot of mobile subscribers an extended band from 452 5 MHz 452 975 MHz mobile and 462 5 MHz 462 975 MHz base may be used as an option The offset between mobile and base frequen cy is always 10 MHz Control messages signals containing system wide information assignment status and dialed number are exchanged between the mobile station and the base station All signals are transmitted at 1200 Bd FFSK with a center frequency of 1 5 kHz and a shift of 600 Hz An encoded NMT 450 frame has a length of 166 bits Every frame contains 15 bits bit sync sequence fol lowed by an 11 bits frame sync sequence The last 140 bits contains the encoded message In order to combat errors on the radio path due fading and interference an error correcting code is used Today NMT 450 is used in Sweden and a modified NMT 450 in Poland and Eastern Europe More infor mation can be found in the NMT DOC 450 1 450 3 specifications NOAA GEOSAT The NOAA GEOSAT software has been specifically tailored to the transmissions of meteorological satellites Transmissions are always at 120 rpm using an IOC of 576 In contrast to short wave stations which use frequency modulation satellite weather images are
163. Number LCN SAT C TDM EGC In addition to TDM channel assignments the NCSC also broadcasts so called Group Call Messages En hanced Group Calls EGC which are not sent to a specific MES but to groups of MES or to all MES The name of the file generated for such a broadcast is suffixed with _e for EGC Introduction The Inmarsat C maritime mobile satellite system has an inherent capability Known as Enhanced Group Call EGC which allows broadcast messages to be made to selected groups of ship stations located any where within a satellite s coverage Four geostationary satellites provide worldwide coverage for these types of broadcasts Two types of EGC services are available Safety NET and Fleet NET Fleet NET is a commercial messaging services offered by Inmarsat and is not recognized by the Global Maritime Distress amp Safety System or GMDSS Safety NET along with NAVTEX is recognized by the GMDSS as the primary means for disseminating maritime safety information Ships regulated by the Safety of Life at Sea Conven tion travelling outside areas covered by NAVTEX must carry an Inmarsat C Safety NET receiver by 1 Feb ruary 1999 Safety NET Services Virtually all navigatable waters of the world are covered by Inmarsat satellites Each satellite transmits EGC traffic on a designated channel at 1 5 GHz Any ship sailing within the coverage area of an Inmarsat satellite will be able to receive all Safety NET messages broadca
164. OFDM r Graphic Modes amp CW HF ACARS ARINC 635 MIL STANAG amp HF ACARS Graphic Modes amp CW CW MORSE Mode Selector LINK 11 CLEW MIL 188 110A Mode Selector is FM HELL MIL 188 110B STANAG 4539 MIL 188 110 16TONE a MIL 188 110 39TONE SSTV MIL 188 141B MIL M 55529A STANAG 4285 STANAG 4415 STANAG 4481 FSK STANAG 4481 PSK STANAG 4529 STANAG 5065 FSK HF Modes Mode Selector See Mode Selector on page 65 VHF UHF DIR Menu DIRECT modes can only be demodulated at the intermediate frequency level IF analogue or IQ The various VHF UHF DIR protocols are displayed in the VHF UHF DIR menu To start decoding of the de sired mode click on it The various analysis tools are displayed in the Analysis menus The descriptions of the operating modes in a separate section of this manual are arranged in alphabetical order The Mode Selector is available from the VHF UHF DIR menu and from the WAVECOM Toolbar VHF UHF DIR Analysis VHF UHF DIR VHE UHF SUB Satellite Fax amp Modems Options VHF UHF DIR Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Analysis k FFT Analysis AIS Sonagram AIS APCO 25 FFT amp Sonagram APCO 25 DCS SELCAL DCS SELCAL DMR Oscilloscope DMR dPMR FSK Analysis dPMR ERMES FSK Code Check ERMES ee GSC OS ey GSC _ PSK Phase Plane MOBITEX 8000 MOBITEX 8000 NXDN Classifier NXDN PACKET 9600 Classifier Code Check PACKET 9600 POCSAG Autocorrelation POCSAG TETRA
165. OM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Element Description ITimestamp The timestamp is stored as a 64 bit signed number representative of the time of capture of the first sample in the chunk block in microsecond res olution It is stored as the number of microseconds since beginning of the epoch i e 1st January 1970 midnight awRealData Float32 length Real float 32 numbers of real data array WAVECOM Data File Format The decoder is able to save data and decoder settings in a special binary file format called WDA which is described in this section WDA files may used to provide input for the BitView Tool WDA files are capable of storing various kinds of information gt Text data Graphics data FELDHELL data Signal analysis data SAT mode data Classifier data Classifier CodeCheck data Y Y YV V WV gt Sonagram data All types of WDA files contain a header that identifies the type of data stored in the file and other infor mation related to the stored data and the data proper see below FileHeader Data File Header Identical information is stored in the first 64 Bytes of the header but depending on the data stored in the data part of the file the header may contain additional information which increases its size Signature FileType Version LineCount Pad Pad2 The default size of the file header is 64 bytes The Signature is always WDA Note Older versions may carry the signatur
166. OM port is ready but data is not currently being transmitted Data is being sent to the COM port A general error occurred and the COM port is in an error state A time out error occurred The selected COM port is not available or is in use The COM port is congested Check port settings and increase the baud rate Remote Control The decoder uses Microsoft TCP to communicate between the server and the user interface This structure allows a number of decoders to be remotely controlled from a single PC Selecting a decoder for remote control is simply done using the Configuration menu When using remote control the operating details remain unchanged Details see W CODE on page 12 XML See separate documentation 304 e Additional Functions WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 WAVECOM Data Formats IP CONF TCP IP Data Format The decoder is able to receive signal data over a TCP IP stream The data format is as follows gt Sampling rates from 8 kHz to 192 kHz gt IQ data I respective Left Channel gt IQ data Q respective Right Channel It is not allowed to change the sampling rate during decoding IP PXGF TCP IP Data Format OVERVIEW The PXGF streaming and file format provides a framework for the streaming and storage of sampled data along with the meta data required to process the sampled data It is a streaming format in that synchroni zation can be regained if lost A fil
167. OWS operating system is based on a multitasking kernel and can handle several tasks simulta neously and therefore interaction with the menu system will not interrupt the execution of an active func tion This allows for example the shift and center frequency to be set in the Demodulator submenu without disrupting the currently active operating mode Main Menu Screen Display This window is displayed without any mode started 2 OA 2 155 xXx om As a standard WINDOWS procedure a left click on a menu item will display the corresponding drop down menu File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite FAX8 Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help 22 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 The functions of the File View and Window menus are general system functions in accordance with the WINDOWS standard File Menu HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF Open CO Close Save Ctrl 5 Save Ass Save As Text Save As Picture Save As Bitstream Save Selection As Save continuous Media Player Recorder Find Ctrl F Find Next F3 Clear Screen Print Ctrl F Print Continuously Print Prewiew Print Setup Recent File Exit Using the File menu files may be saved and opened Other functions such as the Media Player Recorder find printing print preview and printer setup are also available
168. Only If All Signaling Units is selected all signaling units are shown in hexadecimal except empty signaling units which are skipped If Messages Only is selected packet mode user data is converted to readable text control and manage ment packets are not decoded The satellite covering the Atlantic East region transmits a 5250 Bd A QPSK P channel on 1546 0705 MHz SAT B The SAT B system carries digital voice low and high speed data and telex The forward direction channels from land earth stations LES or CES to mobile earth stations SES or MES are 6 kBaud 12 kBaud and 65 1 kBaud TDM or SCPC depending on service 214 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Parameter Value Frequency range L Band C Band Operation modes symbol rate modu Inm B Forward NCS and LES Msg Chnl lation Forward 6 kbps DPSK NCS TDM LES TDM 24 kbps OQPSK CES Voice CES Low Speed Data 132 kbps OQPSK CES High Speed Data Return 24 kbps OQPSK Aloha TDMA SCPC Required SNR gt 15 dB 20 dB recommended mer In idle mode all mobile stations listen to the NCS Network Control Station common TDM channel which carries signaling information When a mobile station identifies its id in a signaling frame it will act on the commands received from the NCS and in case of a channel assignment message being received tune to the assigned transmit receive frequency pair The forward telex traffic channel from the
169. Open Open previously saved files Save Save received text to an already open text file If no file is open Save As will be started to ask for a valid path and file name Save As You can specify a path and file name and save the received text to this file Save As Text Save received text as an ASCI or Unicode file File name X Save as type Unicode Text Files Text Files txt Unicode Tex Files Ce O OOOO O O a Hide Folders Lo jr 7 Save As Save a bit stream e g from an auto correlation session as a text file of ASCII 0 s and 1 s Bitstream Save As Picture Save the main window as a JPEG a BMP or a PNG file Save Selection as Select a block of text and save it to a text file Save Continuously Save continuously all output to a file Media Play Record and play back WAV files er Recorder Find Search for every occurrence of a specific word or phrase in the received text Find Next Find the next occurrence of a specific word or phrase in the received text Clear Screen Prompts the user to clear the screen Print Send the received text to a printer Print Continuously Send continuously all output to a printer WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 First start e 23 Print Preview Preview the output before sending it to the printer Print Setup Open the printer setup dialog Recent File Displays a list of recently opened files Note Files that are saved with Save and Save as are stored in the WAVECOM WD
170. Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help Classifier W48 DIR Manual Mode Classification Finished Auto 154449 D S i a 2 Mode Analysis de gt AA ma 2 Ed g wmn OM OM 4B Ls e Mo A NA i _ i 1 i I A U i 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3250 3500 3750 4000 4250 4500 4750 Hz Siena 2 iim 802 2 Pam hah l 3 3 Bandwidth 4800 Hz Center 1500 Hz Offset 0 Hz Input AF LEFT The upper FFT window is shown with five signals classified in manual mode Classifier Settings Settings are accessed through the Options Classifier Settings menu Modulation MFSK Cw OFDM 8 PSK 16 PSK OQPSK Classifier Options Continuous mode Refresh list Cycle Mode Data Acquisition Mode Previous Samples w Sample Time 3 23 v OFDM Mode Partial Analysis y 30 Baud Cw Morse Protection Apply Cancel WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Classifier Optional e 251 Modulation Check any number of modulation types or voice using the appropriate check boxes to narrow down the range of recognized signals Continuous Mode If continuous classification is desired check this box Continuous mode can be halted and restarted pressing the Start Stop Classifier button If the Continuous Mode check box is left unchecked each classification must be started manually by pressing the Start Stop Classifier button The classifier al lows only one cl
171. PACE by 1700 Hz The dot pattern is followed by a word synchronization sequence called the phasing preamble The char acters no 125 and no 108 are alternately transmitted for 1 2 seconds This sequence is followed by the data block with different control characters and the message Each data byte consists of 7 data bits and 3 parity bits Thus the duration of each character is 100 ms Selecting Options Display offers the option of an ASCII or RAW bits display CODAN 9001 CODAN 9001 is an asynchronous adaptive ARQ system Data is modulated onto 16 tones spaced at 112 5Hz intervals The modulation rate of each tone is 75 Baud the modulation type is differential qua ternary phase shift keying differential PSK4A Parameter Value Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF 134 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Parameter Supported functions Output of demodulated multichannel symbols Derandomization of secure mode Derandomization of unsecure mode Arbitrary start values for derandomization of secure modes Output of recognized start value in secure mode Output of status information Output of recognized frame type Decoding of chat messages into text Decoding of text file transmissions into readable output Decoding of data transmissions into hexadecimal output Decompress data Store Channel Data for analysis purposes Automatic recognition of secure and uns
172. Parameters ditor rm eym Edit Signal gt Name Decoder Modulation Codecheck Count F Recognition disabled ITU Designator Comments WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Classifier Optional e 269 Depending on the selection of modulation method using the Edit Signal radio buttons the editor entry window will appear with different sets of entry fields see the sections below The definition of the data base fields are given at the end of this section Enter the required parameter values for the desired signal in appropriate fields Press OK to save the rec ord or Cancel to cancel the operation In numerical fields only the number 0 9 are valid however the asterisk can be used as a wild card to indicate that any value is valid FSK The example above shows the editor window for a FSK signal e g ARQ E Signal Parameters Editor per Som Edit Signal gt FSK D PSK OFDM cw Name ARQE Baudrate 46 15 Decoder arg e Shift 170 Modulation FSK Bandwidth e Codecheck Count 5 Recognition disabled No of Channels Minimum No of Channels Pilot Frequency Hz ITU Designator La FSK For aggregate frequency multiplexed signals the field under the VFT Voice Frequency Telegra VFT phy must also be filled as shown below for a BR6028 seven sub carrier signal Signal Parameters Editor me o Edit Signal gt 9 FSK O MFSK D PSK gt OFDM Name ASC
173. R signaling packet the file is stored and may be selected and viewed in the ses sion window A CLEAR or the selection of NCSC Auto Mode will also trigger a retuning of the decoder to the NCSC and subsequent decoding of the control channel If more than 42 frames not for the MES of Interest were received a timeout occurs and leads also to a retuning to the control channel WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 217 The output window is split in two as in other SAT Modes The top window Session Window displays the message packages in the order they are received The bottom window Session List Window shows the generated files of all successfully received messages The Transmitter ID field is always empty In SAT C TDM mode the MES ID may assume the value 0 This value is interpreted depending on the type of channel being decoded e Ona LES TDM channel MES ID 0 is interpreted to mean that the MES ID is not known because the message was not correctly terminated e Ona NCS TDM channel MES ID is always O since these messages are all EGC messages SAT C TDMA The SAT C TDMA mode includes a frequency memory bar but no capability to find a traffic frequency from a control channel For SAT C TDMA files are suffixed with _r for return The MES ID is always O because the ID is not transmitted together with the message as the message is identified by the Logical Channel
174. R2 2000 CODAN9001 PACTOR III require no longer an additional optional license All functions are now contained in the W CODE or W61PC license Better support of russian Windows custom inputs Wideband Classifier works with VHF UHF SUB Signals Wideband Classifier works with VHF UHF DIR Signals PxGF float support FSK Code Check SUB uses always the FM demodulator Classifier Code Check CCC VHF UHF Direct added Classifier Code Check CCC VHF UHF Sub added W CODE Modem and Fax input file settings removed Direct support for two analog input channels stereo added W Sat email Decoder requres a dedicated license 12 Sept 2011 VHF UHF Classifier Codecheck DIR and SUB merged into one 11 Nov 2011 Incorporate W PCI and W PCIe hardware into W CODE 06 Dec 2011 Enable voice classification in VHF UHF Classifier Codecheck Official launch of W PCI and W PCIe 8 1 23 Apr 2012 New mode NXDN demodulated symbol Add a switch output demod symbol with on and off to output the bitstream directly after the demodulator This parameter also added into XML interface STANAG 4285 has a demodulated symbol output for further analyze in W BitView Tool STANAG 4285 center frequency search extended to 160 Hz and various improvements Rename IAS Bitstream Output to Demodulated Bitstream Output Rename translation to offset in XML interface Add display mode to Pactor in XML interface Variou
175. ROADCAST 101010100111000011001100101110000010101100111110011010 1001011001111000110100010000000000001001010000000001101 aqnanana111110101000000001010100001000000111010001 MA00MnNn0t An excerpt of the display of PDUs here CMCE and MLE PDUs The PDUs in their entirety are not verbally interpreted only the protocol name and the name of the PDU in question are displayed whereas payload data is output as bits If no PDUs are selected this is the default setting only the status messages generated by the CMCE protocol will be displayed Path The paths for saving output data may be selected here Use Server to set the Windows folder for the output files on the server Use Client to set the Windows folder for the output files on the client This option is only enabled on a remote GUI Options Check this box if you want to save encrypted traffic for further analysis Encryption Encrypted data and voice poses specific problems for decoding as decryption of the payload is not attempted TETRA offers air interface encryption which may cover data signaling 238 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 identities etc In the current decoder version encrypted traffic similar to other traffic will trigger the indi cation TRAFFIC in the status box and an option see preceding paragraph is available for Saving traffic to a text file containing cell information destination address and payload data if
176. RONIK AG and punishable by law In addition all warranty claims will become void Liability Information contained on this publication may be changed at any time without prior notice Despite careful preparation this publication may contain errors or omissions and WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG is not liable for any resulting losses or damages Laws and regulations Before using our equipment take note of the laws and regulations of telecommunications authorities in your country It is the responsibility of the users of the equipment to determine whether the reception of the transmissions which may be decoded is permitted or not The manufacturer or vendor is not liable for violations of law of copyright or telecommunication regulations License Terms 1 Wavecom decoder software and other relevant products are license protected e g WIBU CodeMeter dongle 2 The license must be legally acquired The protected software or the product itself can only be operat ed simultaneously up to the amount of acquired licenses This means that a double license allows the user to operate the product simultaneously in two instances maximum 3 Any manipulation of the license e g the amount validity or to circumvent the license is prohibited Wavecom cannot fix the occurred damages e g automatic annulations of the license or physical change of hardware component In these cases the product must be newly acquired at its full price 4 Any manipulation to Wa
177. S C Band weak signal Return Direction L Band strong signal ME A region is controlled by a Network Control Station NCS Its functions are operation of the control chan nels and allocation of traffic channels and channel resources Each region may encompass a number of Land Earth Stations LES Their functions are interfacing to terrestrial networks PSTN data networks In ternet session control The user terminals called a Mobile Earth Stations MES communicate with the NCS and LES The NCS communicate with all LES within its control area The LES and NCS continuously broadcast system information WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 SAT System e 275 Note The information in the following paragraphs applies to the land mobile and maritime systems of fered by Inmarsat The aeronautical services differ in channel naming usage and system setup Systems Over time new generations of satellites were launched into orbit while new services were added Current ly the third and fourth generation of satellites is in operation 3F 4F Inmarsat will also be the operator of Alphasat planned for launch in 2012 which will provide L band services in Europe Middle East and Africa utilizing the expanded L band frequency ranges made available at WARC 03 World Administrative Radio Conference The fifth generation is expected to start deployment in 2013 and will operate Ka band tran sponders for the new INMRASAT
178. SCII alphabet The ALIS 2 system automatically determines the optimum operating frequency after having received a CALL command The station then sends a synchronization word address block counter and a status word The receiving station correlates this bit sequence and synchronizes itself If the transmission link is inter rupted ALIS 2 will search for a new frequency to re establish the link 112 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 If an ALIS 2 system is identified the status line will display System XXXXXXXXh where XXXXXXXXh denotes an eight digit hex id string AMSAT P3D AMSAT Radio Amateur Satellite Corporation OSCAR 40 AMSAT Phase 3D is the latest satellite in the Phase 3 series of high altitude radio amateur satellites The satellite telemetry system may be monitored Parameter Value Frequency range VHF UHF Operation modes FEC telemetry Modulation BPSK Symbol rate 800 Bd with Manchester coding Receiver settings FM BW 5 kHz Input format s AF IF Additional Info ITA 5 A complete telemetry frame consists of a 4 byte preamble a 512 byte data set and a 2 byte CRC check sum The 400 bps information is differentially encoded then EXORed with a 400 bps clock signal to create a Manchester coded PSK signal The P3 flight computer of AMSAT OSCAR 40 uses a radiation hardened Cosmac CDP 1802 microprocessor running at 100K instructions sec The operating system is called
179. SK Symbol rate 2400 Bd Center frequency 1800 Hz Receiver settings DATA CW USB LSB Input format s AF IF This mode employs 5 constituent burst waveforms BWO to BW4 for the various kinds of signaling required in the system so as to meet their distinctive requirements as to payload duration time synchronization and acquisition and demodulation performance in the presence of noise fading and multi path All of the burst waveforms use the basic 8 ary PSK serial tone modulation of an 1800 hertz Hz carrier at 2400 symbols per second Baud The same modulation is used in MIL 188 110A serial mode The burst waveforms have the following preamble and data structure Waveform Burst duration Preamble Payload 613 33 ms 1472 PSK symbols 160 0 ms 384 PSK symbols 26 bits 1 30667 s 3136 PSK symbols 240 0 ms 576 PSK symbols 48 bits BW2 640 400 n ms 26 67 ms 64 PSK symbols 1881 n bits 1536 960 n PSK symbols n 3 6 12 or 24 373 33 13 33 n ms 266 67 ms 640 PSK symbols 8 n 25 bits 896 32 n PSK symbols n 64 128 256 or 512 640 0 ms 1536 PSK symbols The data in the different burst waveforms is used for different purposes gt BWO is used for 3G ALE PDUs Protocol Data Unit gt BW1 for traffic management PDUs and HDL High rate Data Link Protocol acknowledgement PDUs gt BW2 for HDL traffic data PDUs gt BW3 for LDL Low rate Data Link Protocol traffic data PDUs gt BW4 for LDL
180. Settings i cee SAT Settings Services Select service s to monitor Y FAX V DATA Y TEL ISDN TELEX SM TELEX MM Data output paths Server C Users Public Browse Client c Users Public Watchlist All MES IDs v Individual MES IDs MES ID Ranges 12 Add Enabled Start ID End ID Enabled Start ID End ID 42 Remove Y 60 to 100 0 to 0 501 to 520 0 to 0 7 0 to 0 0 to 0 89 0 to 0 0 to 0 0 to 0 0 to 9 For the SAT Modes additional parameters can be set in the Options SAT Settings dialog box These settings are gt Service Select the service to monitor Choose between FAX DATA TEL HSD TELX_SM TELX_MM There are two different possibilities for monitoring telex TELX_SM Single message monitoring only the telex of the MES found in the Control Channel will be recorded TELX_MM Multi message monitoring the mode stays on the TDM channel until there are no more Telex transmissions on this channel Server Set the Windows directory for the output files on the server Client Set the Windows directory for the output files on the client computer This setting is only enabled on a remotely connected GUI gt Watchlist Click the All MES IDs box if all MESs must be monitored leave this box empty if only specific MESs should be monitored Enter these MES IDs into the combo box If ranges of MES IDs should be monitored enter and enable each range See SAT System
181. System a typical messaging scenario will proceed as shown in the following se quence gt An ORBCOMM System subscriber creates a message which is intended for receipt by another sub scriber s home computer Using an e mail program on a laptop PC the subscriber downloads the message to a SC gt The SC transmits the message to the Satellite that receives reformats and relays the message to a GES gt The GES transmits the message over a dedicated line to the GCC that places the message on the public switched network for delivery to the receiver subscriber s PC Internet provider gt The receiver subscriber downloads the message once the computer makes a connection via mo dem to its Internet service provider gt A message from the home base to the subscriber follows the reverse route PC to the Internet over a public switched network to the GCC GCC to GES GES to Satellite and finally Satellite to SC and SC to the user display Even direct subscriber to subscriber transmissions must pass through an ORBCOMM Gateway The software is able to decode the continuous 4800 bps stream of packet data coming from a satellite Not all messages could be shown as text but all messages are available in hexadecimal notation PACKET 1200 PACKET 1200 can be monitored in the amateur VHF and UHF bands This mode uses indirect FM sub car rier modulation Parameter Value To start PACKET 1200 select 1200 Bd or 600 Bd The corr
182. The act of causing a window to become an icon that includes the title of the window Modal Describes the state of a window or dialogue when it does not allow another window or dialogue to be brought in front of it until that window or dialogue is dismissed for example the Expression Builder dia logue MPDS Mobile Packet Data System NA Not Available NCSC Network Control Station Channel Network A collection of interconnected individually controlled computers together with the hardware and software used to connect them A network allows users to share data and peripheral devices such as printers and storage media to exchange electronic mail etc Non modal A window or dialogue that allows another window or dialogue in front of it while it is open for example the Command window On line help A reference guide accessible while using the software that provides additional information about com mands functions and the interface Option Different additional options are available from WAVECOM In the manual options are marked with Option OSI Layer OSI Open Systems Interconnection is a standard description or reference model for how messages should be transmitted between any two points in a telecommunication network Paste To place the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point 338 e Glossary of Terms WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Path name The full nam
183. The operation of the CCC is explained in detail below Classifier Signal classification is done by providing the classifier with a sample of the complex values of the input signal across the chosen sampling bandwidth for a chosen sampling time and a chosen sampling rate This sample is examined for the properties of the signals it contains The results of the classification are output as a list of classified signal parameters Two classification modes are provided a manual mode and a continuous mode In manual mode the clas sifier will make one attempt at classification In continuous mode the classifier cyclically classifies signals with a user selectable interval For more details on the operation of the classifier refer to the section Classifier on page 250 XML Table Check The objective of the table check is to accelerate the determination of the mode or protocol used by the signal s under investigation The signal parameters are checked against entries in a table in XML format The file containing the table may be created and edited by the user using CCC Editor see the section Classifier Code Check Editor on page 267 Below is a browser excerpt from the XML file with the begin ning of the file and entries for two modes VISEL and VFT 8 200 Bd displayed lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 standalone yes gt lt SignalDatabase gt lt SignalList gt lt Signal Name VISEL Mode visel Modulation FSK Disabled
184. The various analysis tools available are displayed in the Analysis menus Descriptions of the operating modes in a separate section of this manual are arranged in alphabetical or der The Mode Selector is available from the HF Modes menu and from the WAVECOM Toolbar 28 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 HF Modes are organized as follows HF Modes Analysis HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Fax 8l Modems Options HF Modes MFSK HF Modes WHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Fax Bl Modems FSK e ays E MFK MFSK Code Check PSK amp OFDM MIL STANAG amp HF ACARS Graphic Modes amp CW P ALE 400 ALIS 2 WAVECOM Decoder HF Modes FSK MIL STANAG amp HF ACARS Graphic Modes amp CW Mode Selector nin ADM 7 HF Modes PSK amp OFDM s VHF UHF DIR WVHF UHF SUB Satellite Fax amp Modems W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 PACTOR I PACTOR I AUTO PACTOR I FEC PACTOR II PSK AM PSK 10 PSK 31 PSK 31 FEC First start e 29 HF Modes MIL STANAG amp HF ACARS HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Fax amp Modems Options D MIL STANAG amp HF ACARS gt MIL STANAG Code Check HF Modes HF Modes Graphic Modes and CW VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Fax amp Modems Analysis Analysis Analysis lt v an na FSK cL t FSK Analysis v MFSK b 5 MFSK PSK amp OFDM b 7 PSK amp
185. Tune process is 0 1 deviation For deviations larger than this use Fine Tune repeatedly until the desired effect has been achieved If you succeeded in correcting the sampling rate e the vertical lines have been straightened and are perpendicular to the time axis press OK to save the measured value WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 First start e 57 WAVECOM W CODE W CODE Calibration Card 1 fie HP Modes VHFJUMF DIR VHE UHP SUB Satellite Modems Options Demodulator Favortes Configuration Wew Window Help CALIBRATION Traffic Dic Rell da 6 Mode Anotysis alee 5 OA 2 e wel x A YN A r 4 Mal Wik i A A nl AN rra Un as 780 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3250 3500 3750 4000 Hz As the sampling rate calibration feature utilizes an AM demodulator input level should be as high as pos sible resulting in a high level of contrast which facilitates the adjustments If necessary use the Demodu lator menu to adjust the AM gain and offset These two functionalities SR Fine Tuning and SR Calibration are not available when W PCI or W PClIe is used View Menu View Window Help Mode Back Mode Forward WAVECOM Alarm Monitor WAVECOM Serial Link Toolbar Status Bar WAVECOM Toolbar Level Indicator Spectrum Indicator Decoder Status Bar Demodulator Status Bar ES ESET ETEEN E la FFT Sonagram ON OFF I
186. UD Manual V8 3 00 Parameter Value Additional Info Bit rate 6250 bps Radio Link ERMES employs a radio link transfer protocol conforming to the ETSI prETS 300 133 4 standard ETS 300 133 1 to ETS 300 133 7 Transmissions are within the range from 169 4125 MHz to 169 8125 MHz all over Europe Channel spacing is 25 kHz The nominal frequencies and the channel numbering are defined as fn 169 425 n 0 025 MHz n Channel number 0 15 ERMES transmitter allocations follow the CEPT T R 25 07 annex 1 recommendation Modulation ERMES modulation is 4 PAM FM The four frequency pulse amplitude modulation carries two bits dibit per frequency step In addition to coherent phase keying ERMES also utilizes pre modulation pulse shap ing To decrease bit error rate data is encoded using the Gray code The nominal frequencies are Carrier Dibit symbol 4687 5 Hz 1562 5 Hz 1562 5 He 4687 5 He o The ERMES Protocol A sequence of 60 seconds is partitioned into 60 cycles The sequences are synchronized to UTC The cycles have duration of exactly one minute and synchronize the various ERMES networks transmitters In this way the receivers will only receive one or more cycles and thus power consumption is substantially re duced Each cycle is subdivided into five subsequences of 12 seconds each In order to maintain synchronism be tween networks the subsequence number command SSN 0 is transmitted preceding every
187. URE 11000 A 10011 orno o sono E osos i 11110 01001 L 00111 M 318 e Appendix WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 No eo eo oo Transparent LETTER FIGURE No Hex 25 Hex 24 8 ITA 2 Alphabet LETTER FIGURE ITA 2 Alphabet 11000 No af atooo o A pe E EXE O aaa esa E EXC EA S sao es as O ECC A E CE O S o arar a PC ETT E EC EEC E e ECO FF O e o E FC E PO EC TE CO WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Appendix e 319 zZ S ITA 2 Alphabet LETTER FIGURE WO 00 N mn a O O O a o Ra O o O O O Re N pa O n _ pa N O O O O O m N O r Rh e Rh e Ra Ra 11001 N QM ul O Re O O O O O m O O O Carriage Return Line Feed WO Ra Rh e Ra Ra Ra Letter Shift Figure Shift e O e O e e O e O e Space N O O O O O Unperforated tape ITA 3 Alphabet No ITA 3 Alphabet LETTER FIGURE A 2 PF E bde ef tooo eo Jo A e sooo foto d IC E A A A O s o pora a a iswwwe 1 fs EC A PO ea PEC ETE E PO IEC ERECTO E PO psf tooo e as tooo Jo py foot e E 320 e Appendix WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 No ITA 3 Alphabet LETTER FIGURE Letter Shift figure Shift Space Unperforated tape ooo o y ooroo Request ooo idle a IN 1100 idle b ITA 4 Alphabet No ITA
188. UTC minute marker A subsequence may also have duration of less than 12 seconds The remaining time is used for transmit ter switching Each subsequences is further divided into 16 batches designated A to P Thus the pagers are divided into 16 groups The transfer mode tone call only numerical call alphanumerical call is controlled by the posi tion of the batch number The receiver addressing only takes place within the appropriate batch After decoding its address the re ceiver will wait on the same frequency for data Data may be transmitted within the same batch within another subsequence batch or within subsequent subsequences Each batch is subdivided into four parts synchronization system information address and text WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 153 Protocol Structure 80 Minutes SEQUENCE 80 Cycles foo Tor o2 oo or os oe or oof Jor aa so 1 Minute CYCLE 5 Subsquence PI O O 12 Seconds SUBSEQUENCE 16 Batches TST AL SER OIE 3 Oe eee ae System Information Network and system information is transmitted within the system subdivision of a batch The system in formation is divided into two parts System Information SI and Supplementary System Information SSI Country code CC Operator Code OC PA code PA ETI ETI of transmitting of the network paging area code external traffic network 7 bits operator 3 bits 6 bits indicator 1 bit BAI BA FSI
189. W CODE Text Card 4 Sox Fle Hf Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help PACTOR HAM CRC 0 0000 Baudrate 100 00 Oe SS A NOR WF Mi i 1500 1750 Center 1314 Hz Traffic Display Mode Error free Frames 1610 23 Mode Analysis at DS AM gt 2 gt o gt u Le 11025 Hz 16 Bits 1 Channel 10H 8 l 2042 OA i 250 1 1 3500 3750 4000 Hz Input AF LEFT NUM gt Tune the demodulator to the correct center frequency and set the correct input level GUI The user interface of the application conforms to standard WINDOWS interface guidelines The main pro gram window is shown in this section This is the window you will see after setup has been completed as described in the preceding paragraphs WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 First start e 19 The WINDOWS elements TOOLBAR WAVECOM TOOLBAR LEVEL INDICATOR and SPECTRUM INDI CATOR may be moved anywhere in the screen as required In the View menu the user may show or hide all window elements By default all elements are visible Please be aware that the appearance of the GUI will vary depending on the product software version and operating system Command Line Parameters You can pass information to the application by adding command line parameters The following commands are valid i lt ini file name gt The n
190. WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 by WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG WAVECOM NACHRICHTENTECHNIK PUBLISHED BY WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG Hammerstrasse 8 CH 8180 Buelach Switzerland Phone 41 44 872 70 60 Fax 41 44 872 70 66 Email info wavecom ch Internet http www wavecom ch by WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG All rights reserved Reproduction in whole or in part in any form is prohibited without written consent of the copyright owner The publication of information in this document does not imply freedom from patent or other protective rights of WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG or others All brand names in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their owners Specifications are subject to change without further notice Printed Wednesday May 29 2013 Contents General Information 2 WECOME aaea E iaa 2 REVISION Sii as laa e 2 Recommended WAVECOM Products and ServiCe S cccccseceveesecuveeeuevensuuuuenaueueneas 8 WBV DIEVIEW TO a diia adas 8 W Ssat emall Decoder ana A A AAA 8 Setup 10 W PCIAW PGIG o lena 10 W PCI W PCIe Hardware Installation cccccceeceeeeueeeeueeenueuuueeuuenanues 10 W PCI W PCIe Software Installation occcconcccnnccnancna nn nr 12 CUE e o 12 W CODE Hardware InstallatiON ooocooonccconcccnnnn cnn 12 W EODE Software Installation ss iaa 12 WwW CODE SEV OOO a id E 14 W CODE Device Serial NUM Dec N a a ae a 14 We CECOUD NeWoOrINd a A et eu insite 14
191. YNC 7 Data bits and No Stop bit mode the bit stream is searched with another ASYNC struc ture i e one start bit 0 7 data bits The 7 data bits are LSB first In addition to the EOM pattern the display will stop if more than 300 NULL characters are received In ASCII SYNC mode each 8 bits LSB first represent one ASCII character The display will stop if the EOM pattern is received or if more than 20 NULL characters are received A switch Options Output Demodulated Symbol enables symbol output directly after the demodulator and before channel decoding FEC This feature enables the user to analyse the demodulated symbol when the above coding scheme deviates from the standard Tuning the decoder The mode decoder can process signal in both SSB settings USB and LSB This can be set by toggling the Polarity field NOR means USB and INV means LSB signal The center frequency of the decoder should be set to 1800 Hz when the receiver is correctly tuned to the sending station Small frequency deviations are automatically tracked and compensated during the decod WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 229 ing The center frequency of the decoder can be adjusted to 400 Hz from its normal setting By using the bar graph any remaining frequency difference can be compensated for by fine tuning of the receiver frequency or by adjusting the center frequency of the decoder Using the Frame Format field
192. a appear for every fourth multi frame in between data and coding information is repeated in the remaining three multi frames Compressed mode specifics For point to point channels CODAN modems utilize a dictionary based compression method which allows compression to be independent of the statistical characteristics of the source data The dictionaries are dynamically built depending on the data previously transmitted Each modem uses one dictionary for re ception and another one for transmission in such a way that a transmission dictionary at one end of the link corresponds to a reception dictionary at the opposite end of the link The ARQ protocol ensures that the dictionaries are updated and synchronized If the dictionaries deviate decompression becomes impos sible as the buffer contents cannot be reconstructed It is thus clear that for non cooperative interception deviating dictionaries pose a major problem CODAN decoding at the practical level When engaging in non cooperative monitoring a number of issues arise gt All frames and the sequence counters contained in therein must be received without errors Re transmitted packets must be discarded gt Missing packets or packets with a failed CRC must not be accepted otherwise data output will be incomplete In case of uncompressed transmissions packets with a failed CRC may be marked as such In case of compressed transmissions decompression consequently becomes impossible due to t
193. a packets are put together and further processed to a text file which contains information about the transmitting station and which can further contain com 164 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 pressed emails and or several commands If the processed data packets yield evaluable data the follow ing information is shown e Transmitting station information e If emails are found and extraction is successful possibly with a CRC Error Data transmission in formation and the extracted emails are printed e If emails are found but extraction fails the cause for the failure is printed e Otherwise if only commands are found they are printed In addition to the decoded output several files are generated in the Global Data RW directory In the subdirectory GWOFDM SN all decoded emails are stored either as text file OutFileTXT or in a folder as SSP file OutDir The SSP files can be opened with any standard text editor The subdirectory RAW_DATA saves for every transmission a log file with all detected packets and if a transmission con tains data packets a data file with the decoded data packets put together is created These files can be used for advanced examination of the transmission In the subdirectory TRANSMISSION_DATA data pack ets of aborted transmissions are saved which are used in case of a continuation of the transmission Files in the RAW_DATA and TRANSMISSION_DATA directory are del
194. a repetition identifier Parameter Frequency range VHF UHF Operation modes Analogue Selcal Modulation FM SUB Tones Receiver settings FM BW 12 kHz Input format s AF IF If there more than two identical digits are to be transmitted the repetition tone is appended to the digit tone e g 22222 is transmitted as f2 fw f2 fw f2 where f2 is the tone for 2 and fw is the repetition tone 150 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 In most systems the accuracy of the single frequencies has to be within 1 1 5 of the nominal value Decoding the selective calls is started by clicking on a system If transmission and system selection con form the call sign is displayed on the monitor In the Options menu a Time stamp function can be ena bled to add date and time to each call Tone Allocation Digit Hz Digit H 1446 1540 E REPETITION 2110 1640 C A Zz 1275 a asa a psa A A Tone duration 40 ms EFR A German company operates a radio broadcast load balancing and ripple control system for electrical power distribution networks Short telegrams are used to control street lights heaters tariff switching etc Parameter The subscribers control their equipment by sending messages to the central computer of service provider The central computer forwards the messages to transmitters in Frankfurt am Main DCF49 129 1 kHz and Burg DCF39 139 0 kHz Transmissions are 200 Bd
195. ached Now hold and drag to place the boundary between the windows where you wish when the mouse button is re leased The waterfall windows are two dimensional displays of baud rate and spectrum versus time The color in tensity of the displays represents the energy density of the spectrum and the value of the relative occur WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Analysis Tools e 77 rence of a baud rate for gray scale values white is the highest intensity and black the lowest A time stamp points to the latest sample taken The latest sample is color inverted to distinguish it from the pre vious samples If the user wishes to examine a particular sample it may be selected in the waterfall window The sample is marked with the time cursor cursors are placed in the graph window and updating is halted in that win dow FSK Analysis Options To assist in the measurement of noisy signals a peak measurement function and an averaging function are available When one of these options is selected the last five samples will be used for calculations The result is displayed in the graph window The user may also select a larger time span as basis for calcula tions from anywhere in the waterfall window Measure Peak and Average Values Select the function you wish to use from the Options menu A checkmark is shown to the left of the op tion selected and five samples are inverted in the waterfall window selected to indicate
196. ack or recording operation the user must specify the WAV file to read from or write to in the Media Player Recorder dialog File CATransteiBEL CODAN SCODAN BEL DemorstrationSignalsssignal Ea Clear list The name of the file can either be specified by typing the full file path into the text box or by pressing the folder button to browse for the required file A list of the 10 most recently used files is also available by pressing the down arrow on the right of the text box WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 First start e 25 Clear List clears the list of previously used files Time Display During the recording process the current length of the recording in minutes and seconds is displayed During playback the current playback position is shown in the time display along with a slider that shows the relative position in the file Time 0 03 The user can fast forward or rewind by dragging the slider with the mouse Level Indicator AAA l dE 60 50 40 a0 20 10 D A level indicator is provided to monitor the sound level While playing a WAV file the level indicator shows the level of the file being played At all other times during recording or while stopped the level indicator shows the level of the sound present on the selected host sound card input For stereo audio the level indicator displays two bars one for each of the left and right channels For mono audio a single bar is displayed The
197. acknowledgement PDUs The MIL 188 141B decoder processes the waveforms BWO BW1 and BW4 only because the configuration number of data packet FEC encoding and interleaver of BW2 and BW3 is negotiated during the peer to peer communication e g between two modems The decoder displays the payload data of BWO and BW1 in BINARY HEX ASCII ASYNC ASCII ASYNC 7 data bits O stop bit and ASCII SYNC formats selected from Options Message Type In the HEX mode the payload data is displayed as it is MSB first In the ASCII ASYNC mode the payload data is displayed as ASCII character i e one start bit 0 8 da ta bits one ASCII character and at least one stop bit 1 The 8 data bits are LSB first The display is stopped when 300 NULL all zero in 8 data bits characters are received or if the async data structure is violated more than 80 times In the ASCII ASYNC 7 data bits O stop bit the data is displayed in a similar way one start bit 0 7 data bits LSB first and no stop bit Also the display terminates when more than 300 NULL characters occur or the async data structure is violated more than 80 times In the ASCII SYNC mode the payload data is segmented into 8 bit LSB first ASCII characters and dis played WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 179 The waveform BW4 has only 2 bits payload data they are displayed in HEX format MSB first Tuning the decoder The decoder processes t
198. adio bands In addition commercial users also use this sys tem The data protocol was modified into several variants for this purpose The WAVECOM software auto matically detects and decodes versions 1 to 8 WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 197 Parameter Value Operation modes Simplex ARQ PACTOR operates as a bit synchronous simplex system in a fixed timing cycle The entire cycle length is 1 25 seconds and the packet length 0 96 seconds Consequently the correlation amounts to 250 bits at 200 Baud The change over time and signal propagation delay limits the system s range to approximately 20 000 km The PACTOR data block consists of three sections Header data and control status and 16 bit CRC At 100 Baud the data field is 64 bits and at 200 Baud it increases to 160 bits Block coding is performed ac cording to the CCITT standard starting with the data section PACTOR operates adaptively so the baud rate can be either 100 or 200 Baud During day time 200 Baud may be successfully used In the evening however strong propagation distortion occurs which necessi tates a reduction of the baud rate to 100 Bd PACTOR includes HUFFMAN data compression by design This scheme relies on the fact that frequently oc curring characters e g space e n or i can be represented with shorter bit combinations than characters which are rarely used A compression factor of approximately 1 7 is achie
199. adjusting the center frequency of the decoder MIL 188 141A MIL 188 141A Standard also known as Automatic Link Establishment ALE specified by the US Depart ment of Defense in September 1988 and with two Change Notices in June 1992 and September 1993 is a procedure whereby radio stations are able to automatically set up their link thus eliminating the need for skilled operators in fact the growing lack of trained and experienced staff was a driving force behind the idea of ALE WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 177 In March 1999 MIL 188 141A was integrated into the new specification MIL 188 141B Appendix A The message protocol was thereby extended slightly Parameter Value sieve cai Operation modes Broadcast Simplex FEC Modulation MFSK 8 Symbol rate 125 0 Bd Center frequency 1800 Hz Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF A station will transmit a link quality burst which may or may not contain the address of another station on a series of pre assigned frequencies The listening station s will continuously scan through these frequen cies During scanning the receiving station will perform a link quality analysis and measure signal to noise ratio and bit error ratio These measurements are used to set up a table in memory of link quality assess ments for each station and frequency Based on the values of the table the best frequency available is selec
200. ains a message from a Swiss aircraft with registration HB INR using logical channel 06 to transmit and acknowledgement of uplink block Q and a link test QO with block identifier 6 and message sequence number 0635 here the time in minutes and seconds after the hour is used other formats are also in use The flight is Swissair SR6767 A few examples of the more important or frequently seen ACARS messages M 06 ADDR HB IND TA NAK ML _O B 3 MSN 2810 FID 05005 Using logical channel 06 an unsolicited TA NAK general response _O without information is transmitted as block 3 from aircraft HB IND on flight OS005 with sequence number 2810 General responses are mainly used for block acknowledgement purposes M 06 ADDR UUUUUUU TA NAK ML SQ B 00XSZRH This is a squitter an ID and uplink test message transmitted at regular intervals from ground stations This one is a squitter SQ version 0 00 from a SITA XS ground station in Zurich Switzerland ZRH The O denotes the ASCII NUL character 00h used for broadcast A block identifier is not used M 06 ADDR OY MDS TA 5 ML B 131125 This is a data transceiver auto tune message from ground station 06 commanding the ACARS trans ceiver of aircraft OY MDS to change its frequency to 131 125 MHz At the same time acknowledgement is given for the aircraft s downlink block 5 AIS AIS also known as Universal Automatic Identification System UAIS is a worldwide radio system for ship
201. al from a remote W CLOUD station to the local speaker Level Indicator I COT Click on the Gain icon to adjust the input to the correct level Gain adjustment must never turn on the red bars of the level indicator Spectrum Indicator 50 Hz 0 50 Hz The Spectrum Indicator is a tuning tool consisting of a bar graph increasing frequency from the left to the right which displays the frequencies of the incoming signal For FSK signals the mark and space fre quencies are displayed For PSK signals the carrier is displayed Decoder Status Bar BAUDOT Baudrate 250 00 Alphabet ITA2 Latin NOR Traffic Bit Inv Mask 00000 18 40 54 60 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 The Status Bar displays decoder status information Double Clicking on Status Bar Fields Double clicking the status bar fields will open the corresponding dialog box This facilitates the use of the decoder software A double click on the shift field baud rate field frequency shift field etc of the demodulator status bar opens the corresponding dialog box Selecting a field will not terminate the active mode As far as possible value changes will be implemented immediately without the interruption of data acquisition Demodulator Status Bar Demodulator DXPSK PB Bandwidth 400 Hz Center 1859 Hz Offset 0 Hz Input AF LEFT The Demodulator Status Bar displays information about the status of the DSP demodulator Double Clicking
202. alling answer eS eS ee Se Ye Training sequence calling 10 Sync sequence full duplex calling answer 11 Second training sequence answer 12 User data Modulation Types The table below lists the various ITU fax and modem modulation modes ITU T User Data Rate bps User Input Full or 2 or 4 Modulation Rec Transmission Half Wire Format duplex FOX FSK HX Fsk WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Modem and FAX Modes e 289 ITU T User Data Rate bps User Input Full or 2 or 4 Modulation Rec Transmission Half Wire Format duplex v 27bis 4800 2400 DaPSK v 27ter 4800 2400 DaPSk 9600 L6QAM V 32 9600 7600 4800 Sync Async FDX 2W Trellis coded 32 16 4QAM V 32bis 14400 12000 9600 Sync Async FDX 2W Trellis coded 128 64 32 7200 16QAM V 90 Down 56000 Async FDX 2W Down PCM digital Up 33600 Up V 32 analogue V 92 Down 56000 Async FDX 2W Down PCM digital Up 33600 Up V 32 ana logue Internet call wait ing Decoding The fax and modem decoding features depends on three software modules which analyze one or two in coming bit streams calling and answering modems in G 711 format 8 kHz sampling rate A or mu law or a 16 bit linear format The first module analyzes the initial handshakes to route the bit stream s to the appropriate demodula tion modules fax or full duplex data of the next stage The next module demodulates the signal and echo cancellatio
203. also allows the accurate determi nation of baud rates in the case of asynchronous systems with bit errors and propagation dependent dis tortions WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Analysis Tools e 91 24 WAVECOM W CODE W CODE Bit Correlation Card 1 rr balao File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite FAX amp Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help Bit Correlation HF Traffic Filter 10 00 ms 22 18 21 os Mode Analysis v u R e ODHA 2 R Ree Ge 180 Hz L 180H2 24 W CODE Bit Correlation Card 1 Time per Line 550 004 ps m Ex JR Coarse kks gt B Fine Start w Ja ian ies aan A G aa ae o Ga Aw E 300 Hz EA A gt NX 1608 1758 1908 3600 Hz I I I I 1 l 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3250 3500 3750 4000 Hz Demodulator DSP Shift 300 Hz Center 1758 Hz Input AF LEFT The time duration of a video line and thus the display resolution is set with the sliders in Time per Line The range is 20 000 us 0 02 s to 10 000 000 us 10 s per graphical line and sampling takes place in steps of 14 us One graphical display line corresponds to the preset time Selecting the Start Stop button controls the effective data sampling By moving the mouse cursor a text field is displayed The value of the positioned segment is continuously displayed in microseconds us and in Baud Bd with the
204. also be configured Note The accuracy of the center frequency and shift settings are critical and directly influence the quality of the decoding After each configuration change the MFSK code check automatically restarts with the new values The values of these parameters are displayed in the appropriate fields after changes have been made If two or more different systems are identified or if more than five proven transmission errors occur an automatic switch to a mode will not take place A WAVECOM W CODE W C A File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite FAX 8 Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help MFSK Code Check HF Baudrate 26 66 Gathering Data NOR Channels Tones 8 21 54 58 Cael amp amp Mr Mode Analysis gt HEH ouA 2 o on 110 H2 all 11012 44 W CODE Code Check Card1 ICOQUELET 8 COQUELET 80 Hits Checks 188 Hz E eels ae asa l l l i l l l l l l l 1 l 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3250 3500 3750 4000 Hz Demodulator MFSK Shift 188 Hz Center 1093 Hz Offset 0 Hz Input AF LEFT The software then proceeds with code and system analysis The incoming bit stream is tested and com pared against known MFSK modes The name of each identified system is displayed in the output window An identified system may be imme diately started by double clicking the mode name in the output window for instance
205. am Output Analysis Selector VHF UHF SUB Selcal Analog ZVEI VDEW SELCAL Analog Mode Selector WAVECOM Decoder b CCIR 1 CCIR 2 CCIR 7 CCITT CTCSS DTMF DZVEI EEA EIA EURO MODAT NATEL PCCIR PDZVEI PZVEI VDEW ZVEI 1 ZVEI 2 ZVEI 3 VHF UHF SUB Modes Satellite Mode Analysis ACARS ATIS BIS FMS BOS GMDSS DSC VHF MOBITEX 1200 MPT 1327 NMT 450 NWR SAME PACKET 1200 X 25 ZVEI VDEW SELCAL Analog Mode Selector VHF UHF SUB Mode Selector See Mode Selector on page 65 W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 First start e 31 Satellite Menu The various satellite protocols are displayed in the Satellite menu To start decoding of the desired mode click on it or to select the modes of a group left click or let the mouse rest briefly on the group item to be selected Now the modes of the group are displayed in a separate menu Start decoding the desired mode by another left click The various analysis tools are displayed in the Analysis menus The descriptions of the operating modes in a separate section of this manual are arranged in alphabetical order The Mode Selector is available from the Satellite menu and from the WAVECOM Toolbar Satellite Analysis Fax amp Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configui Analysis gt FFT INMARSAT AERO Sonagram INMARSAT B gt FFT amp Sonagram INMARSAT C gt Waterfall INMARSAT M R Oscilloscope INMARSAT mM
206. ame of the INI file that is located in the same directory as the decoder application Alternatively a path may be entered n lt card number gt The number of the card to be connected a value between 1 and 8 c lt computer gt The name of the computer to be used for the connection gt localhost not case sensitive or 127 0 0 1 means that you work with cards on the local comput er gt Computer name or the IP address plus the port number to connect to another computer The port number must be entered on the WAVECOM Server Control screen If a port number is not provid ed then default port 33233 is used 1l lt speedlimit gt gt Speed limit of the connection to the server This attribute is a choice of 9600 14400 19200 56k 64k 128k 512k 1M 2M 5M or 10M If no l option is used the speed is un limited Examples for W CODE gt WCODE EXE i config1 ini WCODE EXE i configuration setupAB ini WCODE EXE n 2 c WCODEServer 5800 WCODE EXE n 1 c 192 168 1 12 8080 WCODE EXE n 3 c 192 168 2 5 WCODE EXE n 3 c 192 168 2 5 l 56k Y Vv VV WV Default Data and Program Folders Paths To see all folders select Folder Options in the Control Panel gt Enable Show all folders gt Enable Show hidden files folders and drives 20 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Folder Options General View Search
207. an be stored In editing it is an area in memory where cut or copied data is held sometimes called the clipboard See also clipboard and type ahead buffer Clipboard The holding place for what you last cut or copied a buffer area in memory Information contained on the clipboard can be inserted pasted into other documents and other WINDOWS applications Context sensitive Able to perceive the situation in which an event occurs For example context sensitive help presents in formation specific to the particular task you are performing rather than presenting just a general list of commands Control key A specific key usually abbreviated as Ctrl that produces control characters when used in combination with character keys CRC A cyclic redundancy check CRC is an error detecting code designed to detect accidental changes to raw data and is commonly used in digital data transfer and storage A CRC enabled protocol calculates a short fixed length binary sequence known as the check value or improperly the CRC for each block of data to be sent or stored and appends it to the data forming a codeword When a codeword is received or read the device either compares its check value with one freshly calculated from the data block or equiv alently performs a CRC on the whole codeword and compares the resulting check value with an expected residue constant If the check values do not match then the block contains a data error and th
208. an be used to extract the data header struct LineData LONG PrevSize size of the data line before LONG Size size of the data line LONG TIME time of the data received File Headers and Data Structures for Individual File Types The following sections describe the file headers and data packages of the various WDA file types Text data FileType is Text Header data This file type uses the file header described in File Header on page 309 The following additional data is stored in the header 310 e WAVECOM Data Formats WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 gt In Pad 0O the font type gt In Pad 1 the left to right font direction 1 RightToLeft O LeftToRight text direction gt In Pad 2 if Unicode chars are stored 1 Unicode O Ascii characters are stored Data This file type uses the data structure described in chapter Data Structures on page 310 to store the da ta Every single line of a text document is stored in a separate data package The length of the line is stored in the data header of the package The text data is stored as wchar character values occupying two bytes per character SAT data FileType is SAT Header data This file type uses the file header described in File Header on page 309 The following additional data is stored in the header gt Pad 0 indicates whether the file contains normal or extended data Data Thi
209. and system selection con form the call sign is displayed on the monitor In the Options menu a Time stamp function can be ena bled to add date and time to each call Tone Allocation Tone duration 100 ms PDZVEI The entire call number is transmitted by consecutive tones in decade sequence When two identical digits are to be transmitted consecutively then an eleventh frequency is used as a repetition identifier WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 203 Parameter Value Frequency range VHF UHF Operation modes Analogue Selcal Modulation FM SUB tone Receiver settings FM BW 12 kHz Input format s AF IF If more than two identical digits are to be transmitted the repetition tone is appended to the digit tone e g 22222 is transmitted as f2 fw f2 fw f2 where f2 is the tone for 2 and fw is the repetition tone In most systems the accuracy of the single frequencies has to be within 1 1 5 of the nominal value Decoding the selective calls is started by clicking on a system If transmission and system selection con form the call sign is displayed on the monitor In the Options menu a Time stamp function can be ena bled to add date and time to each call Tone Allocation Tone duration 70 ms PICCOLO MK6 and PICCOLO MK12 PICCOLO MK6 and PICCOLO MK12 are MFSK multi frequency shift keying systems The earlier PICCOLO versions MK1 MK2 and MK3 used 34 or 40 tones ea
210. annel selection mechanism the two linked stations may transmit at different frequencies The polarity of the bit stream upper sideband USB or lower sideband LSB cannot automatically be derived from the signal Polarity may be manually selected by using the Polarity menu field Polarity in version does not cause a loss of signal synchronization TRANSMIT 256 mE Gers 256 tres Gams STATION 5 Characters CRO RECEIVE TRAM SHIT oe 5 Characters CRC RECEIVE DUP ARQ 2 DUP ARQ 2 is a further development of the DUP ARQ system and the system characteristics are very simi lar DUP ARQ 2 allows transmission of ITA 2 Baudot or ITA 5 ASCII characters depending on the appli cation 148 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Parameter Value Frequency range Operation modes FSK Duplex ARQ DUP ARQ 2 operates at a Symbol rate of 250 Baud on the radio link A complete transmission cycle is 176 bits 704 ms Both stations alternate in transmitting data blocks of 64 bits each The data format is 2 data blocks of 32 bits each The blocks correspond to the DUP ARQ ARTRAC sys tem Each of the two blocks contains a 5 bit checksum inverted Hamming for error detection and a sin gle bit for the global parity odd parity Three 8 bit characters are transmitted in the data block Two bits remain unused and are set to zero Special blocks defining IDLE INTERRUPT and other specia
211. anual V8 3 00 Setup e 11 Specification RRR ico chink vice Operating temperature range 0 C to 50 C Case temperature range 0 C to 55 C Relatively humidity non condensing W PCI W PCle Software Installation please refer to W CODE Software Installation W CODE The W CODE application takes existing equipment of the customer e g a soundcard or W PCI or W PCle card from Wavecom as input device and works under a CmStick USB license key This feature allows seamless integration with SDR Software Defined Radio receivers with 1Q data TCP IP outputs or digital audio outputs via virtual sound cards Decoding from PC soundcards with sampling rates up to 192 kHz is also supported One client license is provided with each software package multiple licenses on request W CODE provides all functions required to analyze decode and process radio data communications over the entire frequency spectrum W CODE Hardware Installation Insert the USB licence key s in any USB socket W CODE Software Installation Insert the WAVECOM installation DVD in the drive When requested point the auto start wizard to the disc drive and start installation Note After installation you can run the W CODE application if you are a member of the Administrators Power Users or Users group Before the installation of a software update the old version must be uninstalled see Software Uninstall on page 17 After uninstallation has complete
212. aritime to a LES Distress priority messages may be sent in both directions Maritime SAT C forms part of the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System GMDSS Enhanced Group Calls EGC A broadcast service which may be addressed to individual units as well as groups either geographical or logical Two EGC services are available Fleet NET for commercial traffic and Safety NET for maritime safety traffic e g navigational warnings weather forecasts or distress call relays EGC traffic is transmitted on the NCS Common Channel Data reporting Lets MES send short data reports such as position information sensor data etc which are transmitted via the MES Signaling Channel Two types of data reporting are supported reserved and unreserved Reserved access is controlled from the LES by poll messages which contain instructions on starting time and duration of the reporting and also the type of data report required A poll message may be interpreted aS a programming macro by the MES Unreserved access is initiated by the MES itself Polling Used by base stations to initiate transmissions from a MES of text messages or data reports Polls may be directed to individual stations to groups or to geographical areas VMS Vessel Monitoring Systems and SSAS Ship Security and Alarm Systems The C system is also used for the VMS operated by many states for fisheries control and the mandatory SSAS used for pirate and terror alerts Operat
213. arrow band and reliable two channel PSK mode is available which covers the needs of both amateur and professional users for a secure and fast data transmission system The good performance during disturbances and a small bandwidth of 500Hz are achieved by the use of a two channel DPSK modulation As propagation conditions change PACTOR II is able to select the most suita ble modulation DBPSK DQPSK D8PSK D16PSK and 16PSK and the length of the frame SHORT or LONG Under very poor conditions PACTOR II changes to DBPSK short block which has a frame duration of 1 25 seconds and carries only a small amount of data For very good conditions D16PSK with a long frame is used which transfers a large amount of data and needs 3 75 seconds Parameter VENTE Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF Additional Info ITA 5 with block coding HEX Binary Output 7 035 MHz 14 070 MHz To achieve a data transmission which is robust against all kind of disturbances a decision must be made whether a short or a long frame length should be used The resulting input bit stream is then terminated with a convolutional encoded and interleaved CRC sum After that the symbol mapping for the two chan nels is done and then this signal is applied to the DPSK or PSK demodulator To extract the data from a PACTOR II signal the signal is received and demodulated with a two channel demodulator The center frequency must be adjusted to the cent
214. arty will encrypt his message with the public key of the recipient and he recipient will decrypt the message using his private key WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00Fundamentals of Radio Data Transmission e 101 Channel Coding Due to the unstable nature of the radio media especially in case of HF links a number of techniques have been designed to protect data and ensure a high degree of error free transmission This is especially im portant for the transmission of encrypted information Channel coding is about improving performance by providing techniques which can be used to combat fad ing jitter noise and other perturbations which are properties of time varying channels as radio channels To protect the data extra redundant information must be added to the source encoded data to be pro tected Bits are either added to existing source code or the source alphabet is converted into a completely new alphabet before channel transmission In addition certain procedures protocols are used for the ex change of information Depending on the nature of the radio link simplex half duplex or duplex channel coding and protocols have been devised to detect and or correct transmission errors Traffic between users may be handled in a number of ways depending on requirements and equipment available Terminal Terminal A B Terminal Terminal A B Terminal Terminal A o B Top Simplex one way trans
215. assification attempt at a time During classification attempts the Start Stop Classifier button is grayed out Refresh List If the Refresh List check box is checked the list of results will be cleared after each classification attempt This feature is only available when continuous mode is selected Cycle Mode This parameter sets the interval between classification attempts if no signals were classified Enter a restart cycle length ranging from 4 s to 3600 s Samples are available from two sources Samples taken before the classifier was started select Previous Samples Samples taken after the classifier was started select New Samples Sample Time Choose a sample time of 1 6 or 3 2 s The probability of correct classification of low symbol rate signals increases when the higher sample time is selected OFDM Mode If Full Analysis is selected the modulation format of the OFDM subcarriers is also analyzed If Partial Analysis is selected the modulation format of the subcarri ers is not analyzed 30 Bd CW Morse Checking this box will introduce a feature to prevent the classifier from confusing Protection CW and FSK signals at the edges of the sampled input bandwidth Use Demodulator Center or double click in the Center in the lower status bar for selecting an ap propriate center frequency To select the classification bandwidth double click in the Bandwidth field in the lower status bar or open a menu list by right clicking in t
216. ast schedules and areas have been published by the JOINT WMO IOC COM MISSION FOR OCEANOGRAPHY AND MARINE METEOROLOGY to assist ship operators tune Inmarsat C terminals to the proper Inmarsat ocean region Although reception of Safety NET traffic is automatic the shipboard operator must set up the receiver properly at the start of the voyage gt Select the appropriate broadcast channel This can often be accomplished by logging on to a land earth station in the ocean region for which needed broadcasts are made Select the NAVAREA identification code If travelling near Australia select the proper coastal area codes gt Ensure the Inmarsat C station is connected to a working navigational receiver If a connection cannot be made the ship s position must be manually updated every four hours during the ship s voyage Without these updates reams of unnecessary broadcast messages will be received Broadcast Channel Information The modulation rate of the broadcast channel is 1200 Baud Forward error correction is applied to this creating an effective information transfer of 600 bits per second rate 1 2 convolutional coding with inter leaving is used to disperse error bursts which arise when deep fades are present This ensures that there is a high probability of receiving a message correctly at the first transmission irrespective of the atmos pheric conditions or the ship s position within the satellite coverage Inmarsat Utilities A
217. ation from the source to the sink of the stream Applications that process PXGF input streams should not make assumptions about the data For example if the sample data were being sent using the SSIQ chunk the application should wait for a SIQP chunk to determine the packing of the data rather than assuming a particular packing DEFINITION OF CHUNKS Single channel Short IQ time data SSIQ chunk Data is be sent Element assumed to be continuous when using this data format if the data is blocky an IQDC chunk must after every block of continuous data Type Description Timestamp int64 The timestamp is stored as a 64 bit signed number representative of the time of capture of the first sample in the chunk block in microsecond resolution It is stored as the number of microseconds since beginning of the epoch i e 1st January 1970 midnight awIQData int16 length IQ pairs of signed int16 short numbers Note that regardless of the of IQ data ar number of valid bits the most significant bits in each short should be ray used This allows us to specify the full scale level without needing to specify the number of bits Single channel Float IQ time data SFIQ chunk Data is be sent Element assumed to be continuous when using this data format if the data is blocky an IQDC chunk must after every block of continuous data Type Description Timestamp The timestamp is stored as a 64 bit signed number representative
218. ation is determined by ZVEI In the newer VDEW system the rhombic labeling and the manufacturer identification are combined into one field of three digits called EVU number EVU Call number ZVEI and VDEW Ruf Three digits are used The hundred position digit is transmitted first the one position digit last Group calls are transmitted as pseudo tetrads of 1111 16 For a group call in the 10s range the digit repre senting 1s is filled with logical 1 For a group call in the 100s range the 1s and 10s digit are filled with logical 1 and for a 1000s range call all 12 bits are filled with logical 1 EVU and call number are transferred in a block of six digits The partitioning is either 3 digits for either items or 2 EVU digits plus 4 call number digits The chosen variant cannot be derived from the data so both versions are displayed The following picture shows a trace of a VDEW transmission with basic telegram and a single follow up telegram displaying both versions of partitioning i e 3 3 as well as 2 4 Fie HF Modes VHF UHF Modes Demodulator Options Favorites Setup View Win ZVEI VDEW Baudrate 1200 00 posmas asg 2 2 lt gt El Salle oo 360H2 1 36042 W61PC Text Cardi BAK 5 STAT 1 EVU 3 123 Ruf 3 123 EVU 2 12 Ruf 4 3123 BAK C STAT A EVU 3 123 Ruf 3 456 EVU 2 12 Ruf 4 3456 lt EOM gt 248 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE
219. ation may be reestablished When phasing the software automatically recognizes block length and polarity TETRA TETRA TErrestrial Trunked Radio is a digital voice and data system for mobile services standardized by ETSI and used for public safety and civilian PMR Public Mobile Radio It is closely related to GSM but has its own unique features e g a direct mode allowing mobile stations to communicate with each other without a base station and air interface encryption Parameter CEPT common EU allocation UHF Public safety 385 390 395 399 9 MHz civil applications 410 420 420 430 MHz A Short Data Service similar to the SMS of GSM is available SDS includes a number of protocols and the WAVECOM decoder supports Text Messaging For this type of messaging the text itself and delivery status reports are displayed and the messages saved to disk The other data protocols are displayed as bits due to the lack of detailed protocol descriptions TMO and DMO voice calls in all time slots are decoded and can be monitored in real time as well as saved to disk for later playback and analysis User Interface The user interface for TETRA consists of a three pane window similar to the GUI for the satellite modes and an options dialogue 236 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 GUI for voice communication WAVECOM W CODE W CODE Text amp Ele TETRA Card 1 OSE SS AR e
220. ave Same spacing for all carriers Multiple spacings Carriers Carriers 1 Carriers 2 Carriers 3 4 Carriers 4 5 Carriers 5 6 Carriers 6 7 Carriers 7 8 If Multiple spacings are desired press the Multiple spacings radio button and select a Carrier Spacing pair from the list _ Carriers 1 2 Spacing Enter the desired spacing and press OK to save the value The modulation format of the subcarriers of this OFDM system In MFSK systems the duration of a tone e the inverse of the system baud rate SAT System Overview INMARSAT Ltd is a private satellite provider based in London UK http www inmarsat com It evolved from an inter governmental organization to its current private status in the late 1990s It operates a num ber of geostationary satellites covering the entire surface of the earth except the polar regions using global beams and spot beams for the more traffic intensive regions The positions orbital slots of the two latest generations of INMARSAT satellites are listed in the table be low Coverage Area Satellite Orbital Former Country Designation Position er Atlantic Ocean Region West AOR W Indian Ocean Region IOR Pacific Ocean Region POR 178 E 1 4 Americas 4F3 INMARSAT now uses 870 as a single country code for all regions SNAC Each region has a system architecture as depicted below Forward Direction MATA
221. ave ended channel resources are returned to the channel resource pool AES Initiated Session On an R channel the MES sends a signaling message to the GES requesting appropriate C or T channel resources The GES forwards resource allocation signaling messages on the P channel as described above Some classes of AES support simultaneous data and voice traffic or more than one voice channel Trouble Shooting Receiver Frequency Error Compensation The receiver must be tuned exactly to the frequency setting received from the decoder Any offset must be corrected and entered into the system via the Freq Offset field in the Configuration Receiver and Satellite Settings dialog The following procedure can be used to find out and correct this offset gt After start of the SAT Mode wait until the receiver displays the frequency of the control channel see the NCSC table below and take into account down converter use gt Select spectrum analysis VHF UHF Modes Analysis DIRECT Real time FFT on the user in terface of the decoder Make sure all the settings are still correct Input Offset Select a band width of 24 kHz set Averaging to about 4 or 5 gt The spectrum of the control channel is about 8 kHz wide and it should be adjusted so it is in the centre of the 24 kHz FFT display If this is not the case determine the frequency offset if the spectrum is too far to the right of the display the sign of the offset is negative otherwi
222. average signal power and peak signal power is calculated every 50ms The average signal power is displayed as a green bar in the level indicator while the peak level is displayed as a black line Both of these power levels are expressed in dB with reference to OdB Full Scale When adjusting the sound level for recording it is important to ensure that the peak signal power the black line is as high as possible yet never touches the O dB mark Failure to keep the peak signal power below the OdB mark will result in a clipped or distorted recording Mixer Control Access to the Windows Mixer is provided directly from the Media Player Recorder Input Output Mute e ee To open the recording mixer press the Recording Level button E To open the playback mixer press the Playback Level button The functionality provided by the Windows Mixer depends on the host sound card and the version of the operating system installed For more information see the documentation provided by your host sound card manufacturer Quick access to the most commonly used functionality in the Windows Mixer is provided via a gain slider and mute button These controls are linked directly to their counterparts in the Windows Mixer Adjusting one will also adjust the other On Windows XP the output slider and mute button will control the Wave mixer control On Windows Vista and later it controls the Volume for the W CODE application Recordin
223. ax amp Modems Options Demodulator Favorites b Analysis NOR dde INMARSAT AERO esa 2 INMARSAT B gt INMARSAT C INMARSAT M gt INMARSAT mM SAT mM geri SAT mM DATA NOAA GEOSAT liinda ORBCOMM SAT mM TEL Mode Selector 32 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 FAX amp Modems Menu The various modem protocols are displayed in the FAX amp Modems menu To start decoding of the desired mode click on it or to select the modes of a group left click or let the mouse rest briefly on the group item to be selected Now the modes of the group are displayed in a separate menu Start decoding the desired mode by another left click The various analysis tools are displayed in the Analysis menus The descriptions of the operating modes in a separate section of this manual are arranged in alphabetical order The Mode Selector is available from the FAX amp Modems menu and from the WAVECOM Toolbar FAX amp Modems Analysis FAX amp Modems Modes Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View FAX amp Modems Options Demodul Analysis d FFT Analysis Half Duplex Auto Mode Sade ce Half Duplex Auto Mode FFT amp Sonagram O ers Waterfall Ed FAX G3 V 27ter eee O Oscilloscope FAX G3 V 29 FAX G3 V 29 i FAX G3 V 34hdx FAX G3 V 34hdx cg aban dt BELL103 BELL103 PSK Symbol Rate EIA BELL212A PSK Phase Plane v21 Ta Classifier V 22 V 22bis V 22 Vi22bis v 23 1 23
224. ay data and voice system Modulation 4FSK with pulse shaping Additional Inf To use the mode set Offset to the frequency of the IF output of the receiver and select the correct Po larity From Options use the Message Type menu to select an output method If All Frames is select ed data and voice frames as well as all control frames will be displayed Voice is output in real time to the speaker At the same time the latest voice session will be saved in a wav file in the default data output directory see Default Data and Program Folders section The display parameter Confidence indicates the quality of decoding a value above 95 indicates a very high quality whereas a value below 85 indicates that decoding is unreliable Minor center frequen cy deviations are automatically compensated The value of the Carrier parameter is the center frequency after error correction this value should remain close to the IF of the receiver The physical digital protocol is specified by ETSI in TS 102 361 1 Motorola markets DMR radio systems as MOTRBO known sometimes in Asia as XiR dPMR dPMR digital Private Mobile Radio is an open ETSI standard published under the references TS 102 490 License free and TS 102 658 Licensed It uses FDMA technology with a channel spacing of 6 25 kHz and supports voice and data applications The modulation scheme is 4FSK with a bit rate of 4800 bps Parameter Frequency range Unlicensed ETSI TS 102
225. beginning of a message the RX character positions are filled with IDLE sequences This mode does error recognition but no error correction 140 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Tone Assignment of COQUELET 80 Tone Number Frequency Hz Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 First Tone Group CTCSS The CTCSS selective calling system is defined according to EIA standard RS 220 and operates in the sub audio range Applying this Continuous Tone Controlled Squelch System stations may be selectively called either as a single user or as a group Parameter Value Tone Allocation WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 141 A CTCSS controlled receiver only switches on in case a carrier modulated with the pre programmed CTCSS tone is received For this system 52 tones are defined CV 786 CV 786 is an asynchronous FSK system and is based on ASCII No error detection or error correction is implemented Parameter Adaltional Inf For CV 786 mode standard baud rates from 50 to 150 Baud are available Non standard baud rates may be selected using the Baudrate menu item From Options Alphabet you can select from different ITA 2 and ITA5 aphabets CW MORSE The Auto function will automatically detect Morse keying speeds within the range O 90 WPM words per minute The keying speed is continuously updated and displayed Parameter Value Operation m
226. bit alphabets are accommodated and the number of custom alphabets is limited to 16 A Alphabet Translation Table Save As Save Delete Undo Alphabet ITA_2_LATIN v Update List Font Wavecom Unicode v Writing Direction LeftToRight C RightToLeft System 5 bit Transparent Control Characters Letters C Figures C Third Letters Shift v Current New a Symbol gt 1 65 A 65 A 9 E 2 66 B 66 B 7 a 3 67 C 67 Cc 32 4 68 D 68 D 33 5 69 E 69 E 34 a 6 70 F 70 F 39 7 71 G 71 G 36 8 72 H 72 H 37 5 9 73 I 13 E 38 amp 10 74 J 74 J 39 11 75 K 75 K 40 12 76 L 76 L 41 13 ae M 77 M 42 14 78 N 78 N 43 15 79 O 19 O 44 A D 0 Find Hex View 0 Find F Show All Reset Refresh The Custom Alphabets dialog box displays a number of input fields gt Clicking Save As opens a dialog box in which to enter a name for the newly created translation table Press OK to close the dialog box and save the new translation table The translation table contains the actual values set in the Alphabet Translation Table dialog The name of the new table appears in the Alphabet combo box and a new xml file with the name of the table is creat ed containing the table data gt Pressing Save stores the current dialog settings to the translation table that is active as shown in the Alphabet combo box The data is stored in the related xml file Clicking Delete deletes the ac
227. bit should be 1 otherwise an error has occurred If parity has been defined as EVEN and an even number of 1 s is found then the parity bit should also be 1 The ASCII code does not distinguish between a Letters or Figures case as does Baudot because 7 or 8 data bit ASCII has 128 or 256 possible bit combinations This covers most symbol requirements ASCII based transmissions are finding their way into radio data communications because of the compati bility with computer communications thus avoiding time and resource consuming code conversions From Options Frame length and Parity the various code word lengths and parity options may be se lected Mark parity means that the parity bit is always set to the mark signal condition and likewise space parity always sends the parity bit in the space signal condition Since these two parity options serve no useful purpose whatsoever they are almost never used ATIS ATIS is an abbreviation of Automatic Transmitter Identification System ATIS is used in the VHF UHF ra dio systems on the river Rhine and automatically generates the identification signal at the end of each pe riod of speech transmission In case of lengthy transmissions the ATIS signal is required to be transmitted at least once every five minutes Parameter Value Operation modes FEC ATIS conforms in certain aspects to the CCITT Recommendation 493 3 The specifications are directed at all river Rhine nautical radio ins
228. bits being read into a shift register the length of which may be changed Values of 72 and 128 bits are common Parameter Value Frequency range HF Operation modes Broadcast Simplex FEC Modulation FSK WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 155 Parameter Value Symbol rate 96 144 and 192 Bd variable 30 650 Bd Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF Additional Info ARQ1A with convolutional coding The FEC A mode is started by selecting a standard baudrate from the Baudrate item in the Demodulator menu Frequency shift and baud rate are determined using FSK Analysis For automatic tuning Auto may be selected The synchronization or idle state is easily recognized by its sound It is an alternating mark space keying sequence mark space ratio approx 40 60 Shift register length is set using the S Reg item in the Options menu Incorrect selection of the S Reg parameter causes incorrect error correction and the data output rapidly becomes corrupted If error cor rection is disabled ECC off the length of the shift register will not affect decoding S Reg not visible This feature allows any FEC A signal to be decoded FEC A will detect and correct transmission errors up to a certain limit in the case of extreme interference error correction may worsen the situation so reception without error correction may improve perfor mance FEC A uses the ARQ 1A alphab
229. bottom part selects a color scheme A checkmark is placed to the left of the selection X 25 X 25 can be monitored in the VHF and UHF bands This mode uses indirect FM sub carrier modulation Parameter Value Frequency range VHF UHF Operation modes Duplex FEC TDMA WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 243 Parameter Value Modulation FM SUB FSK Symbol rate 300 600 and 1200 Bd Center frequency 1700 Hz shi Input format s Additional Inf To start X 25 select 1200 Bd 600 Bd or 300 Bd The correct shift or center may be set in the Demodula tor menu Standard values for the center frequency and the shift are 1700 Hz and 1000 Hz X 25 uses a HDLC computer network protocol X 25 is a synchronous system in which data is transmitted in packets of 8 bit octets Frame Format X 25 provides three frame formats the difference being the size of the sequence number 16 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 a Fla Fla 16 8 8 8 16 8 8 8 Fla Fla Extended oxe as cow ra ton en baa ros 16 8 8 8 32 8 8 8 8 Flag Flag Super Ox7E Adr Contr Fld LCN PTI FCS Ox7E The Basic frame has a frame sequence number size of 3 bits so that the increment of the sequence num ber is a modulo 8 operation In case of the Extended frame the increment is a modulo 128 operation and in case of the Super frame a modulo 32768 operation Packet structure A X 25 packet constitutes the data field of a LAPB
230. by another application change the port number If you use routers firewalls etc check that traffic from the selected port is trans ferred to the client s location The default value for the WAVECOM server is 33233 Your client can only connect to the server if it is working on the same port In addition to the port number of the GUI port numbers for the XML Remote Interface and the Server Control Interface may be entered here Important Be aware that data encryption and compression is very CPU intensive Disable these functions if your system is slow Data Encryption The WAVECOM user interface is able to communicate with the WAVECOM server application over an en crypted connection The server has a built in cryptographic capability use the WAVECOM Server Control application to switch this option on or off WAVECOM uses the Crypto Library 5 2 1 to encrypt and decrypt the data transfer between client and server The code of this library is open source and can be found on the following URL http sourceforge net projects cryptopp Crypto offers several block and stream ciphers hash functions and other cryptographic functions More information about this library is found on http cryptopp com The WAVECOM server application makes use of a block cipher in CBC mode All data is encrypted and de crypted using the DES EDE2 algorithm with a key length of 128 bit During initialization of the encrypted connection a key is generated
231. by each specific service Block 9 is the status field contains the actual information 16 different messages may be transmitted De pending on the R direction bit status messages attain different meanings Furthermore the actual meaning of a status message is determined by the service and the individual states The last block 10 is mapped to 4 bits in the telegram and serves to communicate the equipment capability B bit 1 direction R bit 2 and abbreviated tactical information X Y bits 4 5 158 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 B O Vehicle dispatcher communications only 1 Duplex communications possible R O Vehicle Dispatcher 1 Dispatcher Vehicle XY Locally defined For data protection a 7 bit Abramson code redundancy block is appended to the data block This is fol lowed by a single stop bit which is however not tested As FMS data messages does not carry a date timestamp this information is generated by the real time clock of the decoder and output to screen as the first data field BOS Identifier Character BOS Identifier Character Poe German edcross a _Federal Criminal Bureau 3 Malteser Support Service B customs Fire Brigade Civil protection services BO State identifier Character State identifier Character Sensen AAA Federal i Sehleswigolsten a Baden Wuerttemberg Bayern AE e Berlin Bremen Hambur 6 Brandenburg 00 49
232. called block coding A checksum is calculated for a data block and appended to the transmitted block The IRS calculates the checksum once again and compares the result with the checksum received If the checksums are not equal a RQ is issued The checksum calculation is often done using a method called a Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC 102 e Fundamentals of Radio Data TransmissionWAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 In simplex systems there is of course no return channel so the IRS cannot request repetitions Therefore the codes used must be very robust and be able to correct errors at the receiving end Forward Error Correction FEC is used Intensive research has led to the development of a large number of block codes with superior error detec tion and correction features e g Hamming BCH Golay and Reed Solomon codes One of the worst enemies of simplex links is burst noise which may corrupt many successive bits To combat this type of noise bit spreading or bit interleaving is used The bits of successive code words are spread in time In this way burst errors will only influence a few bits of each codeword and the error correcting code may have a decent chance to correct the errors The HNG FEC and RUM FEC channel codes use this method Another method is codeword repetition in which a code word is repeated several characters later in the transmission To improve error detection and correction the repeated characte
233. card is correct If the line is slanted to either side the sampling rate is offset To adjust the sam pling rate use Options Fine Tune until the vertical line representing the reference signal is straight Example CHU signal WAVECOM W CODE W CODE Calibration File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR YHP UHF SUB Satelite Modems Options Demodulator Favortes Configuration View Window Help CALIBRATION Traffik OSESE Bl Mode Analysis gt alee gt Wama el l eE ox 414 Hz 746 953 1160 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3250 3500 3750 4000 Hz Input AF LEFT First adjust the center frequency and the bandpass filter settings You will notice that the vertical lines are skewed Press Options Fine Tune and use the slider to adjust the vertical lines so they become perpendicular to the time axis of the calibration window WAVECOM W CODE W CODE Calibration Card 1 HF M CALIBRATION Traffic Dolsma li Y Mode Anatysis alael gt 2 amla le BRIX ox W CODE Calibration Card 1 fo LE PLS SSS SS HY LL LL hk dededado 3 PALAPAALEAAAL AAPL P DP PL ZS o ILLES GLAAD LI 1L111Ll 11 Ll Ll 1 LE LI 1 LIV AAAS 1L 1111111 bebe AAA FITTA PIIPLLIOLLLLILOPLOLEELLLA LA PELAL ODL EEL ALS EAS a So XA ee a MM o m m m Fine Tune EJ i 0 1 i 1 i i i i 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3250 3500 3750 4000 Hz Note The full range of the Fine
234. ce General All microprocessors and personal computers emit strong broadband noise signals which propagate along the control and data lines Strong noise signals are also often produced by printers without noise reduction features Common noise sources include the unshielded cables for printer monitor and mouse 328 e Appendix WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Antenna installation The antenna is the main factor when it comes to fighting noise A well designed long wire antenna with a proper impedance matching feeder installed well clear of any obstructions seldom exhibits interference problems In very simple installations where for instance an active antenna is deployed in very close prox imity to the decoder or monitor interference is bound to be present especially in the 3 10 MHz range Active antennas must always be mounted at least two meters away from any building part to be clear of the noise field which surrounds a building It is equally important to provide a high quality grounding of the antenna mast cold water mains Receiver Receivers are often not sufficiently shielded or de coupled resulting in noise signals directly entering the receiver Since many receiver types require an antenna impedance of 50 Ohm for correct matching any deviation from this impedance results in a large increase in interference levels due to mismatching This situation may be remedied by inserting an antenna tuner matching
235. censes can be loaded to the CmStick without sending the key to WAVECOM Just click License Up date on the CodeMeter Control Center and follow the information provided by the assistant S CodeMeter Kontrollzentrum Datei Aktion Ansicht Hilfe Lizenz Ereignisse Ausleihe e CmStick ae P2 1 1186722 Serien Nr 1 1186722 Version CmStick 1 15 Y Kapazit t 97 frei 58184 Bytes i Status S Deaktiviert S Aktiviert solange angeschlossen Aktiviert Lizenzaktualisierung Auswerfen Kennwort ndern CodeMeter ist gestartet WebAdmin How to update a license Software Options Additional functions may be enabled and licensed to work with your decoder see License System Soft ware and Options on page 294 Options are marked with Option in the manual Follow this procedure to order options WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Setup e 15 gt The serial number of your CmStick must be provided and the desired options listed gt WAVECOM will process your order and forward an invoice gt After the payment has been received a new key or license file will be forwarded To process an order for options the following information is required gt Complete address gt Ordered items gt Email or mail delivery gt Serial number of CmStick gt Remote context file of CmStick to be updated if applicable W CODE License Checking To check the
236. ch tone representing one character of the ITA 2 or ITA 5 alphabet respectively Parameter Value Frequency range HF Modulation MFSK 6 MFSK 12 The tone duration was 100 ms and the tone spacing 10 Hz Recent systems operate with two sequential tones The combination of the two tones defines the transmit ted character An increase in the signal to noise ratio is achieved by this method 204 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 PICCOLO MK6 is based on the ITA 2 Baudot alphabet 6 tones are used which results in a total of 36 com binations The tone duration is 2 x 50 ms for one character which corresponds to 75 Baud Baudot with 7 5 bit code words PICCOLO MK12 transmits ITA 5 characters To transfer 7 bit ASCII characters twelve tones are required This produces 144 bit combinations of which 128 are used The transmission speed is equivalent to an asynchronous data rate of 110 Baud The WAVECOM software displays four windows on the screen Normal T1 T2 Inverse T1 T2 Normal T2 T1 and Inverse T2 T1 This way of organizing the display is due to the fact that it is not possible for the operator to decide from the monitored tone sequence whether the first received tone constitutes tone 1 or tone 2 of a character In addition reception may occur using either the upper or the lower sideband giving a total of four decoding possibilities Decoding of data is done simultaneously in all four windows T
237. changed from File to Soundcard By changing the device the new device related parameters will appear in the parameter list and the parameters of the old device will disappear By pressing the Apply button the changes will be saved for the specific custom input The XML file Inputs xml located in the Config directory is updated by pressing the Apply button Important After modifying custom input parameters press the Apply button otherwise the changes will be lost Delete a Custom Input Select the custom input to delete in the Input list left table and press the Delete button This will re move the custom input from the XML file Inputs xml located in the Config directory Selecting a Custom Input The user defined custom inputs can be selected via the Signal Input dialog The dialog can be opened via the Demodulator menu s entry Input or by double clicking the Input status bar field at the right bot tom of the GUI The screen shot below shows the Signal Input dialog including two user defined custom inputs at the end of the list Signal Input AF RIGHT AF LEFT RIGHT IQ LEFT8RIGHT STANAG4285 PXGF1 54 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Custom Alphabets Custom defined alphabets are also available This feature allows the user to add alphabets of his own cre ation that have not been defined by WAVECOM and to add variants of existing alphabets Only 5
238. chnology gt No installation required just run the executable gt Data stream and data file import from W61PC LAN W PCI W PCIe and W CODE gt MatLab and C user defined functions W Sat email Decoder The W Sat email Decoder takes as its input a session file and the corresponding text files as produced by a WAVECOM decoder or any text file from an external source containing emails It does protocol decoding and decompression the email s and possible attachment s are output as files The following email sys tems will be recognized and decoded respectively E we row ys GlobeWireless GTMail MS RAS PPP MS RAS TCP IP 8 e General Information WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Rydex WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 General Information e 9 setup W PCI W PCle The WAVECOM decoder hardware series W PCI and W PCle have two physically independent 16 bit A D converters Each card has five inputs in two groups AFIF 1 IF70 1a and IF70 1b for the group 1 and AFIF 2 and IF70 2 for the group 2 These two cards are prepared for protocols and systems which re quire two concurrent channels e g the FAX modem protocols INMARSAT protocols etc W PCI and W PCle are preferable input device for W CODE They replace the one channel W61PC card W PCI W PCle Hardware Installation Before unpacking the W PCI or W PClIe card or installing it into your PC please make sure that you are a
239. chunk inte ger type eg If we are using SSIQ chunks then a dBFS chunk will indi cate the analogue input level that will yield a maximum digital sample swing of 2 15 1 Note that this value may be different from the full scale value of the ADC Single channel Short Real data SSR_ chunk Data is assumed to be continuous when using this data format if the data is blocky an IQDC chunk should be sent after every block of continuous data This chunk can be used to send audio data Element Description ITimestamp The timestamp is stored as a 64 bit signed number representative of the time of capture of the first sample in the chunk block in microsec ond resolution It is stored as the number of microseconds since be ginning of the epoch i e 1st January 1970 midnight awRealData int16 length of Real signed int16 short numbers Note that regardless of the number real data array of valid bits the most significant bits in each short should be used The length of the This allows us to specify the full scale level without needing to specify array must be a the number of bits The number of real int16 shorts in the array must multiple of 2 be a multiple of 2 Single channel Float Real data SFR_ chunk Data is assumed to be continuous when using this data format if the data is blocky an IQDC chunk should be sent after every block of continuous data This chunk can be used to send audio data 308 e WAVECOM Data Formats WAVEC
240. ck or by pressing the CCC button when the previously launched mode or analysis was a VHF UHF DIR or VHF UHF SUB mode or analysis The CCC may be restarted using the Start Restart Classifier Code Check j button Classifier Code Check P3 When the CCC is launched a label positioned on the left hand side of the up permost status bar indicates the level of processing selected E The uppermost status bar will show the current status of the CCC WAVECOM W CODE Classifier Code Check VHF UHF Card 1 MES File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR YHF UHF SUB Satellite Fax Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help Classifier Code Check P3 j Code Check finished NOR Auto 13 42 42 olal la 8A o vote anatase eleele 2 mamia el ell mmm oe os Classifier Code Check YHFZUHF Card 1 CCC Settings Classifier Settings Code Check Settings 42 4Uu 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000 20000 22000 24000 Hz I 1 1 I 1 l 12000 14000 16000 20000 22000 24000 Hz Signal 1 PSK 2B 1510 3Hz 1208 3Bd 1208 3Hz Signal 2 PSK 2B FM Subcarrier 1505 3 Hz 6614 6Hz 1204 2Bd 5303 3Hz Signal 1 Table Detected MPT 1327 Codecheck Detected MPT 1327 Signal 2 Table Detected MPT 1327 Codecheck Detected MPT 1327 Classifier start Classifier finished Code check started checking signal no 1 Mode detected for signal no 1 Code check started checking signal no 2 Mode detected for signal n
241. code spread offering additional immunity against burst errors HNG FEC is started by clicking the Auto button or by selecting a Baudrate in the Demodulator menu By toggling the ECC item in the Options menu error correction may be enabled or disabled ICAO SELCAL ICAO selective calling was initially defined in 1985 using twelve tones Tones A to M but without tone I In 1994 the ICAO calling system also known as ANNEX10 was extended with the additional tones P Q R and S and now operates with 16 tones Parameter The allocation of selective call addresses is exclusively managed by Aeronautical Radio Inc ARINC ICAO Designator Selcal Registry Each address consists of two pairs of tones e g AB CD Both pairs have a duration of 1 000 ms Be tween each pair an interval of 200 ms is inserted ICAO Selcal is used on all frequency bands HF and VHF UHF ICAO Selcal Tone Allocation Designation Frequency Hz Designation Frequency Hz 4732 Reo RED 524 8 Rer RED G 582 1 Reon 168 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 RED rar 426 RED M 977 2 Designation Frequency Hz Designation Frequency Hz LINK 11 CLEW Link 11 CLEW Conventional Link Eleven Waveform also known as TADIL A is a transmission mode mostly in HF band to run a tactical digital information network This mode is specified by the US Depart ment of Defense DoD in MIL STD 188 2
242. coding and demodulation and de coding Satellite TV broadcasting utilizes QPSK or even 8PSK A special instance of m ary modulation is QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation in which phase and amplitude modulation are combined An example of QAM is digital broadcasting in the MF and HF bands DRM OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Modulation OFDM is a combination of multiplexing and modulation The signal to be transmitted is first split into a number of separate channels modulated by the data and then re multiplexed to create an OFDM carrier HF modem research is ongoing to investigate whether this type of modulation is well suited to combat se lective fading which is a major problem in HF data communication OFDM is used for Wireless LANs and ADSL When OFDM is combined with coding it is known as Coded OFDM COFDM which is used in DAB broadcasting to combat multi path WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00Fundamentals of Radio Data Transmission e 105 Bandwidth efficient Modulation Among newer modulations methods employed to make better use of the spectrum available are Offset QPSK OQPSK Minimum Shift Keying MSK and Gaussian FSK GFSK MSK is used in DGPS and in GSM systems OQPSK is used in satellite communications and GFSK is used in various data modes INDIRECT FM A frequency modulated carrier is modulated with an AF FSK sub carrier For decoding the receiver FM demodulator output is required Examp
243. collision avoidance and navigational advice AIS equipped ships continuously transmit short messages containing information like position course over ground speed over ground and so on All information may be sent from ship to ship as well as well as from ship to shore This is very useful for Vessel Traffic WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 109 Systems VTS in congested areas such as harbors rivers and archipelagos Tranmissions may be in broadcast mode or individually addressed The messages may contain a fixed content in binary format free text or binary information defined by international regional or national authorities see table below Parameter Value Frequency range VHF Operation modes SOTDMA FEC Modulation GMSK Symbol rate 9600 Bd Receiver settings BW 15 kHz Transmission is 9600 Baud GMSK modulation over 25 or 12 5 kHz channels using the HDLC packet proto col Each station transmits and receives over two radio channels to avoid interference problems Self Organizing Time Division Multiple Access SOTDMA is used One Time Division Multiple Access TDMA frame corresponds to one minute and contains 2250 slots Each frame contains an 8 bit ramp up and a 24 bit synchronization sequence At the beginning and end of each frame a HDLC flag 01111110 is sent After the 8 bit preamble 168 bits of data and a 16 bit CRC checksum are sent in a default packet one slot Long transmis
244. copy of the latest version of the Safety NET Users Manual is available from the Inmarsat web site www inmarsat com Maritimesafety snet pdf The Inmarsat Maritime Communications Handbook is no longer available from Inmarsat but maz be donloaded from other Internet sites STATUS OF MARITIME SAFETY INFORMATION BROADCASTS NAVAREA NAV MET SAR OCEAN REGION METAREA WARNINGS FORECASTS amp WARN ALERTS FOR SCHEDULED BROAD INGS CASTS UK AOR E 1 France AOR WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 219 NAVAREA SAR OCEAN REGION IOR POR POR AOR W gt lt III Spain Greece IV USA V Brazil VI Argentina VII South Africa ET X X X X X X VIII India Mauritius La Reu nion IX Pakistan X Australia XI Japan China XII USA X X IX X x XIII Russian Federation XIV New Zealand X XV Chile XVI Peru USA 1 X Full Service now available 2 IMO has decided that routine broadcasts of navigational warnings and meteorological forecasts will be made at scheduled times over a single nominated satellite for each NAVAREA METAREA unscheduled Additional information See SAT Settings on page 40 See SAT System on page 275 SAT M The SAT M system carries digital voice and low speed data The forward direction channels from land earth stations LES or CES to mobile earth stations SES or MES are 6 kBaud
245. cter length is used For frequently used characters a symbol is used which has a short word length as is done with the Huff man compression This alphabet is called Varicode PSK 63 and higher speeds are used in amateur radio emergency networks for information transfer with the FLARQ protocol The decoders for these modes can interpret FLARQ messages Tuning a PSK 31 PSK 63 PSK 125 PSK 250 Signal After launching the mode the first step is to look for a valid PSK 31 signal in the spectrum Usually a number of stations are working within the PSK segment which covers a few kHz The bandwidth of the spectrum can be switched between 500 Hz 1000 Hz 4000 Hz and 24000 Hz After that the lower limit of the signal may be selected with the left cursor and the upper boundary with the right cursor Using the center cursor the center frequency may be more precisely set The accurate ad justment of the center frequency is very important and directly influences the performance of the decod ing To ensure that the system can handle drifting signals or a coarsely adjusted center frequency AFC may be enabled in the Demodulator menu The carrier tracking function is now activated If the deviation be tween the tracked and the adjusted center frequency is too large the center frequency should be correct ed Carrier tracking only works over a range of gt DBPSK center frequency 8 Hz gt DQPSK center frequency 4 Hz Hence adjustment of the ce
246. curacy when deter mining baud rate frequency shift and center frequency of HF FSK systems As an additional help FSK code check also offers an option to start the analysis manually after user entry of baud rate frequency shift and center frequency To utilize this option the Auto button must be dese lected The software will then start data acquisition using the pre selected parameters If a pre selected parameter has been changed data acquisition is atomatically restarted The selection of baud rate frequency shift or center frequency is done by clicking on the status bar fields or using the Demodulator menu If the FSK code check cannot identify a mode the code check should be repeated Data acquisition is con tinuously performed as a background task Heavy fading or other disturbances during data acquisition may prevent the identification of a mode You can also restart data acquisition by pressing the Resync button Because this kind of signal is not continuous there is a need for a Noise Gate The status of the noise gate is displayed in the status bar it examines the input signal and tries to determine if a valid signal is available which can be processed or if the input consists only of noise 80 e Analysis Tools WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 WAVECOM W CODE W CODE Code Check Card 1 i Siib o Se A Se A Lo adas File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Modems Options Dem
247. cuts on this computer 1 1 Select the number of shortcuts 2 Press the Create button W Shortcut Manager Number of shortcuts on this computer 1 The computer is now configured for 1 decoder s The Shortcut Manager has now configured your system for additional shortcuts and the corresponding icons are displayed on the Desktop Note You can also use the Shortcut Manager to reduce the number of links in your system Alarm Monitor Introduction The Alarm Monitor is a component of the decoder software Although it is a separate application it is only useful when used in conjunction with the WAVECOM software The Alarm Monitor can monitor all data out 298 e Additional Functions WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 put from text modes of the WAVECOM decoder and produce alarms for user configured messages An alarm produces an alert with optional audio alert and logs the message to a file The Alarm Monitor can be started directly from the decoder using the View WAVECOM Alarm Monitor menu item Wa WAVECOM Alarm Monitor W CODE Disconnected Run Options Settings Setup Help The Alarm Monitor performs three basic functions gt Save text data All received text data will be saved in a text file txt located anywhere on the network gt Save alarm data It is possible to set so called Alarm strings The received text data will be scanned for those strings line by line When a match is found
248. cy is used as a repetition identifier Parameter Value Frequency range VHF UHF Operation modes Analogue Selcal Modulation FM SUB Tones Receiver settings FM BW 12 kHz Input format s AF 1F If there more than two identical digits are to be transmitted the repetition tone is appended to the digit tone e g 22222 is transmitted as f2 fw f2 fw f2 where f2 is the tone for 2 and fw is the repetition tone For MODAT mode having nominal tone durations of 40 ms the duration of a single tone may vary 5 ms Decoding the selective calls is started by clicking on a system If transmission and system selection con form the call sign is displayed on the monitor In the Options menu a Time stamp function can be ena bled to add date and time to each call Tone Allocation Hz 1537 5 ef was s rss Fax 8 MODEMS Half Duplex FAX G3 V 17 Parameter Value reno Operation modes FAX Modem Modulation 128QAM HDX 182 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Parameter Value 14400 12000 9600 7200 bps input formats Additional information see Modem and FAX Modes on page 286 FAX G3 V 27ter Parameter Value Additional information see Modem and FAX Modes on page 286 FAX G3 V 29 Parameter Value Additional information see Modem and FAX Modes on page 286 FAX G3 V34hdx Parameter Value Frequency range o Additional information see Modem an
249. cy modulation Proper decoding is only possible from the receiver IF output 455 kHz 10 MHz or 21 MHz G TOR G TOR operates at a radio channel rate of 100 200 or 300 Bd The quality of the radio channel deter mines the actual adjusted baud rate Parameter Value Frequency range Operation modes Simplex ARQ Adaltional Inf By clicking the Auto button the demodulator will automatically adjust to the actual shift and center fre quency followed by phasing with automatic baud rate and signal polarity detection With some skill the actual baud rate of G TOR may be easily recognized Baud rates of 100 200 and 300 Baud may be manually selected If so phasing will be accelerated After synchronism with a G TOR signal has been achieved the software will ensure the baud rate adapta tion as is the case in Auto mode After the end of transmission the software will re synchronize The cycle duration of G TOR is always 2 4 s The data frame has a length of 1 92 s which leaves 0 16 s for acknowledgement from the remote station At 300 Baud 69 data bytes are transferred at 200 Baud 45 bytes and at 100 Baud 21 bytes After the end of the data block a control byte and a 16 bit CRC sum are appended 162 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 On the receiving side up to 3 incorrect bits may be corrected using a 24 12 Golay code In addition the data bits are interleaved bit interleaving The comp
250. cy shift center frequency and the baud rate are de termined The values of these parameters are displayed in the appropriate fields after the meas urement has completed gt The software then proceeds with code and system analysis The incoming bit stream is tested and compared against known modes gt The name of each identified system is displayed in the output window An identified system may be immediately started by double clicking the system in the output window for instance double clicking ACARS in the figure above will interrupt FSK code checking and immediately start ACARS gt The Hits Checks will show you how often during checking a mode was successfully determined If multiple modes are listed this will indicate which mode should be tried gt Ifa mode is uniquely identified the software will switch to the identified mode and decoding is ini tiated with the measured values of mode baud rate shift and center frequency gt If two or more different systems are identified or if too many transmission errors occur an auto matic switch to a mode will not take place 82 e Analysis Tools WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Noise Gate Mode The Noise Gate Mode can be selected by Options Noise Gate Mode or by double clicking the Noise Gate Mode field in the Status Bar i Noise Gate Mode Disabled CET Cancel gt In Enabled mode a Noise Gate is used This is nece
251. d 1i gt 300 Hz AA 1608 1758 1908 i l l l l l l I 1 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3250 3500 3750 4000 Hz Demodulator DSP Shift 300 Hz Center 1758 Hz Offset 0 Hz Input AF LEFT The bit length analysis screen consists of a window for graphs of the two bit length distribution functions for binary 0 and 1 as well as a window containing a graph of the raw binary data By right clicking on one of the two displays a menu appears By selecting Zoom In the mouse cursor changes its shape By clicking and dragging a field can be resized After the zoom field has been sized release the mouse button An enlarged section of the raw data or the bit distribution is displayed By se lecting Zoom 100 the full screen display will reappear 94 e Analysis Tools WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 2 WAVECOM W CODE W CODE Bitlength Card1 O baba File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite FAX amp Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help Bit Length Analysis HF Traffic Filter 10 00 ms 22 24 18 D ow Mode qe y tL te ao Ama 2 re Ree MO goke igo Hz 24 W CODE Bitlength Card 1 Stat 5 061 ps 197 589 Bd jia 154 800 157 330 159 861 1 A 187 201 215 E E i ee an ia ann aea 250 2e aid 20 aan cpa n den ao ee GUD Se ABD Bd 300 Hz e 1608 1758 1908 wE a 1 1 I I i 1 I I
252. d insert the WAVECOM installation disc in the drive the in staller will start automatically Otherwise it can be started with Windows Explorer by double clicking Installation exe 12 e Setup WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Now the selection dialogue of the installation program is displayed la a A WAVECOM Installation y W CODE InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for W CODE Main Products Additional Software W Cloud W Code W PCle W PCI 32 Bit V8 3 00 XML RCI SDK 8 3 00 W Cloud W Code W PCle 3 g Install W PCI 64 Bit V8 3 00 Instan EasySAT System W PCl e 1 0 00 The InstallShield R Wizard will allow you to modify repair or remove W CODE To continue click Next W Sat email Decoder Install Manual L Lead Classifier Codecheck Editor dm w Bivview 25 00 Install Loa Recordings 1 5 00 W Cloud Server instal 32 Bit 2 0 00 EasySAT System W61PC W Cloud Server 41 200 Install 64 Bit 2 0 00 instat Wavecom Device Driver WEBIPC 32 Bit 7 3 00 Install ha 6 42 C WBIPC 64 Bit V7 3 00 Install WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG First you will see the welcome screen Click Next to continue the installation Click the W CODE button to install the W PCI W PCle W CLOUD and W CODE application r r y WAVECOM W CODE InstallShield Wizard y WAVECOM W CODE InstallShield Wizard a Destination Folder Ready to Insta
253. d FAX Modes on page 286 V 21 BELL103 Parameter Value Operation modes DATA Modem 300 bps input formats Additional information see Modem and FAX Modes on page 286 WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 183 V 22 V 22bis BELL212A Parameter Value Operation modes DATA Modem DPSK 16QAM 1200 2400 bps input formats Additional information see Modem and FAX Modes on page 286 V 23 Parameter Value Additional information see Modem and FAX Modes on page 286 FAX amp MODEMS Full Duplex V 26 V 26bis Parameter Value Additional information Modem and FAX Modes on page 286 V 32 V 32bis Parameter Value Operation modes DATA Modem Full Duplex A Input format s File 2 channels Additional information see Modem and FAX Modes on page 286 V 34 184 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Parameter Value Operation modes DATA Modem Full Duplex MD TCM Multi Dimension Trellis Coded Modulation 33600 31200 28800 26400 24000 21600 19200 16800 bps Input format s File 2 channels Additional information see Modem and FAX Modes on page 286 V 90 Parameter Value Additional information see Modem and FAX Modes on page 286 V 92 Parameter Value Operation modes DATA Modem Full Duplex Input format s File 2 channels Additional info
254. d and IOC can be programmed manually via the Drum speed and IOC items in the Demodulator menu The selected parameters are displayed in the decoder status bar The decoder allows a continuous and smooth alignment of the image as it is being received from Op tions Fine Speed By using the Phase item in the Options menu the image can be shifted into the cor rect position Flip Left Right and Flip Top Down will reverse the image or turn it upside down To enhance the interpretation of gray scale images a false color option is available Right click on the image to opens the Zoom menu and select a color scheme from the bottom part A checkmark is placed to the left of the selection PSK 10 PSK 10 is a very narrow band and reliable mode developed by F6CTE The aim of this experimental slow mode is to allow a chat type communication between hams Parameter Value The baud rate is fixed at 10 Bd and is optimized to transfer the data rate which an operator can input on a keyboard by hand To separate the transferred characters the sequence 011 is inserted between every character Thus the characters can be clearly separated as long as no 011 sequence appears in the character itself This was taken into consideration when designing the alphabet To optimize the data throughput rate of the system an alphabet with a variable character length is used For frequently used characters a symbol is used which has a short word length as is
255. d of transmission an EOM bit pattern 0x4B65A5B2 MSB first is sent to mark the end of mes sage The EOM sequence is followed by flush bits to flush the FEC coder and to complete the transmission of the remainder of the interleaver data block FEC and interleaving is used to combat the effects of fading Doppler spread multipath and burst noise User data is first FEC encoded interleaved then mapped into BPSK symbols and transmitted in 32 symbol data segments The 16 symbol channel probe segment transmitted between each succeeding data seg ment has a known PSK pattern Its purpose is to keep the demodulator mainly the equalizer on track in spite of adverse propagation conditions during the HF transmission This STANAG mode is either used to transmit data in transparent binary mode or as ASCII text For this reason the decoder displays the user data in HEX ASCII ASYNC ASCII ASYNC 7 Data bits and No Stop bit or ASCII SYNC format selected from Options Message Type The decoder stops display ing traffic after the EOM bit pattern is received In the HEX display mode the decoded binary data is displayed as hex values MSB first In ASCII ASYNC mode the bit stream is correlated with an ASCII ASYNC structure i e one start bit 0 8 data bits and at least one stop bit 1 The 8 data bits are displayed LSB first In addition to the EOM pattern the display will stop if more than 300 NULL characters are received or if the asynchronous da
256. d to the five tone sequence systems The five digits are often divided into two groups The first digits work as radio net flags the last three digits are user call numbers The entire call number is transmitted by consecutive tones in decade sequence When two identical digits are to be transmitted consecutively then an eleventh frequency is used as a repetition identifier If there more than two identical digits are to be transmitted the repetition tone is appended to the digit tone e g 22222 is transmitted as f2 fw f2 fw f2 where f2 is the tone for 2 and fw is the repetition tone In most systems the accuracy of the single frequencies has to be within 1 1 5 of the nominal value Modifications of the tone allocation and tone duration has led to numerous systems despite many stand ards Only the EURO EuroSignal system uses six consecutive tones The worldwide telephone signaling stand ard DTMF mode transmits two simultaneous tones Server See file server Shift The difference between two tones in an FSK transmission Size control A screen element found on WINDOWS that allows you to change the window size SNAC Single Network Access Code SNR Signal to Noise Ratio Space Application Condition Condition Voltage to signal ground Negative Positive Conventional term MARK SPACE FSK signal state Lower frequency Higher frequency Spinner A control that allows you to increment or decrement n
257. data bits are pro tected with a systematic fixed length Reed Solomon 255 249 28 ary code Channel access is achieved using the carrier sense multiple access CSMA algorithm and the data link service sublayer uses the aviation VHF link control AVLC protocol AVLC is an extension of the HDLC Standard which is specified by the following ISO documents ISO 3309 ISO 4335 ISO 7809 and ISO 8885 The AVLC packets start and end with a special flag byte Ox7E and include a 9 bytes long AVLC header af ter the start flag and 2 bytes long CRC field before the end flag The header contains the 24 bit ICAO air craft ground station addresses of the sending and receiving terminals and one byte link control field indi cating the type of the packet e g INFO Receive Ready RR Exchange Identity XID TEST and Selec tive Reject SREJ In HEX output mode the whole AVLC packet is printed bytewise as hex In ITA5 US mode the AVLC frame types and 24 bit ICAO aircraft ground station addresses are decoded and printed For INFO frames the data field is decoded correspondingly if it is an ACARS packet and is printed in hex format OxXX if it is an ATN packet For XID frames the parameters IDs are mapped to their names and corresponding values are printed as hex For other frame types the whole data field is printed as hex It is recommended to decrease the Gain manually until locating the bursts first visually in FFT Direct view with a 48
258. decoding CODAN 9001 documentation extended SR Calibration added SAT Translation Frequency Tuning Bar changed to SAT Frequency Tuning Bar and new functions added PSK mode tuning window cursors are now merged into one single cursor Application notes removed from the user manual into separate documents available from www wavecom ch BR 6028 is now a mode and no longer a demodulator CRC tables are changed from Config CRCTABLE TXT to Config CRCTable xml Source code chapter removed as the source is no longer available INMARSAT A and METOSAT removed Notation of Translation frequency changed to Offset frequency Notation of INDIR changed to SUB VDL M2 Display Mode added AMSAT P3D The file amsatp3d raw is no longer available Translation frequency replaced with offset frequency CW AFC ON OFF Automatic detection of the Display Mode for MIL STD and STANAG signals 7 1 13 Apri 2011 New WAVECOM install tool License Key no longer required for W61PC Professional version but still requiered for the SAT and Classifier options W CODE no longer supports MEDAV PACTOR 3 CLOVER 2000 CLOVER 2 and CODAN 9001 APCO25 added W CODE Name of SAT Option and Classifier Option changed 6 e General Information WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Version Date Changes 7 2 27 Jul 2011 GW OFDM protocol added LINK 11 protocol added SAT protocols CLOVE
259. des are very difficult to distinguish especially when the system is in idle mode The de coded text including text representations of the special characters IDLE ALFA IDLE BETA and RQ are important additional classification aids in determining the mode under examination gt If a mode is uniquely identified the software will switch to the identified mode and decoding is ini tiated with the measured values of mode baud rate shift and center frequency gt If two or more different systems are identified or if too many transmission errors occur an auto matic switch to a mode will not take place Fast Scan Full Scan The Scan Mode can be selected by Options Scan Mode or by double clicking the Scan Mode field in the Status Bar Scan Mode 7 Full Scan Cancel The software proceeds to create a list of modes to check which is displayed in the Code Check window The content of this list depends on the selection of the Fast Scan or Full Scan options gt In Fast Scan mode the list only contains the modes which are known to use the measured baud rate to reduce the evaluation time gt In Full Scan every mode which is suitable for an FSK code check is listed and all possible combi nations are checked FSK Code Check DIR FSK code check is started in automatic mode by selecting the Analysis Code Check button or from VHF UHF DIR Analysis FSK Code Check This function has a high degree of ac
260. dle sequence is transmitted followed by 50 baud traffic Parameter Value Frequency range VLF HF Modulation FSK Symbol rate shi All traffic is encrypted A message begins with a bit synch sequence and a start of message preamble Message data is sent with a 7 bit 3 4 ratio alphabet and ends with an end of transmission sequence containing at least 4 end of transmission characters The length of a message is variable If a transmission contains more than one message the start of mes Sage sequence is left out between messages Occasionally traffic with call signs in FSK CW is transmitted WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 131 CIS 50 50 CIS 50 50 is very similar to CIS 36 50 but uses different baud rates and shifts Parameter Value Frequency range VLF HF Idle dot reversals are transmitted at 50 Bd followed by traffic in 50 baud more rarely in 100 Baud All traffic is encrypted A message begins with a bit synch sequence and a start of message preamble Message data is sent with a 7 bit 3 4 ratio alphabet and ends with an end of transmission sequence containing at least 4 end of transmission characters The length of a message is variable If a transmission contains more than one message the start of mes Sage sequence is left out between messages Occasionally traffic with call signs in FSK CW is transmitted CLOVER 2 CLOVER 2 is an adaptive modulati
261. done with the Huff man compression This alphabet is called Varicode and differs from the alphabet used in PSK 31 208 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 PSK 31 PSK 63 PSK 125 PSK 250 PSK 31 is a very narrow band and reliable mode The good performance against disturbances is achieved by the use of DPSK modulation Two demodulators are available Parameter Value legion F 1 1 1 1 1 Operation modes Simplex gt For normal use DBPSK can be selected to demodulate a bi phase modulated signal The baud rate is fixed at 31 25 62 5 125 or 250 Bd and is optimized to transfer data at the keyboard input rate of an average operator gt Alternatively DQPSK can be selected to demodulate a four phase modulated signal In this mode additional redundancy is generated by a convolutional encoder with a code rate 1 2 and a con straint length of K 5 i e 2 bits were produced per bit by 2 polynomials After the demodulation of the signal the encoded bits are converted to a normal bit stream by a Viterbi decoder with K 5 and a code rate 1 2 To separate the transferred characters two zeros are inserted between every character Thus the charac ters can be clearly separated as long as no two consecutive zeros appear in the character itself This was taken into consideration when designing the alphabet To optimize the data throughput rate of the system an alphabet with a variable chara
262. double clicking COQUELET 13 in the figure above will interrupt MFSK code checking and immediately start COQUELET 13 Hits Checks shows how many times a mode was successfully identified during the code check If multiple modes are listed the mode with most hits should be tried first Some MFSK modes are very difficult to distinguish especially when the system is in idle mode WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Analysis Tools e 89 Autocorrelation Autocorrelation is used for determining the periodicity of bit patterns Periodicity implies a constant repeti tion of a specific bit pattern If a station transmits the idle pattern 0010011011 0010011011 the perio dicity is said to be 10 bits HNG FEC and RUM FEC have a periodicity of 15 and 16 bits respectively The periodicity could also be 11250 bits i e after 11250 bits the same constantly repeated pattern occurs again Periodicity becomes very important in the classification of unknown transmissions and the analysis of unknown modes and systems First of all the Auto option from the Demodulator menu field or the Auto button should be used to de termine the exact baud rate and frequency shift If the exact baud rate is unknown the IAS measurement function can be used for this purpose with an accuracy of 0 001 Bd This is done by activating the IAS set ting in the Demodulator menu field Autocorrelation is then initiated by selecting and programming the baud rate menu
263. dth Spacing Pilot Frequency W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Classifier Optional e 271 CW For continuous wave signals the entry window looks like the example below Edit Signal gt FSK MFSK PSK OFDM CW Name CW MORSE Decoder cw morse Modulation Codecheck Count 1 Recognition disabled ITU Designator Comments Cancel Delete Delete the selected signal record s from the table s Enable Select the desired signal record in the list of records and press this menu item to re enable a previously disabled signal record Disable Use this function to disable a selected signal record i e remove it from the CCC recognition process The disabled record is greyed out in the list of records Select All Use this funtion to select all signal records in the overview list View Menu View Help Toolbars and Docking Windows gt ete Submode Baud S i z tae aK Set Filter rie Show All alf rds PSK 2 skis FSK alis 2 MFSK MFSK arg e FSK FSK Multicarrier arq e FSK OFDM arq e FSK PSK sd pas PSK Multicarrier arn e FSK wer The view menu contains these menu items Toolbars and Docking Windows Select this menu item to remove or display the CCC Editor Toolbar This allows you to configure the toolbar according to your requirements Status Bar Enable or disable the Status Bar Set Filter Use this menu item to set up a filtered or non fil
264. dulation FSK Symbol rate CIS 11 operates at a Symbol rate of 100 Bd on the radio link Synchronization for the CIS 11 mode is started with the selection of a baud rate An AUTO start causes the automatic determination of the frequency shift and baud rate to be executed first The signal polarity USB or LSB sidebands is automatically detected The CIS 11 data format is 11 bits wide Data bits 1 5 contain the M2 character The data bits are ar ranged in reverse order if compared to normal M2 systems Bits 6 and 7 specify the system state as well as the alphabet Bits 8 11 handle error detection The four test bits allow the position of a bit in error to be computed and then to be corrected The value of the parity bits is obtained by calculating the modulo 2 sum of the bina ry weights of the respective information bits To maintain synchronization between the two duplex stations both transmitters operate continuously and transmit idle characters if no traffic is transferred WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 129 CIS 12 CIS 12 is a multi channel system using 12 channels each modulated with 120 Bd DBPSK or DQPSK Each channel has a separation of 200 Hz to neighbor channels An unmodulated pilot carrier is placed at 3300 Hz from the suppressed carrier Parameter Value Output may be selected as Hex or ASCII CIS 14 CIS 14 is a full duplex system using two frequencies As in th
265. e gt Shift the shift value gt BaudrateA the baudrateA value gt BaudrateB the baudrateB value gt Bandwidth the bandwidth value gt Time stamp the time when the signal was classified number of seconds elapsed since midnight 00 00 00 January 1 1970 coordinated universal time NOTE the values are written to the string in the same order as listed above If not stored with _UNICODE enabled then the string contains normal 8 bit characters values from type char otherwise the string contains 16 bit characters from type wchar_t A char value occupies 1 Byte and a wchar_t value occupies 2 Bytes in the binary WDA file ClassifierCodeCheck data The FileType is CCC Header data This file type uses the File Header described in chapter File Header on page 309 The following additional data is stored in the Header gt Pad O Timestamp format how to show timestamp in classifier textview O Timestamp off 1 show Timestamp in Local time 2 show Timestamp in Universal Time Coordinated UTC Data This FileType uses the data structure described in chapter Data Structures on page 310 to store the da ta A data package in the WDA file contains the data of one classified signal or the CodeCheck data of a clas sified signal The data stored for the classier CodeCheck is divided into two parts the Classifier part and the CodeCheck part A WDA file contains at first
266. e quency information is dynamically extracted from the system broadcasts or in session oriented signaling messages After being switched on the AES must be told or remembers in which region it is currently located and will automatically tune to the corresponding frequency of the GES and will identify the spot beam ID where it is located AES Identification Each AES is identified by an ICAO assigned 24 bit identification code For voice an IMN Inmarsat Mobile Number is available Session Signaling In its idle state the MES continuously listens to the GES P channel updating its internal network status database control channels frequencies etc through the system table broadcasts There are two possibilities for starting a session gt GES initiates the session WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 SAT System e 281 gt AES initiates the session GES Initiated Session Through the terrestrial network the fixed station connects to a GES The GES sends a signaling message to the AES on a P channel The MES receives signaling message and sends a response back to the GES on a R channel The GES in turn sends a channel assignment signaling message for a C channel SCPC for cir cuit connections and a T channel time slot assignment for longer packet switched data connectivity to both the MES and LES and both stations will tune to the assigned traffic channel where the session will take place After the sessions h
267. e connections between decoder cards clients and the server The server is responsible for managing the decoders connected to the computer as well as all the connections made to that decoder The WAVECOM Server is started by the GUI for a local connection GUI and card on the same host or by the Server Con trol for a remote connection The WAVECOM Server is started as a Service When the server has been started a traffic light icon is displayed in the Windows System Tray Right clicking the icon displays a menu m show Preview If the server is stopped you CANNOT restart it using Restart You must click Exit and then go to Start Programs WAVECOM WXXX WavecomServerControl to restart the server WAVECOM Server Control After restart of the server the WAVECOM Server Control screen is displayed Wy WAVECOM Server Control W CODE Remote Name Connections Device Seral License 1 Pevicea 1 Line In Realtek High Defi 1927840122 2 DeviceB 0 Line 1 WINRADIO Virtual 1927340222 3 DeviceC 0 W CLOUD V1 2 0343973651 DeviceD No Device DeviceE No Device DeviceF No Device DeviceG No Device Device H No Device Card Information Card information is available from the Card Information tab Card names Number of connections to the card including local and remote connections Vv Y WV Device name gt Card serial number Setting Up Card Names A maximum of eight cards may be connected to a
268. e than two identical digits are to be transmitted the repetition tone is appended to the digit tone e g 22222 is transmitted as f2 fw f2 fw f2 where f2 is the tone for 2 and fw is the repetition tone Parameter Value Frequency range VHF UHF Operation modes Analogue Selcal Modulation FM SUB Tones Receiver settings FM 12 kHz narrow In most systems the accuracy of the single frequencies has to be within 1 1 5 of the nominal value Decoding the selective calls is started by clicking on a system If transmission and system selection con form the call sign is displayed on the monitor In the Options menu a Time stamp function can be ena bled to add date and time to each call WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 127 Tone Allocation Tone duration 100ms CHINESE 4 4 Chinese 4 4 is a multi carrier transmission mode It consists of 8 carriers They are 300 Hz apart execpt the 4 and 5 carriers which are 450 Hz apart from each other Parameter Value Operation modes Multi carrier PSK Modulation DQPSK Every carrier is DQPSK modulated with a symbol rate of 75 baud Wavecom Chinese 4 4 decoder uses Hadamard soft decision decoding During decoding the paramater Confidence shows the error correction quality A values above 95 means almost all errors are corrected However this is just a qualitative measure The decoder can correct a center frequency error of up to
269. e BAK for the whole message is transferred in the last follow up telegram By means of the BAK the decoder detects if it is a VDEW message with follow up telegrams The transmission speed is 1200 bps and the FFSK nominal frequencies are 1200 Hz for logical 1 and 1800 Hz for logical 0 Indirect modulation sub carrier is used A data packet consists of 64 bits After a carrier pre keying an 8 bit telegram preamble and a 15 bit Barker sequence follow Data is protected by using 8 bit redundancy Mode labeling for ZVEI and VDEW BAK There are 16 different values for the various call types WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 247 Parameter hex Value ZVEI first data word Value VDEW following data words User defined Not used Nous 6 Separation ca Separation cat so o froma emergency cat o a request Status requestiresponse e Acknowmedgement Acknowledgement o serene ate E serene Spare Status for ZVEI and VDEW STAT Four bits are available In the VDEW system these four bits indicate the number of follow up telegrams The last follow up telegram and a basic telegram without follow up telegrams are indicated by OxA In ZVEI the status bits can be used by the carrier Rhombic labeling RAUTE Four bits are used as additional distinction for a producer designation The use is not determined Manufacturer identification Herst Two digits are used The classific
270. e HF bands BULG ASCII employs the standard ITA 5 alphabet a national alphabet and transfers compressed and en crypted messages and files CCIR The entire call number is transmitted by consecutive tones in decade sequence When two identical digits are to be transmitted consecutively then an eleventh frequency is used as a repetition identifier If more than two identical digits are to be transmitted the repetition tone is appended to the digit tone e g 22222 is transmitted as f2 fw f2 fw f2 where f2 is the tone for 2 and fw is the repetition tone Parameter Value Frequency range VHF UHF Operation modes Analogue Selcal Modulation FM SUB Tones Receiver settings FM BW 12 kHz Input format s AF IF In most systems the accuracy of the single frequencies has to be within 1 1 5 of the nominal value Decoding the selective calls is started by clicking on a system If transmission and system selection con form the call sign is displayed on the monitor In the Options menu a Time stamp function can be ena bled to add date and time to each call 126 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Tone Allocation Tone Duration Protocol Time CCIR 1 CCIR 2 CCIR 7 CCITT The entire call number is transmitted by consecutive tones in decade sequence When two identical digits are to be transmitted consecutively then an eleventh frequency is used as a repetition identifier If mor
271. e LCN and have also a sequence number and a check sum The MES must send an assignment acknowl edgement packet before message transfer is initiated The last LES packet is a request for acknowledge ment The MES acknowledge packet will contain a list of packets received in error and the LES will re transmit these packets until all packets have been received by the MES Then the LES releases the LCN and the MES reverts to idle state 284 e SAT System WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Message transfer from a mobile station to a LES is initiated by the MES finding the LES TDM frequency in formation in the NCS bulletin board It then retunes to this TDM and synchronizes to the TDM frame The MES finds a free signaling channel slot by reading the LES TDM bulletin board information and transmits an assignment request to the LES The LES informs the NCS that the MES is busy It then sends an as Signment packet to the MES containing message channel frequency slot number and LCN The MES re tunes and starts transmitting its message SAT C is mainly used in maritime communications but is also widely used for long distance truck fleet management where the trucks are polled and then return position information from a GPS receiver The system also finds its use in the remote control of pumping stations or remote data acquisition WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 SAT System e 285 Modem and FAX Modes Overview
272. e MIL 199 110A mode the raw user data transmitted by the NATO Robust mode is just binary Therefore the NATO Robust decoder displays the user data in BINARY HEX ASCII SYNC and two ASCII ASYNC formats selected from Options Message Type The decoder stops the display after the EOM bit pattern is received and goes to the SYNC status for preamble hunting In the HEX display mode the decoded binary data is just displayed as it is MSB first In the ASCII SYNC mode each 8 bits LSB first represent one ASCII character The display will stop if the EOM pattern is received or if more than 20 NULL characters are received There are two ASCII ASYNC display modes In the first format just named ASCII ASYNC the 8 data bits are preceded by one start bit 0 and followed by at least one stop bit 1 The 8 data bits LSB first form an ASCII character The second format ASCII ASYNC 7 Data bit O Stop Bit displays a 7 bit ASCII char acter LSB first which is preceded by one start bit 0 There is no stop bit in this format In both modes the decoder will stop displaying in addition to upon receiving the EOM pattern when more than 300 NULL characters are received when the async data structure is violated more than 80 times or the EOM bit pat tern is received Tuning the decoder The decoder processes signals in both SSB settings USB and LSB This can be selected with the Polarity setting in the menu NOR will select USB and INV will select LSB
273. e Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help PSK Symbol Rate HF Filter 50 D 5 Mode Analysis v Sau mm 2 Pe lnc 0Hz 44 W CODE PSK Symbol Rate Card 1 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3250 3500 3750 4000 Sps I l I l i 1 I I 1 l I l 1 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3250 3500 3750 4000 Hz Demodulator ANALYSE PB Bandwidth 3600 Hz Center 1720 Hz Input AF LEFT Zoom For signals with low symbol rates select a different zoom factor by using the menu which appears when right clicking the display Note that the lower scales have a higher precision but at the expense of a lower display rate WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Analysis Tools e 83 Pause Graphics Y Zoom 4000 Symbols s Zoom 1000 Symbols s Zoom 500 Symbols s Y Grey Hot Cool Copper RGB E Filter The filter adjusts the smoothing filtering applied to the display Depending on the signal data content it may be found that more filtering is required to clearly observe the peaks Filter AAA eeseescceccccccesecesccescecseoscesscesceossesscessesscccsesscosesesccosesssessessseoos PSK Phase Plane HF DIR SUB and SAT The phase analysis tool is used for analyzing the characteristics of phase modulated signals and to a lim ited extent m ary PAM Phase Amplitude Modulation signals If the symbol rate is known for details see
274. e Options Station To change the display format of Data Code Words use Options Format NATEL The entire call number is transmitted by consecutive tones in decade sequence When two identical digits are to be transmitted consecutively then an eleventh frequency is used as a repetition identifier Parameter Value Frequency range VHF UHF Operation modes Analogue Selcal Modulation FM SUB Tone Receiver settings FM BW 12 kHz Input format s AF IF If there more than two identical digits are to be transmitted the repetition tone is appended to the digit tone e g 22222 is transmitted as f2 fw f2 fw f2 where f2 is the tone for 2 and fw is the repetition tone In most systems the accuracy of the single frequencies has to be within 1 1 5 of the nominal value Decoding the selective calls is started by clicking on a system If transmission and system selection con form the call sign is displayed on the monitor In the Options menu a Time stamp function can be ena bled to add date and time to each call Tone Allocation Digit Hz Digit Hz WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 187 Digit Hz Digit Hz oo tes ac 631 697 770 952 941 CA O s NMT 450 NMT 450 is an analogue mobile telephone system developed by the Telecommunication Administrations of Denmark Finland Norway and Sweden The idea was to establish a compatible automatic public mo bile telephone system in the
275. e base communication Important The sync word must be chosen for proper decoding in the Mobitex network settings and depends on the Mobitex network provider The first data block contains addressing information frame type id number of blocks and other control in formation Frames can either be data link frames used for the management of traffic or payload data WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 181 frames called MRM frames The payload frames contain so called MPAKs i e Mobitex Packets which can have a total length of 512 bits If the message is longer it is split into a number of sequences The first payload data block contains MPAK header information source and destination addresses sub scription flags packet class and packet type information and a timestamp if they are transmitted in the base to mobile direction The remote terminals do not insert a time stamp this is done by the network The system has two payload packet classes PSUBCOM for subscriber packet switched communication and DTESERV for service messages PSUBCOM will accommodate text 7 bit ASCII text data transparent data status messages transpar ent data and higher protocol data identified by a protocol identification byte after the time stamp MODAT The entire call number is transmitted by consecutive tones in decade sequence When two identical digits are to be transmitted consecutively then an eleventh frequen
276. e by which an operating system identifies a file A path name is a sequence of directory and file names each preceded by a backslash that specifies the path from device to directory to file that the operating system takes to locate that file PB Passband PC Personal Computer Phase Shift Keying Is a digital modulation scheme that conveys data by changing or modulating the phase of a reference Signal Pointer A small solid box or arrow on the screen that follows the movement of the mouse and shows where your next action will take place POR Pacific Ocean Region Professional Items only available in the professional software version are marked with Professional PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network RHCP Right Hand Circular Polarization Right clicking Clicking with the pointing devices right button Scroll To move through the contents of a window or so that a different part becomes visible Scroll bars The controls that are used to view text that extends beyond the edge of a window A window can have vertical and or horizontal scroll bars WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Glossary of Terms e 339 SELCAL Selective call systems are an efficient supplement to voice traffic One method was the so called single tone mode using five different tone frequencies another one the two tone modes where the call number is transmitted as frequency combinations Developments le
277. e case for other time multiplex modes TDM e g ARQ M2 242 and ARQ M2 342 CIS 14 bit in terleaves two channels into a frame of 14 bits Parameter Value Frequency range Operation modes Duplex ARQ TDM Modulation FSK Symbol rate 96 0 Bd Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF Additional Info Cyrillic third shift with parity CIS 14 employs a radio channel Symbol rate of 96 Baud Synchronizing to a CIS 14 signal may be initiated by selecting a baud rate or Auto Starting Auto will au tomatically determine shift center frequency and baud rate The two first bits of the multiplex frame identify the channel state as IDLE or TRAFFIC Then two bit inter leaved M2 data code words follow The last two bits are parity bits used for error detection Parity is calcu lated depending on the position of 1 bits In Code Check the simple data format of CIS 14 with only two parity bits may unfortunately lead to una voidable detection errors CIS 36 CIS 36 in error correcting traffic mode is using a horizontal line and vertical block error detection Each block has ten data frames and a parity frame Each data frame has five data characters and one parity character In case an error is detected the receiving station starts ask for a frame repetition NAK instead of ACK from the last complete and correctly received frame 130 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Pa
278. e device may take corrective action such as requesting the block be sent again otherwise the data is assumed to be error free though with some small probability it may contain undetected errors this is the funda mental nature of error checking CRCs are so called because the check data verification code is a redundancy it adds zero information to the message and the algorithm is based on cyclic codes CRCs are popular because they are simple to implement in binary hardware are easy to analyze mathematically and are particularly good at detecting common errors caused by noise in transmission channels As the check value has a fixed length the func tion that generates it is occasionally used as a hash function Database management system DBMS A software system for organizing storing retrieving analyzing and modifying information Default button The push button with a bold border in dialogues The default button often has a dotted line border around the button name The default button is chosen when you press Enter or Ctrl Enter depending on your configuration 334 e Glossary of Terms WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Default font Used font if no other font is defined DIS The DIS input Discriminator has a range of O 20 kHz This input is supported by a few VHF UHF re ceivers and facilitates the reception of Direct FSK signals like POCSAG or PACKET 9600 The advantage of this inpu
279. e display is immediately visible on the display Incorrect settings Correct settings Several Color schemes for both tools are available through the right click menu In summary the basic steps for analyzing a suspected D PSK signal are as follows gt Use the FFT in the PSK Symbol Rate analysis tool to characterize the signal Use the cursors to configure the estimate of the center frequency and bandwidth gt Use the PSK Symbol Rate analysis tool to measure and select the symbol rate of the signal WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Analysis Tools e 85 gt Try and view the phase plane of the signal using the DPSK demodulator If the signal is a PSK sig nal the phase plane should be visible gt If the DPSK demodulator failed to produce a meaningful display try the IQ demodulator This re quires accurate adjustment of the reference signal to produce a meaningful display PSK Code Check HF DIR and SUB PSK code check is started by selecting the PSK Code Check button or from HF Modes Analysis PSK Code Check The PSK code check is initialized with default values In many cases the user needs to set up the following values gt center frequency gt baudrate gt number of channels gt bandwidth use the pb tuning to enter the correct bandwidth The center frequency can be set by using the cursors in the FFT Window as shown below or by selecting Center in the Demodulator
280. e oscilloscope displays a rel ative and un calibrated value After obtaining the measurement time frequency can be determined By clicking on the graph the display will be paused and measurement cursors appear for both axis Several Color schemes are available through the right click menu WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Analysis Tools e 75 Oscilloscope HF Trig Mode Positive Trig Level 0 Da O bel 2 W CODE Oscilloscope Card 1 2 WAVECOM W CODE W CODE Oscilloscope Card 1 Y ast File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help CAC PE VA WJ Demodulator TIME Time Div 1 ms Gain 7 3 Input STANAG4285 The Trigger Mode option allows the real time oscilloscope to trigger on the Positive or the Negative slope or to be switched Off Trigger Mode Negative The vertical sensitivity may be set with the option Time Div Nine predefined values are available covering a range from 200 us to 100 ms per division FSK Analysis The FSK analysis mode is an important tool to measure the baud rate and frequency shift of FSK transmis sions The magnitude of these property values may help to identify the transmission being monitored The Trigger Level option allows conventional level driven triggering to be set The un calibrated input voltage range is from 99 to 99
281. e the decoder demodulator processes the sub carrier modula tion ASK Amplitude Shift Keying The simplest way to impress the digital information on a carrier is to key the carrier on and off represent ing the two levels of binary information This was the earliest keying method and is still used for Morse links AS most noise encountered at radio frequencies is amplitude noise this modulation method is very susceptible to noise FSK Frequency Shift Keying As electronic equipment became more refined with improved frequency stability and the demands for er ror free communication increased frequency shift keying FSK was introduced In this mode the trans mitter is continuously on but transmits alternately on two different frequencies one representing Mark level and the other one Space level As amplitude noise is additive it can be eliminated by clipping all spikes above the carrier level The difference between the two frequencies the frequency deviation is called the shift and may be for example 170 425 or 850 Hz For many years FSK was the mainstay of digital radio communication PSK Phase Shift Keying PSK manipulates the carrier phase information in conformance with the digital information to be transmit ted by advancing or delaying the phase of the carrier As equipment sophistication increased phase keying became more common and is now in use on modern high speed HF radio links e g in MIL or STANAG based system
282. e to the transmitter site of the interesting party This is the only way to ensure that the quality of the signal is sufficient to secure that all transmitted packets are correctly captured To facilitate the decoding of data the WAVECOM decoder in addition to outputting the decoded data in the decoder window also saves raw channel data with sequence numbers and including bad packets to a text file The text file may be processed manually or by a user provided application COQUELET 13 COQUELET 13 is an asynchronous system and uses a start and idle tone of 1052 Hz As with COQUELET 8 the first group contains 8 tones for keying and the second group 4 tones Parameter Value pao ran Operation modes Asynchronous simplex Modulation MFSK 13 Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF Additional Info ITA 2 COQUELET 13 has a tone duration of 75 ms which is equivalent to a 50 Bd Baudot transmission with 1 5 stop bits Two code tables are defined for this mode Code Table O and Code Table 1 138 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Tone Assignment of COQUELET 13 Tone Number Frequency Hz Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 First tone Group 912 5 E E s E IC 1022 1052 Idle or start tone Second Tone Group COQUELET 8 COQUELET 8 is an MFSK Multiple Frequency Shift Keying system and like the PICCOLO system trans lates an ITA 2 character into a sequence of two
283. e using the PXGF format contains a PXGF stream with a prepended header The header was designed to allow an application to identify a file without processing the file The capability to identify files becomes more important as file sizes get bigger The PXGF file format supports large file sizes PXGF DESCRIPTION The PXGF format was designed to represent sampled data with additional information pertaining to the way in which the data was sampled BACKGROUND The PXGF format is loosely based on the Microsoft RIFF file format The RIFF format is based on the con cept of a chunk Chunks are blocks that contain specific application defined data In the RIFF format the complete file is a single RIFF chunk RIFF chunks and LIST chunks are currently the only two types of chunks that may contain sub chunks All the remaining chunks in the file are children of the global RIFF chunk The RIFF format is unsuitable for our purposes for two primary reasons gt The global RIFF chunk is limited in size to 4GB thereby effectively restricting the file size to 4GB gt The RIFF format is unsuitable for streaming applications as one need to read the whole file se quentially to be able to parse it There is no synchronization mechanism available For these reasons a new file and streaming format was proposed and developed namely the PXGF format THE PXGF CHUNK STRUCTURE The PXGF format puts data into chunks Different types of chunks are defined to store
284. ect number of tones for MFSK signals PSK A and B Signal Confusion Under certain conditions the classifier cannot distinguish between the A and B variants of PSK modulation A PSK signal of one variant may be mistaken for the other variant if the signal is offset from the real cen ter frequency with a certain fraction of its baud rate i e for PSK 2 Y for PSK 4 1 8 and PSK 16 1 16 of the baud rate This behavior also includes multiples of the fractions OQPSK The current version of the classifier has difficulties in correctly evaluating the baud rate of OQPSK signals e g Inmarsat Aero Additionally the phase constellation diagram may be incorrect Handling of Synchronous and Asynchronous Speeds The handling of asynchronous Baudot signals with 1 5 stop bits is a challenge If the classifier does not succeed in recognizing the stop bits it will classify the signal as a synchronous signal having the double speed of the actual signal CW Recognition The classifier may confuse a low rate FSK signal with a fast CW signal particularly at the edges of the classification bandwidth To lower the probability of such behavior a classification model may be selected which only allows CW signals below 30 Bd to be classified at the edges of the classification bandwidth Classifier Code Check HF CCC The HF Classifier Code Check is a versatile analysis tool for the classification of unknown signals and the determination of the protocol mode i
285. ect shift or center may be set in the Demodula tor menu Standard values for the center frequency and the shift are 1700 Hz and 1000 Hz The packet radio protocol is a derivative of the X 25 and HDLC computer network protocols Packet radio is a synchronous system in which data is transmitted in ASCII character packets At the start and end of each block a control character or flag 01111110 is sent The address can consist of up to 80 characters but 16 or 24 character addressing is common when using direct connections or a single repeater The packet protocol distinguishes between three frame types I Information S Supervisory and U Un numbered Payload data transfer uses I frames or very rarely U frames S and U frames are used for transmission control WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 195 The data field can contain up to 256 characters All characters and character combinations are permitted Since transmission is transparent A checksum is sent in the FCS field The status field contains three fields with connection status information in addition to the call signs Frame types are indicated by I S or U S frame status messages e g Receiver Ready RR Receiver Not Ready RNR or Reject REJ are dis played In the third field the transmit and receive sequence numbers are displayed This number ranges from rO to r7 or SO to s7 The sequence number indicates to the opposite station
286. ecure modes 7 bit ASCII Alphabet used by CODAN 9102 Software Secure Interactive Packets Chirp decoding The picture below shows the CODAN 9001 Options dialog The settings from the dialog are stored into the Codan90010Options xml file r CODAN 9001 Options Derandomization 3 No derandomization _ Automatic LSR initialization Secure and Unsecure Custom defined LSR initialization for derandomization LSR initializations table 5bacdf Add Sbacdf9 LSR initialization value 5bacdf9 Output options Output data format Alphabet Store channel data 9 RAW DATA O 7 bit ASCII V Enable frame status messages gt TEXT DATA 8 bit ASCI i C Decompress 5 RAW amp TEXT DATA Lox Cancel J Apply I The CODAN 9001 data transmission system uses a variable randomization in secure and secure interactive mode The randomization vector can change between successive transmissions The randomi zation value is shown in the status pane In the two status lines at the top of the decoding window the frame type DATA ACK IDLE and some information about the decompressor if used are presented Possible derandomization options gt No derandomization no manipulation of the demodulated symbols in this case it is not possi ble to recognize frame characteristics and decode into TEXT DATA Because the decoder does not recognize the frame length with every synchronization the ma
287. efined inputs appear STANAG 4285 Parameter Value PXGF1 Input Name STANAG 4285 Device File File Path imel_Secure_222222nach11111 1_c wavk Channel Left Type PCM Play Continuous Off Add Apply Delete Cancel gt Inthe left table the user defined custom inputs are listed gt In the right table the parameters of the currently selected custom input are displayed The Pa rameter column contains the names of the parameters and the Value column shows the related parameter values gt The Add button is used to create a new custom input The Apply button saves the parameter set tings of a newly created or an edited custom input Pressing the Delete button removes a selected custom input The following picture shows the Custom Inputs dialog after pressing the Add button STANAG4285 Parameter Value PXGF1 Newlnput 3 Input Name Newlnput 3 Device Choose a device type Apply Delete OK Cancel The Input Name can be edited in the right table by typing a new name into the Value field if desired Next the device type has to be specified File or TCP IP can be chosen from the list box that appears by clicking on the Choose a device type WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 First start e 51 STANAG4285 Parameter PXGF1 Newlnput 3 Value Input Name Newlnput 3 Device eee File a TCP IP v Add a new WAV File Custom
288. elated To separate the transferred characters a O11 sequence is inserted between each character guaranteeing Separation as long as this sequence does not appear in the character itself PSK 31 FEC uses the same varicode alphabet as PSK 10 having a maximum length of seven bits per char acter PSK 63F PSK 125F PSK 220F PSK 63F and PSK 125F are very narrow band and reliable modes The performance against disturbances is achieved by the use of DPSK modulation Parameter Value Operation modes Simplex FEC Modulation DBPSK Compared to PSK 31 an improvement was made concerning the error rate and ionosphere effects such as doppler fading and multi path The result was a mode which uses forward error correction FEC and also has a higher baud rate In contrast to PSK 31 only DBPSK modulation is used The baud rate is optimized to the data rate which an operator can input on a keyboard by hand To recover bit stream after demodulation a Viterbi decoder with K 7 and code rate Y is used Because of the use of DBPSK only the mode is insensitive against a confusion of LSB and USB To optimize the data throughput rate of the system the alphabet uses a variable character length For frequently used characters a symbol is used which has a short word length as is done with the Huffman compression 210 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Note In contrast to PSK 31 these modes do n
289. elected Classification Finished The uppermost status bar will show the current status of the CCC Ty AVECOR W COD E W CODE a ssifier Cox heck HF Card File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help lassifier Code Check P3 Code Check finished NOR Auto 10 33 36 08 Mode Analysis R gt ma 2 te MD pa DH H W CODE Classifier Code Check HF Card 1 ago CCC Settings Classifier Settings Code Check Settings 33 34 33 35 4750 Hz A 4500 3750 4000 4250 3500 2750 3000 3250 W 0 250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 5 Sl 54 i cc MA fa AL 4800 Hz I 50 2500 2 3 i 1 1 1 1 1 I 1250 1500 1750 2000 22 750 3000 3250 3500 3750 4000 4250 4500 4750 Hz Signal Modul Center Shift Spacing Baudr signali asu Signa Signal acia 4VGDuU Signal diBuv Es Signal 5 Bandwidth 4300 Hz Center 2704 Hz Offset 0 Hz Input AF LEFT Media Md xe ds a SS re Sonagram Window and Settings Dialogues For details on the sonagram window refer to the section on Sonagram on page 74 The upper left hand side of the sonagram window contains the buttons for the three setting dialogues which determine the behavior of the CCC WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Classifier Optional e 257 Classifier Code
290. elephone line an adapter blocking the line and ringing voltages to the decoder but passing through these voltages to the devices must be employed To capture signals the decoder must be inserted between the calling and the called device The actual configuration of the interface adapter will depend on the type of telephone line the value of line and ringing voltages local laws and regulations and physical connectors used line adapters should be acquired locally Constraints If only mono directional capture is available the following demodulation constraints apply Fax 17 30 V 21 modulated Signals from recorded direction demodulated opposite direction demodu lated if echo level is sufficient Data V 22 V 22bis Signals from recorded direction demodulated opposite direction demodulated if echo level is sufficient V 32 V 32bis Signals from recorded direction demodulated if echo from opposite direction is suf ficiently low V 34 V 90 Demodulation impossible The recording must include all signaling from the very beginning of a transmission otherwise demodulation and decoding may not be possible Carrier lost or reception of fax DCN signal is considered as the end of communication 292 e Modem and FAX Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 If a fax sample stream is missing the initial handshake and thus the fax parameters are absent the signal may still be decoded by manually entering the value of
291. emote computer that con tains at least one WAVECOM card Select the card number Note Connecting to a decoder card on the network may take up to two minutes The wait cursor will ap pear while the connection is being made Configuration Font size The Alarm Monitor will display the text lines with the WAVECOM Unicode font in the selected size Use Color to display the background with the selected color WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Additional Functions e 299 Options The Save menu is used to configure the file saving options Save all receiwed data Mf Alarm Save data containing the specified alarm strings Change time g Time when save files are closed 00 00 and new files are created UE Cancel Text If checked all text data will be saved to a file Alarm If checked text that contains the specified alarm strings will be saved to a file Change time This specifies the time when Alarm Monitor will create new data files for the information being written to files When new files are created data will not be lost during the changeover The old files are closed and stored for later use Settings The Settings menu is used to configure the file and folder names alarm strings and SMS settings Settings Folder The settings in this dialog box help you archiving the different files The file name will consist of the date computer name card number and frequency of the t
292. enabled in the De modulator menu using the Mode item The proper assignment of the V1 and V2 keying combinations must now be set up using the Y B V1 Chan nel and Y B V2 Channel items in the Options menu Most stations use the Y Y B B setting for the V1 channel The second channel frequently uses either the Y B Y B or B Y B Y combination If synchronization is not achieved after configuration has been completed change the V1 and V2 settings until the right combination has been found For example transmissions are possible with V1 set to B Y B Y and V2 set to Y B B Y This combination results in the first three telegraph characters to be transmitted on the V2 channel TWINPLEX stations only key the two inner frequencies f2 and f3 during the IDLE state no traffic or dur ing the RQ state incorrect acknowledgement from the remote station In these states SITOR and TWINPLEX systems cannot be distinguished from each other VDEW The entire call number is transmitted by consecutive tones in decade sequence When two identical digits are to be transmitted consecutively then an eleventh frequency is used as a repetition identifier Parameter Value Frequency range VHF UHF Operation modes Analogue Selcal Modulation FM SUB tone Receiver settings FM BW 12 kHz Input format s AF IF If more than two identical digits are to be transmitted the repetition tone is appended to the digit tone e g 22222 is transmitted as f2 fw f2 fw f2
293. enu Click on Cancel or the Close button to leave the menu The descriptions of the operating modes in another section of this manual are arranged in alphabetical or der HF Mode Selector Transmission Type FSK ALIS AA ARQ M4 342 BAUDOT 222 CIS 36 50 DUP ARQ 2 A KA GW FSK PACTOR FEC SITOR ARQ ano res ARQ530 a A a ange asa ars Eos sana sao SWED ARQ vs MFSK ALE 400 ALIS 2 AUM 13 CIS 36 COQUELET 8 COQUELET 13 COQUELET 80 ICAO SELCAL MFSK 8 MFSK 16 MFSK 20 OLIVIA PICCOLO MK6 PICCOLO MK12 SP 14 TWINPLEX PSK amp OFDM ALF RDS CHN 4 4 Cs 12 CLOVER 2 CLOVER 2000 CODAN 9001 GW OFDM GW PSK PACTOR I PACTOR I AUTO PACTOR I FEC PACTOR II PSK AM PSK 10 PSK 31 PSK 31 FEC PSK 63 PSK 63F PSK 125 PSK 125F PSK 220F PSK 250 ROBUST PACKET MIL STANAG HF ACARS LINK 11 CLEW MIL 188 110A MIL 188 110B MIL 188 110 16TONE MIL 188 110 39TONE MIL 188 141A MIL 188 141B MIL M 55529A STANAG 4285 STANAG 4415 STANAG 4481 FSK STANAG 4481 PSK STANAG 4529 STANAG 5065 FSK Graphic PRESS FAX STV __ WEATHER FAX WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 First start e 65 HF Analysis Selector HF Analysis Selector Classifier Classifier Code Check Frequency Time Ft Fra Sonagram Oscilloscope FSK MFSK C MESK Anais C MESK Code Check PSK PSK Symbol Rate PSK Code Check MIL STANAG MIL STANAG Code C
294. er gt One tone is used as a repetition indicator A transmission is initiated with a start sequence which identifies this mode and may be used for accurate tuning This sequence is transmitted at 1 Baud which makes it readable even during very unfavorable conditions The data proper is transmitted at a rate of 8 Baud As the transmission rate is very low this mode is insen sitive to fading and multipath propagation A MFSK IAS will retrieve symbol clock In order to process both baud rates used by AUM 13 the IAS has to be configured to a baud rate of 16 Baud Thus at a rate of 1 baud 16 symbols per transmitted symbol and at 8 Baud two symbols per transmitted symbol must be received with a certain tolerance Even if for instance the same character is received 16 times in succession error correction is impossible due to the fact that in case of repetition of numerals the numeral itself is followed by the repetition indicator AUTOSPEC The standard baud rate for AUTOSPEC is 68 5 Bd WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 119 The parity dependent repeat transmission of the 5 data bits is easily recognized by ear for certain charac ter combinations The IDLE signal also has a distinctive sound Parameter Value reser cat Operation modes Modulation Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF Additional Info 10 Bit Bauer Code The Bauer code is used for error detection and co
295. er does not support milliseconds The TIME value is the the number of seconds elapsed since mid night 00 00 00 January 1 1970 coordinated universal time according to the system clock The data for the Sonagram file types occupies 4112 bytes inside a data package after the data header A data package in the WDA file contains the data points of one FFT sample and its timestamp value The FFT sample data points are stored in short values 2 bit type that is 2 Bytes in the WDA file contains the value of one FFT sample data point NOTE the following struct type could be used to extract the data WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 WAVECOM Data Formats e 315 typedef struct ST SONAGRAM DATA short asFFTSamp 2048 SYSTEMTIME Time ST SONAGRAM DATA SigAnal data The FileType stored in the file header is SigAnal Header data This file type uses the File Header described in chapter File Header on page 309 The following additional data is stored in the Header following the default header FileHeader CursorHide LabelX LabelY Pad 64 Bytes 40 Bytes 40 Bytes XSizePhys YSizePhys XSizeUser YSizeUser CursorHide flag that indicates if the cursor are hidden LabelX the x axis unit label string LabelY the y axis unit label string Pad padding bytes for alignment not used XSizePhys the physical width of the data range YSizePhys the physical height of the data range
296. er Side Band or LSB Lower Side Band The transmitted text file is output in the window MIL 188 110 16Tone MIL 188 110A B Appendix B MIL 188 110 16Tone is a non mandatory part of the MIL STD 188 110 military standard for use by all departments and agencies of the Department of Defense Parameter Value Frequency range Operation modes Modulation 16 tone DPSK Doppler Tone 605 Hz Freq1 935 Hz Freq16 2585 Hz Shift 110 Hz Symbol rate 75 Bd 172 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Parameter Value Center frequency 1760 Hz Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF BINARY HEX and ASCII output are provided MIL 188 110 39Tone MIL 188 110A B Appendix C MIL STD 188 110 39 Tone is a non mandatory part of the MIL STD 188 110 military standard for use by all departments and agencies of the Department of Defense Parameter Operation modes PSK Simplex Modulation 39 tone Q DPSK Definition The modulation technique used in this mode consists of differential quadrature phase shift keying QDPSK of 39 orthogonal sub carriers in the range from 675Hz to 2812 5 Hz and an additional unmodulated Dop pler reference tone at 393 75Hz The modulation speed symbol rate is always 44 44 Bd Through the transmission of redundant infor mation on certain tones different user data rates can be achieved within a range of 75 to 2400 bps This mode uses F
297. er between the two channels To achieve the best performance the AFC automatic frequency control should be enabled After the demodulation and the bit synchronization the symbols of the two channels are combined to one bit stream After the modulation type has been determined the resulting bit stream is de interleaved passed through a Viterbi decoder In a next step the CRC is checked PACTOR II is suited to the transfer of large files rather than hand typed text The data may be transmitted as ASCII without compression or can be compressed with HUFFMAN or PSEUDO MARKOV compression In addition run length encoding RLE is included Tuning a PACTOR II Signal After launching the mode the first step is to look for a valid PACTOR II signal in the spectrum WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 199 Sel ele AAA _ __ r PU 1495 pas I 1 1000 1200 1400 160 The bandwidth of the spectrum can be switched between 500 Hz 1000 Hz 4000 Hz and 24000 Hz The upper and lower frequency boundaries of the signal are the selected with the right and left cursors With the center cursor the center frequency may be set more precisely The precision of the center fre quency is very important and directly influences the performance of the decoding To ensure that the system can handle drifting signals or a coarsely adjusted center frequency AFC may be enabled in the Demodulator menu The carrier trackin
298. er page is split into two subsections E N Version CmStick 1 14 Capacity 97 free 58012 Bytes J Status Disabled gt SY Enabled until unplugged S Enabled pias a CodeMeter is started WebAdmin l Ele Ede Wew Favorites Tools teb dE http focabhost 22350 Server html WebAdmin CodeMeter Server Configuration Available Network Licenses at lap ace Select Help from the menu Puasa Pasanen m Ml Computer Protected Mode Off fay 100 gt Now you see the CodeMeter help screen License update for CodeMeter and CmStick New licenses can be loaded to the CmStick without sending the key to WAVECOM Just click License Up date on the CodeMeter Control Center and follow the information provided by the assistant S CodeMeter Kontrollzentrum Datei Aktion Ansicht Hilfe Lizenz Ereignisse Ausleihe CmStick 1 1186722 1 1186722 ion CmStick 1 15 97 frei 58184 Bytes S Deaktiviert l S Aktiviert solange angeschlossen amp Aktiviert Lizenzaktualisierung Auswerfen Kennwort ndern CodeMeter ist gestartet WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Additional Functions e 295 WAVECOM Server Introduction The WAVECOM Server and the WAVECOM Server Control applications are used to setup and monitor th
299. erminal specific settings like gt SYNC ASYNC gt Number of databits gt Parity bits NONE EVEN ODD MARK SPACE Number of stop bits Bit Sequence order MSB LSB gt Display format WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 First start e 37 ITAS5 ASCII ITA2 HEX BINARY S5066 The STANAG5066 parser can be used with the NATO and MIL STD modems like STANAG4285 STANAG4539 MIL STD 110 Display format gt If you press the Activate Button the software tries to evaluate the following parameters SYNC ASYNC Number of databits Parity bits Number of stop bits Display format Modem Settings a Modem Settings Path server C Users Public D ocuments WAVECOM WCODE DATA m Path client C Usersi Publici Documents wAY E COM WCODE DATA ss For the modem modes additional parameters can be set in the Options Modem Settings dialog box These settings are gt Path server Set the Windows directory for the output files on the server gt Path client Set the Windows directory for the output files on the client computer This setting is only enabled on a remote GUI MSI MSI Multiple Scroll Inhibit is a function which will suppress multiple linefeeds LF In addition a software generated Line Feed LF is inserted when a carriage return is received Using this menu item the function may be separately toggled on and off for the video output Usin
300. es W51PC W41PC or W40PC The File Type is dependent on the stored data and can have the following values gt Text Graphics FELDHELL SigAnal SAT Classifr CCC gt Sonagram The Version is always 0x00020000 Version A or 0x00030000 Version B Vv Y VV WV WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 WAVECOM Data Formats e 309 LineCount contains the number of data lines stored the data stored is line based that is a data package represents the data of a line Pad contains additional information to be stored Pad2 contains additional information to be stored The 64 Byte struct type below can be used to extract the file header struct FileHeader Signature S FileType 8 Version LineCount Pad 8 Pad2 32 Data Structures Following the header the data is stored as one or more data packages The file header contains the num ber of data packages stored DataHeader Data DataHeader Data DataHeader Data y Leyes neves A data package contains a data header and the data itself DataHeader Data The size of the data header is 12 Bytes The data header at the start of each data package contains the following information PrevSize Size TIME In PrevSize the size of the preceding data is stored Size stores the size of the data contained in the suc ceeding data package and in TIME the timestamp of the data is stored The 12 Byte LineData struct type below c
301. es the data structure described in chapter Data Structures on page 310 to store the da ta A data package in the WDA file contains the data of all pixels of one line in the graphic The pixel data is stored in BYTES 8 bit type values that is one Byte in the WDA file contains the value of an Pixel in the graphic FELDHELL data The FileType is FELDHELL Header data This file type uses the File Header described in chapter File Header on page 309 No additional data is stored in the Header Data This FileType uses the data structure described in chapter Data Structures on page 310 to store the da ta A data package in the WDA file contains the data of all pixels of one line in the graphic The pixel data is stored in unsigned char values 8 bit type that is one Byte in the WDA file contains the value of an Pixel in the graphic Sonagram data The FileType stored in the file header is Sonagram Header data This file type uses the File Header described in chapter File Header on page 309 The following additional data is stored in the Header following the default header FileHeader DocSizeX DocSizeY CursorA CursorB Bandwidth Translation LowFreq HighFreq LowMag HighMag VideoFilterOn Limit Limit Limit Limit DocSizeX the document width DocSizeY the document height CursorA the value of the cusorA CursorB the value of the cusorB Bandwidth the Bandwidth value Offset
302. et Every second bit of the bit stream is used for the convolutional error correction and thus each codeword consists of 14 bits FELDHELL Feld Hell is a synchronous picture telegraph system invented in the 1930s It uses a virtual matrix laid down on the character to be transmitted The pixels of the matrix are then sent scanning the matrix from the bottom of the first column left to the top of the last column right covering a matrix of 7 columns x 14 lines The first and last columns are blank as are the top and bottom lines giving an effective matrix of 5 x 10 pixels Pixels are always sent in pairs Parameter VENTE The original Hell system was a very simple mechanical one with an indented wheel for each character used to generate the transmit pulse trains via a contact In the receiver the pulses activated a printing magnet with a writing edge which pushed a paper tape towards a helix inked by an ink roller No means of synchronization besides nominal helix speed was used speed differences showed up as ris ing or falling lines of letters but as the pitch of the helix was designed to print a double row of charac ters one complete character would always be displayed on the tape Hell utilizes AM in the form of CW or A2 When receiving Feld Hell the decoder will emulate the original Hell tape printer and print each character twice making exact phasing unnecessary as at least one charac ter will be complete and unbroken
303. eted after two hours or when the mode is closed As the GW OFDM signal contains no redundancy sufficient reception quality is important every DATA packet must be received at least one time without corruption In the case of packet repetition the decoder can handle multiple received packets It should be noted that the decompressor has no error correction even one wrong bit can produce a completely false decoded output GW PSK GW PSK is used by Globe Wireless on the Maritime Data Network of the company The network works with several digital modes in an adaptive system GW FSK is always used for opening a connection Depending on propagation conditions it may switch to GW PSK or other digital modes Parameter Value GW PSK is DQPSK and D8PSK modulated with a bandwidth of 400 Hz The bit rate is 400 bits s or 600 bits s with a fixed symbol rate of 200 Baud A GW PSK frame consists of 288 or 432 bits Each frame contains 25 characters or data bytes For error detection a 16 bit CRC checksum is required For smaller packets a filler U for traffic or lt for last pack ets is used A GW PSK signal is tuned in the same way as a PACTOR II signal The precision of the center frequency is very important and influences directly the performance of the decoding Most of the traffic is compressed From time to time uncompressed GPS position data in NMEA format is transmitted on ship frequencies GW PSK stations can be found on all mari
304. ets are very short turn the squelch of the receiver OFF Speed selection is not available for ACARS as only one speed is in use 2400 Baud Processing of ACARS Messages It is possible to do some interpretation of ACARS messages The following options are available Reassemble multipart messages This setting enables the reassembling of bigger messages which are sent in several parts Instead of showing each part separately the message is shown as one single message when the last part has been received The message header is still shown separately for each part Parse ADS C messages This setting enables the parsing of ADS C messages Automatic Dependent Surveillance Contract When an ADS C message is received it is decoded and the additional information is shown in the output win dow WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 107 ACARS Frame Parameter Value Pre key 16 characters All binary ones O reten _ Block Check Sequence 16 bits Bcs Suffix 1 character DEL Messages may be single or multi block The pre key sequence and the BCS have no parity bits ACARS communications are divided in Category A and Category B Using Category A an aircraft may broadcast its messages to all ground stations This is denoted by an ASCII 2 in the Mode field of the downlink message The WAVECOM software translates this character to A Using Category B an aircraft transmits its message
305. eys Sometimes windows in the background are waiting for a button to be pressed to allow the installation to proceed WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Setup e 13 W CODE Server Control The WAVECOM Server and the WAVECOM Server Control applications are used to setup and monitor the connections between devices clients and the server respectively The server is responsible for managing the devices e g soundcards in the computer as well as all the connections made to those devices The WAVECOM Server is started by the GUI for a local connection GUI and devices on the same machine or by the Server Control for a remote connection The WAVECOM Server is started as a Windows Service W CODE Device Serial Number The serial number of the audio device soundcard or virtual audio cable VAC is generated from part of the active MAC address of the computer network interface and a counter When WAVECOM hardware W PCI and W PCle are detected they are also listed in the W CODE Device dialog window with the device name and serial number The serial number is used as a reference for cus tom inputs and default settings You will lose some settings if you switch to a different LAN adaptor e g switching from a WLAN to a LAN connection Host address or name Speed limit Baud YY 127 0 0 1 Disconnect Server Devices No device Name Connections Device Serial number soundcard 1 Line In Realtek High Definitio V1
306. f 485 4 ms An error free transmission is equivalent to a terminal baud rate of 100 Baud The ALIS system automatically determines the optimal operating frequency after having received a CALL command The station then sends a synchronization word address block counter and a status word The receiving station correlates this bit sequence and synchronizes itself If the data transmission link fails ALIS will search for a new frequency to re establish the link ALIS 2 ALIS 2 Automatic Link Set up is a simplex system operating with a baud rate of 240 82 baud ALIS 2 is described in the Report of the CCIR 1990 Fixed Service at Frequencies below about 30 MHz of the ITU Parameter Additional Inf ALIS 2 is 8 FSK modulated The tone spacing is 240 Hz and the tone duration is 4 15254 ms The trans mission block consists of 55 tri bits resulting in 165 bits per frame In addition to the preamble of 21 bits each block contains 126 data bits The preamble includes an identification code allowing different systems to be identified Two identification bits signal four operational states traffic idle RQ and binary data transfer The 16 bit CRC checksum serves the detection of transmission errors and error correction purposes The overall transmission and receive cycle of ALIS 2 is 354 bits which is equivalent to 490 ms In case of an error free data transmission the terminal bit rate is 720 bit s ALIS 2 almost always uses the ITA 5 A
307. f 500Hz are achieved by the use of a two channel DPSK modulation 200 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Parameter Value Operation modes PSK Simplex FEC Modulation Two channel DQPSK Symbol rate 100 0 Bd ani Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF Additional Info ITA 5 with block coding HEX Binary Output In contrast to PACTOR II modulation and block length in PACTOR II FEC is fixed to DQPSK LONG BLOCK Where PACTOR II uses ARQ e after each block sent an acknowledge message from the re ceiving station is required PACTOR II FEC has no acknowledge return channel Thus the receiving station must be able to do all the error correction This is achieved by using a Viterbi decoder with k 9 and code rate Interleaving protects the transmission against fading Using a DQPSK modulation is a good compromise when looking at the amount of bits transmitted and the necessary signal to noise ratio To extract the data from a PACTOR II FEC signal the signal is received and demodulated with a two channel DPSK demodulator The center frequency must be adjusted to the midpoint between the two channels To achieve the best performance the AFC automatic frequency control should be enabled Af ter the demodulation and the bit synchronization the symbols of the two channels are combined to one bit stream After the modulation type has been determined the resulting bi
308. f classification depends on the frequency settings Thus it is important that the mode corresponds to the actual input signal frequency range The success of classification attempts is highly dependent on the selection of the proper sampling time To recognize low speed signals the higher sampling rate i e 3 2 s should be selected It is worth keeping in mind that the classifier is based on statistically based estimates of the properties of the input signals and that many factors determine the reliability of these results among these are signal quality and application settings However using the classifier in conjunction with common sense and good monitoring provides a powerful aid in analyzing unknown signals Classifier User Interface The classifier user interface consists of a settings screen and two windows gt An FFT window gt A list of classified signals 250 e Classifier Optional WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Press the Classifier button to launch the classifier or select it in one of En the analysis menus or selectors Press the Start Stop Classifier button to restart the classification b Classifier WB HF Continuous Mode When the Classifier is launched a label positioned in the left hand side i o o of the upper status line indicates the selected frequency range and the acquisition mode FFT Window WAVECOM W COD W C File MF Modes VHF UMF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Moderns
309. for NCS and LES TDM and 4 kBaud for LES voice and low speed data Parameter Value Frequency range L Band C Band Operation modes Inm M Forward NCS and LES Msg Chnl Forward 6 kbps DPSK NCS TDM LES TDM optional 8 kbps OQPSK LES Voice LES Low Speed Data Return 3 kbps DPSK Slotted Aloha TDMA 8 kbps OQPSK SCPC Required SNR gt 15 dB 20 dB recommended ETE In idle mode all mobile stations listen to the NCS Network Control Station common TDM channel which carries signaling information When a mobile station identifies its id in a signaling frame it will act on the commands received from the NCS and in case of a channel assignment message being received tune to 220 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 the assigned transmit receive frequency pair The forward telex traffic channel from the LES is also a TDM with the same frame structure as the NCS TDM The return channels are 3 kBaud Slotted Aloha for MES requests call acknowledgements and registration traffic TDMA for MES response and 4 kBaud OQPSK for MES voice and low speed data WAVECOM decodes SAT M 2 4 kbps fax and data The decoder will automatically adjust to the modulation type in use BPSK or OQPSK Additional information See SAT Settings on page 40 See SAT System on page 275 SAT MINI M The SAT miniM system carries digital voice and low speed data and fax The forward direction channels
310. for the classification of unknown signals Its purpose is to au tomatically determine the modulation type baud rate frequency shift and bandwidth of one or more sig nals within the classification bandwidth The wideband classifier will attempt to classify all signals within a bandwidth of up to 96 kHz depending on settings How the Classifier Works Signal classification is done by providing the classifier with a complex sample of the input signal across the chosen sampling bandwidth for a chosen sampling time and a chosen sampling rate This sample is exam ined for the properties of the signals contained within it The results of the classification are output as a list of classified signal parameters Two Classification modes are provided A manual mode and a continuous mode In manual mode the clas sifier will make one attempt at classification In continuous mode the classifier cyclically classifies signals with a user selectable interval Depending on the complexity of the signals and the selected classification bandwidth after a few seconds the results of the classification attempt are listed in the results window Each signal in the list is labeled and numbered as Signal n and in manual mode this corresponds to the Sn signal marker in the FFT win dow the marker is a box surrounding the signal envelope The classifier processing state is visible in the status bar After each restart the results window is cleared The actual range o
311. format s AF IF Most transmitters work with a wide shift 400 Hz and a few with narrow shift 150 Hz By selecting the Auto function the software waits for the IOC identifier and synchronization sequence These signals are only transmitted once at the beginning of an image implying that capturing of the signal will only take place at the start of the next image By selecting WEATHER FAX the application starts immediately The drum speed and the IOC may be en tered manually using the Drum speed and IOC items available from the Demodulator menu The se lected values are displayed in the decoder status bar In the short wave band weather charts are trans mitted almost exclusively with speeds of 60 90 or 120 rpm In the case of 60 rpm the drum rotates once per second for 90 rpm at one and a half time and for 120 rpm at a speed of twice a second The index of co operation IOC is readily recognizable from the screen display when images are spread out too wide An IOC of 576 is mostly used on short wave The decoder allows a continuous and smooth alignment of the image as it is being received from Op tions Fine Speed By using the Phase item in the Options menu the image can be shifted into the correct position Flip Left Right and Flip Top Down will reverse the image or turn it upside down To enhance the interpretation of gray scale images a false color option is available Right click on the im age to open the zoom menu and from the
312. frequencies of the signal and the amplitude is then calculated for each frequency Next the amplitudes are evaluated Two simultaneous tones are demodulated The SNR is the same as for the mark space demodulator DXPSK Adaptive DPSK demodulator for PACTOR II This demodulator will automatically adapt itself to DBPSK DQPSK D8PSK or D16PSK D8PSK Similar to DPSK but has eight phase shifts at 45 90 135 and 180 degrees D16PSK Similar to DPSK but has sixteen phase shifts at 22 5 45 67 5 90 112 5 135 157 5 and 180 degrees FFSK and GFSK Depending on the mode the FFSK Fast Frequency Shift Keying and GFSK Gaussian Frequency Shift Keying demodulator is automatically selected Basically this demodulator utilizes the I Q principle Hil bert However filters are adjusted to accommodate the special demands of these modes MFSK This demodulator handles multi frequency signals Filters are switched in on the various frequencies of the signal and the amplitude is then calculated for each frequency Next the amplitudes are evaluated De pending on the number of tones used the filters are configured as phase linear FIR filters or as IIR filters The SNR is the same as for the mark space demodulator Simultaneous multi tone decoding e g DTMF is not possible with this demodulator MS Mark Space The mark space demodulator processes the two keying frequencies of a FSK signal These are fed to two phase linear FIR
313. frequency deviations are automatically tracked and compensated dur ing the decoding By using the bar graph any remaining frequency difference can be compensated by fi ne tuning of the receiver frequency or by adjusting the center frequency of the decoder Using the Frame Format field the decoder can be set to one of the above listed user data configurations A correct coded frame format is determined by a confidence value being stable and greater than 95 i e 95 correct while for uncoded formats the value has no meaning and remains stable at 75 234 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 STANAG 4539 See MIL 188 110B Appendix C STANAG 4539 on page 175 STANAG 5065 FSK STANAG 5065 is a asynchronous FSK system and was developed to provide NATO countries with interop erable shore to ship broadcast communications using the low frequency LF band specifically 60 kHz 160 kHz Parameter Value For STANAG 5065 FSK mode standard baud rates from 50 to 150 Bd are available Non standard baud rates may be selected using the Baudrate menu item From Options Display ASCII and BAUDOT ar available as an output formats SWED ARQ SWED ARQ is an adaptive telegraphy system which operates at a rate of 100 Bd Parameter Value Three different block lengths are used in SWED ARQ The short block containing three characters is essen tially the same as the SITOR ARQ mode If favorable pro
314. g nal The value of the highest probable rate is marked by a vertical dotted marker and numerically dis played in a Baudrate box below the pane Moving the mouse cursor across this pane changes the cursor into a crosshair which can be used to de termine the baud rate for individual spectral components The baud rate value pointed to by the crosshair is displayed in a Cursor position box below the pane Symbols differential Phase plane display showing the differential phase constellation of the signal This pane is only available for PSK signals 254 e Classifier Optional WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Caveats Even though the classifier has been carefully designed the extreme complexity of classification requires the user to be aware of a few caveats Common sense and visual inspection as well as prior monitoring experience are helpful when dealing with these issues Half Duplex Signals The classifier will only classify half duplex or burst signals with difficulty This is due to the nature of the Signal which is only present for a relatively small fraction of the total sampling time Multi channel Systems The current version of the classifier will only classify a 12 channel PSK CIS 12 signal as a single aggre gate signal for all other multi channel systems the classifier will classify each sub channel as an individ ual signal MFSK The current version of the classifier may indicate an incorr
315. g Wingdings 2 X Sample Important Please note that changing the font and changing the alphabet are two different actions If you change the alphabet then you select a table in a Unicode Font If you change the font then you change the graphical representation Arial Courier etc of the characters of an alphabet You may run in to problems if you select a non Unicode font and change the alphabet For some types of transmission it will make sense to change the font this depends on the software that was used for the transmission Temp Files Clicking Temp Files opens a configuration window Set the number of lines to be kept in temporary files during this session The oldest lines will be deleted automatically when the number of lines exceeds this number Enter 0 to allow an unlimited number of lines Text modes Maximum number of text lines Fax modes Maximum number of pixel lines FSK analysis Maximum number of lines Sonagram analysis Maximum number of lines 1000 2000000 You can set the number of lines to be saved to temporary files during a session These limits allow a user to leave his computer on for days while not exhausting hard drive space If the temporary files are larger than 50 of free disk space it will not be possible to save your recording as a new copy of the temporary file s is made when you perform a save operation You can select different values for gt
316. g Controls Most sound cards are equipped with more than one input source e g Line In 1 Line In 2 S PDIF In etc Additionally some computers are fitted with more than one sound card Before a recording can be made the user needs to choose the sound card device and sound card input that will be used for the recording To select the sound card use the Input Device control Input Device Microphone High Definition Aud r 26 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 To select the source use the Input Source control Input Source JLine In 1 Mic Note On Windows Vista and later all input sources from all sound cards are listed under the Input Device control and the Input Source control is not available Various combinations of sampling rate and bits per sample can be chosen when recording WAV files and the output file can be either mono or stereo To set the WAV file recording format use the following con trols Sample Rate 48000 YF nal Sample Rate needs to be set to twice the required signal bandwidth The following sample rates are sup ported Sample Rate Signal Bandwidth Remarks 4 khz a ETA se AA A at A az Recommended O AA A Note Not all sound cards will support all of these sample rates For further details see the documentation provided by your host sound card manufacturer Bits per Sample can be set to either 8 bits or 16 bits depending on the required dyna
317. g function is now activated If the deviation be tween the tracked and the adjusted center frequency is too large the center frequency should be correct ed The carrier tracking only works over a range of the center frequency 10 Hz The deviation of the adjusted center frequency and the tracked frequency is shown in the tuning display If a PACTOR II signal was not found the bar of the tuning display moves randomly If a valid PACTOR II Signal was detected the bar is frozen during the entire frame and shows the deviation Now the center frequency may be manually adjusted to fit the correct frequency if necessary If a valid PACTOR II signal was found the detected modulation type frame length and the polarity is dis played If it was an error free frame the detected compression type the status and the decoded text is displayed Options CRC Recognition The detected CRC is displayed in the decoder status bar see CRC Recogni tion on page 34 Using Options CRC Table a certain CRC mask can be defined see CRC Table on page 34 PACTOR II AUTO Fully automatic switching between PACTOR II ARQ and PACTOR II FEC may be achieved by selecting PACTOR II AUTO mode PACTOR II FEC With PACTOR II FEC a modern narrow band and reliable two channel PSK mode is available which co vers the needs of professional users for a secure and fast data transmission system The good perfor mance during disturbances and a small bandwidth o
318. g on the picture will bring up a popup menu To copy the highlighted portion of the image use the Copy item in the popup menu This copy can be pasted into any graphics application e g WINDOWS Paint and then stored as an image file using the application The popup menu also includes zoom options Different zoom settings from 10 to 400 are available For the proper functioning of SSTV the receiver must be correctly tuned To assist in tuning the SSTV display includes a frequency spectrum in the lower window When correctly tuned one should see a fre quency spike around the sync frequency and a wide band of frequencies between the black and white fre quencies To visually aid tuning markers are displayed at the Sync Black and White frequencies 226 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Copy Zoom 10 Zoom 25 Zoom 50 Y Zoom 100 Zoom 200 Zoom 400 Samples 1 1 i T 1 1500 2000 2500 3000 Freq Hz SSTV Standards for Synchronization Parameter SSTV Modes Mode Time s Resolution Pixel x Line ACA EEE ef E E EE a A E s EE e me ea E ETE e soie si nce fuo amor A E E a s Js E EC EE PO CI E EI ETE AI lo few few paz aro AE EE A EEE i O wmode scis ew fe aexwe sets ew fe ETE Jez fw ae sexe _Wrsase sciz rae ze azs setae roe E A sense rcs fos ase xase E WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Trans
319. g the MSI function has several advantages During disturbances in reception a carriage return charac ter may be lost using MSI prevents lines being overwritten and text being lost It should also be consid ered that some stations do not transmit carriage returns in this case the MSI function will automatically generate the missing carriage return To clearly divide a message into paragraphs many carriage returns are often transmitted Resync Mode This function forces a re synchronization of the current mode Signal Polarity If you select a FSK or PSK demodulator in Bitstream Output or Autocorrelation mode then signal po larity definition is available 38 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 r Signal Polarity Default ST change Ordel Pressing Change Order will reverse the polarity of the signal and pressing Default ST will restore the de fault value Symbol Definition If you select a PSK demodulator in Bitstream Output or Autocorrelation mode then a symbol defini tion is available Symbol Definition Default ST Edit List Edit Number Change Order Pressing Change Order will reverse the polarity of the signal and pressing Default ST will restore the de fault value By right clicking on the display a menu appears Edit List Cancel O 02 WH Oo WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 First start e 39 SAT
320. gain may be man ually entered The availability of the functions depends on the active mode Auto Click on the Auto button to enable a mode Shift center frequency and baud rate is automatically calcu lated and adjusted The new value is selected by double clicking on the preset value or by clicking OK Mode In the Mode menu the demodulator mode may be selected Most HF VHF or UHF modes feature a pre selected demodulator mode for optimum performance but sometimes different demodulators may be chosen AM Satellite weather charts are transmitted using AM This demodulator uses the quadrature I Q demodula tion method The level displayed by the level indicator corresponds to the AM modulation depth of the signal The gain and the amplitude offset may be set using the Demodulator menu BPSK BPSK shifts the carrier phase 180 degrees For carrier recovery a Costas loop is used this is a PLL with a special phase comparator which removes the payload data from the PLL loop The input signal is then down converted to base band by mixing the carrier in a complex mixer and the resulting signal is the da ta signal WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 First start e 41 BPSK is almost exclusively used for satellite data links CW The CW demodulator utilizes a steep adaptive band pass filter and automatic amplitude control The AGC attack time may be adjusted according to the propagation conditions The fi
321. ge addressed to these areas provided the Inmarsat C satellite terminal is connected to a GPS or similar navigational receiver or the ship s position has been recently updated manually If the terminal is not connected to a navigational re ceiver then it will receive all such messages Ships will receive all messages addressed to a NAVAREA if the user has entered the NAVAREA number into the terminal The printing of messages already received correctly is automatically suppressed Safety NET messages include a special header consisting of five C codes gt Cl priority code 1 digit distress urgency safety routine gt C2 service code 2 digits type of message broadcast gt C3 address code 12 characters area broadcast instructions gt C4 repetition rate 2 digits number and frequency of broadcasts gt C5 presentation code 2 digits type of alphabet used The National Geospatial Intelligence Agency NGA maintains the Safety NET Users Handbook on the In marsat Homepage and is available at no charge http www inmarsat com Maritimesafety snet pdf Receiving Broadcasts Most Inmarsat C terminals will not receive a safety broadcast if it is transmitting a message or if it is tuned to an Inmarsat ocean region not used for safety broadcasts in the area travelled Most Safety NET messages are rebroadcast after 6 minutes to give a transmitting terminal time to receive missed messag es Lists of Safety NET broadc
322. gical 1 with a positive half bit wide pulse and a logical O with no pulse i e at O level Bipolar RZ has opposite half bit wide pulses for 1 and 0 The Manchester code or Biphase L is a subtype of NRZ coding and has a level transition at mid pulse negative going for 1s and positive going for Os Differential Manchester omits the level transition for 1s and Os respec tively The exact waveform to be used depends on the application For instance systems needing self clocking would use Manchester coding because of transitions are always available even if the transmission consists of long rows of succeeding 1s or Os The BBC radio data system used on long wave utilizes Manchester coding as does Ethernet LANs The AIS system used on VHF uses differential encoding to resolve polarity ambiguity and this encoding form is also commonly used in satellite transmission systems The illustration below depicts spectral density i e efficiency as a function of pulse bandwidth 100 e Fundamentals of Radio Data TransmissionWAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 5 2 4 8 4 4 Duobinary 4 0 Delay 3 6 A modulation 3 2 a 2 8 A 1 2 4 NRZ J ATN 2 0 i 4 f 16 j Taz 4 N k A N oie aman Bi phase a N 0 8 H gn ar s a N 7 0 4 Lat NS X dsd N ts N Y ie N aw sf gt N Dicode NRZ Spectral density W Hz gt lt NH el ct 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 0 1 2 1 4 1 6 l 1 8
323. gram Files WAVECOM lt Product gt Global Data C Documents and Settings All Us C ProgramData WAVECOM lt Product gt RO ers Application Data WAVECOM lt Product gt Global Data C Documents and Settings All Us RW ers Documents WAVECOM lt Product gt User Specific C Documents and Set Roaming Data tings lt Username gt Application Data WAVECOM lt Product gt User Specific C Documents and Set Non Roaming tings lt Username gt Local Settings Application Data Data WAVECOM lt Product gt C Users Public Public Documents WAVECOM lt Product gt C Users lt Username gt AppData Roaming WAVECOM lt Product gt C Users lt Username gt AppData Local WAVECOM lt Product gt WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 First start e 21 Program Folder Global Data RO Global Data RW 4 M Computer a Mi Computer a El 05 C a E 05 C MSOCache aii Users Administrator gt Ji Adobe b Default a Li WAVECOM a Public CCC Editor as a Recordings gt Y Libraries gt Ji Wav WB Public Desktop a Li W6LPC 4 Public Documents de amd64 a WAVECOM 4 vg Ji CCC Code Tables gt le a we1pc Alphabets Config Data Input Data Output a WCODE Alphabets Config de Data Input gt Data Output Public Downloads gt Western Digital Main Menu The main menu includes all submenus relating to operating modes as well as analysis and setup func tions The WIND
324. graphical cursor The graphical representation of V1 channel polarity mark or space corresponds to the value of the displayed time and the converted baud rate Also the correlation can be determined by using bit correlation The number of time units per line set in Time per Line in addition to the baud rate constitute the preset values for the correlation The following example shows a correlation of 111 bits The baud rate is 228 66 Bd Hence the calculation of the total system cycle length is 1 228 66 x 111 0 4854369 s By right clicking on the display a menu appears By selecting Zoom In the mouse cursor changes its Shape By clicking and dragging a field can be enlarged or reduced horizontally and vertically After the zoom field has been sized release the mouse button An enlarged section of the bit correlation is now dis played 92 e Analysis Tools WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 CODE 2 WAVECOM W CODE W CODE Bit Correlation Card 1 LO ets Bit Correlation HF File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite FAX 8 Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help Traffic Filter 10 00 ms 22 21 46 D ow Mode Analysis v tL DMA 2 PE ec o Gan 180 Hz 29 W CODE Bit Correlation Card 1 T is0Hz Time per Line 550 004 ps Y Stat lt lt L lt gt JB Coarse lt lt lt gt J Fine 1000
325. gt FSK Analysis AMSAT P3D PSK Symbol Rate NOAA GEOSAT PSK Phase Plane asin Classifier Mode Selector Autocorrelation Bit Correlation Bit Length Analysis Demod Bitstream Output Analysis Selector Satellite INMARSAT B Fax amp Modems Options Demodulator Favorites C r Analysis NOR Sy dd gt on INMARSAT AERO Sahm 2 m INMARSAT B gt SAT B INMARSAT C gt SAT B C TFC INMARSAT M gt SAT B DATA INMARSAT mM gt SAT B FAX AMSAT P3D iia NOAA GEOSAT ho Ee SAT B TELEX SM SAT B TELEX MM Mode Selector Satellite INMARSAT M Fax amp Options Demodulator Favorite Analysis r NOR ah INMARSAT AERO SA HMM 2 ae ii INMARSAT B INMARSAT C INMARSAT M gt SAT M INMARSAT mM gt SAT M DATA AMSAT P3D dis NOAA GEOSAT ci ORECOMM Mode Selector Satellite Mode Selector See Mode Selector on page 65 Satellite Modes Fax amp Modems Optio Analysis INMARSAT AERO INMARSAT B INMARSAT C INMARSAT M INMARSAT mM AMSAT P3D NOAA GEOSAT ORBCOMM Mode Selector Satellite INMARSAT C Fax amp Modems Options Demodulator Favorites b Analysis NOR S dd 4 INMARSAT AERO Arma 2 i INMARSAT B gt INMARSAT C SAT C TDM INMARSAT M gt SAT C TDM EGC INMARSAT mM SAT C TDMA AMSAT P3D NOAA GEOSAT ORBCOMM Mode Selector Satellite INMARSAT mM F
326. gth 8 bit alphabet with a 5 3 ratio Each character is repeated 5 positions later This diversity in time allows the correction of an invalid character Bitstream D x character R x repeated character PZVEI The entire call number is transmitted by consecutive tones in decade sequence When two identical digits are to be transmitted consecutively then an eleventh frequency is used as a repetition identifier Parameter Value Frequency range VHF UHF Operation modes Analogue Selcal Modulation FM SUB tone Receiver settings FM BW 12 kHz Input format s AF IF WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 211 If more than two identical digits are to be transmitted the repetition tone is appended to the digit tone e g 22222 is transmitted as f2 fw f2 fw f2 where f2 is the tone for 2 and fw is the repetition tone In most systems the accuracy of the single frequencies has to be within 1 1 5 of the nominal value For ZVEI modes having nominal tone durations of 70 ms the duration of a single tone may vary 15 ms Decoding the selective calls is started by clicking on a system If transmission and system selection con form the call sign is displayed on the monitor In the Options menu a Time stamp function can be ena bled to add date and time to each call Tone Allocation Tone duration 70 ms ROBUST PACKET Robust Packet RPR Robust Packet Radio is a data transmissi
327. he FFT window The Average Factor Window Type Period and Peak Hold options in the menu list are identical to the same real time FFT options Classification Results List The list is ordered in self explanatory columns Each signal in the list is labeled and numbered as Signal n and in manual mode this corresponds to the Sn signal marker in the FFT window the marker is a box surrounding the signal envelope Certain signals listed below can be further studied in an additional graphical view by double clicking on the desired signal in the results list This function is not available in continuous mode If no panes are available this message is displayed W CODE Info No classified data for this signal T 252 e Classifier Optional WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Three panes are available CW Amplitude transitions are displayed along a time E WAVECOM W CODE W CODE Classifier Card File H Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHMF SUB Satellite Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help Classifier WB HF Manual Mode tion Finished Auto 11 57 19 Ow Mode Analysis un gt arma 2 ie jm H Ok O W CODE Classifier Card 12 1 Input AF LEFT Bandwidth 4800 Hz Offset 0 Hz FSK Frequency transitions are displayed along a time Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Auto V CODE W CODE TI Fil HF Modes VHE UHF DIR VHE UHF SUB Satellite Modems Option
328. he data decoded is mostly reliable MD 674 ASYNC MD 674 is an asynchronous FSK system and is based on ASCII No error detection or error correction is implemented Parameter Value T Operation modes Modulation S K For MD 674 mode standard baud rates from 50 to 150 Bd are available Non standard baud rates may be selected using the Baudrate menu item From Options Alphabet ITA5 and ITA2 are available as output formats MD 674 is also Known as Wireline FSK METEOSAT The METEOSAT software has been specifically tailored to the transmissions of meteorological satellites parked in geo stationary orbit at 0 2 degrees East and transmitting on 1691 0 MHz Transmissions are al ways at 240 rpm using an IOC of 288 In contrast to short wave stations which use frequency modulation satellite weather images are transmitted using amplitude modulation For this purpose the decoder is fit ted with a DSP AM demodulator with an integrated software FIR low pass filter Parameter Value Frequency range VHF UHF Operation modes Modulation FM SUB AM 170 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Parameter Value Receiver settings FM BW 40 kHz da Additional Info IOC 288 The software is started in automatic mode by clicking on the Auto button or on Drum speed for manual mode In manual mode the correct display of the image is controlled using the Phase function in the Op tions
329. he deviating diction aries built during the non cooperative interception session Only when a new link is set up it is possible to start over with empty dictionaries It is important to understand that in case of compressed transmissions exclusively the data from one party may be forwarded to the de compressor This understanding is espe cially important if during non cooperative interception both parties in a Chat Session are received as forwarding the data from both parties will immediately poison the dictionary HF transmission issues The CODAN ARQ protocol is adapted to the propagation conditions in the HF range but obviously relies on an active link between the two communicating parties This link does not exist in the case of non WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 137 cooperative monitoring and thus complete and correct data output is fully dependent on error free recep tion there is no way to ask for re transmission As transmissions do not contain source or destination addresses the monitor in case of single frequency half duplex traffic must manually select the party to monitor This may be achieved by adjusting the re ceiver squelch adjusting the receiver HF gain or the use of directional antennas to suppress the unwanted Signal Real time monitoring issues To capture the contents of a CODAN modem data transmission the monitoring equipment should be placed as close as possibl
330. he same music recorded on a CD has been transformed into digital information imprinted on the surface of the disc Digital information or data is not only text it can also represent speech music or images A land line short wave link satellite link or any other way of connecting two points for communications is called a channel The tremendous development within electronics and computer science in the last few decades has led to enormous improvements in the reliability and robustness of the wireless transmission of digital data which has especially benefited the HF spectrum users The HF frequency range is an especially hostile en vironment to communications as it is prone to both natural and manmade disturbances of a time varying nature e g heavy industrial noise fierce solar storms interference from other spectrum users and se vere fading The ever increasing powers of CPUs has been harnessed via digital signal processing DSP techniques and has resulted in improved coding and modulation methods such as turbo codes adaptive equalization m ary modulation and powerful and innovative demodulation and decoding methods Further improvements have been made in the field of automation of operations and in the size power consump tion and features of modern integrated circuits WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00Fundamentals of Radio Data Transmission e 97 Baridpas Modulation Qemedulaticen Formatting Sou
331. he signal in both SSB settings USB and LSB This can be selected with Polarity in the menu NOR means USB and INV means LSB signal MIL M 55529A NB WB MIL M 55529A is an asynchronous FSK system and is based on ASCII No error detection or error correc tion is implemented Parameter Value For MIL M 55529A mode standard baud rates from 50 to 110 Bd are available Non standard baud rates may be selected using the Baudrate menu item From Options Alphabet you can select from different ITA 2 and ITA5 alphabets MIL M 55529A is also known as MD 522 GRC The center frequency of the decoder should be set to 1800 Hz when the receiver is correctly tuned to the sending station Small frequency variations are automatically compensated in the decoder The center frequency of the decoder can be adjusted by 400 Hz from its normal setting By reading the bar graph any remaining frequency difference can be compensated by fine tuning of the receiver frequen cy or by adjusting the center frequency of the decoder MOBITEX 1200 Mobitex 1200 is a multiple access packet radio system for wireless communications Mobitex 1200 oper ates in the VHF band 76 82 MHz in Sweden and around 160 MHz in Finland using 1200 bps FFSK indi rect FM In Sweden a nationwide system channel is operating on 76 7375 MHz for base to mobile commu nications and on 81 7375 MHz in the opposite direction Parameter Value Frequency range VHF Operation modes Slot
332. heck Miscellaneous Autocorrelation Bit Correlation Bit Length Analysis Demod Bitstream VHF UHF DIR Mode Selector VHF UHF DIR Mode Selector Lo eo ED Eo GOLAN GSC MOBITEXB000 PACKET3600 VHF UHF DIR Analysis Selector VHF UHF DIR Analysis Selector WEA Classifier Classifier Classifier Code Check Frequency Time FETE Sonagram Oscilloscope FSK FSK Analysis FSK Code Check PSK Phase Plane Miscellaneous Autocorrelation Bit Correlation Bit Length Analysis Demod Bitstream 66 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 VHF UHF SUB Mode Selector VHF UHF SUB Mode VHF UHF SUB Analysis Selector Eana ES Classifier Classifier Classifier Code Check Frequency Time FFT amp Sonagram Oscilloscope FSK FSK Analysis FSK Code Check PSE PSK Symbol Rate PSK Phase Plane Miscellaneous Autocorrelation Bit Correlation Bit Length Analysis Demod Bitstream SELCAL Analysis WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 First start e 67 Satellite Analysis Selector Satellite Analysis Selector lemalasal o Classifier Classifier Frequency Time FFE Samagam Oscilloscope FSK Analysis PSE Miscellaneous Autocorrelation Bit Correlation Bit Length Analysis Demod Bitstream Half duplex Half Duplex Auto Mode FAX G3 V 17 FAX G3 V 27ter FAX G3 V 29 DET v22 v 22bis __ vaz Full duplex V 26 V 26bis V32 V32bis v4 68 e Fir
333. here the transmitted message is dis played on the pager display Such messages may be up to 80 characters long A country wide pager network is like a mobile telephone service subdivided into individual cells that are each serviced by a base station Cells are fed with information in a time multiplex fashion i e messages are transmitted in cycles This prevents that areas falling in the overlap zone of adjacent cells receive the same message simultaneous ly To prevent the condition that a base station only transmits for one third of the available time stations are usually equipped to handle four frequencies Selecting Options Message Type enables the user to select the various pager modes for display 1 3 ASCII Mode 1 3 in ASCII format O BIN Mode 0 in binary format 0 3 ASCII Mode O 3 in ASCII format 0 3 AUTO Mode O 3 automatic format detection 3 ASCII Mode 3 in ASCII format Data modulation is achieved by direct 2FSK carrier keying with a transmission speed of 512 bit s Newer nets operate at 1200 or 2400 bit s using FFSK modulation For reasons of compatibility with older pagers two different bit rates 512 Bit s and 1200 Bit s or 1200 Bit s and 2400 Bit s are often used on the same frequency In some countries POCSAG and GOLAY sys tems are on the same frequency By selecting the Auto speed function all baud rates are automatically detected and switch over between 512 1200 and 2400 bps is performed POCSAG Signa
334. hipping the item s to WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG must be paid by the customer For goods returned after the warranty period the shipping costs for both ways must be fully paid by the customer Please take great care when returning your goods to us The customer is responsible for returning the goods to the supplier without damage We recommend that you use the package material that was used for the delivery Our decoding cards require HIGHSHIELD ELECTROSTATIC SHIELDING Observe precau tions for handling electrostatic discharge sensitive devices Protect the card against mechanical stress Insure your returned goods Payments Customer orders can only be accepted against advance payment by bank transfer postal money order letter of credit check or credit card For letter of credit payments we charge an additional administration fee Reservation of ownership The delivered goods remain the property of WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG until the invoice in total is fully paid Cancellation Cancellations of orders must be made in writing and have to be confirmed by WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG Any additional administrative costs already incurred by WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG must be paid by the customer Changes of order quantities Changes in the quantities of an order already placed may result in a change of the applicable discount The unit cost may be adjusted to reflect this change Legal domicile The Legal domicile of WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG is Buelach
335. ic Dcocuments WAVECOM W61PC Data 03 03 2010 1 SAT 3B TEL 2043116 C Users Public Dccuments WAVECOM W61PC Data 03 03 2010 1 SAT 3B TEL 10810592 C Users Public Documents WAVECOM W61PC Data 03 03 2010 a SAT B TEL 14762800 C Users Public Documents WAVECOM W61PC Data 03 03 2010 1 SAT B TEL 15083994 C Users Public Documents WAVECOM W61PC Data 03 03 2010 1 SAT 3B TEL 10948397 C Users Public Documents WAVECOM W61PC Data 03 03 2010 1 SAT 3 TEL 9551689 C Users Public Documents WAVECOM W61PC Data 03 03 2010 1 SAT 3B TEL 16679318 C Users Public Documents WAVECOM W61PC Data 03 03 2010 1 The fields of the Session List Window are listed below Mode The mode of the recorded session Service The service of the recorded session MES ID The Forward MES ID of the user terminal of the recorded session Vv WV Transmitter ID Fax ID usually a name or fax number v File Path and file name of the monitored data The file name contains the date and time of the session v Date Time Start date and time of the recorded session Duration Duration of recorded session gt Size For Fax service The number of pages of the fax For Data service The number of user bytes transmitted Termination gt EOD End of data ChannelRelease Normal channel release StopMode Bit stream interrupted SyncLost Excessive number of resync attempts TONoSync Sync or resync time out Y VV V
336. ich prompts the user to select an XML table file ap pears Reload Table Press this button to reload the current XML table The reload feature should be used to ensure that modifications of the currently selected file are applied for instance if CCC Editor has made changes Use Demodulator Offset or double click in the Offset field in the lower status bar for selecting an ap propriate translation frequency When the CCC is launched from the VHF UHF DIR menu the translation frequency corresponds to the central frequency of the displayed frequency range in the sonagram and FFT windows When the CCC is launched from the VHF UHF SUB menu the translation frequency corresponds to the lowest frequency of the displayed frequency range in the sonagram and FFT windows To select the classification bandwidth double click the Bandwidth field in the lower status bar or open a context menu by right clicking in the FFT window The Average Factor Window Type Period and Peak Hold options in the list are identical to the corresponding real time FFT options see the section on Real time FFT FFT Window The FFT Window is identical to the classifier FFT Window see the section Classifier on page 250 WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Classifier Optional e 265 When the CCC is launched from the VHF UHF DIR menu the frequency range displayed in the FFT window spans the selected classification bandwidth around the current
337. ider B List box containing memory entries 1541480000 Provider B 1541450000 Provider A a Sort buttons for numerical or alphabetical sort of the list box en P tries WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 First start e 61 NCSC Auto Only available in SAT C TDM mode Please refer the manual sec Iw NCSC Auto tion on SAT C TDM The SAT Frequency Tuning Bar display elements are mode dependent There are three different variations of the frequency bar SAT B SAT M SAT mM Freavency REE 22210 TG Display of the real frequency Direct tuning is disabled SAT B C TFC SAT AERO P SAT C TDM EGC SAT C TDMA Frequency NAT yee Hz Step 5000 Memory lt lu DEL Eai 1541450000 SAT C TDM EGC gt Display of the real frequency frequency memory and step Direct tuning is enabled SAT C TDM Frequency Bll RES PE LONG sE 5000 memory ess net ledk 1539995000 TOM TRAF RAA F ucsc auto Display of the real frequency frequency memory and step Direct tuning is enabled NCSC Auto tuning can be selected Waterfall SAT FFT SAT Sonagram SAT Frequency E Y PE elo Hz step 8 5000 Display of the real frequency and step Direct tuning is enabled The C band or L band frequency range depends on the system context set up in the Receiver and Satellite Settings XML Frequency Memories File All frequencies are stored in XML files c Users Public Documents WAVECOM lt Prod
338. if the signal is too weak meaningful sessions can not be decoded and consequently a session file will not be generated even if some intermittent decoding has occurred The mode has a filtering function which deletes short session fragments having been termi nated by loss of synchronization WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 215 The following services are decoded gt Voice gt Low speed data gt Fax Operation With the help of the FFT Analysis Tool look for a SAT B signal bandwidth 20 kHz OQPSK 12 ks sec with a lot of traffic In the Satellite menu choose Inmarsat SAT B C TFC The Session Window displays the start and end of a session only if the service of a session is recognized it will be started even if the Progress field increases its number The MES_ID displayed is the return MESId of the MES the Frequency is a dummy value The Session List Window displays the results of the successfully decoded sessions The decoded data is saved as _Dat txt or _ WAV files The data extracted from the SCPC frames is examined for duplicate or missing packets In case of dupli cate packets the duplicate packet is discarded Especially the case of missing packets may be critical for subsequent upper protocol layer decoding there fore an error mark will be inserted into the file name as _DatError txt However for some upper layer protocols it is possible to reconstruct
339. ile analysis tool for the classification of unknown possibly double modulated signals and the determination of the protocol mode in use The CCC combines a wide band classifier with a table based mode check and an advanced code check The CCC will attempt to pro cess all signals within a bandwidth of up to 96 kHz depending on settings As is obvious from its name the VHF UHF Classifier Code Check primarily addresses the requirements for the analysis of signals from 30 MHz to 3 GHz but it will of course work with signals in other frequency ranges if they fall within the band width and fulfil the other criteria used by the CCC processes How the Classifier Code Check Works The CCC processes input signals in up to four successive steps as shown in the block diagram below which also shows the possible signal paths The user can select how many steps should be involved in the analysis of the signal s under investigation WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Classifier Optional e 261 The possible signal paths of the CCC are shown below Classifer XML Table Check Code Check p gt Decoder up D Decoder Y y y Y P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 gt The classifier attempts to classify the input signals according to their modulation formats gt The table check will check the signal against the e
340. in various languages Shift register encryption a stream encryption method uses one or more shift registers into which the clear language message is shifted and EXORed with a key or part of itself Taps in various positions of the registers may feed bits back to the input to complicate decryption by interceptors The shift registers of the transmitting and receiving equipment must be initialized to the same value the seed System security in conventional cryptographic systems depends on the safeguard of the key and on the length of the key Generally speaking the longer the key the more difficult the work of the cryptanalyst will be Unbreakable systems like the one time pad will only use its key once and its key length is as long as the clear text message Cryptographic messages are constructed by byte wise EXORing of the clear text message and the key Kerckhoffs principle is the design criteria for modern cryptographic systems The security of a cryptographic system must not depend on keeping the algorithm secret The security is only dependent on keeping the key secret Modern cryptographic systems use the principles of public keys Traditional systems use the same key for encryption and decryption and safeguard this key Public key systems use two different keys one for encryption and one for decryption Public keys and their encryption algorithms are publicly available but the decryption keys are secret and private the transmitting p
341. indow functions Rectangle Hamming Hanning and Blackman may be selected The selection of a window type influences the accuracy of the signal spectrum measurement Good frequency resolution is obtained using the rectangular window however the rectangular window also causes heavy distortion due to its poor side lobe suppression characteristics A window should be chosen according to the user s re quirements each window type has its own characteristics as listed below The user should be aware that changes in the received signal can cause the display of spurious spectral lines or aliasing false frequency display in FFT measurements Depending on the keying frequency and WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 First start e 63 the magnitude of the frequency shift the aliased frequencies may even be stronger than the desired sig nal Window Type Signal Type Frequency Resolution Spectral Leakage Amplitude Accuracy Hamming Random Good aie Fae Hanning Random Good Goo Fae Rectangular Period From the Period menu the time unit per measurement may be selected The lowest value is 50 ms corre sponding to 20 FFT s s For the highest value of 10 000 ms a measurement is done once every 10 se conds Peak Hold For easy tuning switch on Peak Hold in the Options menu on The tone spectrum appears in the FFT window after a short delay and the frequency range can be changed as required using the cursors as
342. ing max 50 characters Select a WAV file using the browse button on the right Check the Enable scan box to enable that alarm string Select the Match case box if you wish the alarm strings to be case sensitive Y VV WV Deselect the Sound audible alert box to disable all audible alerts Note Without sound hardware you can only hear the default beep regardless of the WAV file settings If you leave the file name blank or enter an incorrect filename you will hear the default Windows beep sound You may record your own WAV files In this way any tune or sound may be used to indicate an alarm Settings SMS The settings in this dialog box are needed to create different files for each message The filename will con sist of the date time computer name card number and phone number Example C Temp 19980626_ 215847 _webradio_2 09418727060 sms The file itself will contain just one text line which includes the detected alarm string Pager modes such as POCSAG often transmit duplicate text data lines To prevent sending duplicate SMS messages a time delay can be specified This prevents the identical message from creating a new SMS message file for the duration of the specified delay The time delay is specified for the contents of the whole message not the alarm string contained in the message WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Additional Functions e 301 WAVECOM Alarm Monitor SMS Settings Phone Mo settings
343. ing in the ARQ E3 mode it is most likely an ARQ E system which is being monitored ARQ E3 employs the ITA 3 alphabet balanced 3 4 mark space ratio for data transmission and error detection Full Duplex systems transmit a RQ character after having detected an erroneous character or in the pres ence of excessive signal distortions The remote station subsequently repeats the last three or seven char acters preceded by the RQ character To maintain synchronization between the two stations both transmitters operate continuously and send the idle bit pattern if no traffic is transmitted WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 115 ARQ M2 342 and ARQ M2 242 These operating modes also known as TDM or ARQ 28 conforming to CCIR recommendations 342 2 and 242 Two 50 Bd Baudot channels are interleaved to form a time multiplexed aggregate bit stream Multi plex frames of 28 and 56 bits are used Parameter Value Operation modes Duplex ARQ TDM ARQ M2 342 and ARQ M2 242 systems operate at Symbol rates of 85 7 96 or 200 Baud on the radio link The ITA 3 7 bit alphabet is used allowing error detection The ITA 3 alphabet is a balanced code in which each character has a mark space bit ratio of 3 4 ARQ M2 342 and ARQ M2 242 systems are full duplex systems Full duplex systems send a repeat request RQ character to the remote station if a character error has been detected or the distortion or fading becomes
344. ing problems during the transmission the FEC bit stream is interleaved before it is assigned to tones source coding In both decoders only the center frequency needs to be tuned After the center frequency is set the decoder first synchronizes most importantly to the polarity of sig nal This takes for MFSK 8 between 5 and 40 seconds for MFSK 16 between 2 and 7 seconds this main ly depends on the baud rate of the mode During the sync phase no text will be output on the screen After the decoder is synchronized it enters the Traffic state and a text file will be output on the screen The synchronization is maintained as long as the MFSK signal is stable When the noise is too strong or the signal disappears the decoder begins to resynchronize the status changes from Traffic to Sync Tuning a MFSK 8 and MFSK 16 Signal The only tuning parameter in MFSK 8 and MFSK 16 signal is the center frequency Set Peak Hold to Max Hold using the Options menu After all tones are displayed determine the minimum and maximum fre quency of the tone set using the cursors With the center cursor the center frequency may be set more accurately Especially for MFSK 8 the center frequency needs to be set precisely because the tone dis tance is only 7 81 Hz After the decoder has been synchronized it enters the Traffic phase The polarity status field on top indi cating N for Normal or I for Inverse shows whether the MFSK signal is USB Upp
345. interface of the APCO 25 Phase 1 system is described in TIA 102 BAAA A The devices may use both the C4FM and CQPSK modulation techniques which can be demodulated with a single de modulator The system uses frequency channels of 12 5 kHz bandwidth to transmit 9600 bits per second Analog audio is digitized by using the full rate IMBE vocoder 7 2 kbps before transmission TIA 102 BABA The system allows group and individual calls where each device has its own ID as well as one or more talk group IDs Each call is marked as a group or individual call with its source and destination addresses The decoded voice calls can be monitored live using the default sound card of the system and they are al so automatically saved under the default Data Output directory as wav files Live sound streaming can be disabled using the mute button on the upper pane The contents of the decoded data packets are printed out as raw data and are not further analyzed The Offset should be set to the center frequency of the channel to be decoded The Polarity of the signal is detected automatically ARQ6 90 and ARQ6 98 ARQ6 90 and ARQ6 98 systems transmit 6 characters of 7 bits each in every data block resulting in a total of 42 bits The SITOR alphabet with a mark space ratio of 3 4 is used Parameter Value Operating modes Simplex ARQ Modulation FSK Symbol rate 200 Bd variable 30 650 Bd Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF Both
346. ion WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 121 OMC Strings gt mal String O TI EmRes Statusi EmAck Reserl EmCall Status9 SysCon Custi TXKeyON Status5 BusyAck Reser5 BroCal Status13 VotNow Cust5 CleaDow Status3 GenAck Reser3 NorCall Status11 DiaDat Cust3 RepON Status IntermAck Reser 122 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 O TI O String ManRes Status15 MobEn Cust7 Cancel Status2 RepAck Reser2 PriCal Status10 ShorDat Cust2 TXKeyOFF Status6 CalBaAck Reser6 ReqCalBa Status14 SatusReq Cust6 MaintID Status4 AbsentUna Reser4 TelCall Status12 ChanCha Cust4 EE pr TEPPER PPP PP PPP PPP PPP PPP OOO WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 123 String ExtAdr Status16 Depending on the OMC code the address word can be followed by one or more data words Four such cases exist Telephone Call One or more data words containing a telephone number are appended to the address word The telephone number is displayed in the decoder output External Addressing A datagram for external addressing consists of two address words The first address word carries the transmitter address including the transmitter regional code and the second address word carries the re ceiver address including the receiver regiona
347. ion A NCS controls each active satellite and the network within the satellite coverage area Whenever a mobile enters or leaves an ocean region it has to register with the NCS using the MES Signaling Channel The NCS updates its tables accordingly and informs the other NCSs and LESs within its region These stations also keep updated tables of MES status A NCS Common Channel TDM is transmitted by each NCS when idle a MES is always tuned to this chan nel A Common Channel frame always has a bulletin board as the first information This board contains network information for all LES capabilities channel information and other system information Each LES has at least one TDM assigned to it The assignment may be permanent or on a demand basis A LES having a message for a mobile unit advises the NCS which transmits a call announcement packet on the Common Channel containing the ids of the MES and LES which LES TDM will be used call direction and priority The MES retunes to the assigned LES TDM The LES TDM also carries a bulletin board with in formation on which MES Signaling Channel slots are free The MES finds a free slot and transmits a call announcement response on a MES Signaling Channel It then returns to the LES TDM The LES then transmits a channel assignment packet containing message length information time slot number Logical Channel Number LCN and local routing information The succeeding message packets are all labeled with th
348. ion of the picture proper be gins At the end of transmission the stop signal is sent this consists of a switch off signal of 450 Hz having du ration of 5 seconds followed by 10 seconds of the frequency representing black level FAX Transmission Sequence 5 white 95 black f white AA lOC TONE Synchronisation Data Break signal Pause pause 5 10 seconds 10 30 seconds 10 40 minutes 5 20 sec 106 e Fundamentals of Radio Data TransmissionWAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes ACARS Aircraft Communications Addressing and Reporting System ACARS is a carrier sensing multiple access packet radio system for aircraft communications ACARS operates in the VHF band mainly around 130 MHz using 2400 bps NRZI coded coherent audio frequency MSK Minimum Shift Keying a particular form of FSK on AM to make use of standard aircraft AM communications equipment Parameter Value pines Operation modes CSMA CD packet ARQ system Receiver settings AM BW 3 kHz Input format s AF IF Additional Info ITA 5 with parity and block coding Frequencies Europe 131 725 131 525 131 825 MHz Frequencies USA 131 550 130 025 129 125 131 475 130 450 131 125 136 700 136 750 136 800 MHz Frequency Japan 131 450 MHz To receive ACARS an omni directional 108 136 MHz antenna a VHF AM receiver scanner with 13 kHz channel bandwidth and a corresponding AF output is necessary As the ACARS pack
349. ional Functions WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Note When a CmStick is plugged into an USB socket of a LCD monitor the CmStick will not be detected by the software protection server if the monitor is switched off Warining Never try to debug the W PCI W PCle or W CODE software This will disable all the licenses on the CMStick 1 CmStick connected DE OE RA 1270 PM You can find more information regarding the CodeMeter and CmStick in the related help file CodeMeter and CmStick User Guide Help Important For current and detailed information consult the CodeMeter help files 1 CmStick connected 11 07 AM a Be t dy Je i 1 20 2010 For help click the CodeMeter Icon gt z a E CiProgram Files CodeMeter Runtime help CmUzerHelp ustinde htm its x Google p File Process View Help Go ib eminencia he BJ nss License Events Borrow Je Favorites de A Suggested Stes 2 Web e Gallery v WAVECOM the reference SE Bl CodeMeter End User he X PH CodeMeter WebAdmin th gt El mm Pager Safetyy Tools a Rolf Demol Contents Index Search Name Rolf Demo1 E 9 1 1146437 QA CodeMeter Online Help ode Server page Q CodeMeter Runtime Kit Serial 1 1146437 Installation of the Runtime Kit The Server page displays detailed information about all available he CodeMeter network licenses The Serv
350. ions WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Getting Started The Serial Link can be started directly from the decoder using the View WAVECOM Serial Link menu item If you plan to connect to a card installed in a PC which is different from the one on which Serial Link is in stalled Server Control or the WAVECOM decoder software must be running on that PC Select a COM port for each WAVECOM decoder card W WAVECOM Serial Link W CODE Card Card Status Port Settings Port Status Connection Disconnected Configure Connection Disconnected Configure Connection Disconnected Configure HE w N Connection Disconnected Configure Connection Disconnected Configure Connection Disconnected Configure Connection Disconnected Configure ven S ept fiyl Connection Disconnected COM Port Configure ul e J Configure each COM port using the corresponding Configure button WAVECOM Serial Link Setti Port Settings Bits per second g600 Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control Cancel Select the computer on your network that contains the WAVECOM decoder cards To connect to a card on your network using Serial Link click Connection The device screen appears and you may select This Computer or Remote Computer entering also the remote computer name Connect each card to the selected port using the
351. is always active The extremely accurate baud rate determination uses the number of necessary phase correction steps for the baud rate determination In modes working with an interrupted data stream such as PACKET 300 it may be advantageous to be able to switch off the baud rate correction to prevent drifting of the pre selected baud rate When the IAS function is disabled any pre selected variable baud rate will be treated in the same way as a fixed baud rate In most of the VHF UHF modes the IAS is permanently disabled This is due to the lack of phase coher ence between successive data blocks An exact measurement of the phase shift is not possible for an ex tended period of time In the event of adverse HF reception conditions fading enabling IAS may offer substantial advantages The software will decrease the size of the phase correction steps in accordance with the verified reduced phase errors and thus prevent bit glitches and the resulting loss of synchronism It is therefore recom mended to enable IAS as a default Tick the IAS menu item to enable IAS Letters Figures This option is only available for ITA 2 based modes The Letters Figures dialog box contains the options Normal Letters Only Figures Only and Unshift on Space UOS Letters and Figures designates the ITA 2 lower letters and upper figures cases For reception under normal conditions the selection of one case or the other is controlled by the reception
352. is recognized the decoder shows its length DECODING OF CODAN DATA MODEM SIGNALS Introduction This section intends to offer an overview of the issues related to the practical decoding of the CODAN data modem protocol using WAVECOM decoders It is important for the user to be aware of any constraints and limitations inherent in the decoding process during non cooperative interception of this mode and so pos sible issues are explained below Protocol overview The CODAN 9001 modem uses 16 DQPSK carriers for the transport of payload data Each carrier is inde pendently modulated with data Each individual channel carries a channel packet All 16 concurrent channel packets constitute a frame and a number of frames constitute a multi frame CODAN 9001 modem frame structure CH Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 2 Frame n en cmipaccr os Chpacketi7 chnpacat 33 fs 136 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 2 Frame n CH y Chnl packet 02 Chniipacket18 Chnl packet34 ee Chnl packet 03 Chni packet 19 Chnipacket35 ee AN Chnl packet 16 Chnl packet 32 Chnl packet 48 Multi frame 1 Chnl packet m Each payload data packet has a constant length and a sequence number However the numbering in the figure above only serves as an example and due to the use of ARQ based retransmissions the numbering may not be sequential For the purpose of this explanation payload
353. is requirement results in a low data throughput and in a standard configuration five characters are merged into one block and transferred in two seconds i e 2 5 characters per second The signals are MFSK modulated mostly with a baud rate of 31 25 In this way all transmitted energy is concentrated in a single tone of relatively long duration The standard center frequency depends on the chosen bandwidth i e it is 500 Hz plus half of the select ed bandwidth The user can tune the receiver so that the signal has a center frequency according to the standard or change the center frequency manually The bandwidth can be changed manually as well The polarity of the signal is being detected and the demodulator set accordingly For each character a confidence value is calculated and evaluated Data with a confidence value of at least 90 are displayed in black with a confidence value of at least 50 they are shown in red otherwise a red underline character is displayed A block with a confidence value of less than 75 is not shown at all ORBCOMM The ORBCOMM System is a wide area packet switched two way data communication system Communi cations to and from Subscriber Communicators SC to ORBCOMM Gateways are accomplished through a constellation of Low Earth Orbit LEO Microstar satellites ORBCOMM Gateways are connected to dial up circuits private dedicated lines or the Internet Parameter Value Frequency range VHF 137 138 MHz
354. it stream and when found transmitter and receiver are synchronized Before the widespread use of electronic circuits all telegraph devices were of electro mechanical nature and therefore prone to mechanical wear and tear This in turn necessitated comparatively large tolerances and made stable synchronization over even short periods difficult To overcome this serious problem the ITA 2 alphabet adopted what is known as start stop or asynchronous operation which achieves syn chronism for each codeword In start stop systems a codeword is wrapped into an envelope consisting of a leading start bit logical 0 and one or more trailing stop bits logical 1 for ITA 2 the code words are 1 5 1 5 7 5 bits long Bit synchronization is then achieved by detection of the start element The stop element s serve s the purpose of telling the receiver to reset its detection mechanisms and wait for the next start bit To en WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00Fundamentals of Radio Data Transmission e 103 Sure proper operation of the mechanical devices the stop bit was extended to have 1 5 times the length of a data bit which accounts for the term non integral earlier in this section In synchronous systems there is continuous synchronization between the sending and receiving devices either by special non printing control characters being inserted into the messages at regular intervals or the code words themselves being cons
355. ition of extra components for digital capability This provides backwards compatibility with the analog systems and re duces the complexity of development To use the mode set Offset to the IF output of the receiver The current version implements the decoding of voice and data When a call occurs some status messages are displayed in the text output Data transmissions are displayed as a hex dump of the decoded data The parameter Confidence shows the demodulation quality When a call is encrypted the voice output is muted but status messages are displayed When encrypted data is received it is shown on the screen in encrypted form Usually it is shown in red because the data checksum can not be verified with encrypted data OLIVIA Olivia is a mode developed by Pavel Jalocha who among other modes developed the basics of PSK31 He named this mode after his daughter Parameter Value Operation modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 193 Parameter Value Modulation MFSK Submodes 250 Hz 8 Tones 31 25 Bd 500 Hz 8 Tones 62 5 Bd 500 Hz 16 Tones 31 25 Bd 1000 Hz 32 Tones 31 25 Bd Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF Additional Info 7038 5 MHz 10133 65 MHz 14075 65 MHz 14107 5 MHz 18102 65 MHz 21086 5 MHz 28076 0 MHz Olivia focuses on robustness against signal path disturbances especially fading and multipath propaga tion Th
356. kHz bandwidth The polarity should be set also correctly according to the output polarity of the receiver From Options Display Mode Valid Frames Only All Frames or Indicate Errorneous Frames may be se lected Display Mode Valid Frames Onl Indicate Erroneous Frames VISEL VISEL also Known as FEC 12 or YUG MIL is a synchronous system This mode is used by defense forces in Eastern Europe Parameter Value Cog rats Modulation FSK 242 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Parameter Value Shift Bandwidth 300 Hz Symbol rate 81 3 120 9 123 5 125 Bd Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF Additional Info ITA 2 The unusual baud rate of 120 9 Bd is very typical for this mode Synchronization is done at the beginning of every burst transmission The unencrypted calling sequence with tactical call signs has an autocorrela tion of 12 bits and all bits are interleaved All traffic is encrypted Occasionally operator chat in plain text is transmitted WEATHER FAX A number of stations world wide transmit weather charts on a regular schedule During the transmission of an image a characteristic and easily recognizable audio signal is heard A specific frequency deviation may also be seen on a tuning indicator Parameter Operation modes Graphic Mode Broadcast Center frequency 1900 Hz Receiver settings FAX DATA CW LSB or USB Input
357. ks leg SIOP CF_ SR_ BW CF_ SR_ BW_ dBFS etc dBFS etc gt The PXGF framework for streaming and storage is designed to be extensible Different applications require different information and if this information is not available in a stream then that applica tion will not be able to process that stream successfully Just because an application uses the PXGF format doesn t mean that it will be able to process all PXGF streams or files For a particular project care should be taken to ensure that all necessary chunks are included gt It is recommended that meta data like the sample rate and packing description be sent every se cond This allows state information to be recovered if synchronization is lost and makes it possible to process large files from the middle of the file gt Only data from one data source and of one format must be included in each stream or file Current formats include SSIQ for single channel data and GSIQ for multi channel data The format 306 e WAVECOM Data Formats WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 used in files should be indicated using the SOFH chunk The format name may also be used for the file extension to allow visual discrimination of different files State information is accumulated by an application by reading different chunks sequentially If synchronization is lost state information needs to be reset This is why it is essential to resend meta data every second It
358. l Product Feature Code Name Map Licenses Status User Limit No Exclu Borrowed User k Shared Free Limit sive 100003 Bundling Articles SecuriKey sn Details 1 0x1 1 o 0 0 0 1 100787 WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG 1 W CODE Ox7f 10 0 0 0 0 10 20 O WC SAT ox7f 10 0 0 0 0 10 30 O WC CL Ox7f 10 0 0 0 0 10 a 4 Details S as BEE 10 O 0 0 0 10 51 O WCLOVER2 ox7f 10 0 0 0 0 10 a 3 Details 52 A ee 10 0 0 0 0 10 53 O WPACTOR3 0x7f 10 0 o o 0 10 80 W BV Ox7f 10 0 0 0 0 10 W CODE gt Details 100 ae Ox7f 10 0 o o 0 10 Information last updated on 16 Nov 2010 17 10 43 WAVECOM Decoder W PCIl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Custom Inputs To add a customer defined Input all other decoder windows must be closed The number of custom inputs is limited to 16 Streaming and custom inputs belong together A new custom input has to be defined before streaming can be used to acquire a specific data stream for decoding At the moment streaming can be defined for TCP IP data and for WAV files If a custom input is selected as the input source the data stream is read from the specific input For defining editing and deleting a custom input the dialog Custom Inputs is used The properties of the custom input are stored in a XML file The defined custom inputs are selectable like any other input sources In the screen shot below two user d
359. l code Short Data Transfer A short data transfer is very similar to the transmission of a telephone number The address word is fol lowed by some data words The display format of the decoded information can be switched between bina ry hexadecimal and text data Text data is displayed in ASCII format Dialog Data Transfer In case of dialog data transfer the BIIS address word is followed by a HDLC control block This control block is analyzed by the decoder module and the contents are displayed as plain text The control block consists of an address a command response bit a control field indicating the frame type and a 32 bit parameter field in hexadecimal format I frames and S frames contain a receive sequence number N R or send sequence number N S The usu al HDLC commands and responses are displayed in abbreviated form Data words following the HDLC control block can be displayed in binary or hexadecimal format In the case of system control data OMC 011000 a 6 bit custom code is transmitted instead of trans mit and receive addresses Further information about the OMC coding regional codes and the HDLC protocol may be found in the ETSI standard ETS 300 230 For validation of the code words CRC and parity checks are used If the CRC or the parity is incorrect the decoder output is displayed in red BR 6028 BR 6028 is a VFT Voice Frequency Telegraph frequency and time diversity modem using 7 data chan nels It
360. l functions are transmitted For these blocks the two normally unused bits specify the particular special functions with the combinations 10 or 11 DUP ARQ 2 has automatic channel selection facilities Before transmission starts the best available short wave transmission channel is selected and its quality is continuously checked for the duration of the transmission Within a given frequency range the system may select one of 5 possible channels which are spaced at 400 Hz intervals Because of this channel selection mechanism the linked stations may transmit at different frequencies DUP FEC 2 DUP FEC 2 is a further development of the DUP ARQ 2 system and the system characteristics are very similar DUP FEC 2 allows transmission of ITA 2 Baudot or ITA 5 ASCII characters Parameter Value Operation modes Broadcast Duplex FEC Adaltional Inf DUP FEC 2 has a radio channel rate of 125 or 250 Baud A data frame is 32 bits long For error protection a five bit CRC sum inverted Hamming and a single bit for global parity odd parity is used DUP FEC 2 is often used as a full duplex system As is the case with other full duplex systems transmis sion simultaneously takes place on two different frequencies If an error occurs special sequences are transmitted to signal this condition and a block repetition is requested RQ If errors are received the two last 32 bit blocks are retransmitted when the radio channel rate is 125 Baud and
361. lar to the mixing of the signal frequency and BFO of a receiver WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 First start e 43 An exception is the FFSK demodulator for direct frequency modulation in this case the indicated offset frequency is equal to the effective center frequency An example for an HF receiver and ARQ E mode gt Receiver IF 455 000 Hz gt Offset 453 300 Hz gt Center 1700 Hz The advantage of this method is that the user only needs to know the center frequency Another example for a VHF UHF receiver and POCSAG mode gt Receiver IF 455 000 Hz gt Offset 455 000 Hz gt Center 0 Hz In this case the offset frequency is equal to the center frequency Input W PCI and W PCle cards support a number of inputs Signal Input AFIF 1 IF70 1a IF70 1b AFIF 2 IFfO 2 ProF 12001 DMR gt AFIF 1 AFIF 2 are two physically independent inputs They have a range of 50 Hz 25 MHz These inputs should be used when the source is an AF output line or speaker or an IF output of a communication receiver or digital recorder gt IF70 1a IF70 1b IF7O 2 are IF inputs at 70 MHz with a bandwidth of 35 MHz 52 5 MHz 87 5 MHz This IF is common for satellite equipment The first two IF70 1a and IF70 1b and the third IF70 2 are of two independent channels gt PXGF 12001 is an example of Custom Input with PxGF format gt DMR is an example of Custom Input in wav file format For
362. les of INDIRECT modulation are PACKET 1200 ATIS and analogue and digital tone call systems Decoding is only possible from the receiver AF output INDIRECT AM This modulation method uses AM carrier modulation which is in turn modulated by an AF FSK sub carrier For decoding the receiver AM demodulator output is required At the time of writing ACARS is the only known mode using this modulation method Decoding is only possible from the receiver AF output FAX Weather charts to be transmitted are fastened to a revolving drum and illuminated by a light source The drum is then scanned by a light sensor moving along the axis of the drum The voltage output from this sensor is converted into tone frequencies modulating the transmitter The number of revolutions per minute RPM is a measure of the speed of the drum on the transmitting side The index of cooperation IOC is a measure of the speed with which the sensor moves along the ax is of the drum A fax transmission begins with a tone of 300 or 675 Hz The start tone has duration of 5 10 seconds and is very well suited for precise tuning The frequency of the tone determines the IOC value Then 30 seconds of alternations between the frequencies representing black and white levels are transmitted the switching frequency being 1 4 Hz This sequence carries the RPM information and the receiver is now synchronized so that the picture will start in the right position Subsequently the transmiss
363. lex G TOR system is described in detail by the manufacturer KANTRONICS in a booklet G TOR The New Mode Articles Charts Protocol edited by Shelley Marcotte Two code tables are defined for this mode Code Table O and Code Table 1 which may be selected from Options Code Table GW FSK GW FSK is used by Globe Wireless on the Maritime Data Network of the company Parameter Value Frequency range Operation modes Simplex ARQ FS Symbol rate 100 or 200 Bd Adaltional Inf The GW FSK frame consists of three sections header data and control At 100 baud the size of the data field is 48 bits and at 200 baud the size is increased to 112 bits Each frame contains 6 14 characters or data bytes For smaller packets a filler lt is used For 100 baud the error detection is unknown while the 200 baud sub mode uses a 16 bit CRC for error detection GW FSK operates adaptively so the baud rate can be either 100 or 200 baud The baud rate depends on propagation as well as the type of transmission Station idle and start of communication is done with 100 baud Traffic and GPS position messages are transmitted at 200 baud Station idle and ID signals are transmitted at short intervals whenever the shore station is idle The format is synchronous ASCII Most of the traffic is compressed From time to time uncompressed GPS position data in NMEA format is transmitted on ship frequencies GW FSK can be found on all short wave maritime ba
364. license s on the CmStick follow these steps Open the CodeMeter WebAdmin interface from the CodeMeter tray icon a E Anzeigen SS E CRE Wo 1 CmDongle deaktivieren Hilfe Customize Uber Beenden Press the WebAdmin 16 e Setup WAVECOM Decoder CodeMeter WebAdmin CM Rea Server O T G Cluster User Available Licenses at rolf_haenggi Product Name Feature Licenses Status Code Map User No Exclu Shared Free Limit User o Limit sive 100003 Bundling Articles x1 1 1 100787 WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG Licenses available on the CmStick are listed in this screen W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Item Remarks Product Displays the product code Code ome Displays the name of the product item normally the name of the product Displays the feature map WAVECOM uses the feature map to control the software update Map period Displays the total number of network licenses Displays the number of licenses which are currently used in the user limit mode Displays the number of licences that are currently used in the no user limit mode Displays the number of licences that are currently used in the exclusive mode Displays the number of licences that are currently used in the shared mode Displays the number of licences that are currently free Displays detailed information about the respective network licences in use Important If you have multiple CmSticks plugged into c
365. ling Generally activation of the HF carrier is followed by the transmission of a preamble or bit synchronization pattern which slaves the receiver to the clock frequency The preamble contains at least 576 bits and rep resents a continuously alternating sequence of 010101 0101 Following the preamble data batches con taining the actual information are transmitted each batch being 17 x 32 bit or 544 bits long 576 bit S44 bit 544 bit 544 bit The structure of a batch is fixed Each batch starts with a 32 bit synchronization codeword with a fixed content 206 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 The synchronization word is followed by eight frames frame O 7 containing 2 x 32 bits in total Only the first 32 bits are however used for transmitting a pager address It would therefore be possible to double the maximum number of subscribers in the group by utilizing the frame contents to its full extent 32 232 bit 2X32 bit 2x32 bit 2x32 bit 2x32 bit 2x32bM 2x32bit exc bit The message contents of the code words may include pager addresses or messages destined for specific pager addresses The frames contained in a batch are numbered from O to 7 All pagers are similarly di vided into 8 groups with each pager only receiving frames for the group to which it has been assigned A pager synchronizes itself to the batch synch codeword SC and ignores the seven frames which are not applicable Following
366. ll not adversely affect the operation of any other decoder cards in the system The IF output of my receiver seems not to be suitable with 10 7 MHz IF input of the decoder card Is there any solution The 10 7 MHz IF s of some receivers typically have a bandwidth of up to 500 kHz and is intended for a spectrum analyzer This bandwidth is too wide for the decoder IF input A solution is a slight modification of the receiver i e to install a 455 kHz output in the receiver see WAVECOM s web site What is the maximum number of decoder cards that could be remotely controlled In theory when accessing remote client cards any number of cards may be controlled remotely from a single computer There are of course WINDOWS resource constraints and network bandwidth constraints that would limit the number of clients that can be simultaneously connected For the average PC hard ware eight simultaneous clients is the recommended maximum Why does connecting to a remote decoder card sometimes take a long time Connecting to any decoder card on the network may take up to two minutes The connection is made by Microsoft DCOM and the connection delay is the normal DCOM connection time The wait cursor will ap pear while the connection is being made What should I do if a decoder card needs repair Contact your local distributor to arrange the return of your card If necessary it will be forwarded to WAVECOM for repairs Signal Interferen
367. ll the Program Click Next to install to this folder or dick Change to install to a different f The wizard is ready to begin installation Install WAVECOM W CODE to Click Install to begin the installation C Program Files WAVECOMWIOODE ase If you want to review or change any of your installation settings dick Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard InstallShield Change the destination folder and click Next to continue Click Next to continue the installation the installation G r J WAVECOM W CODE InstallShield Wizard elo JE WAVECOM W CODE InstallShield Wizard d Installing WAVECOM W CODE The program features you selected are being installed InstallShield Wizard Completed Please wait while the InstallShield Wizard installs WAVECOM W CODE This may take several minutes The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed WAVECOM W CODE Click Finish to exit the wizard Status InstallShield Wait until the installation is finished If the installation was successful click Finish to complete the process Note If a firewall is enabled on your system depending on its security level settings various components of W CODE may ask to access the Internet or the trusted zone of the firewall You will have to manually grant access to these components Check for hidden windows if the installation process seems to hang this can be done by pressing the Alt Tab k
368. llenges of radio commu nication Inter symbol interference is one such challenge Due to the time varying nature of fading chan nels one symbol may be delayed in such a way that it interferes with the next symbol at the receiving end By shaping the digital pulses in certain patterns the level of ISI may be reduced The raised cosine pulse Shape is the shape most frequently used in conjunction with equalization Equalization To combat the perturbations introduced during the transmission via time varying communication chan nels modern digital communication systems employ a technique called equalization Preset equaliza tion transmits a training sequence which is compared to a similar sequence at the receiving end The difference between the received and local sequences is used to adjust a special filter Adaptive equaliza tion continually measures the characteristics of the channel from the data received and dynamically ad justs the filter To take advantage of the powerful features of equalization good channel error perfor mance is necessary The equalizer sits between the demodulator and the detector Synchronization To enable the receiving end of a data or telegraph link to interpret the received code words in a meaning ful way the receiver must first be synchronized to the incoming bit stream by finding the bit level transi tions and next achieve code word phase Basically the receiver will search for a certain bit pattern in the b
369. lowing parameters have to be set via the Custom Inputs dialog Value aor TCP IP 127 0 0 1 Port number 1234 Format IP CONF Sampling Rate Hz 48000 Number of channels 2 Channel Left Right IQ Apply Delete WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 First start e 53 TCP IP Input Parameter Value Input Name The name of the custom input Device Select TCP IP in the list IP address Set the source IP address at the moment this menu item is not enabled all traffic sent to the enabled port is processed by the decoder Port number Enter the a port number The data source must be configured with the same port num ber Format IP CONF or IP PXGF for more information see WAVECOM Data Formats on page 305 Sampling Rate Hz The sampling rate used by the data source Number of channels Number of channels Channel In the list box the channel s to be used are displayed Left Right Left Right If IQ is selected only Left Right can be selected If PCM is selected all three chan nel configurations are available PCM or 1Q Edit a Custom Input Select the custom input from the input list on the left in the Custom Inputs dialog For instance select the NewInput 3 entry which is a file input Now it is possible to modify the parameter values in the parameter table on the right For instance the Input Name or the Channel parameter value can be modified Even the Device value can be
370. ls The following 176 symbols are divided into four 32 symbol data segments and three 16 symbol channel probe segments The 176 symbol data probe segment immediately follows a next frame beginning with the same 80 symbol preamble This repeated frame structure allows synchronization of the demodulator at any time of trans mission ES T 213 33 MS ooo Preamble Block1 Block2 Block3 Block 4 Preamble symbols 32 Data symbols NN NN Channel probe symbols At the end of transmission an EOM bit pattern 4B65A5B2 in hexadecimal notation MSB first is sent to mark the end of message The EOM sequence is followed by flush bits to flush the FEC coder and to com plete the transmission of the remainder of the interleaver data block In most cases FEC and interleaving is used to combat the effects of fading frequency shift multipath and burst noise User data is in this case first FEC encoded interleaved then mapped into PSK symbols and transmitted in 32 symbol data segments The 16 symbol channel probe segment transmitted between each succeeding data segment has a known PSK pattern Its purpose is to keep the demodulator mainly the equalizer on track in spite of adverse propagation conditions during the HF transmission Generally STANAG 4529 transmits the user data in transparent binary mode This should be defined by the higher layer using the STANAG 4529 mode For this reason the decoder displays the
371. lter response may be set to Slow Normal or Fast This demodulator produces high quality CW decoding It is important to select the appropriate receiver AGC response normal or slow DSP The DSP mode utilizes an I Q demodulator Hilbert transformation The received signal is split into an in phase component and a quadrature component Next amplitude normalization takes place and the result ant signal is used for the frequency conversion This method is characterized by a linear relationship be tween the received frequency and the output voltage of the demodulator The DSP demodulator has a good signal to noise ratio and yields very good results under most conditions DPSK In differential PSK the absolute carrier phase cannot be used for data recovery as is the case with BPSK and QPSK To decode multiphase DPSK up to 16DPSK the input signal is mixed with a complex phase regulated reference signal The resulting data reduced signal is then filtered in a low pass filter The fol lowing phase comparator calculates the phase difference between the signal from the integrator and the delayed signal A variant of DPSK is used almost exclusively when phase modulation is employed on short wave data links DBPSK Similar to DPSK but has two phase shifts at 180 degrees DQPSK Similar to DPSK but has four phase shifts at 90 and 180 degrees DTMF This demodulator handles multi frequency signals Filters are switched in on the various
372. lution varies from 120 x 120 and a transmission time of 8 seconds to 640 x 480 with a transmission time of over seven minutes Some transmissions are black and white only and others are in color using either R G B or Y U V color coding On the air the most common modes are the Scottie and Martin modes The WAVECOM SSTV decoder can decode a variety of modes Martin 1 4 Scottie 1 4 SC 1 modes SC 2 modes and B W Robot modes These modes can be detected automatically Modes that use Y U V color coding are not supported Use the Auto button to select automatic mode or alternatively select a specific SSTV Mode in the Op tions menu If a specific mode is selected the system will not change mode if a SSTV signal of a different mode is detected If Free Run in the Options menu is selected an image line will be displayed even if no valid Horizontal Sync i e start of a new line is detected When Free Run is selected the decoder does not adjust the picture timings to match the received signal To manually correct the horizontal timing one uses the Alignment option When the alignment is correct the picture will be received vertically One would nor mally only use Free Run mode if the signal is very noisy and the system cannot detect the sync pulses it self or if the picture is very wavy Click and drag on the image with the left mouse button to select a portion of the image The selected por tion is displayed in reverse colors Right clickin
373. ly set translation frequency When the CCC is launched from the VHF UHF SUB menu the frequency range displayed in the FFT window spans the se lected classification bandwidth starting from the currently set translation frequency Classification Results List The Classification Results List is identical to the Classifier Classification Results List see the section on Classifier on page 250 This information is available for all processes Tree View of the Classified Signals Code Checks A list of code checked signals is displayed below the list of classified signals For each signal a tree struc ture is used if required for more detailed information see below Signal 1 Table Detected MPT 1327 Codecheck Detected MPT 1327 To expand the view right click on the node The view has two levels gt A classified signal reference Signal lt number gt with a Table Detected reference if a match has been determined from the XML table loaded gt A Codecheck Detected reference Signal lt number gt This level contains a reference to the list of classified signals Codecheck Detected Left clicking on the expand folder button to the left of Codecheck Detected will expand the view to in clude details of the mode detected by the code check The Codecheck Detected listing may also contain more details on the mode in the Submode and Misc fields 266 e Classifier Optional WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e
374. matic freezing of the graphic as long as the cursors are displayed Enable the Backspace support Sometimes in modes like PSK 31 the operator is sending back Space characters If backspace support is enabled backspace will work as for an ordinary terminal program Enable reconnect to cards on remote computer Enable or disable the GUI to reconnect to a card on a remote computer If enabled the decoder will reconnect to the card on the remote com puter Enable relative frequency display You can select if in the FFT sonagram etc displays the re al frequency center frequency offset or the relative frequency is displayed Receiver and Satellite Settings These settings are used for satellite modes and analysis and give the operator the possibility to configure receiver or down converter frequencies and to select a satellite and receiver type The receiver or down converter control interface to be controlled is connected to a serial port of the computer Receiver center frequency is preconfigured to 1542 MHz for the L Band settings and 3544 5 MHz for the C Band settings WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 First start e 49 Satellite Settings Downconverter gt L Band center frequency 7OMHz C Band center Satellite receiver type Settings in use L Band settings Center frequency 1 542 000 000 Hz C Band settings Center frequency 3 614 500 000 Hz Ocean regio
375. me Toodulation value ogpsk gt Parameter name speed value 2000 000000 Parameter name pazsband center value 2000 Parameter name Passband bandwidth value 3500 gt Parameter name Input value Inpa gt Parameter name Inputgaln value 70 gt Parameter names translaton value B66000567 Parameter name als value stop gt 4 FParameterList lt Anformatior lt fMezzage The Sat Aero System The Aero services differ in a number of ways from the maritime and land mobile Inmarsat services Among other characteristics the Aero system uses specially adapted modulation formats as Aviation BPSK A BPSK which is differential BPSK and Aviation QPSK A QPSK which is a variant of Offset QPSK OQPSK Services A number of services are available as listed below Voice uses the circuit switched C channel whereas da ta uses the P channel in the forward direction and the T or R channels in the return direction depending on the size of data to be transmitted R channels are used for single signal unit messages Two data ser vices are available gt Data 2 Used for ACARS over satellite messages on OSI layer 2 data link layer gt Data 3 Used for Aeronautical Telecommunication Network ATN OSI protocol traffic on OSI layer 3 network layer Service Antenna Global Beam Spot Beam Data Channel Rates Circuit Switched Operation Operation Channel Rate Aero L Yes No 600 1200 Aero I
376. mic range Bits per Sample Dynamic Range Audio can be recorded in stereo or mono When recording in mono either the left or right channel can be recorded The Channel control provides the following options Channels Recording Source Mono Left Records left channel only Mono Right Records right channel only On sound cards that are not capable of stereo sound only one option namely Mono is available WAVECOM Decoder W PCI e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 First start e 27 The WAV file format supports files up to a maximum size of 4 GB The maximum length of recording that can be made depends on the sample rate number of channels and bits per sample The table below lists the maximum recording lengths for a few common formats Format Max recording length 8kHz 8 bit mono 149 hours 7 min 8kHz 16 bit mono 74 hours 33 min 48kHz 16 bit mono 12 hours 25 min 48kHz 16 bit stereo 6 hours 12 min 192kHz 16 bit stereo 1 hour 33 min Playback Controls Sound playback can be routed to the output of any installed sound card To select the sound card that will be used for playback use the Output Device control Output Device Speakers High Definition Audio T Monitor function komiai The monitor function allows the user to listen to the audio signal connected to the sound card input Press the Monitor button toggle this function on and off The monitor function works by playing back the recorded signal in real
377. milar to CTCSS but uses 104 octal 3 digit code words instead of continuous analogue tones The data is sent as a series of 23 bit GOLAY encoded frames without any sync bits Polarity can be normal or inverse and must be selected by the user DCS Code Table Normal Inverse Normal Inverse Normal Inverse Normal Inverse WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 143 O71 072 ss s s fase fa os e as s a Ja zs e e Normal Inverse Normal Inverse Normal Inverse Normal Inverse 073 506 246 523 431 723 664 311 074 174 251 165 432 516 703 114 712 252 462 445 043 712 115 152 255 446 446 255 116 754 261 732 452 053 122 225 263 205 454 266 125 365 265 156 455 332 131 364 266 454 462 252 132 546 271 065 464 026 134 223 274 145 465 331 143 412 306 071 466 662 145 274 311 664 503 162 152 115 423 506 Demodulated Bitstream Output The Demodulated Bit Stream Output sends a raw synchronized bit stream FSK some PSK only through an XML interface to an external application When Demodulated Bit Stream Output is selected the parameters of the decoder software e g de modulator shift frequency center frequency etc must be set to correct values at first The synchronized bit stream after demodulation will now be available and is sent through the XML interface to a user ap plication r E WAVECOM W CODE Demodulated Bitstream Output Card 1 A LL CODE
378. mission Modes e 227 Mode Type Time s Resolution Pixel x Line Notes sens RGB 256 x 128 s w Ras so 256x256 A EST ES 512 x 256 A A sw E 512 x 256 SS Notes Not implemented a Top 16 lines gray scale b Top 8 lines gray scale C Similar to original SSTV d No horizontal sync start of a new line STANAG 4285 STANAG 4285 is specified by the NATO North Atlantic Treaty Organization Military Agency for Standardi zation in Characteristics of 1200 2400 3600 Bits per Second Single Tone Modulators Demodulators for HF Radio Links 16 February 1989 Parameter VENTE Frequency range H Operation modes Broadcast Simplex FEC Modulation 8 PSK Center frequency 1800 Hz Symbol rate 2400 Bd Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF The modulation technique used in this mode consists of phase shift keying 8 PSK of a single tone sub carrier of 1800 Hz The modulation speed symbol rate is always 2400 Bd Using different M PSK modulations and FEC Forward Error Correction coding rates serial binary user in formation raw data accepted at the line side input can be transmitted at different user data rates STANAG 4285 single tone waveform has the following characteristics which may be selected from Options Frame Format Baud User da User data FEC coding Interleaver No of unknown No of known 8 Rate ta rate rate bps rate 8 phase sym phase symbols bps bols User Data
379. mission in only one direction Middle Half duplex transmission in either direction not simultaneously Down Full duplex simultaneous transmission in both directions ARQ is a technique by which the Information Sending Station ISS transmits information in such a way that the Information Receiving Station IRS is able to detect transmission errors and then ask for repetition of the character or block of characters in error This technique is used in half duplex and du plex channels Several methods are used for error detection and possible error correction One method is the use of pari ty check codes One such code in international use for ARQ is the balanced ITA 3 code consisting of seven bits with a constant mark space ratio of 3 4 A ratio different from 3 4 in a received codeword will be an error and a RQ Request for Repetition is issued This code has no correcting capability ASCII is also a parity checking code The Russian CIS 36 mode combines m ary modulation with parity checking In this case the data to be sent is formed into blocks and parity is calculated for both rows and columns horizontal and vertical parity check Another ARQ code is the ARQ 1A parity code The code words of this code also consist of seven bits 6 data bits and 1 parity bit The parity bit is set to 1 or O depending on the number of logical 1 s in the six data bits of the codeword The Bulgarian ASCII system uses yet another form of parity check
380. mized for low frequencies PB Center Click on the PB Center menu item to adjust the center frequency of the passband filter For more details see Passband Filter Support on page 69 PB Bandwidth Click on the PB Bandwidth menu item to adjust the bandwidth of the passband filter For more details see Passband Filter Support on page 69 Center Click on the Center menu item to adjust the demodulator center frequency within 1 Hz accuracy For modes utilizing direct FSK this button is not available in this case the offset frequency is equal to the ef fective center frequency Shift Click on the Shift menu item to adjust the frequency shift in 1Hz steps In HF modes the range is 50 Hz 3500 Hz and in VHF UHF modes using direct FSK the range is 50 Hz 16000 Hz Baudrate Click on the Baudrate menu item to enter a new value Depending on the mode the baud rate dialog box contains preset values which may be directly selected The new value is selected by double clicking on the preset value or clicking on OK Polarity Click the Polarity menu item to toggle between normal and inverse polarity Offset Adjusting the offset frequency and the center frequency will adapt the decoder input to a receiver IF out put The minimum offset frequency resolution available with the decoder is 1 Hz The effective center frequen cy is the sum of the offset frequency and the center frequency The function is simi
381. n frequency 70MHz Oscillator frequency 1 472 000 000 Hz 0 Hz Oscillator frequency 3 544 500 000 Hz 0 Hz DDC frequency offset DDC frequency offset Inmarsat Ocean Region NCSC Default Settings Atlantic East 16 west x ala Cancel IM Apply The GUI displays a number of input fields gt Ocean Region Select the ocean region satellite pointed to by the monitoring antenna gt Oscillator Frequency Set this parameter to the frequency of the local oscillator used or set it to O if an external converter or mixer is not used gt Frequency Offset Find out how accurately the receiver sets its frequency Use the real time FFT item in the Analysis DIRECT menu and select a bandwidth of 24 kHz to find out the frequency offset of the receiver Adjust the receiver to the NCSC frequency of the appropriate ocean region Following this the NCSC signal should be centered exactly in the FFT display The adjustment ap plied to centre the NCSC signal is the offset make it accurate to 500 Hz or less gt L Band and C Band Center Frequency Exact value of the L or C band frequency that is con verted to 70 000 License MHz When License is clicked the Server page of the CodeMeter Webadmin page is opened 50 e First start CodeMeter WebAdmin M Home Content Server Configuration Diagnosis Info Help Cluster User Available Licenses at ROLF_H wavecom loca
382. n ARQ protocol if a reception error occurs the in formation receiving station IRS can request the retransmission of the corrupted packet from the infor mation sending station ISS To reduce the peak to average power ratio a scrambler is used Different compression algorithms are used to achieve efficient data throughput Decoder There are long packets containing data and short packets containing control or request information for the ARQ process The decoder can recognize and decode the following packet types Packet type Function Source IDLE lle frame DATA Frame with Acknowledge ACK or Not Acknowledge NAK RS FORCED OVER IRS accepts the OVER ISS indicates end of Transmission IRS acknowledges end of trans I mission MYCALL Contains selcall of the calling sta Not specified tion RQ FORCED OVER and END ACK are short packets The others are long packets The decoded packet types are shown in the upper status bar In the next lower status bar the following information is shown e Number of carriers channels e For long packets Number of channels with CRC OK and CRC FAILED e For RQ packets Number of channels with ACK NAK and wrongly decoded channels UNKN Due to the compression employed by GW OFDM decoded data is not available until the end of a transmis sion The end of a transmission is indicated by an END or END ACK packet or after a timeout of several seconds After a transmission ends the decoded dat
383. n and check that you get this status message WAVECOM Server W CODE running gt The first time the software is used after the installation you will have to set the decoder device manually From the menu bar go to Configuration A drop down menu will appear Click on the W CODE Device menu item A setup window appears 18 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Server Local Host address or name Remote 127 0 0 1 Disconnect Server Devices No device Name soundcard G39dde Devicec DeviceD Device DeviceF DeviceG DeviceH W CLOUD Networking Connections 1 Remote host wcloud73651 Cz Speed limit Baud YY No Device Line In Realtek High Definitio W1 1 CODE Serial number 1927840122 Line 1 WiNRADIO Virtual Sound V1 1 1927840222 W CLOUD G33DDC Wavecom V2 0 Auto connect Encryption Vv 0343973651 gt Select a device number and click Close to save the entry If you require more details regarding remote connections and connection parameters see W CODE Device on page 47 gt The decoder is now ready for use Apply a signal to the selected input or use the Media Player Recorder to play back a WAV file gt From the HF Modes VHF UHF Modes or Satellite menus a mode may be selected e g PACTOR II if a PACTOR II signal is played back 3 WAVECOM W CODE
384. n identifier Parameter Value Frequency range VHF UHF Operation modes Analogue Selcal Modulation FM SUB Tone WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 245 Parameter Value Receiver settings FM BW 12 kHz Input format s AF IF If more than two identical digits are to be transmitted the repetition tone is appended to the digit tone e g 22222 is transmitted as f2 fw f2 fw f2 where f2 is the tone for 2 and fw is the repetition tone In most systems the accuracy of the single frequencies has to be within 1 1 5 of the nominal value For ZVEI modes having nominal tone durations of 70 ms the duration of a single tone may vary 15 ms Decoding the selective calls is started by clicking on a system If transmission and system selection con form the call sign is displayed on the monitor In the Options menu a Time Stamp function can be ena bled to add date and time to each call Tone Allocation Tone duration 70 ms ZVEI 3 The entire call number is transmitted by consecutive tones in decade sequence When two identical digits are to be transmitted consecutively then an eleventh frequency is used as a repetition identifier Parameter Value If more than two identical digits are to be transmitted the repetition tone is appended to the digit tone e g 22222 is transmitted as f2 fw f2 fw f2 where f2 is the tone for 2 and fw is the repetition tone In most sys
385. n is applied if in use The last module processes fax ECM Error Correction Mode as well as performing data link layer analysis on data signals The various fax and data modes are then decoded and output in a number of formats 290 e Modem and FAX Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Image Data Transparent Datainasync HDLC 142 Uncompressed The decoder capabilities encompass the modulation types and protocols listed below FAX Data Data Capabilities Modulation types AA E vt vr WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Modem and FAX Modes e 291 Protocols FAX Data T 30 Asynchronous T 4 mono dimensional bi dimensional Unframed HDLC T 6 ECM V 42bis JPEG MNP 4 JBIG MNP 5 Input and interfacing The fax and modem decoder accepts input sampled at 8 kHz with a precision of 0 01 and stored into a signed 16 bit linear format The dynamic range of the input shall not exceed 12 bits 1 sign bit One or two sampled streams are accepted depending on the capture method being mono directional or bi directional The input may be a samples file in the format listed below gt 16 bit signed linear 8 bit signed linear 8 bit unsigned linear A law A law inverted V VV V WV Mu law gt Mu law inverted The decoder will accept fax and modem signals using the AF input Full duplex requires two channels ste reo In order to interface to a t
386. n the View menu the visibility of each individual status and indicator element may be enabled or disa bled A checkmark indicates that the element is enabled A disabled element is not deleted but may be made visible at any time Window Menu Help New Window Cascade Tile Arrange Icons v 1W CODE Text Card1 Using the Window menu new output windows may be opened and organized Help Menu For context sensitive help on a menu item use F1 on the item 58 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Contents Selecting Contents opens the online help system Help on clicked buttons menus and windows are then available WAVECOM on the Web Help Contents www wavecom ch About W CODE Contents access the decoder help file www wavecom ch links to website of WAVECOM About W CODE r About W CODE W CODE Version 8 3 00 Build 8107 29 May 2013 Copyright 1995 2013 WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG All rights reserved CODE Displays information on software version build number and release date for the installed application Other GUI Elements Toolbar Uae Sga h Allows access to file print and search operations Most functions on this toolbar are also available from the File menu If the mouse is resting for more than approximately half a second on a button a label with the name of the function is displayed tool tip In addi
387. n use The CCC combines a classifier with a table based mode check and an advanced code check The CCC will attempt to process all signals within a bandwidth of up to 4 8 kHz depending on settings As is obvious from its name the HF Classifier Code Check primarily addresses the requirements for the analysis of signals below 30 MHz but it will of course work with signals in other frequency ranges if they fall within the bandwidth and fulfil the other criteria used by the CCC processes How the Classifier Code Check Works The CCC processes input signals in up to four successive steps as shown in the block diagram below which also shows the possible signal paths The user can select how many steps should be involved in the analysis of the signal s under investigation WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Classifier Optional e 255 The possible signal paths of the CCC are shown below Classifer XML Table Check Code Check p gt Decoder up D Decoder Y y y Y P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 gt The classifier attempts to classify the input signals according to their modulation formats gt The table check will check the signal against the entries of an XML formatted table gt The code check will check by attempting synchronization Finally the signal may be forwarded to a decoder for output
388. ncy values the center cursor automatically displays the center value To remove the cursors click on the graphics window again When the cursors have been placed in the desired positions they may be moved right or left by moving the center cursor By doing this the measurement of frequency spacing in MFSK and FDM systems is pos sible Adjustment of the Offset Frequency An FFT spectrum calculation can be done from 0 Hz up to the selected maximum frequency The offset frequency for decoding of VHF UHF DIR transmissions e g POCSAG GOLAY GSC or ERMES must be adjusted to the effective center frequency of the signal e g 455 kHZ A bandwidth of 24 kHz from 455 kHz to 479 kHz is sufficient for the measurement range of the FFT therefore the offset frequency must be offset to half of the bandwidth The offset frequency adjustment is calculated as the IF output frequency 455 kHz minus half of the selected FFT bandwidth 24 2 kHz Offset 443 kHz The measurement range is now 443 kHz 467 kHz For the 455 kHz receiver IF output of a shortwave receiver e g HF 1000 the offset frequency is first adjusted to 453 3 kHz to obtain the standard center frequency of 1 700 Hz The HF 1000 BFO must now be adjusted to 1 700 Hz WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Analysis Tools e 71 FFT HF SUB DIR and SAT FFT Type Start Frequency End Freqeuncy FFT HF Offset Frequency Bandwidth FFT SUB Offset Frequency Bandwidth
389. nds More information is available on http www globewireless com GW OFDM GW OFDM is an HF data transmission system wholly owned and operated by GlobeWireless Twenty four HF coastal radio stations provide connection to the land network Additionally GlobeWireless offers an email service for vessels around the world The equipment required by the user consists of a proprietary GlobeWireless data modem e g GL 5100 and shortwave radio equipment and is installed and main tained by the company Parameter Value Frequency Range OFDM ARQ Modulation OFDM with DQPSK Center Frequency 1500Hz Shift Bandwidth 750 2000 Hz WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 163 Parameter Value Symbol rate 62 5 Bd per carrier max 32 carriers Receiver Settings LSB USB automatic polarity recognition Input format s AF IF Additional Info AFC Adaptive number of carriers compression GW OFDM Modulation and Protocol GlobeWireless OFDM employs a dynamic increase and decrease in the number of OFDM carriers the num ber of carriers can vary between 12 and 32 Each carrier is modulated with DQPSK The main specifications of GW OFDM are e 12 to 32 subcarriers DQPSK modulation 62 5 Hz subcarrier spacing symbol duration 16ms Cyclic prefix guard interval duration 2ms 700 2700 Hz occupied bandwidth Pilot tone for synchronization and frequency tracking The system ensures error free data exchange with a
390. nel Return to NCS MES Registration Initial registration Return to LES NCS MES Call Acknowledgement Call acknowledgement Return to LES SCPC channel User Circuit switched Forward and return traffic Shared channels User Packet switched Return traffic The only frequencies the MES initially knows are the frequencies of the NCSC in all regions all other fre quency information is dynamically extracted from the NCS Bulletin Board or in session oriented signaling messages After being switched on the MES must be told or remembers in which region it is currently located and will automatically tune to the corresponding frequency of the NCS The terminal will then search through the NCSS spot beam ID frequencies to identify the best spot beam WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 SAT System e 277 MES Identification A MES is called from the terrestrial network by its Inmarsat Number IMN which is identical to its public telephone number with a country code prefix according to Table 2 Internally the system uses two differ ent 24 bits IDs The Forward MESID used on the forward path i e in the direction from the Land Earth Station LES to the Mobile Earth Station MES The Return MESID used on the return path i e from the MES to the LES These IDs are unrelated to the publicly published IMN and are only known to the Inmarsat system which maintains a database describing the relationship between the
391. ngle block may be transmitted using any desired sequence of blocks By implementing block coding two errors may be corrected in the BCH 15 7 codeword The bits within a block are interleaved during transmission which allows the correction of burst errors affecting up to 16 bits which is equivalent to a fading protec tion of 27 ms GOLAY Data Block with Eight Alphanumeric Characters WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 161 CRO sum Expansion bit This illustration shows a block of eight alphanumeric characters of 6 bits each The high fading protection is achieved by transmitting columns rather than rows interleaving In this way a burst error affecting 16 bits does not cause a character error In addition each block contains a checksum computed by binary ad dition of the information bits of the other 7 words adding to the error detection capability of the system In high capacity systems the GSC makes use of grouping For this purpose 16 calls are stacked together Each stack is preceded by one of 10 copy information blocks that consists of 18 repetitions of a single Golay codeword In this way all receivers in a system are grouped in 10 header block groups and each re ceiver only has to decode the stack that is preceded by its particular header block GOLAY also has a facility for optimizing voice calls A special audio control code is used to separate voice messages GOLAY uses direct frequen
392. ngth ranging from 0 12 sec to 8 64 sec thus producing a delay in the data transmission Parameter Value Operation modes PSK Broadcast Simplex FEC Modulation 8 PSK 16 QAM 32 QAM and 64 QAM Symbol rate 2400 0 Bd Center frequency 1800 Hz Frequency range HF WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 175 Parameter Value Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF This mode is equivalent to NATO STANAG 4539 MIL 188 110B Appendix C single tone waveform has the following characteristics rate bps leaver per symbol known sym bols User Data Channel Baud rate User data Inter Modulation bit FEC coding rate No of un Probe 2400 12800 64 QAM 6 Variable Interleaver Ultra short Very short Short Medium Long V VV V WV Very long Each transmission of a MIL 188 110B message begins with a synchronization phase preamble which in cludes 287 8 PSK symbols In the preamble the modem setting i e user data rate and interleaver size is coded This auto baud feature should be used to configure the modem to decode the data bits After the preamble the user data bits are transmitted in blocks of 256 symbols paired with 31 symbol mini probe blocks After 72 user data mini probe pairs a 103 symbol mini preamble is inserted The number of data blocks in a transmission is in principle unlimited A unique bit pattern in hexadecimal number 4B65A5B2 MS
393. ning the baud rate and signal polarity The Baudrate item in the Demodulator menu allows a manual start of signal decoding with polarity de termination remaining automatic The user may also enter a baud rate of his choice Setting the demodu lator up for correct shift and center frequency must also be done manually via the Demodulator menu In the case of a manual start the polarity is also determined and the signal is tested for a valid asynchro nous data format If valid parameters are detected the output of text is started Even in the case of a break in the received signal the software does not attempt automatic synchronization This prevents the premature termination of data capturing in the presence of transient interference to the signal The Auto mode will automatically cause a return to synchronization if lengthy periods of signal loss are experienced or a pre defined error rate exceeded 120 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 A Baudot code word consists of a start bit 5 data bits and 1 1 5 or 2 stop bits giving each character a length of 7 7 5 or 8 bits Baudot is an asynchronous code in which synchronization is performed for each character by the start and stop bits Baudot transmissions may be rendered unreadable by inverting one or several data bits Using the Bit In version item in the Options menu any of the 32 bit inversion patterns may be pre selected Isochronous or synchro
394. nous Baudot uses 7 bits and is especially used for on line crypto systems BIIS Binary Interchange of Information and Signaling is an ETSI standard ETS 300 230 used for transmission of signaling information for selective calls status messages short text messages and data Parameter Value Additional Info Signaling data Short Data transfer HDLC possible ETSI standard ETS 300 230 The system operates at 1200 Bit s using indirect FSK modulation in the VHF or UHF band To accommo date the different types of data a number of code words have been defined Every transmission consists of at least one address word Additional data such as telephone numbers or short text messages may be appended to the address word as one or more data blocks For the transmission of longer data packets the High Level Data Link Control HDLC protocol may be im plemented in the BIIS devices Status messages are transmitted within the address word The address word contains the Operational Mode Characteristic OMC a regional code indicating the country of the device a common address part the transmitter address and the receiver address The address data is displayed in hexadecimal format OMC code and regional code are displayed as short strings There are 64 OMC codes consisting of a cate gory part CAT and a function part FNC Some codes are custom status or reserved codes The follow ing table shows all valid codes in string and binary representat
395. nter frequency gt If two or more different systems are identified or if too many transmission errors occur an auto matic switch to a mode will not take place Noise Gate Mode The Noise Gate Mode can be selected by Options Noise Gate Mode or by double clicking the Noise Gate Mode field in the Status Bar Noise Gate Mode Disabled a Enabled S O l Cancel gt In Enabled mode a Noise Gate is used This is necessary as this kind of signal is not continuous The noise gate examines the input signal and tries to determine if a valid signal is available which can be analyzed or if the input consists only of noise gt In Disabled mode the Noise Gate is switched off WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Analysis Tools e 81 FSK Code Check SUB FSK code check is started in automatic mode by selecting the Analysis Code Check button or from VHF UHF SUB Analysis FSK Code Check This function has a high degree of accuracy when deter mining baud rate frequency shift and center frequency of HF FSK systems As an additional help FSK code check also offers an option to start the analysis manually after user entry of baud rate frequency shift and center frequency To utilize this option the Auto button must be dese lected The software will then start data acquisition using the pre selected parameters If a pre selected parameter has been changed data acquisition is atomatically restarted
396. nter frequency must be accurate The tuning display indicates if a DBPSK or a DQPSK signal is being received Two bars mean DBPSK four bars DQPSK The demodulator must be adjusted accordingly Polarity of PSK 31 PSK 63 PSK 125 PSK 250 If a LSB signal is received using the receivers USB position or vice versa the phase plane is mirrored on the horizontal axis For a DBPSK signal this has no effect because all the phase states are on the horizon tal axis itself For DQPSK however this must be considered by switching the polarity This can be done in WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 209 the Demodulator menu by toggling Polarity or with a double click on the field on the left side of the sta tus field PSK 31 FEC PSK 31 FEC is a narrow band amateur mode developed by F6CTE The aim of this experimental slow mode is to allow chat communication between hams with much less errors than with PSK 31 Parameter Value Operation modes Simplex FEC Modulation DBPSK Symbol rate 31 25 Hz Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF Additional Info 3 580 MHz 7 035 MHz 14 070 MHz The baud rate is fixed at 31 25 Bd The speed of transmission is about 30 words per minute compared to CW Each bit is repeated 13 bits later for forward error correction using the same principle as used in AMTOR FEC or PSK AM except that this type of FEC is bit related instead of character r
397. ntries of an XML formatted table gt The code check will check by attempting synchronization Finally the signal may be forwarded to a decoder for output The operation of the CCC is explained in detail below Classifier Signal classification is done by providing the classifier with a sample of the complex values of the input Signal across the chosen sampling bandwidth for a chosen sampling time and a chosen sampling rate This Sample is examined for the properties of the signals it contains The results of the classification are output as a list of classified signal parameters The wideband classifier is able to recognize a double modulated Signal In such a case the type of the outer modulation e g AM FM is displayed within parentheses along with the center frequency of the inner signal Two Classification modes are provided a manual mode and a continuous mode In manual mode the clas sifier will make one attempt at classification In continuous mode the classifier cyclically classifies signals with a user selectable interval For more details on the operation of the classifier refer to the section Classifier on page 250 XML Table Check The objective of the table check is to accelerate the determination of the mode or protocol used by the signal s under investigation The signal parameters are checked against entries in a table in XML format The file containing the table may be created and edited by the user using CCC Editor
398. o 2 Code Check finished Classifier code check in idle mode Demodulator IQ Bandwidth 24000 Hz PB Center 12000 Hz Dffset O Hz Input AF LEFT Sonagram Window and Settings Dialogues For details on the sonagram window refer to the section on Sonagram on page 74 When the CCC is launched from the VHF UHF DIR menu the frequency range displayed in the sonagram window spans the selected classification bandwidth around the currently set translation frequency When the CCC is launched from the VHF UHF SUB menu as is the case in the above figure the frequency WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Classifier Optional 263 range displayed in the sonagram window spans the selected classification bandwidth starting from the cur rently set translation frequency The upper left hand side of the sonagram window contains the buttons for the three setting dialogues which determine the behavior of the CCC Classifier Code Check Sequences Classifier Code Check Sequences Process sequence selection Process 1 Classification Process 2 Classification Table Check Table Check Code Check Process 4 Classification Table Check m Data Decoding Process 5 Classification Table Check mp Code Check Data Decoding From this list the desired mode of operation of the CCC is selected Each process performs one or more steps to narrow down the possible candidates fo
399. o eight devices of which two may be active at the same time The S bus carries 40 V Analogue equipment connects to the S bus via a Terminal Adapter TA The local loop not the S bus is a normal balanced two wire pair carrying the T interface line signals at a voltage at between 25 and 96 VDC Fax and Data Transmission In order to transmit the fax and modem data the signals must be processed in such a way that they are adapted and ruggedized for the transmission over noisy and disturbed telephone lines Transmit and re ception processing takes place in devices called modems a combination of modulator and demodula tor The properties of various modems are standardized through ITU International Telecommunications Union V series recommendations Fax standards are laid down in a number of T series recommendations Modem Functionality The techniques used to make the data more robust include framing scrambling error detection and cor rection and compression and line conditioning using probing and training signals which are used to adjust equalizers and echo cancellers at the far end to the actual phase frequency and amplitude characteristics of the line A schematic of the transmission section of a typical modem using phase modulation is shown below In coming data is framed as HDLC frames scrambled to facilitate bit synchronization and then encoded The encoded signal is then mapped to the phase changes and for QAM also
400. ock Identifier of the correctly received block Positive acknowledgement from the ground station consists of a similar transmission of the Downlink Block Identifier Acknowledgements are placed in the Technical Acknowledgement field The general response message label is _DEL 5fh 7fh Messages with this label contain no information except acknowledgements and are used for link maintenance The traffic exchanged can be requests for voice communication weather reports access to airline com puter systems reading of aircraft automatic sensors flight plans messages to be routed to destinations in 108 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 the international airline data network in fact much traffic previously carried by voice has been trans ferred to ACARS The text field of the ACARS packet is used for messages with a fixed format free text or a mixture of formatted and free text Standard 7 bit ASCII is used bit 8 is an odd parity bit and LSB bit 1 is trans mitted first ACARS Downlink Message Example 8 06 11 1996 18 43 32 M 06 ADDR HB INR TA Q ML Q0 B 6 MSN 0635 FID SR6767 Bold typeface indicates decoder generated characters Decoded Interpretation cara O aircrart registration or fight enter O OO Contin 0 9 apink AZ anz NUL OOM OOOO Uplink Downlink Block Identifier MSN Message Sequence Number Fight Identifier In this case record 8 decoded at 18 43 32 cont
401. odes Simplex Duplex ARQ Broadcast Modulation CARRIER KEYING 0 90 WEN Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF 142 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 The center frequency can be set to any value between 200 and 3400 Hz via the Center item in the De modulator menu The center frequency is nominally 800 Hz which is dictated by the quartz filters of pro fessional receivers while other receivers work with 1000 Hz The shift can be set between 100 300 Hz and controls the lock in range of the center frequency band width 1 2 x shift Using Options Alphabet the output can be set to Latin Cyrillic Greek Arabic or Hebrew Using Options AFC the continuous automatic tuning to the center frequency of the CW Morse signal can be enabled or disabled The software reports an error condition ERROR if the controlled parameters as the dot dash ratio the in ter word or inter character breaks deviate too much from the standard and error free decoding cannot be maintained DCS SELCAL DCS stands for Digital Coded Squelch also known as DCSS Digitally Coded Squelch Signaling and is used for selective calls and remote control applications Parameter Value Operation modes Digital Selcal Symbol rate 133 7 134 4 137 Bd Receiver settings FM BW 15kHz eae The data is transmitted on sub audible tones within the frequency range 2 Hz to 300 Hz In practice DCS is si
402. odifications W51PC removed ATIS changed New chapter WAVECOM TCP IP Data File Format WiNRADIO Setup Time cursors in sonagram New manual layout 6 6 5 0 2 Jul 2008 New protocols OLIVIA BIIS 1200 Improvements and modifications Chapter Professional version removed as in the feature only one version is availa ble Phase plane Sync Async replaced with IQ demodulator BITS replaced by BINARY in ALF RDS CODAN 9001 INMARSAT A MIL188 110A B 16Tone 39Tone MIL 188 141B STANAG 4285 4415 4529 RAW replaced by HEX in CIS36 50 CIS50 50 GW FSK GW PSK VISEL STANAG4529 default center frequency changed to 1700 Hz W CODE added WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 General Information e 3 Version Date Changes Code meter added i 22 Jan 2009 14 Mai 2009 4 e General Information New protocols SAT B C TFC Robust Packet Radio ORBCOMM Improvements and modifications User Manual split into a W CODE and W 61 Manual FAX and Modem added SAT AERO improved User defined alphabets added Sample Rate Fine tuning added New protocols FAX G3 V 17 FAX G3 V 27ter FAX G3 V 29 FAX G3 V34hdx V 21 BELL103 V 22 V 22bis BELL212A V 23 V 26 V 26bis V 32 V 32bis V 34 V 90 V 92 ALE 400 added Alternative Modes for CODAN 9001 W CODAN 9001 CLOVER 2 W CLOVER 2 and CLOVER 2000 W CLOVER 2000 Improvements and modifications Modems modes
403. odulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help FSK Code Check DIR Baudrate 1200 00 POCSAG Auto Noise Gate Mode Enabled 16 05 16 Oeil amp amp WH Mode Analysis gt tf S omua 2 e 4865 Hz m 4865Hz H mmm 2 W CODE Code Check FLEX GOLAY MOBITEX 8000 PACKET 9600 Mode POCSAG Demodulator FFSK Shift 8110 Hz Offset 10000 Hz Input AF LEFT _ _ _ O_O O C E Sl gt After starting the FSK code check the frequency shift center frequency and the baud rate are de termined The values of these parameters are displayed in the appropriate fields after the meas urement has completed gt The software then proceeds with code and system analysis The incoming bit stream is tested and compared against known modes gt The name of each identified system is displayed in the output window An identified system may be immediately started by double clicking the system in the output window for instance double clicking ACARS in the figure above will interrupt FSK code checking and immediately start ACARS gt The Hits Checks will show you how often during checking a mode was successfully determined If multiple modes are listed this will indicate which mode should be tried gt Ifa mode is uniquely identified the software will switch to the identified mode and decoding is ini tiated with the measured values of mode baud rate shift and ce
404. of the time of capture of the first sample in the chunk block in microsecond resolution It is stored as the number of microseconds since beginning of the epoch i e 1st January 1970 midnight awlQData Float32 IQ pairs of float32 numbers length of IQ data array WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 WAVECOM Data Formats e 307 Single channel IQ Packing SIQP chunk The information in this chunk is required to parse the data in the SSIQ chunk Element Type Description iIsIQPacked int32 Value 1 for IQ ordering and value O for QI ordering For example a val ue of 1 will indicate that the first sample in the element awIQData of a SSIQ chunk is an I sample Sample Rate SR__ chunk Element Type Description ISampleRate_uHz The number of samples per second that are being recorded by this channel BandWidth BW__ chunk The bandwidth centred about the centre frequency If the bandwidth is not centred about the centre fre quency use the BWOF chunk instead Element Type Description IBandwidth_uHz The bandwidth of the signal in micro Hertz Centre Frequency CF__ chunk Element Type Description ICentrFrequency_uHz The centre frequency of the signal in micro Hertz dB Full Scale dBFS chunk Element Type Description fFullScaleLevel_dBm float32 The analogue input level to the ADC in dBm which will produce maxi mum full scale digital samples for the current IQ time data
405. of the shift characters 36 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Special alphabets e g Chinese comprise only letters so forcing a shift into lower case mode may be an advantage Letters Only Selecting this function may also be advantageous when searching for a bit in version pattern as the pattern may be more easily recognized In weather code transmissions five figure groups are used in this case one may force a shift into upper case Figures Only The Unshift on Space UOS function forces a shift into lower case after a space character has been re ceived In this manner the readability of the transmission may be enhanced under poor conditions weak Signals or interference Compared to the Letters Only mode UOS has the advantage that single upper case characters like peri ods full stops and commas are correctly printed The drawback is that the software will incorrectly shift to lower case when receiving figure groups separated by space characters Message Type These are mode specific parameters e Message Type Sync mode 11 3 ASCII 0 BIN o 10 3 ASCII Cancel EAU lt lt 3 ASCII Data format Number of data bits 7 Number of stop bits al Parity bit NONE yv Bit sequence order LSB MSB Data polarity 0 NOR Display Display format TTAS ASCI v Auto Detect Stat Idle 0 Canes a Message Type is used to apply t
406. oftware then proceeds with code and system analysis The incoming bit stream is tested and com pared against known PSK modes 86 e Analysis Tools WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 The name of each identified system is displayed in the output window An identified system may be imme diately started by double clicking the system in the output window for instance double clicking PSK 31 in the figure above will interrupt PSK code checking and immediately start PSK 31 Hits Checks shows how many times a mode was successfully identified during the code check If multiple modes are listed the mode with most hits should be tried first Some modes are very difficult to distinguish especially when the system is in idle mode MIL STANAG Code Check The MIL STANAG code check analysis tool is used to determine whether a signal is one of the following MIL STANAG and related transmission modes gt HF ACARS MIL 188 110A MIL 188 110B MIL 188 141B STANAG 4285 gt STANAG 4529 STANAG 4415 is a sub mode of MIL 188 110A and is detected as this mode STANAG 4481 is a sub mode of STANAG 4285 and is detected as this mode This analysis feature can be started from the HF Modes Analysis MIL STANAG Code Check menu from the Analysis Selector The center frequency can be set by the user The default value for the code check is 1800 Hz as shown in the user interface The center frequency of HF ACARS 1440 Hz can be selected fr
407. ol channel segment transmitted between every data segment has a known PSK pattern Its purpose is to keep the demodulator mainly the equaliz er on track in spite of adverse propagation conditions during the HF transmission After the 176 symbol data probe segment another frame beginning with the same 80 symbol preamble follows immediately This frame structure makes the synchronization of the demodulator in the mid of the transmission very easy The STANAG 4285 decoder processes all the above configurations This should be set manually in the Frame Format menu Generally STANAG 4285 transmits the user data in binary mode e it does not care what type of binary data is transmitted This should be defined by the higher layer using the STANAG 4285 mode For this reason the decoder displays the user data in BINARY HEX ASCII ASYNC ASCII ASYNC 7 Data bits and No Stop bit or ASCII SYNC format selected from Options Message Type The decoder stops displaying data after the EOM bit pattern is received In the HEX display mode the decoded binary data is just display as it is MSB first In ASCII ASYNC mode the bit stream is searched with ASCII ASYNC structure i e one start bit 0 8 data bits and at least one stop bit 1 The 8 data bits are LSB first In addition to the EOM pattern the display will stop if more than 300 NULL characters are received or if the asynchronous data structure is vi olated more than 80 times In ASCII AS
408. olarity USB or LSB sidebands is automatically detected Full duplex systems transmit the RQ character after having detected an erroneous character or in the presence of excessive signal distortions The remote station subsequently repeats the last three characters preceded by the RQ character TO maintain synchronization between the two stations both transmitters operate continuously and send the idle bit pattern if no traffic data is transmitted ASCII The ASCII code which is internationally adapted as the CCITT ITA 5 alphabet is used in all kinds of data transfer of information between computers or computer based equipment Only the 7 bit values O 127 are internationally defined and standardized For asynchronous transmissions the code consists of a start bit 7 or 8 data bits one parity bit optional and 1 or 2 stop bits Parameter Value Frequency range Operation modes Symbol rate 50 75 100 110 150 180 200 300 and 600 Bd variable 50 1200 Bd Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 117 Parameter Value Input format s AF IF Additional Info ITA 5 For ASCII mode standard baud rates from 110 to 300 Baud are available Non standard baud rates may be selected using the Baudrate menu item The parity bit allows error detection The number of 1 s is counted If an odd number is found and parity has been defined as ODD then the parity
409. old Time adjusts the number of points displayed on the screen Increasing the hold time increases the amount of time a dot will remain in the image before being overwritten by a new value Demodulator Mode If you select IQ as the demodulator the signal is not demodulated at all Instead the phase of the signal is visually compared with a reference signal Providing the correct reference signal is selected this will result in a phase display that provides an indication of the type of PSK or PAM signal The points will trace the path taken as the signal phase change At the nominal signal mapping points there is normally an ac cumulation of data points providing a visual clue to the overall signal mapping Multi channel DPSK signals often have a very narrow channel signal bandwidth This results in the phase of the signal never remaining constant and so the accumulation of signal points in the phase plane is not visible To quantify such signals use the IQ demodulator mode lt lt Decrease lt gt Increase gt gt The frequency of the reference signal is set using the Center option Note that if the reference frequency is incorrect the display rotates at a rate that is the difference between the reference frequency and the true carrier frequency of the signal When adjusting the reference signal the changes are live This means that changes you make immediately take effect and the resulting change in the phas
410. om a list After the cen ter frequency is set the code check searches for the mode within a range of 100 Hz of the center fre quency Although HF ACARS may have a center frequency of 1440 Hz it can also be detected when the code check is set with center 1800 Hz a _ WAVECOM W CODE W CODE Code Check Card 1 Br a S o E mess File HF Modes WHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help MIL STANAG Code Check HF INV Auto Confidence 0 17 34 01 Oa amp amp M 2 Mode Analysis y cL ta rx mAa 2 Ree 150H2 88 150H2 Em w W CODE Code Check Card1 HF ACARS MIL 188 110A MIL 188 110B MIL 188 141B STANAG 4285 STANAG 4529 Signal 1 HF ACARS at center 1440 Hz confidence 95 Hits Checks Misc 100 00 Center 1440 Ez Confidence Demodulator 1Q PB Bandwidth 4000 Hz Center 1440 Hz Offset 0 Hz Input AF LEFT NUM Apart from HF ACARS which has a baud rate of 1800 all other MIL and STANAG modes operate at 2400 baud However the code check can automatically determine modes with different baud rates After the code check has determined a mode the mode name is displayed in the text window The confi dence parameter shows how good the match is the highest possible value being 100 When confidence WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Analysis Tools e 87 is greater than 90 the code check automatically swi
411. ommon wildcard character is the asterisk AS an example if you request a listing of TXT files in a particular applica tion you would see a list of all files ending with the extension TXT WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Glossary of Terms e 341 WINDOWS Microsoft WINDOWS Operating System Word wrap The automatic continuation of text from the end of one line to the beginning of the next so that you don t have to press the Enter key at the end of each line you type If word wrap is set off the text you type may extend beyond the edge of the window 342 e Glossary of Terms WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Index A About 298 About W CODE 59 ACARS 107 Adding a shortcut to an existing installation 298 Additional Functions 294 AES Identification 281 AIS 109 Alarm Monitor 298 ALE 400 110 ALF RDS 111 ALIS 111 ALIS 2 112 Alphabet 34 Alphabets Details 318 AMSAT P3D 113 Analysis Tools 71 Antenna installation 329 APCO 25 113 Appendix 318 APPLICATION NOTES 306 ARQ6 90 and ARQ6 98 114 ARQ E 114 ARQ E3 115 ARQ M2 342 and ARQ M2 242 116 ARQ M4 342 and ARQ M4 242 116 ARQ N 117 ASCII 117 ASK Amplitude Shift Keying 105 ATIS 118 AUM 13 119 Auto 41 Autocorrelation 90 AUTOSPEC 119 B BACKGROUND 305 BandWidth BW__ chunk 308 Bandwidth efficient Modulation 106 BAUDOT 120 Baudrate 43 BIIS 121 Bit Correlation 91 Bit Inversion Mask 34
412. omputers to the same local network refer to License System Software and Options on page 294 Software Uninstall In certain situations e g when updating the application it is necessary to uninstall the software Use the following commands Windows 7 gt Click on Start go to Click on Start go to the Click on Start and open the the Computers menu Settings menu and open Control Panel and click the Unin Control Panel stall or change a program button Select the Add Remove Programs icon Select the Programs icon Select Programs and Fea gt Select WAVECOM W tures Select Install Uninstall Choose WAVECOM W xx Choose WAVECOM W from the list XX from the list Click Add Remove XX from the list gt Click Uninstall Click Uninstall in the menu The application has now been removed from the PC it is possible however that the shortcut icons may have to be removed manually WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Setup e 17 First start W CODE First Start v After the software and the CmStick have been successfully installed the decoder program can be started either from the Windows Start menu or by double clicking the program icon on your desk top v Proper operation of the decoder is indicated by the WAVECOM Server Control icon in the Windows system tray If the traffic light in the icon is green then the server is operating normally You may also move the mouse over the ico
413. on Status Bar Fields Double clicking various status bar fields will activate the corresponding dialog boxes This facilitates the use of the decoder software A double click on the shift field baud rate field frequency shift field etc of the demodulator status bar opens the corresponding dialog boxes Selecting a field will not terminate the active mode As far as possible changed values will be immediately used without interrupting data acquisition SAT Frequency Tuning Bar The SAT Frequency Tuning Bar simplifies frequency selection for the satellite modes In Receiver and Satellite Settings the user has the ability to store the center frequency of the down converter The SAT Frequency Tuning Bar box displays a number of inputs and controls Frequency E MMO 12610 YONA ste 5000 tenor enfe Jens 3609280000 tama1 K Frequency Frequency fil GPT E ayeye User entry field for the real frequency In modes with automatic frequency setting the automatically set frequency is shown Step 5000 y Spinner to increase or decrease the frequency List box to select the frequency step for the spinner Memory Retrieve a frequency from the selected memory entry t Store the current frequency to memory You will be prompted for a name The current frequency will be replaced by the new fre quency Delete the contents of the selected memory position Edit the name of the memory entry 1541480000 Prov
414. on medium more efficiently the formatted data is further processed through compression As we saw above some codes e g the Morse code inherently has the ability by statistical observation of the source data to reduce redundancy Statistical reduction is also the basis for Huffman coding used in fax communication where the most frequently occurring bit combinations are transformed into symbols having the lowest number of bits Huffman coding is thus an example of variable length coding The degree of compression achievable the compression ratio is related to the properties of the data to be compressed Other examples of compression codes are ARJ Lempel Ziv JPEG and MPEG the later ones used for video voice and music compression PACTOR and G TOR are examples of the use of redundancy removal source coding for radio communica tion 1 O i 1 D 1 0O 1 1 0 I I l I l NRZ M a Lii M LOT ULI d Ii A y I l I l I l IIl I l I l Unipolar RZ A i nu Miller he i gt l i l Iil III y bruni III i Iil IIl l i i Vi 1 LOA 11 V l E 1 1 TN i O NN NN 0 T 2T 3T 47 0 T 27T 37T 47 Baseband waveforms can be formatted in various ways The most common method is called Non Return To Zero NRZ L meaning that the bits will have one of two voltage levels NRZ M also called differen tial encoding uses a change in level for a logical one and no change for a logical 0 NRZ S is comple mentary to NRZ M Unipolar RZ represents a lo
415. on mode devised from Special Communica tions Systems GmbH amp Co KG It is optimized for the deployment in the short wave band To accommo date the characteristics of this frequency range for example fading and multipath propagation a eight carrier OFDM was used Parameter VENTE Dependent on the speed level r200 or r600 every carrier is DBPSK or DQPSK at a rate of 50 Bd modulat ed Just like in PACKET RADIO the AX 25 protocol comes into operation The decoder module detects the speed level and the size of the transmitted packet automatically and shows the result The payload of one packet can be up to 256 Byte The real length of one data packed depends on the amount of data to be send There are 25 different packages One for connect disconnect and respectively 12 for the two speed levels with their variable packet length To make the transmission as robust as possible there are several modifications applied onto the AX 25 data stream before the transmission The call signs are compressed with a special algorithm the data stream is scrambled redundancy is added and it is interleaved over the full frame length 212 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 The decoder output is divided in signaling information call signs with SSIDs package identifier and AX 25 control word and data It is possible to represent the data as ITA5 US and HEX Further description to the signaling information can be
416. on of the messages split into its meaningful parts A message contains a preamble sync word a data header part an alert tone signal if applicable a voice message part and an end of message part The data part format is as follows ZCZC ORG EEE PSSCCC PSSCCC TTTT JJJHHMM LLLLLLLL ZCZC Start of message header block code ORG Originator header block code EEE Event header block code PSSCCC Geographical area header block code TTTT Purge time header code block JJJHHMM Original dissemination time header block Julian date UTC LLLLLLLL Message originator header block The area code PSSCCC is divided into state county and subpart code the dissemination date is divided into day hour and minute If the message originator LLLLLLLL is a NWS office the ICAO location identifiers are used e g KDTX NWS If the message is a re broadcast the call sign of the broadcast station is used e g KFAB AM or WDAF FM ORG Originator Codes Event Code Broadcast station or cable system EAS Civil authorities CIV National Weather System or Meteorological Service of Canada WXR EEE EAS Event Codes Event Code Event Code EAN Tw EAT TSA NIC Tsw NeT WSA NAT wsw NNN NIC NST AVA Bzw au CFA CAE cew cow 190 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 High Wind Warning Hazardous Materials Warning Tornado Warning Tropical Storm Watch Transmitter Primary On T Civil Emergency Message
417. on system with ARQ and FEC broadcast modus It uses Reed Solomon RS coding to achieve a remarkable performance even under poor HF propagation conditions Parameter Value Operation modes Half duplex ARQ Modulation PSK2A PSK4A PSK8A PSK16A ASK2PSK8 ASK4PSK16 2DPSK2A 4 tones Data is modulated onto four tones spaced 125 Hz The modulation rate of each tone is 31 25 Baud The Supported modulation techniques include binary phase shift keying PSK2A quaternary PSK PSK4A 8 PSK PSK8A 16 PSK PSK16A binary amplitude shift keying combined with 8 PSK ASK2PSK8 quater nary ASK combined with 16 PSK ASK4PSK16 and two channel diversity binary PSK 2DPSK2A CLOVER 2 frame includes CCB Clover Control Block and data block with variable lengths and modula tions Each data block is displayed immediately after receiving The decoder status indicates TRAFFIC When a CCB is received the decoder status switches to IDLE The content in a CCB is displayed only when call sign or text is available The call sign is displayed in the status line and the short text is dis played in the main window RS coding is utilized to correct transmission errors Four coding levels called RS Efficiency are specified which allow for more or less error correction within a block The percentages in the following list of coding 132 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 levels relate the number of inf
418. one Assignment of PICCOLO MK6 and PICCOLO MK12 PICCOLO MK12 ITA ve oT 7 8 g 10 41 a 4 2 3 4 5 5 Tone Ho Frq Hz o 20 q 60 20 100 120 140 160 150 00 220 f Center Tuning 1700 Hz The decoder or receiver must be tuned to obtain the midpoint between tones 5 and 6 as the center fre quency In the case of IDLE standby transmissions these two tones are keyed at a rate of 100 ms and tuning becomes quite simple Decoding of PICCOLO and COQUELET systems requires receivers with high frequency stability Thus state of the art receivers using PLL or DDS frequency synthesis are well suited for the reception of these sys tems The software also provides an AFC Automatic Frequency Control function Frequency deviations are con tinuously monitored by the software and automatic correction is introduced The control range is 5 HZ The AFC function may be enabled disabled using the Demodulator menu The MFSK demodulator is intended for use with MFSK systems This mode may be selected in the De modulator menu via the Mode item The center frequency should be set to approximately 1700 HZ One manufacturer has doubled the data transfer rate and shortened the tone duration to 2 x 25 ms this is equivalent to a transfer rate of approximately 150 Baud Baudot with 7 5 bit codeword The standby tones were also changed but otherwise the systems are identical Almost all transmissions in PICCOLO MK6 and PICCOLO MK12 are encrypted However some
419. ops displaying data after the EOM sequence is received and goes to Sync state and resyn chronizes In Options Frame Format the user data rate and interleaver length can be set In Options Diversity a value between Time Frequency and Frequency Only diversity can be select ed The value must be set correctly for all user data rates except 2400 and 1200 bps In Options Message Type all the different character lengths and number of extracted data bits can be Set Tuning the decoder The Polarity of the decoder should be set according to the signal When the received signal is in NOR po larity USB the Doppler frequency should be tuned to 393 75 Hz using the Offset all the 39 tones are at the right side of the Doppler tone when the signal is in INV polarity LSB the Doppler frequency should be tuned to 3206 25 Hz using the Offset with all the 39 tones at the left side of it The correct decoding process is indicated by a Confidence value with 100 for a 100 correctly decoded message However finally getting a useful data output can only be achieved by selecting the proper mes Sage type frame format user data rate interleaver diversity and signal center MIL 188 110A MIL 188 110A Serial single tone is one of the most popularly used modes in long haul HF data modems The mode is specified by the US Department of Defense DoD in the Military Standard Interoperability and Performance Standards for Data Modems 30 Sept 1991
420. or data transmis sion which uses acknowledgements and requests to achieve reliable data transmission over an unreliable service An acknowledgement is a message sent by the receiver to the transmitter to indicate that it has correctly received a data frame or packet A request is a message sent by the receiver to the transmitter to indicate that the sender has to re transmit the frame packet if the sender does not receive an acknowledgement before a timeout it usually re transmits the frame packet until it receives an acknowl edgement or exceeds a predefined number of re transmissions ASCII An acronym for American Standard Code for Information Interchange pronounced ASK ee It is a code in which the numbers from O to 127 stand for letters numbers punctuation marks and other characters ASCII code is standardized to facilitate transmitting text between computers or between a computer and a peripheral device Baud rate The speed in a 2FSK transmission The duration of a bit is 1 Baud At 50 Baud a bit is 20ms long WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Glossary of Terms e 333 The speed is given as the channel speed in Bauds For two level modulation types this equals the raw user bit rate for four level s the bit rate is doubled for eight levels it is tripled etc Broadcast Public or private radio station transmitting music news etc Buffer A temporary holding area in the computer s memory where information c
421. or the context menu see FFT Sonagram Context Menu on page 63 It is possible to remove the tuning FFT or Sonagram in the View Menu Tuning PSK Signals 72 e Analysis Tools WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 The upper and lower frequency boundaries of the signal is selected with the right and left cursor With the center cursor the center frequency may be set more precisely The precision of the center frequency is very important and directly influences the performance of the decoder After every change the center frequency is automatically updated and the bandwidth of the signal is set according to the received mode Options can be set using the right mouse button or the context menu see FFT Sonagram Context Menu on page 63 It is possible to remove the tuning FFT or Sonagram in the View Menu FFT and Sonagram This analysis tool combines real time FFT and sonagram analysis modes _WAVECOM W CODE FFT amp Sonagra rd 4 Y File HF Modes WHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Fax amp Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help FFT amp Sonagram HF Window Hannin Peak Hold Off Period 50 ms Auto g 0a dt SS 44 Mode Analysis y tt te Ama 2 ee Ye 2 FFT amp Sonagram Card 4 W CLOUD Time se 12 36 43 795 o E Pl A 12 36 47 977 12 36 56 426 Dem odulator FFT Bandwidth 4000 Hz Center 1700 Hz
422. or the short interleaver or 20 36 720 bits for the long interleaver A zero interleaver setting is usually not selected because through interleaving the effect of short term fading and burst noise can be mitigated The coding rate of FEC is 1 2 i e after encoding the data rate is 150 bps Each two bits are then mapped to a 32 bit Walsh sequence thus yielding the 75 32 2400 Bd symbol rate At the end of transmission a certain bit pattern in hexadecimal notation 4B65A5B2 MSB first is sent to mark the end of message EOM The EOM sequence is followed by the flush bits which are for the FEC coder flushing and for the complete transmission of the remainder of the interleaver matrix data block Therefore both the EOM sequence and the flush bits are treated as normal user data bits and passed to the last interleaver block gt Preamble 0 6 s or 4 8 s gt Interleaver 1 gt Interleaver 2 P a sis gt Interleaver N including EOM amp flush bits Besides the FEC and interleaver used in this mode a special component the tone excision module is used to pre process the waveform so that a more stringent decoding performance can be reached than is the case for the MIL 188 110A mode even for a severely degraded HF radio link The tone excision mod ule mainly adaptively eliminates interfering tones which may occur during the transmission 230 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 As in th
423. ormation symbols user data to the block length a block comprises user data and parity check symbols gt ROBUST 60 gt NORMAL 75 gt FAST 90 gt OFF 100 i e no error correction The level of RS Efficiency is automatically detected by the demodulator Important parameters of a data block or a CCB are displayed in the decoder status bar The modulation is displayed in Format the block length and RS code efficiency are displayed in RS Code The display Car rier shows the center frequency of the current block after tracking Using Options CRC Table a certain CRC mask can be defined see CRC Table on page 34 The Options Display Mode provides the options to display All Frames or Error free Frames which means frames with the correct CRC check CLOVER 2000 CLOVER 2000 is an adaptive modulation system with ARQ that uses Reed Solomon RS coding to achieve a remarkable performance even under worst HF propagation conditions Data are modulated onto eight tones spaced 250 Hz The modulation rate of each tone is 62 5 Bd The supported modulation techniques include binary phase shift keying PSK2A quaternary PSK PSK4A 8 PSK PSK8A 16 PSK PSK16A binary amplitude shift keying combined with 8 PSK ASK2PSK8 quaternary ASK combined with 16 PSK ASK4PSK16 and two channel diversity binary PSK 2DPSK2A Parameter Operation modes modes Half duplex ARQ Modulation PSK2A PSK4A PSK8A PSK16A ASK2PSK8 ASK4PSK16 2
424. orrect formatting is ensured WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Classifier Optional e 267 The current version of the CCC is only available for HF modes This should be kept in mind when adding new records to the data base CCC Editor GUI The main window of the CCC Editor is shown below with an open data table and a table record for ARQ M2 242 opened in the Signal Parameters Editor window CCC Table 20101129 xml CCC Editor X File Edit View Help Name Decoder Modulation Subcarrier Baud Symbol Shift Bandwidth No of Tones No of Carriers Spacing Pilot Frequency CodecheckCo ITU Designator Comments ALE 400 ale 400 MFSK 50 50 8 3 ALF RDS alf rds PSK 2 1187 5 8 ALIS alis FSK 228 66 5 ALIS 2 alis 2 MFSK 240 3 ARQ E arq e FSK 46 15 5 ARQ E arq e FSK 48 2 ARQ E arq e FSK 72 5 ARQ E arq e FSK 75 Signal Parameters Editor 5 ARQ E anye FSK 85 7 Editsignal gt FSK MFSK PSK gt OFDM 3 ARQ E arq e FSK 96 5 ARQ E arq e FSK 96 5 Name ARQ M2 242 Baud Rate ARQ E arq e FSK 184 6 5 ARQ E arg e FSK 200 Decoder arg m2 242 Shift 2 ARQ E arq e FSK 288 5 ARQ E3 arq e3 FSK 50 Modulation FSk Bandwidth 5 ARQ E3 arq e3 FSK 72 5 ARQ E3 anpes FSK 96 Codecheck Count 3 5 ARQ B arq FSK 192 7 Recognition disabled No of Channels 4 ARQ E3 arq e3 FSK 200 5 ARQ E arq e3 FSK 48 ITU Designator deso met 2 ARQ E3 arq e3 FSK 100 2 ARQ E3 arq e3 FSK 288 Comments Spacing
425. ot use DQPSK modulation Tuning a PSK 63F and PSK 125F Signal After launching the mode the first step is to look for a valid PSK 63F or PSK 125F signal in the spectrum It is possible that within a bandwidth of 4 kHz more than on station is working The bandwidth of the spectrum can be switched between 500 Hz 1000 Hz 4000 Hz and 24000 Hz After that with the left cursor the lower limit and with the right cursor the upper boundary of the signal may be selected Using the center cursor the center frequency may be more precisely set The adjustment pre cision of the center frequency is very important and directly influences the performance of the decoding To ensure that the system can handle drifting signals or a coarsely adjusted center frequency AFC may be enabled in the Demodulator menu The carrier tracking function is now activated If the deviation be tween the tracked and the adjusted center frequency is too large the center frequency should be correct ed Carrier tracking only works over a range of DBPSK center frequency 8 Hz Hence adjustment of the center frequency must be accurate In contrast to PSK 31 this mode does not use DQPSK modulation PSK AM PSK AM is a very narrow band and reliable amateur mode developed by F6CTE The aim of this experi mental slow mode is to allow chat communication between hams Parameter Value Modulation DBPSK Additional Inf PSK AM is similar to PSK 31 but uses its own fixed len
426. otation or the order confirmation of WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG Customer orders are binding only if WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG has confirmed them in writing WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Appendix e 329 Prices The list prices are net and exclude VAT shipping and packing costs unless otherwise agreed WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG reserves the right to adapt its prices to offset cost increases e g salaries material costs and exchange rate fluctuations Delivery time The delivery time is specified in the confirmation of order contract The delivery time may be extended due to unforeseen circumstances such as acts of God epidemics earthquake etc war as well as deliv ery delays from our material suppliers Dispatch The method of dispatch may be selected by the customer Without specific shipping instructions from the customer we reserve us the right to arrange the dispatch by any forwarder courier of our choice Any complaints regarding damage delays or loss must be forwarded to WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG in written form within 48h from the receipt of the goods Complaints of suspected bad packing must be forwarded to WAVECOM on the date of receipt Return of goods The return of defect goods requires written approval of WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG before the dispatch For a return during the warranty period the costs of the shipping the item s back to the customer will be paid by WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG The charges for the s
427. pagation conditions prevail the system will switch to medium block length 9 characters or to long blocks 22 characters In case of interference the block length is automatically reduced The block length is displayed on the status line as either short middle or long Longer block lengths effectively increase the data transfer rate The equivalent Baudot rates are 75 and 100 Bd for medium and long block lengths respectively WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 235 3 char pause a char pause 3 char pause a char pause short 210 m 240 me 210 ms 240 m 210 me 240 mz 210 me 240 me 9 characters pause 9 characters pause middle 650 ms 270 ms 650 ms 0 ms 22 Charaters Pause long 1540 me 260 ms The illustration depicts the protocol of data transmission for the SHORT MEDIUM and LONG block types Given this timing scheme the two stations can maintain the data link even after losing block length syn chronization by re transmitting the change over commands These consist of the IDLE A IDLE B and other characters but are always three characters long In some RQ cycles SWED ARQ makes use of bit center keying and maintains a request counter of cycles deviating from the 3 4 mark space ratio The SWED ARQ mode may be started by selecting a baud rate If the transmission channel is subject to very strong interference the block length change over might be lost By reselecting the baud rate re synchroniz
428. porting System therefore HFDL is also known as HF ACARS Parameter Value Signal source s AF IF The protocols are compatible with the OSI model and enable the ground stations and avionics systems on aircraft to communicate with each other in a bit oriented message format HF Data Link employs M ary Phase Shift Keying M PSK to modulate a carrier centered at RF 1440 Hz where RF is the nominal HF carrier frequency The carrier is modulated with 1800 symbols per second Baud However the rate at which user data is transmitted can be selected to be 300 600 1200 or 1800 bps HFDL air ground protocols employ a slotted Time Division Multiple Access TDMA protocol Every frame has duration of 32 seconds and is divided into 13 slots The first slot is called a Squitter which carries various types of information including slot acknowledgement and assignment codes The next 12 slots of a frame are called Medium access Protocol Data Units MPDU They are used by air crafts and ground stations to exchange different kinds of data e g aircraft logon logoff requests aircraft 166 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 position frequency assignment etc Each MPDU contains several Link Protocol Data Units LPDU which may consist of Basic Data Units BDU Each slot Squitter or MPDU has the same structure Parameter Value Remarks 1440 Hz single tone Known BPSK symbols for synchronization
429. quent MPT messages monitored on the Forward Control Channel transmitted by the TSC The most common message is ALH a general invitation to transmit any single codeword message ALH P 42 11 5461 CH 3 WT 6 M 0 N 4 Invitation to all mobile units belonging to group 42 5461 P 42 11 5461 to transmit The message is sent on control channel 3 CH 3 the TSC responses may be delayed by 6 slots WT 6 no subdivision of the radio population is enabled M 0 and the next frame contains 4 random access timeslots N 4 A radio unit calls another unit with the same prefix AHY P 79 11 760 12 770 D 0 P 0 CHK 1 E 0 AD 0 General availability check on the called D 0 unit 760 11 760 sent before allocating a traffic channel The TSC is checking if the called unit is ready for a data call CHK 1 The calling party 770 12 770 is requesting a non emergency transaction No data codeword AD 0 is appended to this AHY message GTC P 79 11 760 CH 427 12 770 N 0 Calling unit 770 and called unit 760 are directed to proceed with traffic on channel 427 CH 427 The next frame contains no timeslots N 0 A broadcast message BCAST SYSDEF 5 SYS 20265 CH 520 SPARE 0 RSVD 00 ADJ 2 Option for non active radio units to determine the signal strength SYSDEF 5 at the following time slice on control channel 520 CH 520 of system 20265 SYS 20265 having local serial number 2 ADJ 2 To select monitoring either the base station Fixed or the Mobiles us
430. quisition is atomatically restarted The selection of baud rate frequency shift or center frequency is done by clicking on the status bar fields or using the Demodulator menu If the FSK code check cannot identify a mode the code check should be repeated Data acquisition is con tinuously performed as a background task Heavy fading or other disturbances during data acquisition may prevent the identification of a mode You can also restart data acquisition by pressing the Resync button The 1 5 stop elements used in many Baudot transmissions will often prevent the correct determination of the signal baud rate or the baud rate will be calculated as twice its actual value Distorted stop elements may also lead to completely erroneous baud rate calculations To prevent this malfunction measurements of Baudot transmissions take place using the standard speeds of 45 45 50 75 100 150 and 180 Baud in addition to the measured baud rate 24 WAVECOM W CODE W CODE Code Check Card 1 M Sox File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help FSK Code Check HF Baudrate 100 00 50 00 STANAG 5065 FSK Progress 600 Auto Scan Mode Fast Scan 15 21 52 Oeil amp amp A F Mode Analysis v u g S amp S A MB 2 Pe tte 270H2 I D 70Hz o enn A W CODE Code Check Card 1 O E3 ASCII 9 BITS ASCII 10 BITS ASCII 11 BITS BAUDOT ITA 2 CIS 11 CIS 36 50 NOR
431. r eventual successful signal determination or decoding The availability of more or less complex processes allows the user to select the process which is best suit ed to his purposes The process selected is shown in the status line Process Steps Only classification is performed but no decoding Classification and table check are performed but no decoding Classification table check and code check are performed but no decoding ed valid detector was found Classification table check and code check are performed and finally the signal is decoded if a mode with an associated valid detector was found Classifier Modulation Settings GE Classification and table check are performed and finally the signal is decoded if a mode with an associat Classifier Modulation Settings Modulation type FSK FFB Cw OFDM 2 PSK 4 PSE 16 PSK OOPSK Voice All Classifier options Fl Continuous Mode Cycle Mode Data Acquisition Mode Previous Samples Sample Time 225 ka OFDM Mode Partial Analysis T 30 Baud CW Morse Protection These settings control the behavior of the classifier See the section on Classifier Code Check HF CCC on page 255 for details Note that the Refresh List option is not available when the classifier is used with the CCC 264 e Classifier Optional WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Code Check Settings Code Check Settings General Code Check timeout
432. r in serial transmission However real time or high volume data systems like digitized secure voice computer network access and image or file transfer often uses parallel transmission The serial code words are fed to a serial to parallel converter and then to the sub carrier modulators of a FDM Modulation Modulation is the process whereby the digital baseband signal or waveform is superimposed onto a carrier The carrier may be manipulated in amplitude frequency and phase The most frequently used modulation techniques are 2FSK using two frequencies MFSK with four or more tones and differential phase modulation methods such as 2DPSK 4DPSK 8DPSK or 16DPSK On satellite links phase modulation methods such as BPSK or QPSK are used Other modulation types include AM FM or phase sub carrier modulation of an FM AM or phase shift main carrier Modulation methods which directly manipulate the carrier may be decoded using the receiver IF output or for smaller shifts in the case of FSK also the AF output In addition many VHF UHF receivers also have a direct discriminator output which may be used In contrast modulation methods using sub carrier modulation must be decoded using the receiver AF out put Decoding indirect modes can only take place using the receiver AF output The receiver serves as a 104 e Fundamentals of Radio Data TransmissionWAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 demodulator for the FM or AM carrier whil
433. r may be bit inverted The original character and the repeated character are then compared at the IRS SI FEC and SITOR B are ex amples of this type of code One code type has been successful in particular that is the convolutional code in which the value of the parity bits depends of the values of a number of preceding data bits The data bits are shifted through a shift register with taps The output of the taps is EXORed to form the value of the parity bits After con volution the bits are interleaved to further improve noise immunity FEC A uses this method Convolution al coding and the related Viterbi decoding have found widespread use in satellite communication Modern communication systems often utilize a combination of coding schemes to obtain higher invulnera bility against errors at a lower complexity level Thus in satellite communication codes are concatenat ed that is to say a convolutional inner code towards the modulator is concatenated with a Reed Solomon outer code with an interleaver inserted in between Recent research has refined the concate nated coding and added an iterative decoding algorithm to achieve what is called turbo coding Further research has led to the discovery of so called Low Density Parity Codes LDPC the use of which has ena bled communicators to come very close to the theoretical bandwidth limit of a communication channel Modern technology has enabled more sophisticated approaches to combat the cha
434. racter values in the custom Alphabet list with O Press Refresh to reload all characters of the current font and update the display This feature is useful when the font has been changed Pressing Hex View to display the hex value for all characters otherwise decimal values are used When Show All is enabled the positions of undefined characters are displayed in the Font char acter table gt Press the OK button to close the window Recent changes are not saved if the latest changes have to be saved press the Save button before pressing OK SR Fine Tuning Sound card sampling frequency accuracy is much more critical for sophisticated digital modes compared to the simple BAUDOT or SITOR modes The built in SR Fine Tuning feature can be used to correct errors that are introduced by an inaccurate soundcard sampling frequency the tolerance of soundcards can be a few hundred parts per million si Sample Rate Fine Tuning Fine Tuning Value 1 000000 Step 0 000001 Reset to 1 SR Calibration To check the error of you soundcard use analysis software that is able to calculate the deviation of the sample rate in ppm Try to avoid sound cards that are completely out of tolerance When W CODE uses low cost sound cards as a signal source sampling frequency errors will most likely occur For commonly available sound cards the sampling frequency may vary up to one percent of the nominal value This behavior p
435. rameter Value Operation modes Duplex ARQ Modulation MFSK 36 Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF CIS 36 is operating with Symbol rates of 10 20 or 40 Bd which is equivalent to tone duration of 100 50 or 25 ms Transmissions in CIS 36 are mostly in Russian using an ITA 2 alphabet CIS 36 is a full duplex mode with two transmission frequencies but can also be used in simplex mode CIS 36 is based on the older PICCOLO MK1 system However the signal is not symmetric and uses three frequency groups with 10 11 and 11 frequencies The tone spacing is 40 Hz The theoretical bandwidth is 1400Hz In on line crypto traffic mode the control tones 1 12 24 and 36 are rarely sent so between the three frequency groups a spacing of 80 Hz seems to appear The decoder shows the shift cursors at the tone position 2 and 35 resulting in a 1320 Hz shift The 10 Bd variant is used for manually transmitted operator messages and is mostly unencrypted The au tomatic switching of the tone length is initialized by control sequences When message traffic has to be sent the system switches to 20 or 40 Bd This part is either coded or online encrypted in almost every transmission Special control sequences are used for transmission con trol call set up and clearance CIS 36 also has SELCAL and link establishment features CIS 36 50 CIS 36 50 also known as BEE 36 or T600 is a synchronous system Usually a 36 Bd i
436. ransmission re CC WAVECOM Alarm Monitor Folder Settings Path and filename settings Frequency Hz Folder 0 E E 0 0 0 0 E E Ea JE SAHA DEB 0 0 0 0 0 ler jie je oO i Current save paths Text Alarm Proceed as follows gt Enter the frequency to which you have tuned your receiver gt Select a folder using the browse button on the right gt Press the numbered button on the left to see the current save paths at the bottom for that choice You may set up to ten different path and filename settings These are used so the user can quickly change the save filenames when changing frequencies When you change your receiver to another frequency simply select the correct choice button on the left to use the new filename settings 300 e Additional Functions WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Settings Alarm Alarm Monitor allows you to scan for up to ten different alarm strings at the same time You may assign a different audible alert to each alarm string When Alarm Monitor has detected an alarm string the alert will sound immediately WAVECOM Alarm Monitor Alarm Settings String settings Enable Alarm string Sound eea 1 E JE JE JE JE 2 S 4 zi o oND EJee JEJEJE Match case Y Sound audible alert OK Cancel Proceed as follows gt Enter an alarm str
437. ransmission is initiated with a start sequence which identifies this mode and may be used for accurate tuning This sequence is transmitted at 1 Baud which makes it readable even during very unfavorable conditions The data is transmitted at a rate of 10 or 20 Baud A block synchronization sequence is initially transmit ted followed by the five digit code words If more than one block is transmitted a block synchronization sequence is inserted between the different blocks As the transmission rate is very low this mode is insen sitive to fading and multipath propagation WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 171 MFSK 8 and MFSK 16 MFSK 8 and MFSK 16 are multi frequency shift keying digital transmission modes MFSK 8 uses a set of 8 tones with the equal distance of 7 81 Hz MFSK 16 a set of 16 tones with the equal distance of 15 625 Hz The baud rate of MFSK 8 is 7 81 Bd and that of MFSK 16 is 15 625 Bd Parameter Value Pedir F Operation modes FEC Adaltional Inf Both modes are used to transmit text file ASCII file The ASCII character is first converted to Varicode which encodes frequently used characters to short length bit combinations and less frequently used char acters to longer length bit combinations For example e is mapped to 1000 and Z is mapped to 110111000 The Varicode bit stream is then coded with a FEC Forward Error Correction algorithm To combat fre quency fad
438. rce Codina Coherent PMoncoherant A SAA Character coding Dilteential PEM DCA Phase shift Diferential phase Sampling i Block coding keying PSR shift baying Quantization Syethes analysis coding Frequency ahit DPS i Pulso cod magulati n IPEM Redundancy reducing coding kewing FSR Frequency shift ario iE Amptitude shitt keying FSR keying ASK Armplitude shift Continuos phase keyim LASE magii la teih LOM inua piae ICP modulation Hybrids F CPM E Channel Lacing Waverton Structured AA ol iptenge Multiple Access TAPRE AO e Miary salina Carrier Frequency division Aantindal Bloc synchronization FOME 1 Corn hoes ma Cormmeobu io ral Subcarrior Time division Bioethogemal Wechroruzation TOM T OWA Sev rid Codo divigen Trangt hoponal synchronization iCOM COMAI j Frame Space Geeisiga j Sy rch nigaeeer SOMA Pit veto ke Palarization desicion Spread arg Ev cheers atean POM b EE oe Direct sequencing OS Froqueney hopping E Mer yp dr iFHS Time hopaing TH Block i Hybrids Data stream Basic digital communication transformations from B Sklar A Structured Overview of Digital Communica tions IEEE Commun Mag August 1983 Telegraph Speed Bit Rate Baud Rate and Symbol Rate The basic building block of data and telegraph signalling is the bit a word derived from binary digit so called because it can a
439. repetition rate is displayed 4 5 or 8 cycles This parameter may give clues to the identity of the transmission If a continuously repeated character often FFFF is decoded whilst working in the ARQ E mode it is most likely an ARQ E3 system being monitored ARQ E employs the ARQ 1A alphabet with parity checking which allows the detection of transmission errors Full duplex systems transmit a RQ character after having detected an erroneous character or in the pres ence of excessive signal distortions The remote station subsequently repeats the last three four or seven characters preceded by the RQ character To maintain synchronization between the two stations both transmitters operate continuously and send the idle bit pattern if no traffic is transmitted ARQ E3 systems often operate at Symbol rates of 48 50 96 192 and 288 Baud on the radio link Parameter Value Operation modes Full duplex ARQ Additional Inf ARQ E3 synchronization may be started with the selection of a baud rate An AUTO program start causes the automatic determination of the frequency shift and baud rate to be executed first The signal polarity USB or LSB sidebands is automatically detected After synchronization to an ARQ E3 system has been achieved the detected repetition rate is displayed 4 or 8 cycles This parameter may give clues to the identity of the transmission If the same continuously repeated character often FFFF is decoded whilst work
440. revents decoding or introduces additional errors Complex signals like the MIL Standard and STANAG waveforms are heavily affected In previous versions of W CODE the SR Fine Tuning feature was used to correct the sampling rate but adjusting the rate was very difficult due to a substantial time lag between the adjustment taking place and the display being updated To remedy this problem a new feature has been introduced under Configura tion SR Calibration The new feature utilizes an AM demodulator which demodulates the pulses of a reference signal the output which resembles a fax image is displayed in a calibration window The de gree and the direction of slanting of vertical lines are a measure of the amount and the sign of the devia tion between the sound card sampling frequency and the reference signal The values are stored and used for all future decoding Signal thresholds can be set with a tunable band pass filter which may be placed anywhere in the spec trum with the desired bandwidth The settings affect the blurring of pulse edges 56 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Reference signals which may be used include weather fax transmissions and time signals e g CHU DCF77 MSF HBG etc For instance CHU transmits a short tone pulse every second If the band pass filter is tuned to the frequency of this tone a straight vertical line will be visible if the sampling rate of the sound
441. ring equipment sends a Message Confirmation signal indicating that the message has been successfully received Calling Fax Urit AnsweringF ax Unit pa Sends CalliNG tone CNG j j o 0 l Sends Answer tone 2100Hz lL l 1 1 Sends Capabilities data Digtal dertification Signal DIS V 21 Sends configuration data 1 i Digt al Command Signal DCS V 21 1 Sends data ratetest pattern i V 27ter 29 or V 17 i l _ Sends Confirmation to Receive CFR V 21 mo I I I Sendimage y i gt gt Sends post image handshake _ i End Of Procedure EOP Multi page 1 m Signal MPS or End Of Me EOM oe a sete V2 g A Acknowledges image rs Message Confirmation MCF V21 I Sends DisCoNnect DCN V2 H___ I i Hangup Hangup The illustration below is a time vs frequency spectrum of a V 32 call 288 e Modem and FAX Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 i en A r F te o Me oe SN Ca ipl eZ p dle wy Ay y y A AAN si F i 3H y Peru m EA IA AA OA E TTA bt sok HET A AS E lames b gt ua ate memes Bicone Ul RS A T tre SN Pay SATE OARA m 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 400 H0 120 430 1 PSTN dial tone Calling modem DTMF PSTN rings back tone 4 o N IA A REN Y 2100 Hz phase reversal answer tone 1800 Hz phase reversals tone calling 600 3000 Hz phase reversals tone answer Training sequence half duplex answer Sync sequence c
442. riod Display Settings Set T1 Set T2 Move Grey V Hot 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 o 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 4000 Hz j Cool Demodulator FFT Bandwidth 4000 Hz Center 1951 Hz Offset 0H Copper Input AF LEFT RGB pb __ NUM Options can be set using the right mouse button or the context menu see FFT Sonagram Context Menu on page 63 It is possible to remove the tuning FFT or Sonagram in the View Menu Making measurements With the four cursors it is possible to make measurements in the frequency and time domain To enable the time cursors click into the sonagram to freeze the screen Then click with the right mouse button to get the menu to set the time cursors gt Ti Add first cursor to the actual mouse position gt T2 Add second cursor to the actual mouse position gt Move Move Ti cursor and T2 cursor simultaneously It is also possible to drag the cursor to a new location If the cursor line gets in the upper our lower part of the window then the window will scroll automatically Sonagram HF SUB DIR and SAT FFT Type Start Frequency End Freqeuncy Sonagram HF Offset Frequency Bandwidth Sonagram SUB Offset Frequency Bandwidth Sonagram DIR Offset Frequency Bandwidth 2 Offset Frequency Bandwidth 2 Sonagram SAT Offset Frequency Bandwidth 2 Offset Frequency Bandwidth 2 Oscilloscope In general an oscilloscope is used to measure voltage over time However th
443. rity changes during a transmission synchronization will not be lost SAT AERO The SAT AERO system carries digital voice fax and low speed data The channels between aeronautical Ground Earth Stations GES and Aircraft Earth Stations AES are A BPSK or A QPSK modulated with 600 1200 4800 8400 10 500 and 21 500 bps Parameter Value Frequency range L band C band Operation modes symbol rate Inm Aero Forward Pd and Psmc logical channels modulation Forward P channel packet switched data TDM 600 bps 1200 bps A BPSK SDPSK 10 5 kbps A QPSK OQPSK convolutional FECR Y k 7 C channel circuit mode SCPC 8 4 kbps A QPSK OQPSK convolution al FEC R 2 3 k 7 10 5 kbps A QPSK OQPSK convolutional FEC R V k 7 Return R channel slotted Aloha 600 bps 1200 bps A BPSK SDPSK 4 8 kbps 10 5 kbps A QPSK OQPSK convolutional FEC R Y k 7 T channel TDMA 600 bps 1200 bps A BPSK SDPSK 10 5 kbps A QPSK OQPSK convolutional FECR Y k 7 C channel circuit mode SCPC 8 4 kbps A QPSK OQPSK convolution al FEC R 2 3 k 7 10 5 kbps A QPSK OQPSK convolutional FEC R k 7 A BPSK Aviation BPSK symmetrical differential PSK SDPSK A QPSK Aviation QPSK a variant of offset QPSK Four channel types are used P acket switched R andom T DMA and C ircuit switched Currently only the P channel can be decoded Two output formats may be selected All Signaling Units or Messages
444. rmation see Modem and FAX Modes on page 286 MPT 1327 Trunked mobile radio makes a limited number of radio channels available for a relatively large number of mobile subscribers by channel sharing and appropriate access and signaling procedures on a control chan nel The software monitors control and traffic channels Parameter Value WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 185 Parameter Additional Info Channel spacing 12 5 kHz NZRI A trunked network is controlled by a fixed base station TSC Trunked System Controller Wide areas re quiring radio coverage are divided into cells each of which is controlled by a TSC The TSCs are connected to a hub and are controlled by a Management Controller The TSCs register roaming of the mobile units and route traffic to the TSC which is nearest to the subscriber TSCs may be connected to the public tele phone network Trunked systems may carry voice or data signals The mobile unit uses two channel simplex and the base station full duplex The British MPT 1327 specifications for trunked private land mobile radio systems have won general and de facto acceptance in Europe MPT 1327 specifies the general signaling features to be used on the trunked system The system is used in the UK France Germany Chekker License A Switzerland Speedcom and the Scandinavian countries with national adaptations The control channel is divided into the
445. rom a drop down list of available modes The name given to the table entry by the user This field is a free text field The modulation method used by the decoder Set by default or selected from a drop down list of modulation methods available for the selected decoder A user free text field for the ITU emission designator applicable to this signal The minimum number of carriers in a multi carrier system The minimum number of channels in a VFT system The minimum number of tones in a multi frequency system The number of carriers in a multi carrier system Number of channels in a VFT system The number of tones in a multi frequency system If applicable the frequency of the system pilot frequency pilot tone or Dop pler correction tone If checked the signal is not included in the CCC recognition process and the record is greyed out in the list of records The frequency shift for two frequency FSK Classifier Optional e 273 Spacing Hz Submode Tone Duration ms WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 274 e Classifier Optional The frequency spacing between adjacent tones in a multi frequency system do not confuse up Spacing and Shift For multicarrier systems Spacing is user editable by clicking Edit which will open the Multicarrier Signal window see below If equal spacing is desired press Same spacing for all carriers and enter the spacing in the entry field and press OK to s
446. rotocol is a derivative of the X 25 and HDLC computer network protocols Packet radio is a synchronous system in which data is transmitted in ASCII character packets At the start and end of each block a control character or flag 01111110 is sent The address can consist of up to 80 characters but 16 or 24 character addressing is common when using direct connections or a single repeater The packet protocol distinguishes between three frame types I Information S Supervisory and U Un numbered Payload data transfer uses I frames or very rarely U frames S and U frames are used for transmission control The data field can contain up to 256 characters All characters and character combinations are permitted Since transmission is transparent A checksum is sent in the FCS field The status field contains three fields with connection status information in addition to the call signs gt Frame types are indicated by I S or U gt S frame status messages e g Receiver Ready RR Receiver Not Ready RNR or Reject REJ are displayed gt In the third field the transmit and receive sequence numbers are displayed This number ranges from rO to r7 or sO to s7 The sequence number indicates to the opposite station which packets have been received free of errors The large volume of available radio amateur literature is recommended for further study of the packet ra dio system PACTOR PACTOR is a frequent visitor in the amateur r
447. rrection purposes Each code word consists of 10 bits The five leading bits are a character of the ITA 2 alphabet and the trailing 5 bits are a direct repetition of the first five bits If even parity is present the last five bits are inverted before transmission Symbol rate 62 3 68 5 102 63 and 137 Bd variable 30 650 Bd The Bauer code can correct single bit errors and corrected characters are displayed in red on the screen display Characters which have been found to contain more than a single bit error are represented by the underline symbol Error correction may be enabled or disabled by selecting ECC Error Correction Control BAUDOT The Baudot code has been the most common telegraph code used as a result of the widespread use of teleprinter its place now being gradually taken over by ASCII Baudot is internationally approved as CCITT alphabet ITA 2 but several national modifications to ITA 2 exist as do completely different character assignments e g Arabic alphabets Bagdad 70 and ATU 80 Russian M2 and alphabets using a third shift to accommodate the shift between Latin and another charac ter set Baudot is the basis for many codes in use on radio circuits due to the need for easy compatibility with teleprinter networks and equipment Parameter Value Frequency range Operation modes Modulation Additional Inf For the BAUDOT the Auto option starts the process of automatically setting up the demodulator and de termi
448. s By double clicking a file a call or a mes Sage is retrieved and displayed or played back Tetra Settings Various options are available through Options Tetra Settings Display Voice and SDS Voice Only SDS Only Signalling an Fl FICMCE F SNDCP Path Server C Users Public Documents WAVECOM WCODESDATA f Client C Users Public DocumentsWAVECOM WCODESDATA Options Save the encrypted traffic Display The user may select what is to be displayed by clicking one of the radio buttons Signaling The checkboxes allows the user to display all layer 3 PDUs Protocol Data Units corre sponding to the levels of the TETRA protocol stack for protocol overview see the WAVECOM white paper WP TETRA or consult the appropriate ETSI documentation PDUs from the following protocol entities are available Mobile Link Entity MLE Information on neighboring cells and control of cell reselection Mobility Management MM Controls various services e g registration and de registration authentication OTAR Over The Air Rekeying mobile station stunning and group attachment Sub Network Dependent Convergence Protocol SNDCP TETRA specific adaptation proto col for IP data Circuit Mode Control Entity CMCE Controls all voice and data SDS Call setup maintenance and tear down functions CMCE protocol D TX CEASED Destination 105 01001001000000100111110010010000111110000 MLE protocol D NWRK B
449. s Classification Finished 160743 ue Lua g Pal fino OH aH2 1 1 1 1300 1900 2009 21 i i i i 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 21500 1700 Ba i 300 1001 WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Classifier Optional e 253 MFSK PSK Frequency transitions are displayed along a time axis The values of the frequencies of the MFSK signal are displayed on the vertical axis CODE W CODE o File M F Modes VHF UMF DIR VHF UMF SUB Satellite Modems Options Demodulator favorites Configuration View Window Help lasufies WBS HE Manual Mode Classification Finished shed Auto Ds a Y Mode Analysis a amp gt SARE gt fd E 2 W CODE Classifier Card 1 2 He Curent frequency dagan Phase transitions are displayed along a time axis the red graph shows the value of the real component of the signal the I component and the green graph shows the value of the im aginary component of the signal the Q component ODE W CODE Fie HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help Classifier WB HF Manual Mode Classification Finished Auto 11 52 51 oes Y Mode Analysis a gt BAM 2 Ea jumbals te dagam ied ed values geen imagnay values Baucrate Bd 2400 4 Cursar position Bd Baudrate Spectrum This pane displays a probability spectrum of the instantaneous baud rates contained in the analyzed si
450. s In satellite communication PSK is the main modulation method for instance Inmarsat C uses BPSK 2PSK and other Inmarsat systems use QPSK 4PSK M ary FSK MFSK M ary PSK MPSK Modes on the HF bands utilize frequency or phase modulation of a sub carrier which then in turn modu lates a carrier using suppressed carrier SSB keying or by directly modulating a carrier Decoding can be done from the receiver AF or IF output USB LSB CW or FAX demodulator Examples of this type of modulation are ordinary two frequency FSK four frequency FSK Twinplex and the STANAG PSK modes M ary designates the number of modulation levels FSK designates common two frequency FSK MFSK systems deviate from the classical binary transmission of 0 Mark and 1 Space as a single tone carries more information This is the reason for a higher element period in MFSK compared with binary transmissions having the same bit rate This produces a substantial increase in the insensitivity to multi path propagation and noise Examples of MFSK systems are PICCOLO COQUELET and CIS 36 Due to intensive research and the availability of highly efficient hardware and software the waveforms originally developed within the STANAG specifications of NATO have gained considerable influence in radio data communications This has resulted in very efficient modems utilizing multi phase modulated single tones combined with the use of adaptive equalization and sophisticated
451. s as well as in the text window gt DATA ONLY Frame and packet headers are displayed in the status lines In the text window only user data are displayed ZVEI 1 The entire call number is transmitted by consecutive tones in decade sequence When two identical digits are to be transmitted consecutively then an eleventh frequency is used as a repetition identifier Parameter Value Frequency range VHF UHF Operation modes Analogue Selcal Modulation FM SUB Tone Receiver settings FM BW 12 kHz Input format s AF IF If more than two identical digits are to be transmitted the repetition tone is appended to the digit tone e g 22222 is transmitted as f2 fw f2 fw f2 where f2 is the tone for 2 and fw is the repetition tone In most systems the accuracy of the single frequencies has to be within 1 1 5 of the nominal value For ZVEI modes having nominal tone durations of 70 ms the duration of a single tone may vary 15 ms Decoding the selective calls is started by clicking on a system If transmission and system selection con form the call sign is displayed on the monitor In the Options menu a Time Stamp function can be ena bled to add date and time to each call Tone Allocation E REPETITION Tone duration 70 ms ZVEI 2 The entire call number is transmitted by consecutive tones in decade sequence When two identical digits are to be transmitted consecutively then an eleventh frequency is used as a repetitio
452. s can be selected with Polarity in the menu NOR means USB and INV means LSB signal The center frequency of the decoder should be set to 1800 Hz when the receiver is correctly tuned to the transmitting station Small frequency variations are automatically compensated in the decoder The center frequency of the decoder can be adjusted to 400 Hz from its normal setting By using the bar graph any remaining frequency difference can be compensated by fine tuning of the receiver frequency or by adjust ing the center frequency of the decoder MIL 188 110B Appendix C STANAG 4539 The MIL STD 188 110B Interoperability and Performance Standards for Data Modems published on 27th April 2000 by the US Department of Defense DoD includes in its appendices different kinds of mo dem waveforms The Appendix C defines the HF data modem waveforms and coding specifications for data rates above 2400 bps i e for data rates of 3200 4800 6400 8000 and 9600 bps Uncoded operation at 12800 bps is a DO Design Objective The single tone waveforms specified use 8 PSK 16 32 and 64 QAM on a single carrier frequency 1800 Hz as the modulation techniques The waveform has a unique symbol rate of 2400 Bd Together with a constraint length 7 rate 1 2 convolutional code FEC punctured to rate 3 4 the various effective user data rates except 12800 bps are realized A linear interleaver is used to redistribute the FEC coded user data bits of a certain block le
453. s file type uses the data structure described in chapter Data Structures on page 310 to store the da ta A data package contains the data of one SAT session saved as a string containing these values gt Mode name of the Inmarsat System e g SAT B Service the SAT service e g FAX MES ID the identification number File the path of the received file of the SAT session Vv VV WV DateTime the date and time of the received session number of seconds elapsed since midnight 00 00 00 January 1 1970 coordinated universal time Duration elapsed time for transmitting the session Size size can contain the number of pages or the size of a received field unit byte Termination indicates if transmission successful WAVECOM Card ID the ID of the card which received the session Computer Address address of the computer which received the session Y VV VV WV Already displayed flag indicates if the received file of the session has already been displayed via the ImagerViewer app O no 1 yes gt Transmitter ID Transmitting subscriber identification Note The values are written to the string in the same order as listed above If not stored with _UNICODE enabled then the string contains normal 8 bit char characters from type char otherwise the string contains 16 bit characters from type wchar_t A char value occupies 1 Byte and a wchar_t value occupies 2 Bytes in the binary WDA file Classifier data The FileType s
454. s for a major reduction in message interchange between mobile units and a control center by digital transmission of abbreviated telegrams Parameter Receiver settings FM BW 12 kHz Input format s AF IF Additional Info BCD Code with block coding FMS BOS operates at 1200 bit s using FSK modulation of 1200 Hz and 1800 Hz tones FMS BOS Transmission Example FZ gt LS BOS K 1 LK d OK 10 FZ 7611 ST d ZBV 1 The FMS BOS data telegrams always have the same structure and a length of 48 bits regardless of the transmission direction or message contents The actual information is contained in 40 bits The BCD code is used to transmit the digits in the telegram A FMS BOS message is preceded by 12 bits of carrier and a sync character Ox1a The message itself consists of 10 BCD blocks Block 1 is the BOS service identifier 0 f identifying the service issuing the message Block 2 is the state identifier 0 f identifying the German state Due to the fact that the number of states exceeds the number of available identifier digits digits E and F are additionally identified by the lo cation identifier to be used by two states each Blocks 3 4 are the location identifier e g OK 10 and can assume one of 99 different possibilities The actual value is determined by each individual state Blocks 5 8 are the vehicle identifier e g 4213 and can contain one of 9999 combinations The indi vidual identifiers are assigned
455. s improvements and bug fixes 8 2 01 Jan 2013 New modes Chinese 4 4 New option W CLOUD Signal monitoring and decoding based on genuine encrypted IQ signal over large geographical distance Classifier narrowband CL NB extended to BW 48 kHz for VHF UHF and SAT bands 8 3 01 Jun 2013 W CLOUD supports streaming IQ signal over VSC Virtual Sound Card of WiNRADiO GW OFDM mode totally revised and improved NXDN live voice output New FFT and Sonagram display settings with Base level Range and FFT length XML interface extension regarding W CLOUD devices Correction in ORBCOMM decoding position and speed data WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 General Information e 7 Recommended WAVECOM Products and Services W BV BitView Tool The highly sophisticated BitView Tool is an external off line stand alone NET application for analysis of unknown signals BitView has a number of features gt Bit manipulation tools gt Bit display tools text graphics gt Simultaneous processing of multiple analysis sessions gt Auto update functionality gt Report generator parameters data ASCII XML gt Drag and drop of functions gt Re arrangement of functions in a tree view gt Nested docking gt Auto hide gt Drag and drop of windows gt Application and modification of alphabets gt Persistent to XML file screen layout is restored at start up time gt NET te
456. se fax encoding is according to recommendation T 82 85 Call WAVECOM for support on this issue SAT C TDM SAT C TDMA The SAT C system is a simple store and forward messaging system SAT C has four operational channels NCS Common Channel SAT C TDM Y Y V V WV gt Continuous TDM 8 64 s frame 1200 symbols s Scrambled encoded and interleaved One bulletin board per frame Signaling Enhanced Group Calls EGC polls see below LES TDM SAT C TDM gt Y Y YV V WV Continuous TDM or demand assigned by NCS 8 64 s frame 1200 symbols s Scrambled encoded interleaved One bulletin board per frame Signaling and LES mobile messages MES Signaling Channel Y Y V WV Slotted Aloha random access 28 slots frame 120 bits slot 1200 symbols s Scrambled encoded Distress and normal calls data reporting NCS log in log out registration MES Message Channel SAT C TDMA gt TDMA gt gt 1200 symbols s Scrambled encoded interleaved WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 SAT System e 283 gt Mobile LES messages Services SAT C supports several services Store and forward messaging Allows messages to be exchanged between a mobile station and a user connected to the fixed network telex modem connection X 25 or Internet email Only messages that are received completely error free are forwarded to the destination Distress calls Distress calls are sent from a mobile only m
457. se it is pos itive gt Now close the FFT window select Configurationet Receiver and Satellite Settings Enter the amount and sign of the frequency offset into the Freq Offset field gt Start the SAT Mode again after the receiver has been retuned taking the frequency offset into consideration Select the FFT again and check if the control channel is now exactly in the middle of the FFT display Repeat the adjustment if necessary It is very important that the control channel spectrum should not be offset more than 100 Hz i e it should be symmetrically centered Ocean Region NCSC Inmarsat B M NCSC Inmarsat miniM AOR W 1538 120000 MHz 1537 3100000 MHz AOR E 1538 220000 1537 3200000 IOR 1538 180000 1537 3400000 pom 1538 230000 1537 3300000 Signal Strength The Signal Noise Ratio for the control and traffic channels should be at least 18 dB as measured with the FFT of the decoder Depending on the location of the monitoring system a dish size of 2 3 m will be needed Spot Beam Reception Traffic channels may be in spot beams allocated for power saving and frequency reuse These spot beams cover only a part of the ocean region for the satellite being monitored Therefore it is possible that the monitoring systems tunes to a frequency without signal Nothing can be done in this case except moving 282 e SAT System WAVECOM Decoder W PCI e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 your antenna at least 500 km By observing the
458. secure modes user selectable key for de randomization of secure modes output of recognized key in secure mode output of status information output of recognized frame type decoding of chat messages into readable output decoding of text files into readable output decoding of data into hex output W CLOVER 2 2000 CRC recognition changed to Display Mode for se lection of error free frames or all frames Option for user defined table of General Information e 5 Version Date Changes CRC added MIL 141A CODAN 9001 Improved performance for Golay 24 12 decod er MIL 39T Display formats ASCII and ITA 5 merged CIS 36 50 CIS 50 50 More fault tolerant start and stop criteria automat ic default to Letter Shift after idle or a longer sequence of invalid data syn chronization to valid 3 4 characters without need for preamble DTMF Character set changed and replaces E and F COQUELET 8 13 80 Bar graph range corrected STANAG MIL modes ITA 2 U character now printed FMS BOS settings added to documentation 7 0 24 Nov 2010 New protocols dPMR X25 TETRA Improvements and modifications GUI toolbars menus etc changed Wideband classifier bandwidth 96 kHz Adjustable Classifier Code Check with XML table lookup Classifier Code Check Table Editor CODAN 9001 extended with Compressed Data and Secure Interactive Packets
459. sine 155 FECC aaa o ais o sao 155 FEELDHEE ii a 156 FEE X sia ro a aA 157 EM HEEE da de a 157 FS eo Na Ne Net 158 EMDSS Be e n a E a e ia dis 160 SMBDSS DSE WHE secar aan 160 COLA OS Ea A A ee Ga 161 ESTO Rad a a a a A e Genta EN AE idad A iii ea 162 OWES Curr A A tae AS lite 163 E A O A ETET 163 GW OFDM Modulation and ProtoOcol cccccceeueecueeeuueuuueeuueeuuuenenuenans 164 DECIS 164 VHP SK rte dd bed 165 ACARO iio adas 165 HFSACARS a a heen dd es ee ene a 166 ANG REC aerate lid rca 167 ICAO SEUGAL E cialis daa ara eno 168 EJNK T1CCLEEWTE dc i 169 MD 574 ASYN Corsair stas 170 METEO SA O a e 170 MES 20 ii a tt a 171 MFSK 8 and MESK T6 cuina riada 172 MIL 188 110 16Tone MIL 188 110A B Appendix B ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 172 MIL 188 110 39Tone MIL 188 110A B Appendix C cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 173 MIL TSS LOA A a daras 174 MIL 188 110B Appendix C STANAG 4539 ccc cccccccccesteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeaaags 175 Mild BGS iia alla rada 177 MIlstSS 14TB APpendic Casadas 178 MIESME 555929A NB WBRA AA AA AAA 180 MOBITEX 1 2 O a os 180 MOBITEX S 000 A iio 181 MODA Td ad dd 182 FINES MODEMS Halls DUPIE X oi 182 FAX GS A awed E ered totaal alk eausend where te ah a a acew A wa eaoed ei 182 E 2 TCR oe cesac co haciet a a EE 183 FAX G3 N 2 Dl 183 WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 WAVECOM Decoder FAX G3 V34NOX Serna A AAA 183 VDT BEL 10S AE E EN E E zante 183 V 22
460. single computer Each of these cards has a name asso ciated with it the card names can be used to establish a connection to a specific card The default names are DeviceA through to DeviceH It is possible to change the card names by 296 e Additional Functions WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 gt Clicking into the name edit field gt Change the name of the card gt Click on the Apply Changes button Discard Changes will discard any changes Networking Information Fa a Y WAVECOM Server Control W CODE Device Information Networking Information About TCP Port Graphical User Interface 33243 Y Data Encryption XML Remote Control Interface 33244 Server Control Interface 33245 The following network setup parameters for remote control are available from the Networking Infor mation tab gt Allow Remote Connections Disable this box if you do not allow connections to the decoder cards from another computer gt Data Compression Enable or disable data compression for the data transfer to the remote com puter Data compression is required if you use a slow remote connection If your modem is al ready compressing the data disable this option gt Data Encryption Enable optional data encryption if a secure connection is required If the con nection is already safe crypto devices VPN etc disable this option gt TCP Port Enter a free TCP port If the port is already used
461. sion packets may occupy two to five con tinuous slots Bit stuffing and NRZI encoding is used Traffic can be monitored on the AIS1 Channel 87B 161 975 MHz and AIS2 Channel 88B 162 025 MHz From Options Display Mode All frames or Error free frames may be selected AIS Binary Messages Area Designation Function Message Global International 0 2 3 4 5 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 MN St Lawrence Seaway SLS 1 Metro Hydro 1 2 3 6 OS O MENE 12 A E O E O AT A _Rhine Danube land 30 28 22 23 24 4055 2 ALE 400 Amateur version of MIL 188 141A For more details see MIL 188 141A on page 177 110 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Parameter Value Operation modes ALE Broadcast Simplex FEC Modulation MFSK 8 ani ALF RDS ALF RDS Accurate positioning by Low Frequencies is a German system for the transmission of DGPS in formation on low frequencies in this case 123 7 kHz Data is transmitted in RDS format RDS Radio Da ta System is a one way data transmission system used by FM broadcasters worldwide to broadcast pro gram time and traffic information on a 57 kHz BPSK DSB sub carrier with suppressed carrier and a bit rate of 1187 5 bps In the case of ALF RDS the transmission is made in SSB with a decreased level pilot carrier to reduce bandwidth Parameter Value Operation modes Broadcast FEC Modulation BPSK Symbol rate 1187 5 Bd Receiver settings DATA CW
462. ssary as this kind of signal is not continuous The noise gate examines the input signal and determines if a valid signal is available which can be analyzed or if the input consists only of noise gt In Disabled mode the Noise gate is switched off PSK Symbol Rate HF DIR SUB and SAT When starting PSK signal analysis one is trying to determine the characteristics of an unknown signal The normal starting point for this is the FFT The FFT is used to determine an estimate of the signal center frequency and signal bandwidth This should be done by adjusting the measurement cursors The phase analysis tools inherits the information deter mined by the measurement cursors and uses this information to configure the center frequency and bandwidth This in turn sets up a pre filter allowing the tools to be used for signals disturbed by out of band interference or when more concurrent channels are present To determine the symbol rate a PSK symbol rate analysis tool is provided This tool provides a spectrum display with three zoom levels and allows the measurement of the symbol rate using cursors A PSK sig nal will normally produce multiple peaks Normally but not always the symbol rate or baud rate will be a distinct peak at the highest amplitude The other peaks are normally fractions of the true symbol rate r A A KA WAVECOM W CODE W CODE PSK Symbol Rate Card 1 R e File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellit
463. ssume only two states Current logical 1 Mark or lower frequency positive voltage or No Current logical 0 Space or high frequency negative voltage The bit rate is the number of bits transmitted per second measured in bps One or more bits can be merged into a single signaling unit called a symbol The symbol rate formerly known as the telegraph speed or the baud rate is the inverse of the duration of one single signaling unit and is measured in symbols sec or Baud Bd So if one channel signaling unit has a duration of 10 ms then the telegraph speed is equal to 1 0 01 100 Bd If the channel has on ly two signaling states e g O V and 5 V bit rate is equal to baud rate i e 100 bps If four levels were used the baud rate would still be 100 Bd but now the bit rate would be doubled to 200 bps each baud representing two bits Signaling states identify the different values a signaling unit may assume In case of binary signaling there are two states but many systems utilize more For radio transmission the levels may be represented by frequency phase amplitude levels or a combination thereof see the sections on channel coding and modulation Power 0 eee E A j frequency Signal at baseband Signal at RF radio frequency A baseband channel or low pass channel or system or network is a channel e g a telecommunications system that covers a frequency range from close to or even zero H
464. st bit indicates whether the next data word is sent with inverse or normal polarity WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 145 If Normal 3 5 7 16 is chosen in the Message Type options field messages containing ASCII text are decoded in case of numbers their meaning is displayed as well The message types 1 6 and 9 containing the real DGPS information are not displayed in this mode of operation Selecting Raw excl 1 6 9 offers a raw bit display except of the message types 1 6 and 9 and Diff corrections displays the corrections messages By selecting the All frame headers option all frame headers are displayed regardless of the message type In case of a parity error the data transferred in the related data word are displayed in red characters to indicate a potential error RTCM v 2 0 and 2 1 are not completely compatible but both systems are used This may lead to errone ous interpretation of certain frame types More detailed information may be found in RTCM Recommended Standards for Differential NAVSTAR GPS Service 2 0 RTCM paper 134 89 SC104 68 DMR DMR Digital Mobile Radio is a two channel digital TDMA system for the transmission of voice and short text messages For voice the AMBE or AMBE 2 codec by DVSI is used Data transmission accommodates 7 bit ASCII only Parameter Value Frequency range VHF UHF 136 147 403 470 MHz Operation modes Digital 2 channel TDMA two w
465. st over this channel by that satellite All Inmarsat C maritime ship stations can monitor the EGC channel The EGC channel can also be monitored by dedicated receive only equipment installed separately or as part of an Inmarsat A station The International Maritime Organization has announced that by June 1998 broadcasts of navigational and meteorological information will be made for every NAV MET Area of the globe Search and Rescue infor mation is also broadcast in most areas Inmarsat C Safety NET services currently include Urgency messages and navigational warnings to rectangular or circular areas gt Coastal warnings in place of NAVTEX used only in Australia gt Shore to ship distress alerts to circular areas gt Search and rescue coordination messages to rectangular or circular areas gt Meteorological and navigational warnings and meteorological forecasts to a NAVAREA gt United States Safety NET broadcasts include NAVAREA IV and XII navigational warning broadcasts from the U S National Imagery and Map ping Agency NAVAREA IV XII and XVI meteorological forecasts and warnings from the U S National Weath er Service 218 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Distress alerts and search and rescue warnings from the U S Coast Guard Atlantic ice reports from the International Ice Patrol U S Coast Guard Ships located outside a circular or rectangular area will not receive a messa
466. st start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 FAX amp Modem Analysis Selector Fax amp Modems Analysis Selector Classifier Frequency Time FFT FFT amp Sonagram Sonagram Waterfall Oscilloscope FSK FSK Analysis PSK PSK Symbol Rate PSK Phase Plane Miscellaneous Autocorrelation Bit Correlation Bit Length Analysis Demod Bitstream Passband Filter Support Perfect signal processing filtering is essential for best decoding results which are achieved by using the correct filters in the receiver Doing so prevents blocking effects from strong nearby signals However cor rectly processed signals may be unavailable e g when a receiver does not offer optimum filters or when using recorded signals To overcome these obstacles additional passband filters are included in the WAVECOM decoders to assist the operator in separating signals within the analyzed frequency spectrum In the WAVECOM GUI a passband PB tuning bar is placed below the tuning FFT window If tuning FFT is not available as is the case for some modes the parameters can be set in the Demodulator Menu For many modes the parameters PB Center PB Bandwidth and Center can be individually controlled see the table below WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 First start e 69 PB Conf Remarks PB center frequency controlled from offset frequency setting ltem MARK SPACE P
467. sting analogue SELCAL systems Be prepared for double or multiple identifications Several color schemes are available through the right click menu 96 e Analysis Tools WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Fundamentals of Radio Data Transmission The drawing illustrates the various processing operations applied to digital information from source to sink The box labeled Channel represents the media through which data must pass adapted from Ber nard Sklar Digital Communications Fundamentals and Applications Prentice Hall 2001 From ther Sources Data SOUrca Source AT Channel ee l Frequency Multiple Synchronizati an Channal Data Sink E a Source EON Channel De e Frequency Multiple To Other Sources A basic understanding of how digital information is transferred by land line or radio links is necessary to fully exploit all of the features of the WAVECOM decoder It is assumed that the user is familiar with the general working of telecommunication systems in particular radio systems The overview below deliber ately avoids the mathematical descriptions and proofs which underly modern communication theory and practice for the sake of brevity We define digital information as information which is represented by discrete states of the transmission medium In contrast analogue information is represented by an infinite continuum of states For exam ple live music is analogue information whereas t
468. sured in Hz on a relative scale from O to 100 The dis plays are updated around every 5 seconds The calculated baud rate center frequency and frequency shift values of the latest sample are stored to be used whenever a decoding mode is selected Two pairs of cursors may be placed in the baudrate and spectrum graph windows to assist in manual measurements The values to which they point and the difference between the two cursor values are shown above the cursors When a pair of cursors is placed in one of these windows graph display updat ing is halted but signal sampling continues and is displayed in the waterfall window The time cursor in the waterfall window is placed on the selected sample Methods exclusively based on bit length measurement are unreliable for baud rate measurements The baud rate measuring process employed by the decoder is therefore based on a new method employing au to correlation and subsequent Fast Fourier Transformation FFT presentation Using this method FSK transmissions may be analyzed without problems Be aware that when measuring the baud rate of codes using code words which have a non integer number of bits e g asynchronous 7 5 bit ITA 2 the indicat ed baud rate will increase by a factor two Waterfall Window To open the waterfall window move the mouse to the left of the extreme right of the graph window The normal cursor will turn into a splitter two parallel lines with arrows perpendicularly att
469. systems operate on the ARQ principle Using the ARQ method a data block of 42 bits is transmitted The SITOR alphabet is used to protect the transmitted data After each transmission the direction of transmission is reversed and the remote station acknowledges error free data or requests a repetition of data received in error The two systems only differ in the duration of the request cycle interval A complete cycle for ARQ6 90 has duration of 450 ms of which the data block is 210 ms an interval is 230 ms A complete cycle for ARQ6 98 has duration of 490 ms of which the data block is 210 ms an interval is 280 ms ARQ E The ARQ E duplex systems operate at Symbol rates of 46 2 48 50 64 72 86 96 144 184 6 192 and 288 Baud on the radio link Parameter Value Operation modes Duplex ARQ Symbol rate 46 2 48 50 64 72 86 96 144 184 6 192 and 288 Bd variable 30 114 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Parameter Value so Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF Additional Info ITA 2 with parity and identification bit ARQ E synchronization may be started by the selection of a baud rate An AUTO program start causes the automatic determination of the frequency shift and baud rate to be executed first The signal polarity USB or LSB sidebands is automatically detected After synchronization to an ARQ E system has been achieved the detected
470. t tached to the electric ground to avoid damaging static sensitive components on the card or in the comput er Power off your computer unplug it from its power source and disconnect all peripherals Carefully remove the cover of the computer and locate a free PCI or PCI express slot Firmly insert the card into the slot Close the computer cover and switch on the power WARNING THE A D CONVERTER ON THE W PCI AND W PCIe CARD MAY DEVELOPE ENOUGH HEAT TO PRODUCE BURNS OR START A FIRE IF PLACED NEAR FLAMMABLE OBJECTS WAVECOM WILL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM NON COMPLIANCE WITH THIS WARNING gt lt kha amp dk Anupma S O G a a a a a TA a CI SMA a a e d a a amp a a Ta Aan See T ati v ee A e Mos y IF 70 1a AFIF 1 oe IF70 1b ES 4 AFIF 2 SN TA mal IF 70 B i A am EH a m 4 y Bie y E a w W PCI card 10 e Setup WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 c WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG W PCle Ver 1 1 W PCle card Both W PCI and W PClIe cards have five SMA signal inputs The following table is a concise specification Specification Card type Half size PCI card W PCI Half size PCIe x1 card W PCI Express Frequency range 50 Hz 25 MHz 52 5 MHz 87 5 MHz SAW filter Signal level 2 mVrms 0 5 Vrms 2 mVrms 2 5 Vrms 20 mVrms 2 5 Vrms with 20 dB attenuator WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD M
471. t is the easy handling Only the gain has to be adjusted There is no need for an adjustment of the center or the translation frequency DIS is only released for Direct FSK modes Disable To make an item unavailable for use Disabled items reflect the WINDOWS color settings for disabled commands and generally appear dimmed and cannot be chosen EOD End Of Data Error message A message displayed to tell the user about an error or problem in the execution of a program or in the us er s communication with the system An error message is often accompanied by a beep EXT DEM IN The EXT DEM IN input must be used if an external demodulator is to be connected The minimum input level is TTL level LO O V HI 5 V and the maximum is RS 232C level LO 12 V HI 12 V Note that utilizing this facility will disable certain W51PC functions Thus this input should be employed for special purposes only FDX Full duplex FEC Forward error correction FEC is error control methode for data transmission whereby the sender adds redundant data to its messages also known as an error correction code This allows the receiver to detect and correct errors within some bound without the need to ask the sender for additional data The ad vantages of forward error correction are that a back channel is not required and retransmission of data can often be avoided at the cost of higher bandwidth requirements on average FEC is therefore
472. t stream is de interleaved passed through a Viterbi decoder and the CRC is checked PACTOR II FEC uses the same compression algorithms and CRC masks as PACTOR II Options CRC Recognition The detected CRC is displayed in the decoder status bar see CRC Recogni tion on page 34 Using Options CRC Table a certain CRC mask can be defined see CRC Table on page 34 Tuning a PACTOR II FEC signal See PACTOR II on page 199 PACTOR III PACTOR III is an adaptive transmission mode that provides higher throughput and improved robustness compared to PACTOR I and II both designed for operation within a bandwidth of 500 Hz To achieve the improved features PACTOR III uses up to a maximum of 18 tones spaced 120 Hz thus occupying a max imum bandwidth of 2160 Hz Six so called Speed Levels SL are specified which are predefined combi nations of modulation type DBPSK or DQPSK channel coding and number of tones 2 6 14 16 or 18 as well as positions of tones For all Speed Levels the modulation rate of each tone is 100 Bd Parameter Operation modes Half duplex synchronous ARQ Modulation DBPSK DQPSK 2 6 14 16 or 18 tones WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 201 Parameter Additional Info ITA 5 with block coding 14 106 MHz 21 112 MHz Optional Mode Tone numbers TN and respective frequencies TF in Hz as well as modulation types B DBPSK Q DQPSK for the
473. t to 1440 Hz when the receiver is set to the nominal fre quency of the ground station A small frequency difference will be automatically compensated by the de coder However the center frequency can be tuned by 400 Hz from its nominal setting There are two internal system configuration files for the display of HFDL messages hfacars txt and hfacars dat These files should not be modified by the user HNG FEC HNG FEC uses a 15 bit code the first 5 bits corresponding to the ITA 2 alphabet The first and last bits of this code word are inverted Inv Nor Nor Nor Nor Inv The remaining 10 bits are used for error detec tion and correction Error correction is done by table look up of the character which closest matches the one that was received in error WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 167 Parameter Value Operation modes Broadcast Simplex FEC FS Symbol rate 100 05 Bd variable 30 650 Bd Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Modulation Input format s AF IF Additional Info ITA 2 with 10 Bit redundancy HNG FEC operates at a symbol rate of 100 05 Baud on the radio link HNG FEC employs bit spreading interleaving with a distance of 64 bits each new character starting at intervals of 15 bits The software synchronizes to traffic as well as idle bit patterns The idle binary bit pat tern is given by 110 100 110 010 O11 Transmission reliability for HNG FEC is good with the
474. ta structure is violated more than 80 times 232 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 In ASCII ASYNC 7 data bits and no stop bit mode the bit stream is correlated with another ASYNC struc ture i e one start bit 0 and 7 data bits The 7 data bits are displayed LSB first In addition to the EOM pattern the display will stop if more than 300 NULL characters are received In ASCII SYNC mode each 8 bits LSB first represent one ASCII character The display will stop when ei ther the EOM pattern was recognized or more than 20 NULL characters have been received Tuning the decoder The decoder can process signals in both SSB settings USB and LSB The sideband is selected by toggling the Polarity field of the display NOR will select USB and INV will select LSB The center frequency of the decoder is set to the default value of 1800 Hz but can be adjusted within a range from 800Hz to 2400Hz Small frequency deviations are automatically tracked and compensated dur ing the decoding By using the bar graph any remaining frequency difference can be compensated by fi ne tuning of the receiver frequency or by adjusting the center frequency of the decoder In the Confidence field the quality of decoding can be observed A well recognized stream is determined by a confidence value being stable and greater than 95 i e 95 of the message is correct STANAG 4529 STANAG 4529 is specified by the NATO
475. tallations fixed as well as mobile stations and has been in use there since 1994 and from 1995 also internationally The ATIS signal sequence is transmitted using the FSK with space and mark frequencies of 1300 Hz and 2100 Hz and a modulation rate of 1200 Baud The higher frequency corresponds to the B state of the sig nal and the lower to the Y state The ATIS sequence consists of a country identifier and a four digit call sign e g PE 1234 for a Dutch ves sel or HB 6235 for a Swiss vessel All sequences are transmitted twice DX and RX positions A 10 bit code is used in this synchronous sys tem Bits 8 9 and 10 are a binary representation of the number of bits in the B state The error check character corresponds to a modulo 2 sum of the corresponding information bits 118 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 ATIS Country Identification Code Code Country Code Country Code Country Moana faa o Germany a Croat e Romania Stove Rep o cmemrep turkey E estonia titi A www O S AN AUM 13 AUM 13 is a sequential 13 tone mode which is optimized for the transmission of numeric codes AUM 13 is similar to SP 14 Parameter Value Operation modes Broadcast unprotected Modulation MFSK 13 Each tone has been assigned a character gt 10 tones are assigned to the numerals 0 9 gt One tone is used as an idle character gt One tone is used as a space charact
476. tations mostly switch to this mode only under extremely poor propagation conditions Parameter VENTE SI FEC operates at symbol rates of 96 and 192 Bd on the radio link SI ARQ stations can switch to FEC broadcasting operation in similarity to SITOR ARQ Mode A and SITOR FEC Mode B The SI FEC mode uses the ITA 3 alphabet for data protection Each character is sent twice but with a time delay The repeated character is transmitted with inverted polarity For a pair of characters which have been decoded and recognized as error free one character is displayed If both characters are received in error the underscore _ character is displayed 222 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 SITOR ARQ SITOR ARQ is a simplex system where both stations transmit alternately on the same frequency The CCIR recommendation 476 3 defines a cycle of 450 ms and the two stations are designated as fol lows gt ISS information sending station gt IRS information receiving station The WAVECOM software always decodes the information of the ISS station Parameter Value Operation modes Simplex ARQ 100 0 ed SITOR systems almost exclusively operate at a symbol rate of 100 Baud and with a shift of 170 Hz After the receiver has been correctly tuned the SITOR mode may be started by selecting a baud rate Fully automatic tuning to the signal center and shift may be achieved by selecting the Auto bu
477. tches to the corresponding mode decoder using the corrected center frequency MFSK Analysis The MFSK analysis for the HF signal range employs a graphical display in two dimensions frequency y axis and time x axis Both values may be preset This tool was originally developed for the analysis of analogue tone call systems but is equally suitable for evaluation of FSK and MFSK systems In particular the frequency and element duration is well displayed After starting MFSK Analysis the detected frequency values are displayed as pixels A monitored MFSK signal is easily recognized as stable lines To stop the display from scrolling horizontal ly click on the display Measurement cursors for both the time axis and the frequency axis appear The display may be scrolled backwards with a maximum range of 15 seconds when tracking rate is set to 1 ms and 225 seconds when the tracking rate is set to 15ms The scroll back range for all tracking rate set tings in between varies accordingly KA WAVECOM W CODE W CODE MFSK Card 1 SA pP File HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite FAX amp Modems Options Demodulator mien Configuration View Window Help MFSK Analysis HF Tracking Rate 2 ms Filter 10 00 ms 21 39 38 Mode Analysis ma 2 R Ree o GO 500 804 735 666 510 l 213 403 4 297 403 510 I l l 1 I 1 I I l 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3250 3500 3750 4000 Hz
478. ted Aloha TDMA system full duplex Modulation FM SUB FFSK Symbol rate 1200 Bd 180 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 When traffic is low it is transmitted on the system channel but if it is heavy the base stations may auto matically set up additional traffic channels or local system channels The Mobitex 1200 frames consist of a frame header with a unique synchronization word base station identification traffic area identification and control flags followed by zero or more blocks of data max 32 blocks Each block consists of 6 bytes followed by an error correcting code Each system is identified by the unique 4 hexadecimal digit sync word The sync word is inverted for mo bile base communication The first data block the link header contains addressing information frame type id sequence number number of blocks in the frame and other control information Frames can either be data link frames used for the management of traffic or payload data frames called MRM frames The payload frames contain so called MPAKs i e Mobitex packets which can have a total length of 512 bits If the message is longer it is split into a number of sequences The first payload data block contains MPAK header information source and destination addresses sub scription flags packet class and packet type information and a timestamp if they are transmitted in the base to mobile direction The remote terminals do
479. ted when the station wishes to transmit When the ALE controller of a receiving station hears its own address or the address of the group to which it belongs it will stop the scanning and respond to the call The stations will then either switch to a low speed data exchange mode or to a high speed data FSK or PSK modem or to voice mode The MIL 188 141A signal is an 8 tone MFSK signal in the range 750 2500 Hz spaced 250 Hz apart Each tone symbol is 8 ms long corresponding to 125 Baud and represents three bits giving a bit rate of 375 bps The MIL 188 141A bit stream is structured in 24 bit frame which includes three bits preamble for the frame type and three 7 bit ASCII characters or just 21 bits unformatted binary data To increase robustness the 24 bit frame is Golay 24 12 encoded and then interleaved giving a total frame length of 48 bits 1 stuff bit Each 49 bit code word is transmitted three times one after another to combat burst interference In both specifications especially according to MIL 188 141B Appendix B the 21 bit ALE frame data can be encrypted before transmission This feature is named Link Protection The data may be encrypted accord ing to different classified application levels AL 1 to AL 4 Unencrypted data is transmitted with AL O The MIL 188 141A mode decoder processes the signal automatically after the center frequency is set It synchronizes the signal in both USB and LSB polarities There are two displa
480. tems the accuracy of the single frequencies has to be within 1 1 5 of the nominal value For ZVEI modes having nominal tone durations of 70 ms the duration of a single tone may vary 15 ms Decoding the selective calls is started by clicking on a system If transmission and system selection con form the call sign is displayed on the monitor In the Options menu a Time Stamp function can be ena bled to add date and time to each call Tone Allocation 246 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Tone duration 70 ms ZVEI VDEW The digital selective calling systems ZVEI and VDEW were defined for selective call and data transmission in the non public mobile land radio service The ZVEI system adheres to the recommendation AK SRDS 87 3D while the VDEW system was known as DIN45013 until 1992 The systems are identical on the physical layer Due to the special requirements of the VDEW some additional features where added to the ZVEI system Parameter Value Input format s AF IF Additional Info BCD Code ZVEI and VDEW digital selective calls differ in codeword inter pretation and BAK In the VDEW system it is possible to concatenate up to four telegrams The basic telegram Grundtelegramm is followed by one or more follow up telegrams Folgetelegramme The difference between both systems is the BAK Betriebsartenkennung VDEW uses the BAK to indicate follow up telegrams ZVEI does not Th
481. tents WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Additional Functions 294 License System Software ANd OPTtiOns ccceeeeeeeeecceceeccceccecccccccsecscssssesegs 294 LICENSES SIS Ma ea a ia 294 EMS Cra NA Nica 294 WAVECOM SOCIE SA A A AE do 296 roduc NA Aeon 296 WAVECOM Server Controlar aaa 296 SNORNCUEMaNAGE ara na A ea Oued a a a 298 Adding a shortcut to an existing installation oooccccccccnncnnnnnnnnnnnoo 298 Alani MONI Orare o 298 Deh OC UCI Nata da Ea 298 ODUIOMS ida ios de elas 300 A 300 RUIN dai 302 Sena NIK sand as ada 302 IMEROCUCHIOM a 302 Getting ota ted iaa 303 Status IO rFMacOH aaa 303 Remote CONtrO sra 304 AN 304 WAVECOM Data Formats 305 IP CONF TCP IP Data Format 305 IP PXGF TCP IP Data FO Mabinctomna alada Dala 305 OVERVIEW costat dd iia Dd dE die DNA 305 PXGF DESCRIPTION A A bes 305 THE PAGF CHUNK STRUCTURE caca a 305 APPLICATION NOTES armada aaa 306 DEFINITION OF CAUN Sisa ala 307 WAVECOM Data File Formation rosana 309 a a A o On IU cane vant A a a a tints eases 309 Data SUCESO 310 File Headers and Data Structures for Individual File Types 55 310 Appendix 318 ARDE Detalla rada 318 A GC ii winehandacaauesueand tay dade tunes siden dacwcca sien ener deteud lated hen deseenanierave 318 OUCSTIONS GCANSWEIS itiiit ver iametemeamatromneer rama neaeuer AA 328 Signal TALC a Gelato sera eee 328 GENECKal PP OR Un A 328 Ant nina INStalla tios aa aia 329 RECEIV
482. ter and remote W CLOUD devices as defined in the W CLOUD Networking section The process should only take a few se conds A Virtual Audio Cable and a soundcard are detected on the local computer The entry shows the type of product found as well as the serial number generated from part of the active MAC address of the comput er network interface and a counter Important If you see Error in the device field there is a problem with the soundcard driver or hard ware Try to reinstall the correct driver Windows Vista or Windows 7 Sound card inputs are only detected when a cable or microphone is plugged in If you connect a cable restart the WAVECOM server otherwise the devices will not be listed in the WAVECOM software Each device is identified by a unique serial number Thus the application is able to search for devices au tomatically this functionality is available for local as well as remote computers pressing the Connect button will start the process The selected entry is stored in the initialization file INI file for the card or device and no further entry is necessary when the application is restarted The settings may be changed at any time The system can be used in a network configuration This allows the system to be remotely controlled WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 First start e 47 Font Clicking Font opens a configuration window Mesteaad LET Pla Wingdings Bold Obli
483. tered view of the data base Filtering takes place accord ing to modulation type as selected from the menu list Show All will display all records 272 e Classifier Optional WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Help menu Pressing the Help menu will allow the user to display basic application information Data Base Fields The individual fields of the data base are described below Please be aware that certain fields are manda tory and must be filled an error message is displayed if such a field has not been filled A You have to specify a name Bandwidth Hz Baud Rate Bd or Symbol Rate Bd Codecheck Count Comments Decoder Name Modulation ITU Designator Minimum No of Carriers Minimum No of Chan nels Minimum No of Tones No of Carriers No of Channels No of Tones Pilot Frequency Hz Recognition disabled Shift Hz WAVECOM Decoder W PCIl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Enter the required receiver bandwidth for this signal Enter the channel rate in Bd For two condition signals e g FSK PSK 2 or CW the baud rate equals the bit rate including channel coding overhead if any For two condition signals without any overhead the baud rate equals the user or source bit rate The number of times the code check must be executed to obtain the desired confidence level A user free text field Enter the WAVECOM decoder mode used by the CCC Selected f
484. text Menu on page 63 It is possible to remove the tuning FFT or Sonagram in the View Menu Waterfall HF SUB DIR and SAT FFT Type Start Frequency End Freqeuncy Waterfall SUB Offset Frequency Bandwidth Waterfall DIR Offset Frequency Bandwidth 2 Offset Frequency Bandwidth 2 Waterfall SAT Offset Frequency Bandwidth 2 Offset Frequency Bandwidth 2 Sonagram A second widespread method for FFT display is the real time sonagram which displays the amplitude and frequency values produced by the FFT over time In the sonagram the signal amplitude is displayed by colour with different colours representing different amplitudes Sometimes this display is also called Spectrogram This amplitude related spectrum analysis mode offers many hints to the distribution of a signal spectrum The operation is numerically identical to the real time waterfall analysis and is simply a different method of visualisation 74 e Analysis Tools WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 WAVECOM W CODE Sonagram C CLO ALEA Fie HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Fax8 Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help Sonagram HF Window Hanning Period 50 ms Auto Avg 1 14 39 29 D pHga 4 mode Analysis v gt H 12 a LM 2 LF he o iam 0 Hz DHz EA o gt or A Sonagram Card 4 W CLOUD Bandwidth 1 Average Factor Window Type b Pe
485. the address at the beginning of a frame a message of any desired length may be sent In the case of numeric pagers digits are sent in BCD code while for alphanumeric pagers the message is trans mitted using 7 bit ASCII codes Add Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Info nfo sc info Info F1 F7 Idle Frames 32 9x32 288 bit 62 2 The example shows the transfer of a message of 350 bits in frame 3 The first 32 bits of frame 3 are the address codeword Add Then follow 4 1 2 frames equivalent to 9 x 32 bits which extend up to the next synch word SC The remaining 62 bits fit into frame O If the frame containing the end of a message is not required to send a new address it is filled with IDLE codes until a new address or a new synch word must be sent POCSAG mode uses direct frequency modulation Proper decoding is only possible from the receiver IF output POL ARQ POL ARQ is a full duplex system with two transmitting frequencies The system is based on the SITOR ARQ alphabet This alphabet having a 4 3 mark space ratio allows error detection Like all duplex systems POL ARQ initiates a request for repetition cycle RQ when transmission errors occur Parameter Value Operation modes Duplex ARQ Modulation FSK Symbol rate 100 150 and 200 Bd variable 30 650 Bd Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF POL ARQ operates at a symbol rate of 100 and 200 Bd on the radio link To synchronize to this
486. the decoder can be set to one of the signal configurations When the Confi dence value is greater than 95 i e 95 correct in a stable state the Frame Format is correct STANAG 4415 The NATO robust non hopping serial single tone mode with tone excision also known as STANAG 4415 transmits user data at 75 bps over severely degraded HF channels with large Doppler and multi path spreads Parameter Frequency range HF Operation modes Broadcast Simplex FEC Modulation 8 PSK Additional nf The on air waveform specified in this mode is identical to the 75 bps waveform of the MIL 188 110A serial mode The modulation uses 8 ary phase shift keying PSK on a single carrier frequency 1800 Hz Serial binary information raw data accepted at the line side input is converted into a single 8 ary PSK modulated output carrier at a symbol rate of 2400 Bd Each data transmission consists of four distinct phases The synchronization preamble phase the data phase the End Of Message EOM phase and the coder interleaver flush phase The preamble phase lasts for 0 6 seconds for zero or short interleaver settings and 4 8 seconds when the interleaver size is set to long This is followed by the data phase which consists of an unlimited number of interleaver blocks The raw user data accepted at 75 bps is first FEC Forward Error Correction encoded Then the bit stream is passed through an interleaver with a size of 10 9 90 bits size f
487. the missing data Additional information See SAT Settings on page 40 See SAT System on page 275 SAT C TDM SAT C TDMA SAT C EGC SAT C is a satellite based store and forward low speed message transmission system operating in the L band to forward direction and from return direction the mobile earth stations MES and in the C band to and from the land earth stations LES and network control stations NCS Parameter Value Frequency range L Band TDM C Band p _ _ Cems O O O O O O modes gt Broadcast Duplex FEC ARQ TDM TDMA FEC ARQ TDM TDMA Symbol rate 1200 Bd Mobile stations may be maritime land based or aeronautical The channel rate in both directions is 1200 symbols sec Error protection is achieved by convolutional encoding with R 1 2 and k 7 giving a user bit rate of 600 bps A block or frame of data in the forward direction TDM comprises 10368 symbols 8 64 s Data is highly interleaved to combat slow fades It is also scrambled to ensure an even distribution of logical 1s and Os for proper bit synchronization Frame synch is achieved by using an unscrambled unique word at the be ginning of the frame The coding will correct some errors otherwise ARQ is used The forward channels from the LES and NCS are continuous time division multiplex TDM channels and are used for message transmission and signaling 216 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3
488. the missing parameters For data signals without the initial handshake the user may force the modulation type in the case of V 22 V 26 V 27 V 29 and V 32 signals with a bit rate lower than 4800 bps Output Fax images and data are output to the display and may also be saved to disk The following formats are Supported Fax Images are saved in bitmap or compressed JPEG formats Handshake information is saved as a text file Data Transparent data Data in asynchronous character format no LAP protocol or data compression Decoded HDLC frames no LAP protocol recognized Decoded V 42 V 42bis MNP 4 and MNP 5 data WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Modem and FAX Modes e 293 Additional Functions License System Software and Options License System Options are marked with the word Option in the manual W61 License System CmStick SO oO W CODE License System W CODE and all options are provided with a CMStick CmStick In order to activate the application a software protection device must be connected to the computer The device is called a CmStick and is available as gt A small USB device gt APC Card CmCard M Cardbus 32 Bit gt An Express Card 34 CmCard E Without the appropriate valid licenses installed on the CmStick W CODE and its options will be disabled After the installation of the software on the computer the O icon will be presented in the tray icon area 294 e Addit
489. the number of samples used for the calculations If you wish to use a different number of samples in the calculation place the mouse on the waterfall sam ple from which calculation should start and hold and drag the mouse over as many samples as you want to use The marked samples will be color inverted cursors will appear in the graph window and the graph display will show the average or peak value of the marked samples To disable peak or average measurement uncheck it in the Options menu the cursors will disappear on ly one sample is marked in the waterfall window and updating of the graph window will resume Examine Sample Display Cursors Click on the baudrate or the spectrum graph window to display the cursors or click on the sample in the waterfall window that you wish to examine Graph window updates will stop and a pair of cursors will ap pear You may move the cursors along the x axis in normal Windows fashion The matching waterfall sample is marked with the time cursor Click on the graph window again to remove the cursors and resume graph window updates Zoom Right click with the mouse into the spectrum To adjust the frequency scale move the cur or baudrate graph pane upper panes and se sor into the range of the frequency scale If lect if you like to Zoom 2X or or to Zoom 4X you see the Hand press the left mouse but ton and move the frequency slider 0 W CODE Baudrate Card1 Taz 10
490. the text lines that include at least one alarm string will immediately be saved in a separate text file alm located anywhere on the network The detected text line will also be presented on the Alarm Monitor display If selected an audible alert will be generated gt Forwarding of the alarm text If enabled each message raising an alarm will be saved in another text file sms anywhere on the network This function allows the message to be forwarded via SMS Short Message Service The alarm monitor can not perform the sending of the SMS mes Sage a third party product is required for this The Configuration menu is used to configure the hardware and to customize the Alarm Monitor display to any font size and color Connect to any decoder on your network All settings are automatically saved The Alarm Monitor will automatically use these settings the next time it is started Exception The computer name and the card number will be overwritten if you run the Alarm Monitor directly from the WAVECOM decoder GUI Alarm Monitor also inherits its settings from the decoder Setup If you plan to connect to a device installed in a PC other than the one on which you have installed Alarm Monitor Server Control or the WAVECOM software must be running on that PC Connect the Alarm Monitor to any WAVECOM devices located in any computer on your local network If you do not connect to a card located in your local PC enter the name of the r
491. three blocks when working at 250 Baud Like DUP ARQ 2 DUP FEC 2 has many special blocks for IDLE and RQ WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 149 DZVEI The entire call number is transmitted by consecutive tones in decade sequence When two identical digits are to be transmitted consecutively then an eleventh frequency is used as a repetition identifier Parameter Value Frequency range VHF UHF Operation modes Analogue Selcal Modulation FM SUB Tones Receiver settings FM BW 12 kHz Input format s AF IF If more than two identical digits are to be transmitted the repetition tone is appended to the digit tone e g 22222 is transmitted as f2 fw f2 fw f2 where f2 is the tone for 2 and fw is the repetition tone In most systems the accuracy of the single frequencies has to be within 1 1 5 of the nominal value For ZVEI modes having nominal tone durations of 70 ms the duration of a single tone may vary 15 ms Decoding the selective calls is started by clicking on a system If transmission and system selection con form the call sign is displayed on the monitor In the Options menu a Time stamp function can be enabled to add date and time to each call Tone Allocation Tone duration 70 ms EEA The entire call number is transmitted by consecutive tones in decade sequence When two identical digits are to be transmitted consecutively then an eleventh frequency is used as
492. time bands and also in the fixed service bands More Information is available on http www globewireless com HC ARQ HC ARQ is a simplex system operating at a symbol rate of 240 Bd on the radio link WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 165 Parameter Value Frequency range Operation modes Simplex ARQ Additional Inf HC ARQ does not use a fixed timing cycle so data blocks of the information sending station ISS and the acknowledgement blocks of the information receiving station IRS have no fixed timing frame Synchronization is achieved by a long bit sequence at the start of each block The start sequence consists of the bit pattern 1000 1011 10101 0010 and 16 subsequent control bits After the start sequence sixty ITA 2 characters and 32 check bits for each block follow HC ARQ may be set to one of three data block lengths with 30 60 or 180 characters 150 300 or 900 da ta bits However the system is not adaptive and the block length must be set to the same value by both stations before transmissions start HC ARQ was originally intended for use in telephone line based data transmission but it is also found on short wave HF ACARS HF Data Link HFDL protocols are defined in the ARINC Aeronautical Radio Inc Specification 635 3 published on December 29 2000 The development of HF Data Link service builds on the experiences of ACARS Aircraft Communications Addressing and Re
493. tion a short help text is displayed on the system status bar Depending on the active mode buttons for which the corresponding function is not available are grayed WAVECOM Toolbar Mode Analysis gt i SAMA MX 0 The selection of the most important decoder functions is facilitated by toolbar buttons Operation is identi cal to the use of the menu bar If the mouse is resting for more than approximately half a second on a button a label with the name of the function is displayed tool tip In addition a short help text is displayed on the system status bar Depending on the active mode buttons for which the corresponding function is not available are grayed Mode Mode Selector Analysis Analysis Selector a5 Back go to last decoding or analysis mode History select one of the last decoding or analysis modes from this drop down menu WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 First start e 59 jy nn na a EFR A e ARQ E FFT HF Clear Go Forward in the history list after going back in the history list nu Classifier CL Tae Classifier Code Check a Start Stop Classifer a FSK Auto Tuning dd FSK Analysis FFT Analysis Sonagram Analysis Waterfall Analysis Resync Mode 2 y L gt Toggle Letter Figure F FE Maximize Passband A oh Media Player Recorder REC Live Voice W CLOUD Device Settings to show traffic statistics of a W CLOUD device and to enable disable the Ea output of sign
494. tion in addition to the call signs gt Frame types are indicated by I S or U gt S frame status messages e g Receiver Ready RR Receiver Not Ready RNR or Reject REJ are displayed gt In the third field the transmit and receive sequence numbers are displayed This number ranges from rO to r7 or sO to s7 The sequence number indicates to the opposite station which packets have been received free of errors The large volume of available radio amateur literature is recommended for further study of the packet ra dio system 196 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 PACKET 9600 PACKET 9600 may be monitored in the amateur UHF and SHF bands 2400 Baud transmissions are rare Some digipeaters support two modes PACKET 1200 and PACKET 9600 Parameter Value Symbol rate 2400 4800 and 9600 Bd Receiver settings FM BW 15 kHz side icine Additional Info ITA 5 with block coding Amateur AX 25 System To start PACKET 9600 select a baud rate The correct shift may be set in the Demodulator menu The default value for the shift is 4800 Hz As PACKET 9600 uses direct FSK modulation the offset frequency pre selection is equal to the center fre quency of the IF input Some digipeaters offset their transmit frequency up to 1 000 Hz from their normal frequency and this introduces many reception errors The frequency offset is compensated by changing the offset frequency The packet radio p
495. tions instead of using the mouse LAN Local Area Network 336 e Glossary of Terms WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 LES Land Earth Station LNA Low Noise Amplifier Loop A section of a program that runs repeatedly until a limit or condition is met such as a variable reaching a specified ending value Mark Application Condition Condition Voltage to signal ground Negative Positive FSK signal state Lower frequency Higher frequency MATLAB MATLABO is a well established high performance language for technical computing It integrates compu tation visualization and programming in an easy to use environment where problems and solutions are expressed in familiar mathematical notation Menu bar A horizontal strip that appears at the top of the screen and contains menu pads Menu name A word phrase or icon on the menu bar that designates one menu Selecting the menu pad highlights the name and causes the menu options to appear Menu options Commands found on menus that perform specific actions When you choose a menu option you are tell ing the program what action to take Menu pads The menu names found on the menu bar Menu system The combination of the menu bar menu pads menus and menu options MES Mobile Earth Station WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Glossary of Terms e 337 MFSK Multi Frequency Shift Keying Minimize
496. tive translation table Pressing Undo will replace the new user selected values in the dialog box with the values stored for the current alphabet gt The Update List is used to add the user created alphabets to the list of alphabets By pressing the Update List button the Alphabet directory is searched for xml files related to new alphabet If a new one is found the list and the Alphabet combo box are updated gt The Alphabet combo box shows the names of all translation tables By selecting an entry the stored data for the specific translation table are displayed Note that the most recent changes to the current alphabet are not saved until Save is pressed Select the font that is used to display the translation tables by pressing Font gt The Alphabet list control left list displays the characters defined for the current alphabet The first column shows the position index in the alphabet for the characters The second column Cur rent shows the currently defined value of the character at the selected position The third column New shows the user defined character value By pressing the Save button the Current value becomes the New value gt The Font list control right list displays all the characters defined in the selected font The first column shows the decimal or hex character value The second column Symbol shows the char acter Selected characters are copied to the selected rows in the Alphabet list by pressing the Ar
497. to a single ground station This is denoted by an ASCII character in the range to in the Mode field of the downlink message mn The ground station may use either 2 or the range Category A but may uplink to in the Mode field to in the Mode field All ground stations support The WAVECOM software translates the ground station address also called the Logical Channel Number into a number in the range 0 29 A station will transmit after having monitored the HF channel for traffic otherwise it waits until the chan nel is clear If a collision occurs between the packets of two stations transmitting at the same time they will back off and new transmission intervals will be set by random interval timers in the radio equipment At the receiving end a block check calculation is made and compared to the calculation appended to the packet by the transmitting station If the downlink messages contain errors no response will be given and the transmitting station will retransmit the packet a number of times until a positive acknowledgement is received and the message can be deleted from storage or the aircrew be alerted to its non transmission If an uplink message is found in error the airborne equipment will generate a negative acknowledgement NAK which triggers an uplink retransmission Retransmission is also triggered by timeout Positive acknowledgement from the aircraft consists of the transmission of the Uplink Bl
498. to do ALS when the same signal is connected to one input For other audio devices e g soundcards only manual gain adjustment by the slider is available The input gain can be adjusted between O and 100 of the nominal input sensitivity of the selected input When the gain has been adjusted to the desired level press OK to save the setting The adjustment is valid only for the selected input The gain setting for each input is separately saved in the application initialization file Gain adjustment should never cause the red bars of the level indicator to be lit Gain adjustment for soundcard Favorites Menu Configuration Open Save As WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 First start e 45 The Favorites menu lets the user save and reload a mode and its corresponding settings i e mode al phabet center frequency baud rate etc The settings are saved in a WFV file Open 2 Open CODE OO J Computer OS C Transfer v Organize v New folder Je Downloads Recent Places ME Desktop Libraries W CODE V7 0 0 A Rolf Haenggi Read Update 12 11 2010 No preview da Computer gt available amp 05 c DVD RW Drive E rolf haenggi wc UserShares M amp company wc N amp audio wc O BAUDOT2 wfv File name BAUDOT2 wfv v WAVECOM Favorite Files wfv v Cancel Select Open to reload the settings
499. to ship broadcast sys tem WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 231 Parameter Value Operation modes Broadcast Simplex FEC Modulation BPSK Symbol rate 2400 Bd Receiver settings Data CW USB LSB Signal source s AF IF The modulation technique used in this mode is based on the operating conditions encountered by naval broadcasts The technology utilizes binary phase shift keying BPSK of a single tone 1800 Hz sub carrier with a con stant modulation speed of 2400 Bd Through the use of BPSK modulation and a FEC coding rate of 1 4 the effective user data rate is 300 bps Baud Rate User data rate bps Bits per symbol M PSK FEC coding rate Interleaver 2400 1 BPSK The user data is transmitted using a continuous frame structure with 213 33 ms per frame Each frame starts with a preamble containing 80 symbols The following 176 symbols are divided into four 32 symbol data segments and three 16 symbol channel probe segments The 176 symbol data probe segment immediately follows the next frame beginning with the same 80 symbol preamble This repeated frame structure enables synchronization of the demodulator at any time of transmission pena T 213 33 MS gt 3 16 32 16 gt gt 16 Preamble Block Block2 Block3 Block4 io Preamble symbols 32 Data symbols 16 Channel probe symbols At the en
500. ton in the WAVECOM Toolbar gt RAW DATA the output consists of synchronized and demodulated multichannel symbols in hex adecimal representation Every symbol consists of 32 bits 16 channels 2 bits channel TEXT DATA the demodulator output is processed into readable text TEXT amp RAW DATA if possible the decoder decodes into readable text otherwise it outputs the demodulated multichannel symbols as RAW DATA gt 7 or 8 bit ASCII CODAN 9001 can use a 7 bit or an 8 bit alphabet the choice being made by selecting the appropriate radio button The 7 bit alphabet is often used in transmissions handled by the CODAN 9102 software The data is presented in two ways hexadecimal form and ASCII form At the beginning of every line the user can find the following information about the channel data packet gt CRC OK or CRC NOK not O K gt SEQ Nr Sequence number a counter from zero up to the length of the packet gt ARQ Nr ARQ number used from the modems to request packets not received correctly At the end of a packet some statistical data is stored In secure mode the channel data packet output is adapted as the secure interactive packets have a Slightly different structure The extended preamble gives an indication as to whether the transmission is a group or broadcast call The frame type shown in the decoder status bar indicates if the current package is ACK IDLE or DATA If a data package with a known length
501. tored in the file header is Classifier Header data This file type uses the File Header described in chapter File Header on page 309 The following additional data is stored in the Header gt In Pad 0 Timestamp format how to show timestamp in classifier textview O Timestamp off 1 show Timestamp in Local time 2 show Timestamp in Universal Time Coordinated UTC WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 WAVECOM Data Formats e 311 Data This FileType uses the data structure described in chapter Data Structures on page 310 to store the da ta A data package in the WDA file contains the data of one classified signal The signal data of a signal detected by the classifier is written to a single string The following values are written to the string gt Signal the signal name displayed in the GUI e g Signal 1 gt Mode the mode name e g CW MORSE gt Modulation the modulation e g F1B gt Center frequency the center frequency value including the unit e g 1846 5Hz gt Shift the shift value including the unit e g 926 4HZ gt Baudrate the baud rate value including the label if available e g 158 7Bd otherwise unclassified gt Bandwidth the bandwidth value including the unit e g 922 7HZ gt Confidence the confidence value including the unit e g 51 gt Mode the mode value gt Center the center frequency valu
502. tructed to facilitate synchronism To maintain synchronism special idle or sync characters are transmitted when no traffic is transmitted In contrast to start stop systems only elements having a duration of an integer multiple of the duration of the minimum signal element are used isochronous sequence For burst mode or packet transmissions a leading preamble of either a sequence of alternating zeros and ones and a repeated fixed pattern in satellite transmission called a Unique Word is often used for synchronization purposes A very common way of combined synchronization and packet delimiting is to pre cede and terminate the data packet with so called flags e unique bit patterns not being a part of the data proper Flags are characteristics of HDLC High level Data Link Control which is used in amateur radio packet communication and in AIS Multiplexing and Multiple Access Another method is to transmit more than one channel on a radio link This may be achieved either in the frequency or time domain or a combination of the two When the aggregation of channels is done before the modulation process it is Known as multiplexing When several independent stations access a medium is the term multiple access is applied A well known example of multiple access is Ethernet LANs where all nodes have access to the same medium With frequency division multiplexing FDM or frequency division multiple access FDMA a carri er frequenc
503. tton The SITOR 7 bit alphabet employs a 3 4 mark space ratio The ISS transmits blocks of 210 ms duration each containing 21 bits In turn the IRS transmits acknowledgement bursts with a duration of 70 ms If the ISS does not receive an acknowledgement a block containing the RQ character is sent In the case of blocks being received in error by the IRS the last data block sent is repeated SITOR AUTO Fully automatic tuning to signal center shift and transmission modes SITOR ARQ Mode A and SITOR FEC Mode B may be achieved by selecting SITOR AUTO mode SITOR FEC The SITOR FEC mode is used in broadcast applications where a return channel is not required or unavaila ble Two sub modes are in use General broadcasting to a number of stations and selective addressing of only one station Parameter Value Frequency range Operation modes FSK Broadcast Simplex FEC FS Symbol rate 100 0 Bd Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF SITOR FEC transmissions are used in maritime radio communication to distribute traffic lists news safety and weather information Amateurs also use the FEC mode for calls to all CQ calls WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 223 The selective FEC is used when the receiving station must operate under radio silence conditions and hence cannot transmit In most cases SITOR FEC transmissions uses a rate of 100 Baud using the standard
504. uct gt Each mode has a XML file containing its corresponding settings In addition to frequency entries the watch list desired services NCSC Auto status only for SAT C TDM and demodulators used only for SAT AERO P are stored in these files The illustration below shows an example of a XML file for the SAT C TDM mode including watch list and memory positions lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt SATSettingsList gt lt SATSettings CardSerialNo 0704078620 NCSCAuto 0On gt lt Service gt DATA lt Service gt lt Freqlist gt lt Entry Name test Value 1539544000 gt lt Entry Name TDM TRAF Value 1539995000 gt lt Entry Name aorencsc Value 1541450000 gt lt Entry Name SAT C TDM EGC Value 1541450000 gt lt Freqlist gt lt MesIDWatchlist All no gt lt MesIDList Active yes gt lt MesID gt 12345 lt MesID gt lt MesID gt 212121 lt MesID gt lt MesID gt 6789 lt MesID gt lt MesIDList gt lt MesIDRangeList gt MesIDRange Active no Begin 0 End 0 gt lt MesIDRange Active no Begin 0 End 0 gt lt MesIDRange Active no Begin 0 End 0 gt lt MesIDRange Active no Begin 0 End 0 gt lt MesIDRange Active no Begin 0 End 0 gt 62 e First start WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 For SAT AERO P a frequency entry contains the demodulator used on a particular frequency lt Entry Name aero5 Value 154
505. umbers either by typing the numbers or clicking the UP and DOWN arrow keys 340 e Glossary of Terms WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 String An item of information consisting of a sequence of text characters SW Software TDM Time Division Multiplex TDMA Time Division Multiple Access Text editing window A window in which text is displayed and can be scrolled Text editor The part of the software that allows you to modify text files Text file A file which contains information expressed in text form and whose contents are interpreted as characters encoded using the ASCII format Thumb A gray box in the scroll bar that indicates the relative position in the text If you want to move through the text rapidly you can drag the thumb up and down Unicode Font The Unicode standard is intended to provide a unique universal and uniform encoding for each character in all living languages plus a few dead ones One font WAVECOM Unicode is automatically installed on your computer Other Unicode fonts with are available on the market Unlock To remove the restriction on the use of a disk or a file so that it can be changed deleted or renamed Utility Transmission in RTTY or FAX W XX Stands for a WAVECOM product code like W PCI W PCle W CODE W61PC W 51PC W41PC or W40PC Wildcard A character that may be used to represent a sequence of characters in a path name A c
506. user data in BI NARY HEX ASCII ASYNC ASCII ASYNC 7 Data bits and No Stop bit or ASCII SYNC format selected from Options Message Type The decoder stops displaying data after the EOM bit pattern is received In the HEX display mode the decoded binary data is just displayed as it is MSB first In ASCII ASYNC mode the bit stream is correlated with an ASCII ASYNC structure i e one start bit 0 8 data bits and at least one stop bit 1 The 8 data bits are displayed LSB first In addition to the EOM pattern the display will stop if more than 300 NULL characters are received or if the asynchronous data structure is violated more than 80 times In ASCII ASYNC 7 data bits and no stop bit mode the bit stream is correlated with another ASYNC struc ture e one start bit 0 and 7 data bits The 7 data bits are displayed LSB first In addition to the EOM pattern the display will stop if more than 300 NULL characters are received In ASCII SYNC mode each 8 bits LSB first represent one ASCII character The display will stop if the EOM pattern is received or if more than 20 NULL characters are received Tuning the decoder The decoder can process signals in both SSB settings USB and LSB The sideband is selected by toggling the polarity field of the display NOR means USB and INV means LSB The center frequency of the decoder is set to the default value of 1700 Hz but can be adjusted within a range from 800Hz to 2400Hz Small
507. using the SHA hash function The input for the SHA hash function is de fined within the WAVECOM software and cannot be changed by the user General information about cryptography and other software that is using Crypto is listed on this web site http www mobiuslinks com links asp sid 1 WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Additional Functions e 297 Important Export of this software from the United States may require a specific license from the United States government It is the responsibility of any person or organization contemplating export to obtain such a license before exporting Certain parts of this software may be protected by patents It is the users responsibility to obtain the appropriate licenses before using these parts About a We WAVECOM Server Control W CODE Nie Copyright 1995 2013 WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG 8 All rights reserved Card Type W CODE i Release 8 3 00 p Build 8107 29 May 2013 i Server Version 1 2 Protocol Version 1 0 This screen displays information on software version build number and release date for the installed ap plication Shortcut Manager Adding a shortcut to an existing installation Adding a shortcut to an existing installation does not require re installation of the software Follow the steps below to proceed with the installation Start the Shortcut Manager via the start menu W Shortcut Manager ml Number of short
508. vecom software especially hacking and reverse engineering of the product is prohibited The damage occurred thereby will be passed on to the user as pointed out in article 3 of these License Terms 5 Any Wavecom software may not be copied without the consent of Wavecom WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Appendix e 331 Manufacturer Address WAVECOM ELEKTRONIK AG Hammerstrasse 8 CH 8180 Buelach Switzerland Phone 41 44 872 70 60 Fax 41 44 872 70 66 E mail info wavecom ch Web www wavecom ch 332 e Appendix WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Glossary of Terms Active window The window on the screen where the next action will take place The active window is indicated by a col ored title bar and border AF IN The AF input has a range of O 16 000 Hz This input should be used when the source is an AF output line or speaker or a 12 0 or 12 5 kHz IF output used in professional digital recorders Alert A warning or notice of an error in the form of a message a sound from the computer s speaker or both AMBE Advanced Multi Band Excitation speech coding ANSI An acronym for the American National Standards Institute an organization that sets standards for a varie ty of programming languages and systems AOR Atlantic Ocean Region APC Adaptive Predictive Coding ARQ Automatic repeat request ARQ or automatic repeat query is an error control method f
509. ved in comparison to uncom pressed ASCII Looking purely at monitoring the Huffman code has the disadvantage that compression synchronization may be lost during propagation disturbances and so the remaining text in the data block is also lost Detailed descriptions of the PACTOR protocols can be obtained in the radio amateur literature It must however be pointed out that real world PACTOR implementations differs considerably from these descrip tions Options CRC Recognition The detected CRC is displayed in the decoder status bar see CRC Recogni tion on page 34 Using Options CRC Table a certain CRC mask can be defined see CRC Table on page 34 PACTOR FEC PACTOR FEC is a bit synchronous simplex system and is based on PACTOR Parameter The PACTOR FEC data block consists of three sections Header data and control status and 16 bit CRC At 100 Bd the data field is 64 bits and at 200 Bd it increases to 160 bits Block coding is performed ac cording to the CCITT standard starting with the data section 198 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 In contrast to PACTOR all data blocks are in consecutive order with no or little space between them They are several variants on the market The baud rate is fixed to 100 or 200 Bd PACTOR FEC is used for broadcast transmission and is recognized by the FSK Code Check or Classifier Code Check PACTOR II With PACTOR II a modern n
510. venth frequency is used as a repetition identifier Parameter Value Frequency range VHF UHF Operation modes Analogue Selcal Modulation FM SUB Tones Receiver settings FM BW 12 kHz Input format s AF IF If more than two identical digits are to be transmitted the repetition tone is appended to the digit tone e g 22222 is transmitted as f2 fw f2 fw f2 where f2 is the tone for 2 and fw is the repetition tone In most systems the accuracy of the single frequencies has to be within 1 1 5 of the nominal value Decoding the selective calls is started by clicking on a system If transmission and system selection con form the call sign is displayed on the monitor In the Options menu a Time stamp function can be ena bled to add date and time to each call Tone Allocation Digit Hz ee CO e IC E PA ESA E S Tone duration 33 ms ERMES ERMES is a Europe wide high speed paging system with a user data rate of 6250 bps in comparison to POCSAG which has a maximum rate of 2400 bps ERMES radio data may be transmitted using frequency or time multiplexing or both All transfer modes do however utilize the same modulation format on the same frequency ERMES is used in several European countries whereas Asian countries tend use FLEX as standard which is a technically comparable Motorola system Parameter Value Receiver settings FM BW 15 30 kHz AREE 152 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLO
511. which packets have been received free of errors The large volume of available radio amateur literature is recommended for further study of the packet ra dio system PACKET 300 PACKET 300 is mainly used by radio amateurs Very seldom 600 Baud test transmissions may be heard On HF SSB modulation LSB or USB is standard Parameter Value Frequency range HF Operation modes Duplex FEC TDMA Symbol rate 300 and 600 Bd variable 30 650 Bd Receiver settings DATA CW LSB or USB Input format s AF IF Additional Info ITA 5 with block coding amateur AX 25 System The packet radio protocol is a derivative of the X 25 and HDLC computer network protocols Packet radio is a synchronous system in which data is transmitted in ASCII character packets At the start and end of each block a control character or flag 01111110 is sent The address can consist of up to 80 characters but 16 or 24 character addressing is common when using direct connections or a single repeater The packet protocol distinguishes between three frame types I Information S Supervisory and U Un numbered Payload data transfer uses I frames or very rarely U frames S and U frames are used for transmission control The data field can contain up to 256 characters All characters and character combinations are permitted Since transmission is transparent A checksum is sent in the FCS field The status field contains three fields with connection status informa
512. wide system for handling maritime emer gency and safety transmissions Part of the system is DSC Digital Selective Calling Each user of the GMDSS is assigned a nine digit number MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identity from the mobile mari time service 3 digits of this number are used as a country code DSC is used on HF and VHF On HF the system is working with 100 baud and a shift of 170 Hz Parameter Selecting Options Display offers the option of an ASCIT or RAW bits display The complex structures of the DSC are described in detail in the ITU Rec M 493 11 GMDSS DSC VHF GMDSS Global Maritime Distress and Safety System is a worldwide system for handling maritime emer gency and safety transmissions Part of the system is the DSC Digital Selective Calling Each user of the GMDSS is assigned a nine digit number MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identity from the mobile maritime service 3 digits of this number are used as a country code Parameter Value VHF UHF Frequency range Operation modes Broadcast Simplex 160 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Parameter Value Modulation FM SUB FSK Symbol rate 1200 Bd Additional Info ITA 5 DSC is used on HF and VHF On VHF the symbol rate is 1200 baud and the center frequency is 1700 Hz and the shift is 800 Hz Selecting Options Display offers the option of an ASCII or RAW bits display The complex structures of the DS
513. xadecimal characters have been received In ASCII ASYNC mode the bit stream is searched with an ASCII ASYNC structure i e one start bit 0 8 data bits and at least one stop bit 1 The 8 data bits are transmitted LSB first In addition to the EOM pattern the display will stop if more than 300 NULL characters are received or if the async data structure is violated more than 80 times In ASCII ASYNC 7 Data bits and O Stop bit mode the bit stream is searched with another ASYNC structure i e one start bit 0 7 data bits The 7 data bits are transmitted LSB first In addition to the EOM pattern the display will stop if more than 300 NULL characters are received In ASCII SYNC mode each 8 bits LSB first represent one ASCII character The display will stop if the EOM pattern is received or if more than 20 NULL characters are received Tuning the decoder The decoder processes the signal in both SSB settings USB and LSB The sideband can be selected with the Polarity option in the menu NOR means USB and INV means LSB signal The center frequency of the decoder should be set to 1800 Hz when the receiver is correctly tuned to the sending station Small frequency variations are automatically compensated for in the decoder The center frequency of the decoder can be adjusted to 400 Hz from its normal setting By using the bar graph any remaining frequency difference can be compensated for by fine tuning of the receiver frequency or by
514. ximum frame length is used for decoding gt Automatic LSR initialization Secure and Unsecure handles both the secure and unsecure transmission cases an unsecure transmission is automatically recognized In the secure case the decoder calculates the start value WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Transmission Modes e 135 gt Custom defined LSR initialization for derandomization expects a seven digit hexadecimal value for initialization note that it is important to enter leading zeros This option should be used if the initialization value is known or if it is not possible to calculate the value automatically due to poor signal conditions The CODAN 9001 decoder has the following output options gt Store channel data The channel data output is very useful for analysis purposes In the channel data output every channel packet is stored in a file C Users Public Documents WAVECOM W61PC Data Output CODAN9001 SN gt Enable frame status messages It is possible to activate frame status messages with the rele vant checkbox The frame status messages are printed in the decoder output They show PREAM BLE FOUND and EXTENDED PREAMBLE FOUND gt Decompress The user can control the decompressor and the channel data output Please refer the section Compressed Mode specifics for further information on Compressed Mode The user can set the decoder decompressor into the initial state with the Mode Resync but
515. xplanatory Decoding Process 4 and 5 complete the classification and code checking steps by automatically switching to decod ing of the assumed mode In the case that a sampling spectrum contains multiple signals and without any preference set in Code Check Settings Signal 1 is automatically selected for decoding otherwise the preference checked will determine the selection for decoding Classifier Code Check Editor The Classifier Code Check CCC option which allows automatic classification and subsequent decoding of monitored signals is based on automatic parameter measurements These code base measurements may however be replaced by or be expanded with table based parameters The table records are con tained in a XML database file which can be edited by the user using the CCC Editor Installation The CCC Editor is a stand alone application CCC Editor exe which is installed in C Program Files WAVECOM CCCEditor If an older version of the CCC Editor exists on the host on which an installation is attempted the user must uninstall the existing version At installation time the default data file is installed as CCC lt DateCreated gt DB xml in C Users Public PublicDocuments WAVECOM CCC Code Tables The user may add any number of data base files using any file name the extension must however always be XML as long as the files are cor rectly formatted XML files consistent with the code table schema Using this editor c
516. y gt O Main Freq 426 700 MHz 416 700 MHz MCC 228 MNC 8889 LA 1 HF Modes VHF UHF DIR VHF UHF SUB Satellite Modems Options Demodulator Favorites Configuration View Window Help NOR Traffic ecurity class 1 gt 6 BAMA 2 Rd om _ Confidence 100 12 57 22 4000 Hz 4000 Hz Neighbour s 427 525 CALL STARTED lt Slot Mode 1 2 3 a Mode TMO TMO TMO TMO TMO TMO TMO TMO TMO TMO TMO TMO 105 2 106 105 3 106 2 105 Source z 2 100458 100396 3 2 100458 100396 3 100458 2 1 784987 Destination Date 17 11 2010 17 11 2010 17 11 2010 VEIA 2040 17 11 2010 17 11 2010 17 11 2010 17 11 2010 17 11 2010 17 11 2010 17 11 2010 17 11 2010 Time 12 55 02 12 55 04 12 55 02 12 55 05 12 55 06 12 55 08 12 55 06 12 55 09 12 55 10 12 55 10 1225500 2 125595211 Status ALLOCATED File 2340590122 20101117_125501_ TETRA _TMO VOICE_3 wav 2340590122 20101117_125501_ TETRA TMO VOICE_2 wav 2340590122 20101117_125502_ TETRA _TMO VOICE _160 wav 2340590122 20101117 _125502 TETRA TMO VOICE _159 wav 2340590122 20101117_125506_TETRA TMO VOICE 3 wav 2340590122 20101117 _125506_TETRA_TMO VOICE 2 wav 2340590122 20101117 _125506_TETRA_TMO VOICE_160 wav 2340590122 20101117 _125507_TETRA_TMO VOICE _159 wav 2340590122 20101117_125510_ TETRA _TMO VOICE _3 wav 2340590122 20101117_125510 TETRA TMO VOICE_160 wav 2340590122 20101117_125510 TETRA TMO VOICE_
517. y which may exhibit various characteristics gt A large number of closely spaced vertical lines indicates a very small period 7 to 15 bits gt Small and asymmetric peaks indicate that a distinct periodicity is not present The presence of such small peaks may however be an indication of a very long period gt In the case of a very noisy graph periodicity cannot be determined without the zoom function Such measurements indicate the fact that the system is transmitting data traffic state The user Should then wait for an idle state or for some request RQ cycles for closer examination gt The graphic display only shows approximate wave forms This peculiarity is often evident in the case of simplex systems however an approximate determination is still possible gt Inthe case of a horizontal line without any peaks or deviations no periodicity may be deduced or the period is much larger than the total number of sampled data bits 90 e Analysis Tools WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Each mode and each signal can produce very different displays Often it is possible to determine a perio dicity with the zoom function For FSK signals the polarity is changed from the menu Options Signal Polarity and then using the buttons in the window shown For more information see Signal Polarity on page 38 For PSK signals the configuration of the symbol definition is in the menu Options Symbol Definition
518. y is modulated with a number of sub carriers Each sub carrier carries a data signal The sub carriers may be amplitude frequency or phase modulated The more common is narrow shift frequency modulation Each channel is independent of the otherones and may transmit with a different speed or use a different alphabet or system One such system used in HF communications is the CODAN 16 carrier QPSK system With time division multiplexing TDM or time division multiple access TDMA each data source is allowed access to the aggregate channel line or radio link in well defined time slots To keep pace with the incoming bit stream the aggregate channel speed must be the sum of the speed of the individual channels All channels must have identical speeds However a channel subdivision scheme has been standardized so that up to four sub channels may share one channel An example is the ARQ M2 and M4 modes In satellite systems a combination of FDMA and TDMA is often used to optimize channel usage DAMA Demand Assigned Multiple Access satellite systems are an example of this type of multiple access Polarization division multiplexing is used in satellite communications whereby differently polarized signals use the same frequency leading to frequency reuse Inmarsat earth station satellite links in C band use this type of multiplexing The overwhelming majority of radio data systems will transmit the individual bits of a codeword one after the othe
519. y modes selected the in Dis play Mode menu All Frames and Valid Frames Only The first option just displays the frames without checking if the ALE protocol is strictly observed the second option displays the frames according to the ALE protocol defined according to MIL 188 141B Appendix A which is backwards compatible to MIL 188 141A In both options the frame data can be displayed in ASCII HEX or both ASCII and HEX formats This can be set by using the Display menu Only unencrypted data can be displayed correctly with the mode decoder For protected application data according to MIL 188 141B Appendix B Link Protection the display may be meaningless because a us er specific key is necessary for data decryption MIL 188 141B Appendix C MIL 188 141B Appendix C defines the third generation 3G high frequency HF radio technology includ ing advanced automatic link establishment ALE automatic link maintenance and high performance data link protocols This advanced technology improves on the performance of previous similar techniques e g 2G ALE The specification is issued by the US Department of Defense DoD in the Interface Standard Interoperability and Performance Standards for Medium and High Frequency Radio Systems ist March 1999 Parameter Frequency range 178 e Transmission Modes WAVECOM Decoder W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Manual V8 3 00 Parameter Value Operation modes Broadcast Simplex FEC Modulation 8 P
520. z 234023 0123401234 0123401234 459 234023 459 348 348 I I I 1 I I I l 1 l 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 3250 3500 3750 4000 Hz Center 1700 Hz Input AF LEFT Tracking rate determines the sampling rate The range is 1 15 ms default is 2 ms Double clicking Filter inserts a low pass filter for filtering the SELCAL system tones The value of the filter should be adjusted to avoid serious tone distortion A rule of thumb value is 1 6 times the baud rate The filter range is 1 100 ms Using the Span menu the resolution of the frequency axis may be increased The steps are 3000 Hz for analogue SELCAL systems 1500 600 and 300 Hz From the Center menu the center frequency may be adjusted It is important to readjust the center fre quency whenever the frequency Span axis is increased Pressing the Detect button starts the SELCAL analysis mode The monitored signal buffer is searched for valid tone data Testing is sequential and the name of the system under test is displayed Recognized systems are identified below the graphics window Decoding of an identified system may be immediately started by double clicking the system in the output window When evaluating analogue tone call systems be aware that some systems are almost technically identical or only differ in the allocation of tones e g ZVEI 1 and ZVEI 2 and thus a certain degree of tolerance must be shown when te
521. z i e DC up to the highest signal frequency Examples are serial cables and local area networks LANs Baseband signals may be used to modulate carrier frequencies 98 e Fundamentals of Radio Data TransmissionWAVECOM Decoder ual V8 3 00 W PCl e W CODE W CLOUD Man Formatting and Source Coding Formatting is the process whereby source data is prepared for the ensuing digital processing Sometimes this process is included in the functionality of source coding The purpose of source coding is to reduce the amount of redundant or unnecessary information from the raw data Bits are assembled into patterns or code words with a certain length which is expressed in number of bits The code words represent all or a part of the entire alphabet including letters numbers special char acters and control codes or represent the pixels of a fax or samples of digitized speech Code words are assembled into alphabets or codes In some codes the code words are of unequal length A distinction should be made between source coding which is the coding used to communicate between a data source or sink a teleprinter a PC and data communication equipment e g a modem or a decoder and channel coding which is the coding used on the channel between the transmitting and receiving data communication equipment Sometimes the source code is also used as the channel code The Morse code is an unequal length code Code words are composed of dots the smallest

WAVECOM Decoder W-PCI/e, W-CODE, W

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents